Formulations of water-soluble derivatives of vitamin e and soft gel compositions, concentrates and powders containing same

ABSTRACT

Provided herein are compositions that contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives. The water-soluble vitamin E mixtures contain mixtures of dimers and monomers of the vitamin E derivative. Provided are products containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, including capsules, soft gel compositions, pre-gel compositions, emulsions and powders.

RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a divisional of co-pending U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/866,808, now allowed, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS, CONCENTRATES AND POWDERS CONTAINING THE SAME,” filed Sep. 25, 2015, to Philip J. Bromley.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/866,808 is a continuation of PCT/US2015/051097, filed Sep. 18, 2015, entitled “PRE-SPRAY EMULSIONS AND POWDERS CONTAINING NON-POLAR COMPOUNDS,” which claims priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119(e) to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,433, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “PRE-SPRAY EMULSIONS AND POWDERS CONTAINING NON-POLAR COMPOUNDS,” and to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,450, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS, CONCENTRATES AND POWDERS CONTAINING SAME,” each to Philip J. Bromley.

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/866,808 also is a continuation of PCT/US2015/051083, filed Sep. 18, 2015, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES,” which also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,435, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES,” and to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,450, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS, CONCENTRATES AND POWDERS CONTAINING SAME,” each to Philip J. Bromley.

This application is related to co-pending U.S. application Ser. No. 14/866,717, filed Sep. 25, 2015, entitled “PRE-SPRAY EMULSIONS AND POWDERS CONTAINING NON-POLAR COMPOUNDS,” to Philip J. Bromley. U.S. application Ser. No. 14/866,717 also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,433, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “PRE-SPRAY EMULSIONS AND POWDERS CONTAINING NON-POLAR COMPOUNDS,” and to U.S. Provisional Application No. 62/052,450, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS, CONCENTRATES AND POWDERS CONTAINING SAME,” each to Philip J. Bromley.

This application also is related to U.S. application Ser. No. 14/866,724, filed Sep. 25, 2015, now abandoned, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES,” to Philip J. Bromley. U.S. application Ser. No. 14/866,724 is a continuation of PCT/US2015/051083, filed Sep. 18, 2015, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES,” which also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/052,435, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES,” and to U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/052,450, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS, CONCENTRATES AND POWDERS CONTAINING SAME,” each to Philip J. Bromley.

This application also is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/207,310, filed Mar. 12, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,517, issued on May 31, 2016, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME,” which claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/852,243, filed Mar. 15, 2013, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF PEG-DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME,” and International PCT Application No. PCT/US2014/025006, filed Mar. 12, 2014, published as WO 2014/151109 on Sep. 25, 2014, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME,” which also claims priority to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/852,243, filed Mar. 15, 2013, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF PEG-DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME” and to U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/863,732, filed Aug. 8, 2013, entitled “FORMULATIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE DERIVATIVES OF VITAMIN E AND COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING SAME,” each to Philip J. Bromley.

The subject matter of each of the above-referenced applications is incorporated by reference in its entirety.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

Provided herein are compositions that contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives. The water-soluble vitamin E mixtures contain mixtures of dimers and monomers of the vitamin E derivative. Also provided are products containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, including soft gel compositions, pre-gel concentrates, capsules and soft gels compositions that contain the pre-gel concentrates, and powders, and methods for preparing the products. Methods for preparing the products are provided.

BACKGROUND

Non-polar ingredients and compounds are not easily dissolved in aqueous solutions, such as water or other polar solvents. A number of non-polar ingredients and compounds are used in compositions for human ingestion. These include, for example, pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals and/or dietary supplements. Exemplary of non-polar ingredients are vitamins and minerals, fatty acids, and other non-polar compounds, non-polar bioactive agents and non-polar ingredients. Because of poor water solubility, inclusion of non-polar ingredients and compounds in products for human consumption, for example, in supplements, foods and beverages, can be problematic, and the amount of non-polar ingredient that can be included is limited.

Water-soluble forms of vitamin E, such as TPGS (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate), in particular TPGS 1000 (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate), have been approved by the FDA as vitamin E nutritional supplements. TPGS is a stable, tasteless and odorless source of readily bioavailable vitamin E that does not hydrolyze under normal conditions. TPGS, TPGS homologs, TPGS analogs and TPGS derivatives also are used as surfactants, and have been used to prepare stabilized formulations of food, beverage, pharmaceutical or nutraceutical products containing non-polar compounds. TPGS (and homologs, analogs and derivatives) has been used as a solubilizing agent for such stabilized formulations, such as water-soluble formulations that contain water-insoluble non-polar compounds, such as drugs, vitamins, or other biologically active compounds, such as natural and non-natural omega-fatty acids. Thus, TPGS possesses the dual function of providing additional dietary vitamin E and providing stabilization to a formulation.

Available products containing non-polar compounds, particularly products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products containing non-polar compounds, and methods for formulating such products, are limited. In addition, the amount, or concentration, of non-polar compounds in available food and beverage products is limited due to the display of undesirable organoleptic properties when the amount of non-polar compound is increased. Thus, there is a need to develop products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, that contain non-polar compounds and methods for making the products. There is an additional need to develop products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, that contain a higher amount of non-polar compound than is offered in available food and beverage products. There also is a need to develop products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, that retain their organoleptic properties when they contain a higher amount of non-polar compound. Accordingly, it is among the objects herein to provide food and beverage products containing non-polar compounds, in particular, food and beverage products containing more non-polar compounds than available products that retain desirable organoleptic properties, and methods for making the products.

SUMMARY

Provided herein are compositions that contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) and a non-polar ingredient and optionally, additional ingredients. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) contain a relatively high percentage, such as at least 13%, typically greater than 25%, 29%, 35%, 45%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, or 53%, up to 60-65%, of the dimer form of the vitamin E derivative, generally a PEG derivative of vitamin E. The remainder of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition is the monomer form with a small percentage, less than 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1% of contaminants, such as higher order polymers and reagents, such as vitamin E. Previously, water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions have been prepared to have as high as possible monomer concentration and typically have at least 87% or more monomer.

It is shown herein that the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain the high dimer-containing compositions impart advantageous properties to compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. Hence, provided herein are compositions that contain a water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition and a non-polar ingredient, such as polyunsaturated fatty acids, coenzyme Q10 compounds, phytosterols, non-polar small molecule drugs, vitamins and other nutraceuticals and other such compounds.

Hence provided herein are compositions which can be used as concentrates for providing soluble forms of non-polar compounds for dilution into aqueous beverages and other foods and beverages, or can be formulated for direct consumption. The compositions, referred to herein as concentrates (although they can be formulated not only for dilution, but for direct consumption), that contain a non-polar compound and a water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition that contains at least 13%, typically, at least 20%, 25%, 29%, 30%, 40%, 45%, 50% or more, typically up to 60-65%, of the dimer form of the vitamin E derivative product. One advantageous property of the higher dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions is that, when diluted into foods and beverages, the resulting products have greater clarity and stability than products produced by addition of the same concentrates, except that the concentrates contain a water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition that contains less than 13% dimer.

Generally, vitamin E derivative compositions have been prepared to contain as much monomer form as possible and contain dimer only as an undesired byproduct in low concentration. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) provided herein can be used as the PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, in addition to or in place of another surfactant, such as a polysorbate, in any composition or formulation that contains a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described and used herein are manufactured to contain higher amounts of the dimer form and, consequently, lower amounts of the monomer form of the vitamin E derivative. For example, aqueous beverages that contain these higher dimer content water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) have substantially greater clarity; typically they are about 2-fold less turbid when measured with a nephelometer in Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTUs), compared to the same beverages and concentrates that differ only in the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition that is used. Amounts and particulars of the compositions and the concentrates and resulting liquid dilution compositions, such as aqueous beverages, are described herein. Reference is made to the description and claims set forth below.

Previously, water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions have been prepared to have as high as possible monomer concentration and typically have at least 87% or more monomer. It is shown herein that the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain high amounts of dimer impart advantageous properties to compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. Hence, provided herein are compositions that contain a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture (composition) and a non-polar ingredient, such as polyunsaturated fatty acids, coenzyme Q10 compounds, phytosterols, non-polar small molecules, drugs, vitamins and other nutraceuticals, and other such compounds.

Provided herein are compositions that include concentrates and liquid dilution compositions produced from the concentrates, compositions for direct consumption, and dilutions of the concentrates, such as beverages, that contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) and a non-polar ingredient and optionally, additional ingredients. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) contain a relatively high percentage, at least 13%, typically greater than 25%, 29%, 35%, 45%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, up to 60-65%, of the dimer form of the vitamin E derivative, generally a PEG derivative of vitamin E. The remainder of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition is the monomer form and a small percentage, less than 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, or 1% of contaminants, such as higher order polymers and reagents, such as vitamin E.

These high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions (mixtures) are employed for the preparation of compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E mixtures and one or more non-polar ingredients, such as fatty acids, vitamins, phytosterols, other nutraceuticals, drugs, and bioactive components. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) contain a high percentage, greater than or at least 13%, by weight, of the dimer form of the vitamin E derivative, and the remainder is predominantly the monomer form, with up to 5% other components, such as trace amounts of reagents, other forms of vitamin E, and other minor contaminants. Thus, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture (composition) provides a mixture of the dimer form and monomer form of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative and contains a relatively high concentration of dimer form. These mixtures (or compositions) also are referred to as high dimer-containing vitamin E derivative mixtures, because they are manufactured to be a mixture of forms, with greater than 13%, typically greater than 20%, dimer form. This mixture has advantageous properties, particularly compared to the same derivative of vitamin E that has been used that contains much lower concentrations of dimer, if any, and at least 87% monomer form. The high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures are employed to solubilize non-polar ingredients. Thus, provided are compositions that contain high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures and a non-polar compound. In particular, the compositions, which include compositions for direct consumption and concentrates, including nanoemulsion concentrates, contain: a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture (composition) in an amount of from between 1% to 99%, inclusive, by weight, of the resulting composition, where the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture contains at least 13 wt % water-soluble vitamin E derivative dimer and up to 87 wt % monomer; and a non-polar compound other than the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. In some embodiments, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture contains at least 20%, 25% or 29%, by weight, vitamin E derivative dimer, or the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture contains up to 75%, 70%, 69%, 62%, 55%, 50%, 45%, 40%, 35% dimer or 29%-69%, inclusive, of dimer; and/or contains less than 70%, 65%, 63%, 62%, 61%, 55%, 50%, 48%, by weight, of the vitamin E derivative monomer in the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. In some embodiments, the amount of dimer is greater than 29% and the total amount of dimer and monomer in the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is greater than 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, or 99%.

The dimer form of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative is present in an amount between or between about 13% and 15%, 13% and 20%, 13% and 25%, 13% and 30%, 13% and 35%, 13% and 40%, 13% and 45%, 13% and 50%, 13% and 55%, 13% and 60%, 13% and 65%, 13% and 70%, 13% and 75%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 20% and 65%, 20% and 70%, 20% and 75%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 70%, 25% and 75%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 29% and 52%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 70%, 30% and 75%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 70%, 35% and 75%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75%, or 70% and 75%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture or is at least or at least about 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73% or 74%, up to 75%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture.

The monomer is present in the high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures in an amount from between or between about 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 69%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 69%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 69%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 69%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 69%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 69%, or 65% and 69%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture or is at least about 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, up to and including 69%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture.

In the high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures, the monomer comprises between or between about 35% and 65%, inclusive, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture and the dimer comprises between or between about 25% and 65%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, or the dimer comprises between or between about 29% and 61% or 62%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, and the monomer and dimer comprise at least 70%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E mixture in the composition.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative is any suitable derivative of vitamin E that renders it more soluble than in its absence, and can result in mixtures of dimers and monomers. Exemplary of such derivatives are polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E, such as, but not limited to, polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of vitamin E. PEG derivatives include those in which the PEG derivative of vitamin E contains a PEG moiety having a molecular weight between or between about 100 Da and 20,000 Da, inclusive, including between 200 Da and 10,000 Da, 200 Da and 8000 Da, 200 Da and 6000 Da, 200 Da and 5000 Da, 200 Da and 3000 Da, 200 Da and 1000 Da, 200 Da and 800 Da, 200 Da and 600 Da, 200 Da and 400 Da, 400 Da and 20,000 Da, 400 Da and 10,000 Da, 400 Da and 8000 Da, 400 Da and 6000 Da, 400 Da and 5000 Da, 400 Da and 3000 Da, 400 Da and 1000 Da, 400 Da and 800 Da, 400 Da and 600 Da, 600 Da and 20,000 Da, 600 Da and 10,000 Da, 600 Da and 8000 Da, 600 Da and 6000 Da, 600 Da and 5000 Da, 600 Da and 3000 Da, 600 Da and 1000 Da, 600 Da and 800 Da, 800 Da and 20,000 Da, 800 Da and 10,000 Da, 800 Da and 8000 Da, 800 Da and 6000 Da, 800 Da and 5000 Da, 800 Da and 3000 Da, 800 Da and 1000 Da, 1000 Da and 20,000 Da, 1000 Da and 10,000 Da, 1000 Da and 8000 Da, 1000 Da and 6000 Da, 1000 Da and 5000 Da, 1000 Da and 3000 Da, 3000 Da and 20,000 Da, 3000 Da and 10,000 Da, 3000 Da and 8000 Da, 3000 Da and 6000 Da, 3000 Da and 5000 Da, 5000 Da and 20,000 Da, 5000 Da and 10,000 Da, 5000 Da and 8000 Da, 5000 Da and 6000 Da, 6000 Da and 20,000 Da, 6000 Da and 10,000 Da, 6000 Da and 8000 Da, 8000 Da and 20,000 Da, 8000 Da and 10,000 Da or 10000 Da and 20,000 Da, or has a molecular weight of at least 100, 200, 238, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3400, 3500, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 12,000, 14,000, 16,000, or 18,000, up to and including 20,000 Da.

Among the PEG derivatives of vitamin E are, for example, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol sebacate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol dodecanodioate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol suberate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol azelaate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol citraconate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol methylcitraconate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol itaconate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol maleate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol glutarate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol glutaconate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol fumarate, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol phthalate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol succinate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol sebacate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol dodecanodioate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol suberate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol azelaate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol citraconate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol methylcitraconate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol itaconate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol maleate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol glutarate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol glutaconate, tocotrienol polyethylene glycol fumarate and tocotrienol polyethylene glycol phthalate.

In some embodiments the vitamin E derivative is selected from among tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), tocopheryl sebacate polyethylene glycol and other TPGS analogs and TPGS homologs, tocopheryl dodecanodioate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl suberate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl azelaate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl citraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl methylcitraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl itaconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl maleate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl glutarate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl glutaconate polyethylene glycol and tocopheryl phthalate polyethylene glycol. Exemplary of TPGS, is D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS).

In addition to the high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures, the compositions provided herein contain an additional ingredient, which typically is a bioactive ingredient, such as a drug, vitamin or nutraceutical. Generally, such ingredients are non-polar ingredients and are rendered soluble by the high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixture. As provided and shown herein, the high dimer-containing water-soluble derivatives of vitamin E mixtures are more effective than vitamin E derivative compositions that contain high amounts of monomer and low amounts, if any, of dimer.

Among the non-polar ingredients are those that are or contain a non-polar compound, such as, but not limited to, polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs), coenzyme Q, phytosterols, resveratrol, carotenoids, micronutrients, alpha lipoic acid and oil-soluble vitamins. Exemplary of such compounds are non-polar compounds that contain PUFAs, such as fish oil, algae (algal) oil, flaxseed oil, borage oil, saw palmetto extract, safflower oil, coconut oil, soybean oil and conjugated linoleic acid (CLA)-containing compounds. These include omega-3 fatty acids, omega-6 fatty acids, omega-9 fatty acids and conjugated fatty acids, such as, but not limited to, docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), alpha-linolenic acid (ALA), gamma-linolenic acid (GLA), conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) and oleic acid compounds. Among these are coenzyme Q10; an oil-soluble vitamin that is selected from among vitamin B12, vitamin D3, vitamin A palmitate, vitamin E, vitamin B1, vitamin B3, vitamin B5, vitamin B6, vitamin C and mixtures thereof; a carotenoid-containing compound that is selected from among lycopene, lutein, zeaxanthin and mixtures of lutein and zeaxanthin; and a micronutrient-containing compound that is selected from among yerba mate, ginkgo biloba and ginseng.

The concentration of non-polar compound in the composition depends upon the particular compound and desired dosage or amount to be administered and also whether the composition is intended for direct administration or is a concentrate for dilution or consumption in a capsule. Hence, the concentration of non-polar compound can be present in an amount from 0.1%-99%, by weight, of the composition, such as 0.5% or 1% to 75%, by weight, of the composition, or, for example, 0.1% to 10%, 1% to 5%, 5% to 10%, 5% to 12%, 5% to 15%, 5% to 20%, 5% to 25%, 10% to 14%, 10% to 12%, 10% to 15%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 25%, 5% to 30%, 1% to 30% or 1% to 15%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition.

Other ingredients in the compositions include a preservative in an amount sufficient to preserve the composition. The preservative, for example, can contain benzyl alcohol.

The compositions can also include a non-polar solvent that dissolves the non-polar compound and is different therefrom and is present in an amount sufficient to dissolve the non-polar compound. Exemplary non-polar solvents include, for example, a vitamin E oil, a flaxseed oil, an oat oil and mixtures thereof.

The compositions can include a polar solvent, such as a polar protic solvent. Exemplary polar solvents include water and consumable alcohols and mixtures thereof, such as, but not limited to, water, glycerin, propylene glycol, ethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, triethylene glycol and trimethylene glycol. The amount of polar solvent depends upon the particular composition and whether it is a concentrate or for direct consumption. Hence, the concentration can be, for example, from more than 0.5% or 1% to 95%, by weight, of the composition, such as from 45% to 80%, or 60% to 80%, by weight, of the composition.

The compositions also can contain a co-surfactant present in an amount sufficient to increase stability of the composition compared to the absence of a co-surfactant. Co-surfactants for use with the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures include, for example, a phospholipid, such as phosphatidyl choline, a sucrose fatty acid ester, a polysorbate and a polysorbate analog.

The compositions also can include an emulsion stabilizer, such as a modified starch and gum mixture. These include, for example, one or more of a blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate; modified gum acacia; and ester gum.

The compositions include other optional ingredients, such as a pH adjuster, present to adjust the pH of the composition to between 2.0 and 4.0. Typically, the pH adjuster is present in an amount of less than 1% by weight. Exemplary pH adjusters include citric acid and phosphoric acid. Other ingredients include a flavor or flavoring agent and/or sweeteners, particularly in the compositions for direct administration. Flavors can be imparted by beverage bases as well as flavoring agents.

The amount of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is from 16% to 30%, inclusive, or is 1% to 95%, inclusive, or is 10% to 40%, inclusive, or 10% to 50%, inclusive, or 15% to 25%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition, or is at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition, such as greater than 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 10%, 15% or 20% or about 20%, greater than 30% or about 30%, between 30% or about 30% and 55% or about 55%, between 16% and 30%, between 30% or about 30% and 50% or about 50%, between 30% or about 30% and 45% or about 45%, or at least 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, 20%, 22%, 24%, 27%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54% or 55%, up to at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 97%, 98%, or 99%, all by weight, of the composition. For example, for concentrates, the vitamin E derivative mixture can be present in an amount of about at least 15%, or 15% to 30%, at least 40% or about 40%, 50% or about 50%, or greater than 60% or about 60%, greater than 65% or about 65%, for example, greater than 70% or about 70%, for example, a starting concentration within the concentration range of between 50% or about 50% and 95% or about 95%, between 60% or about 60% and 95% or about 95%, between 65% or about 65% and 90% or about 90%, for example, between 69% or about 69% and 90% or about 90%, between 69% or about 69% and 89% or about 89%, for example, at least 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 69.5%, 69.9%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 79.5%, 79.9%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 89.5%, 89.9%, or 90%, by weight, of the composition.

Exemplary compositions, particularly concentrates, include a composition that contains a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture present in an amount from 5% to 95%, by weight, of the composition, wherein the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture comprises from 25 wt % to 69 wt % water-soluble vitamin E monomer and from 13 wt % to 75 wt % water-soluble vitamin E dimer; a non-polar compound other than the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, present in an amount from 1% to 75%, by weight, of the composition; and a preservative, present in an amount sufficient to preserve the composition.

Another composition contains: a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture present in an amount from 5% to 95%, by weight, of the composition, where the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture comprises from 25 wt % to 69 wt % water-soluble vitamin E monomer and from 13 wt % to 75 wt % water-soluble vitamin E dimer; a non-polar compound other than the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, present in an amount from 1% to 75%, by weight, of the composition; a preservative, present in an amount sufficient to preserve the composition; and a non-polar solvent that differs from the non-polar compound and is present in an amount sufficient to dissolve the non-polar compound.

Another exemplary composition contains: a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, present in an amount from 5% to 95%, by weight, of the composition, where the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture comprises from 25 wt % to 69 wt % water-soluble vitamin E monomer and from 13 wt % to 75 wt % water-soluble vitamin E dimer; a non-polar compound other than the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, present in an amount from 1% to 75%, by weight, of the composition; a preservative, present in an amount sufficient to preserve the composition; a polar solvent, present in an amount from 45% to 80%, by weight, of the composition; and a pH adjuster, present in an amount sufficient to adjust the pH of the composition to between 2.0 and 4.0.

The compositions provided herein can be concentrates or can be for direct consumption. Among those for direct consumption are dilution compositions, such as beverage compositions, into which any of the concentrates provide herein have been diluted. Also included are the pre-gel compositions and soft gel compositions that contain a surfactant and non-polar ingredient(s) for direct consumption.

The compositions provided herein also can contain additional ingredients such as sweeteners, stabilizers, pH adjusters and antifoaming agents. Sweeteners include any known to those of skill in the art, including, but not limited to, sucralose, sucrose, lactose, fructose, an acesulfame salt, aspartame, saccharin, stevia, stevioside and xylitol. Stabilizers include, but are not limited to, carbonates, bicarbonates, acids and antioxidants. The carbonates, bicarbonates, acids and antioxidants can be included in the compositions for direct consumption, as they stabilize the compositions as consumed and packaged. Such compositions also are packaged in a sealed container, which can contain nitrogen to displace oxygen from the sealed container. Such compositions include, but are not limited to, juice, water, sports drinks and sodas.

Also provided are emulsion compositions that can be used to form dry powders. Also provided are soft gel compositions that contain a non-polar ingredient, a high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture (composition), such as a the PEG derivative of vitamin E composition, such as a high dimer-containing TPGS composition, and a relatively high concentration, such as greater than 1%, typically greater than 7%, 10%, 15%, of a non-aqueous solvent, such as an alkyl alcohol, such as benzyl alcohol, in an amount greater than 1% and up to 25%, are provided. The claims set forth below directed to each of these compositions are herein incorporated by reference. Also, incorporated by reference are the subject matter, and all claims in U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/052,435, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “SOFT GEL COMPOSITIONS AND PRE-GEL CONCENTRATES” to Philip J. Bromley, and U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 62/052,433, filed Sep. 18, 2014, entitled “PRE-SPRAY EMULSIONS AND POWDERS CONTAINING NON-POLAR COMPOUNDS” to Philip J. Bromley. It is understood that for purposes herein, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions in the incorporated claims are the high dimer-containing compositions as described herein.

Provided are powders and pre-spray emulsions. The pre-spray emulsions comprise the ingredients of the powders plus a polar solvent. The capsules, tablets and soft gel capsules are for administering to a subject to provide a non-polar ingredient or compound to the subject, such as for supplementation to provide a nutrient or nutraceutical or a bioactive compound for treating or lowering the risk of a disease. The powders, which are soluble, can be introduced into a beverage of choice to provide the non-polar ingredient or compound or sprinkled on food.

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients in all of the compositions provided herein are the following: omega-3 EPA and DHA; resveratrol; sesamin; curcumin; Boswellia (Boswellic acids); lipoic acid, such as alpha lipoic acids, capsaicinoids; PQQ, carotenoids, such as astaxanthin, zeaxanthin; lutein, beta carotene, and lycopene; and vitamins, such as vitamin A, vitamin D and vitamin E complexes; vitamin K1 and vitamin K as MK7.

Methods for preparing the compositions, particularly those that are concentrates, are provided. These methods include steps of: (a) mixing and heating initial ingredients in a vessel, where the initial ingredient(s) comprise: a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture present in an amount from 5% to 95%, by weight, of the concentrate; and the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture comprises from 25 wt % to 69 wt % water-soluble vitamin E monomer and from 13 wt % to 75 wt % water-soluble vitamin E dimer; and then (b) adding one or more additional ingredients to the vessel, where the one or more additional ingredients comprise: a non-polar compound at an amount from 1% to 75%, by weight, of the concentrate; and then (c) homogenizing the ingredients; and (d) cooling the mixed ingredients, whereby, for compositions with high levels of vitamin E derivatives, the mixed ingredients become waxy in consistency, and lower levels form an emulsion, thereby generating the composition.

Methods for preparing a beverage, soft gel, and other compositions for direct consumption containing non-polar ingredients also are provided. The beverages are prepared by adding the composition provided herein, such as a nanoemulsion concentrate, to a beverage base. The concentrate is added at a predetermined concentration to produce a beverage supplemented with the non-polar ingredient in the concentrate at an effective or intended concentration. The beverage base comprises the other components of the resulting beverage, including, but not limited to, water, juice, soda, a sports drink and/or a nutritional drink. Soft gel compositions are prepared by introducing a pre-gel composition into a soft gel shell or capsule.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Outline A. Definitions B. Water-soluble vitamin E derivatives 1. Vitamin E 2. Polyalkyleneglycol derivatives of vitamin E a. Tocopherols and tocotrienols b. Linkers c. PEG moieties d. Surfactant properties 3. Tocopheryl polyalkyleneglycol derivatives a. Uses i. Nutritional supplement ii. Surfactant 4. Synthesis 5. Water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) C. Methods for making water-soluble vitamin E derivatives 1. Reaction mixture a. Vitamin E succinate b. Polyethyleneglycol c. Catalyst d. Solvent e. Exemplary reaction mixtures 2. Exemplary methods a. Preparation of a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture b. Processing the reaction mixture to obtain a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture c. Purification of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture to obtain a purified high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture D. Products containing high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures 1. Exemplary ingredients and exemplary concentration ranges a. Water-soluble vitamin E derivatives b. Non-polar ingredients i. Polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA)- containing ingredients (a) Omega-3 fatty acid compounds (1) DHA/EPA (i) Fish oils (ii) Algae oil (2) Flax seed oil - omega 3 (ALA) (b) Omega-6 compounds (c) Saw palmetto extract (d) Conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) ii. Coenzyme Q compounds iii. Phytochemical-containing non-polar ingredients (a) Phytosterols (b) Resveratrol iv. Carotenoid-containing compounds (a) Carotenes (b) Xanthophylls v. Micronutrient-containing compounds (a) Vitamins (b) Alpha-lipoic acid (thioctic acid) vi Boswellia extracts vii. Alkaloids viii. Cannabinoids ix. Hops-containing compounds x. Antioxidants c. Non-polar solvents d. Preservatives and sterilizers e. Polar solvents f. Co-surfactants (emulsifiers) i. Phospholipids ii. Sugar-derived surfactants iii. PEG-derived surfactants iv. Sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants g. Emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers) h. Flavors i. pH adjusters j. Soluble fibers k. Additional ingredients i. Additional non-polar compounds ii. Stabilizers (a) Bicarbonates or carbonates (b) Acids (c) Antioxidants 2. Concentrates a. Pre-emulsion concentrates i. Formulating the pre-emulsion concentrates ii. Exemplary ingredients and typical concentration ranges b. Liquid nanoemulsion concentrates i. Formulating the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates c. Liquid dilution compositions containing the concentrates d. Evaluation of the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions i. Clarity (a) Empirical evaluation (b) Particle size or number of particles (c) Turbidity measurement ii. Stability iii. Advantageous characteristics of compositions for human consumption iv. Safety v. Oral bioavailability e. Selecting a formulation and modifying formulations 3. Soft gel and pre-gel compositions containing non-polar ingredients and the high dimer-containing PEG derivative of vitamin E mixture a. Non-aqueous pre-gel compositions containing non-polar ingredients i. Non-polar ingredients ii. Surfactants (high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures) iii. Non-aqueous solvents iv. Co-surfactants (emulsifiers) (a) Phospholipids (b) Sugar-derived surfactants (c) PEG-derived surfactants (d) Sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants v. Emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers) vi. Flavors vii. pH adjusters viii. Soluble fibers ix. Stabilizers (a) Bicarbonates or carbonates (b) Acids (c) Antioxidants b. Formulating the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients c. Soft gel compositions containing non-polar ingredients i. Capsules d. Formulating the soft gel compositions e. Ingredients and concentration ranges f. Exemplary dosages and administration of the soft gel compositions 4. Powders and pre-spray emulsions a. Pre-spray emulsions containing non-polar ingredients i. Formulating the pre-spray emulsions ii. Exemplary ingredients and typical concentration ranges (a) Pre-emulsion concentrates (b) Surfactants (1) Sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants (c) Stabilizers (1) Bicarbonates and carbonates (2) Ingestible acids (3) Antioxidants (d) Polar solvents (e) Binders (f) Co-surfactants (emulsifiers) (1) Phospholipids (2) PEG-derived surfactants (g) Emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers) (h) pH adjusters b. Powder compositions containing non-polar ingredients i. Formulating the powder compositions ii. Ingredients and concentration ranges E. Exemplary methods for preparing products containing high dimer- containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures 1. Equipment employed in the methods a. Scales b. Purifiers c. Vessels d. Mixers e. Heating/cooling apparatuses f. Transfer devices g. Evaluation equipment 2. General methods for producing the compositions a. Water phase ingredients b. Water phase production c. Oil phase ingredients d. Oil phase production e. Combining phases f. Cooling g. Filtration, additions, evaluation and packaging h. Cleaning the equipment i. Clarity 3. General methods for preparing aqueous pre-gel concentrates (compositions that are introduced into or formulated in soft gel shells or capsules) a. Ingredients b. Production of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates c. Transfer and/or packaging 4. Exemplary methods for preparing pre-spray emulsions and powders a. General methods for producing the emulsions and powders b. Drying the emulsions to produce powders c. Storing the powders d. Filtration, additions, evaluation and packaging F. Examples

A. DEFINITIONS

Unless defined otherwise, all technical and scientific terms used herein have the same meaning as is commonly understood by one of skill in the art to which the invention(s) belong. All patents, patent applications, published applications and publications, Genbank sequences, databases, websites and other published materials referred to throughout the entire disclosure herein, unless noted otherwise, are incorporated by reference in their entirety. In the event that there are a plurality of definitions for terms herein, those in this section prevail. Where reference is made to a URL or other such identifier or address, it is understood that such identifiers can change and particular information on the internet can come and go, but equivalent information can be found by searching the internet. Reference thereto evidences the availability and public dissemination of such information.

As used herein, “vitamin E” refers to any naturally occurring or synthetic form of vitamin E, for example, tocopherols and tocotrienols, and can refer to a single form of the compound or a mixture of forms.

As used herein, “water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition,” “water-soluble vitamin E derivative,” “water-soluble vitamin E derivative surfactant,” “water-soluble vitamin E surfactant,” and “water-soluble derivative of vitamin E mixture,” which are be used interchangeably, refer to compositions that contain mixtures of water-soluble forms of vitamin E (vitamin E derivatized with moieties, such as polyalkylene glycol that increase the water solubility of the water-insoluble vitamin E). The mixtures contain dimers and monomers of the vitamin E derivatives. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) include vitamin E (natural or synthetic forms of vitamin E), such as tocopherol derivatives and tocotrienol derivatives. Derivatives of vitamin E, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG)-derivatives previously produced, are manufactured to contain as much monomer form as possible, and to contain minimal amounts of any dimer form (see, e.g., Christiansen et al. (2011) J. Pharm. Sci. 100(5):1773-1782).

In contrast, the high dimer-containing vitamin E derivative mixtures, such as PEG derivative of vitamin E compositions (also referred to herein as high dimer PEG derivatives of vitamin E mixtures or high dimer-containing PEG derivatives of vitamin E mixtures) employed herein, are manufactured to contain dimer forms. The mixtures described herein contain at least 13%, particularly at least or at least about 20%, 25%, 29%, or more, dimer form of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative. In particular, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) are manufactured to contain between or between about 13 wt % and about or up to 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75 wt %, particularly at least 29% to 75% or 80%, inclusive, of the water-soluble vitamin E dimer. In general, the high dimer-containing derivatives, such as PEG derivatives of vitamin E mixtures, such as a high dimer-containing TPGS composition, contain 30%-60%, particularly 35%-52%, dimer, and the remainder is the monomer form and is present in less than 5%, generally 3%, 2%, or 1%, and other trace components, such as unreacted reagents, such as vitamin E and the hydrophilic derivatizing moiety.

In general, the mixtures herein contain at least 13% of the dimer form and up to 87% monomer form, particularly at least 25% of the dimer form and up to 70% of the monomer form, such as between or between about 25 wt % and 69%, inclusive, of the monomer. Hence, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) (high dimer-containing compositions) contain a substantial amount (i.e., 13% or more, particularly 25%, 29%, 35%, 48%, 52%, or more) of the dimer form compared to commercially available forms that are manufactured to provide the monomer form.

As manufactured, the high dimer-containing mixtures can include other forms and unreacted components, hence the total amount of dimer and monomer do not necessarily total 100%, by weight, of the composition. It is shown herein that inclusion of at least 13%, 20%, 25%, 29%, or more of the dimer form, and some monomer form, about less than 87%, 69%, 65%, 60%, 55%, or 50% of the monomer with at least 13% dimer, confers advantageous properties on these water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) not possessed by such compositions that contain lower amounts of the dimer form.

Examples of water-soluble vitamin E derivatives are those formed by covalently attaching a vitamin E moiety, e.g., a tocopherol or tocotrienol, to a hydrophilic moiety, for example, an alkylene glycol, such as a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety, via a linker. The compositions as provided herein are manufactured so that the resulting water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) include a mixture of monomers and dimers of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives, and contain a substantial amount (compared to prior art preparations), i.e., 13% to 95%, inclusive, such as at least 13%, 20%, 25%, or 29%, up to as much as 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, by weight, of the dimer form and generally less than 70%, 65%, 63%, 62%, 61% or 60%, or less of the monomer form. Water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) include, for example, polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocopherol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocopherol, and polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocotrienol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocotrienol. The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives can include, for example, vitamin E TPGS (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives.

As used herein, “tocopherol” and “tocotrienol” refer to any naturally occurring or synthetic form of vitamin E, and can refer to a single compound or a mixture of tocopherols and tocotrienols. Examples of tocopherols include, for example, α-tocopherol, D-α-tocopherol, β-tocopherol, γ-tocopherol and δ-tocopherol. Examples of tocotrienols include, for example, α-tocotrienol, β-tocotrienol, γ-tocotrienol and δ-tocotrienol.

As used herein, a “PEG derivative of vitamin E” or “vitamin E-PEG conjugate” or “vitamin E-PEG derivative,” is a compound containing one or more vitamin E moieties (e.g., a tocopherol or tocotrienol) joined by a covalent bond, for example, an ester, ether, amide or thioester bond, to one or more polyethylene glycol (PEG) moieties, via a linker, such as a dicarboxylic or tricarboxylic acid. Exemplary of PEG derivatives of vitamin E are D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives.

As used herein, “tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate,” “TPGS,” “tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate surfactant” and “TPGS surfactant” refer to tocopheryl polyethylene glycol conjugates that are formed by covalently joining tocopherol succinate, an ester formed through esterification of tocopherol and succinic acid, to a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety via an esterification reaction. The PEG moiety of the TPGS surfactant can be any PEG moiety, for example, a PEG moiety with a molecular weight of between or between about 200 Da to 20,000 Da or about 20,000 Da, for example, PEG moieties having a molecular weight of or about 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 3000, 5000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 20,000 Da, or more; or PEG analogs, including, for example, PEG-NHS (N-hydroxysuccinimide), PEG-aldehyde, PEG-SH, PEG-NH₂, PEG-CO₂H, and branched PEGs.

As used herein, “TPGS monomer” is a single vitamin E moiety, i.e., D-α-tocopherol, covalently joined to a water-soluble moiety, such as a polyethylene glycol, through a succinate linker. “TPGS monomer” can also refer to TPGS analogs, homologs or derivatives, including any other water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein. A “TPGS dimer” is made up of two vitamin E moieties, i.e., D-α-tocopherol, covalently joined to a water-soluble moiety, such as a polyethylene glycol, through one or more succinate linkers (shown below). “TPGS dimer” can also refer to TPGS analogs, homologs or derivatives, including any other water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein. The esterification reaction between the vitamin E moiety, for example, D-α-tocopheryl succinate, and PEG results in a highly complex crude product that contains a mixture of TPGS monomer, unreacted PEG, unreacted vitamin E (e.g., D-α-tocopheryl succinate), catalyst, and TPGS dimer, formed when a second molecule of the vitamin E moiety reacts with the terminal hydroxyl group of a PEG moiety already conjugated to TPGS monomer via a linker. For purposes herein, mixtures are produced by performing the reaction under conditions that result in higher amounts of the TPGS dimer being produced as compared to prior art preparations. In addition, the TPGS dimer can be purified and the amounts increased. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) where the vitamin E derivative is TPGS, as described herein, contain a mixture of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer, and contain more than 12%, but generally at least 20%, 25%, 29%, 35%, or more, TPGS dimer, up to as much as 95% or about 95% TPGS dimer, but typically up to about 75%. The remainder of the composition contains the TPGS monomer and can contain unreacted starting materials and catalyst. Similarly, water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) containing vitamin E derivatives other than TPGS contain mixtures of dimer and monomer.

As used herein, a “concentrate” is a composition that comprises the water-soluble high dimer-containing vitamin E derivative mixture and/or the non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound(s) in higher than single dosage concentrations so that the concentrate compositions are diluted for ingestion.

As used herein, “colloid” refers to a mixture containing two phases, a dispersed phase and a continuous phase, with the dispersed phase containing particles (droplets) distributed throughout the continuous phase. Colloidal mixtures include aerosols, foams, and dispersions, for example, emulsions, for example, nanoemulsions. A liquid colloid, for example, a nanoemulsion, can have a similar appearance, for example, similar clarity, to a solution in which there is no dispersed phase.

As used herein, “emulsion” refers to a colloidal dispersion of two immiscible liquids, for example, an oil and water (or other aqueous liquid, e.g., a polar solvent), one of which is part of a continuous phase and the other of which is part of a dispersed phase. The provided liquid dilution compositions include emulsions, typically oil-in-water nanoemulsions (which include any oil-soluble phase dispersed in any aqueous phase, also called the water phase), in which the oil phase is the dispersed phase and the water phase is the continuous phase. Emulsions typically are stabilized by one or more surfactants and/or co-surfactants and/or emulsion stabilizers. Surfactants form an interfacial film between the oil and water phase of the emulsion, providing stability. Typically, the nanoemulsions of the provided liquid dilution compositions contain micelles that contain one or more surfactants surrounding a non-polar ingredient which is dispersed in the water phase. Exemplary of the provided emulsions are the provided liquid nanoemulsion concentrates and liquid dilution compositions and flavored shots, made by diluting the concentrates, typically in an aqueous medium. In general, emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water emulsions) are colloidal dispersions of two immiscible liquids (e.g., oil and an aqueous liquid, such as water) that contain a continuous and a dispersed phase. Emulsions can be used to disperse non-polar compounds in aqueous liquids. In an oil-in-water emulsion, the dispersed phase is an oil phase and the continuous phase is an aqueous (e.g., water) phase.

As used herein, a “nanoemulsion” is an emulsion in which the dispersed droplets, for example, the micelles, have a diameter (particle size) of less than 1000 nm or less than about 1000 nm, typically, less than 500 nm or less than about 500 nm, typically less than 300 nm or less than about 300 nm, for example, less than 250 nm or less than about 250 nm, for example, less than or less than about 200 nm, for example, less than or less than about 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, or 200 nm. Exemplary of nanoemulsions are the provided liquid nanoemulsion concentrates and the liquid dilution compositions, for example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the diluted concentrates.

As used herein, “surfactant” refers to synthetic and naturally occurring amphiphilic molecules that have hydrophobic portion(s) and hydrophilic portion(s). Due to their amphiphilic (amphipathic) nature, surfactants typically can reduce the surface tension between two immiscible liquids, for example, the oil and water phases in an emulsion, stabilizing the emulsion. Surfactants can be characterized based on their relative hydrophobicity and/or hydrophilicity. For example, relatively lipophilic surfactants are more soluble in fats, oils and waxes, and typically have HLB values less than or about 10, while relatively hydrophilic surfactants are more soluble in aqueous compositions, for example, water, and typically have HLB values greater than or about 10. Relatively amphiphilic surfactants are soluble in oil- and water-based liquids and typically have HLB values close to 10 or about 10.

As used herein, “co-surfactant” is used to refer to a surfactant that is used in the provided compositions in combination with the primary surfactant, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, for example, to improve the emulsification of the provided compositions and/or compounds, for example, to emulsify the ingredients. In one example, the provided compositions can contain at least one surfactant and at least one co-surfactant. Typically, the co-surfactant represents a lower percent, by weight (w/w), of the provided compositions, compared to the surfactant. Thus, the provided compositions typically have a lower concentration of the co-surfactant(s) than of the surfactant.

As used herein, “HLB” refers to a value that is used to index and describe a surfactant according to its relative hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity, relative to other surfactants. A surfactant's HLB value is an indication of the molecular balance of the hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions of the surfactant, which is an amphipathic molecule. Each surfactant and mixture of surfactants (and/or co-surfactants) has an HLB value that is a numerical representation of the relative weight percent of hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions of the surfactant molecule(s). HLB values are derived from a semi-empirical formula. The relative weight percentages of the hydrophobic and hydrophilic groups are indicative of surfactant properties, including the molecular structure, for example, the types of aggregates the surfactants form and the solubility of the surfactant. See, for example, Griffin (1949) J. Soc. Cos. Chem. 1:311. Surfactant HLB values range from 1-45, while the range for non-ionic surfactants typically is from 1-20. The more lipophilic a surfactant is, the lower its HLB value. Conversely, the more hydrophilic a surfactant is, the higher its HLB value.

As used herein, “micelle” refers to aggregates formed by surfactants that typically form when a surfactant is present in an aqueous composition, typically when the surfactant is used at a concentration above the critical micelle concentration (CMC). In micelles, the hydrophilic portions of the surfactant molecules contact the aqueous or the water phase, while the hydrophobic portions form the core of the micelle, which can encapsulate non-polar ingredient(s), for example, the non-polar ingredients in the provided concentrates. Typically, the surfactants in the provided concentrates form micelles containing the non-polar ingredient at their center in the aqueous liquid dilution compositions. Typically, the micelles in the provided concentrates have a particle size of about 1000 nm, typically less than or less than about 500 nm, typically less than 300 or less than about 300 nm, for example, less than 250 nm or less than about 250 nm, for example, less than 200 nm or less than about 200 nm, for example, less than or less than about 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, or 200 nm.

As used herein, “analog” refers to a chemical compound that is structurally similar to another compound (referred to as a parent compound), but differs slightly in composition, for example, due to the variation, addition or removal of an atom, one or more units (e.g., methylene units, —(CH₂)_(n)—) or one or more functional groups. The analog can have different chemical or physical properties compared with the original compound and/or can have improved biological and/or chemical activity.

Alternatively, the analog can have similar or identical chemical or physical properties compared with the original compound and/or can have similar or identical biological and/or chemical activity. For example, the analog can be more hydrophilic or it can have altered reactivity as compared to the parent compound. The analog can mimic the chemical and/or biological activity of the parent compound (i.e., it can have similar or identical activity), or, in some cases, can have increased or decreased activity. The analog can be a naturally or non-naturally occurring (e.g., synthetic) variant of the original compound. Other types of analogs include isomers (e.g., enantiomers, diastereomers) and other types of chiral variants of a compound, as well as structural isomers. The analog can be a branched or cyclic variant of a linear compound. For example, a linear compound can have an analog that is branched or otherwise substituted to impart certain advantageous properties (e.g., improved hydrophobicity or bioavailability). Exemplary of the analogs used in the provided compositions and methods are TPGS analogs, which can be formed using the methods provided herein and can be used in place of TPGS in the provided compositions.

As used herein, “tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate analog” or “TPGS analog” refers to compounds, other than TPGS, that are similar to a parent TPGS compound, but differ slightly in composition, for example, by the variation, addition or removal of an atom, one or more units (e.g., methylene units, —(CH₂)_(n)—), or one or more functional groups. TPGS analogs include vitamin E-derived surfactants, e.g., tocopheryls and tocotrienols, including PEG derivatives of vitamin E, including vitamin E PEG monomers and dimers, such as, but not limited to, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol sebacate (PTS), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol dodecanodioate (PTD), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol suberate (PTSr), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol azelaate (PTAz), and polyoxyethanyl tocotrienyl sebacate (PTrienS), as well as other PEG derivatives of vitamin E. The compositions provided herein include at least 13%, typically more than 29%, such as 29%-55%, dimer form in the composition, with the rest of the composition the monomer form or small amounts of other forms and trace contaminants.

Exemplary of TPGS analogs are compounds having the formula shown in Formula II:

where R₁, R₂ and R₃ each independently is hydrogen (H) or methyl (CH₃); R₄ is H, CH₃ or the portion marked “A”; each dashed line (

) is independently a single or double bond; n is an integer from 1 to 5000; m and q each independently are 0 or 1; and p is an integer from 1 to 20.

As used herein, “TPGS 1000 analogs” are compounds other than TPGS 1000 that are similar to a parent TPGS 1000 compound due to the addition or removal of an atom, one or more units (e.g., methylene units —(CH₂)_(n)—), or one or more functional groups. TPGS 1000 analogs include, but are not limited to, TPGS compounds having one or more PEG moieties that vary in chain length and molecular weight compared to TPGS 1000, including, for example, TPGS compounds having PEG moieties having a molecular weight between or about between 200 Da to 20,000 Da or about 20,000 Da, for example, PEG moieties having a molecular weight of or about 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 3000, 5000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 20,000 Da, or more. Also exemplary of TPGS 1000 analogs are TPGS compounds including PEG analogs, e.g., PEG-NHS, PEG-aldehyde, PEG-SH, PEG-NH₂, PEG-CO₂H, and branched PEGs. Also exemplary of TPGS 1000 analogs are any TPGS analogs, e.g., vitamin E-derived surfactants, including PEG derivatives of vitamin E, including, but not limited to, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol sebacate (PTS), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol dodecanodioate (PTD), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol suberate (PTSr), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol azelaate (PTAz) and polyoxyethanyl tocotrienyl sebacate (PTrienS), as well as other PEG derivatives of vitamin E.

As used herein, “homolog” refers to an analog that differs from the parent compound only by the presence or absence of a simple unit, such as a methylene unit, or some multiple of such units, e.g., —(CH₂)_(n)—. Typically, a homolog has similar chemical and physical properties as the parent compound. Exemplary of the homologs used in the provided compositions and methods are TPGS homologs.

As used herein, “TPGS homologs” are analogs of TPGS that differ from a TPGS parent compound only by the presence or absence of a simple unit, such as a methylene unit, or some multiple of such units, e.g., —(CH₂)_(n)—. Typically, suitable TPGS homologs have similar surfactant properties compared to the parent compound (TPGS), for example, similar HLB values, for example, HLB values between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20. Exemplary of TPGS homologs are tocopheryl polyethylene glycol sebacate (PTS), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol dodecanodioate (PTD), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol suberate (PTSr), tocopheryl polyethylene glycol azelaate (PTAz). Exemplary of TPGS homologs are compounds having the formula in Formula I (above), where neither of the dashed lines represent a double bond and where, when m and q both are 0, and p is greater than 1.

As used herein, “TPGS 1000 homologs” are analogs of TPGS 1000 that differ from a TPGS 1000 parent compound only by the presence or absence of a simple unit, such as a methylene unit, or some multiple of such units, e.g., —(CH₂)_(n)—. Suitable TPGS 1000 homologs have similar surfactant properties compared to the parent compound (TPGS 1000), for example, similar HLB values, for example, HLB values between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, such as 13-18. TPGS 1000 homologs include TPGS 1000 homologs with slight variations in the length of the PEG chain moiety.

As used herein, “organoleptic properties” refers to sensory attributes of a food or beverage, in particular the beverage compositions and powder provided herein. Those of skill in the art understand such properties and they can be quantitated if needed. Organoleptic properties include, but are not limited to, taste, odor and/or appearance. “Desirable” or “advantageous” organoleptic properties include those organoleptic properties of a food or beverage composition for consumption by an average human subject, such as a desirable odor, taste and/or appearance, or the lack of an undesirable odor, taste and/or appearance. Undesirable organoleptic properties include the presence of, for example, an undesirable taste, odor or appearance attribute, such as the presence of an “off-taste” or “off-odor,” for example a fishy, grassy, metal or iron, sharp or tingling taste or odor, or the presence of an undesirable appearance attribute, such as separation or precipitation. In one example, the provided beverage compositions retain the same or about the same taste, odor and/or appearance as the same beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates, that is, the provided beverage compositions retain organoleptic properties desirable for consumption by an average human subject. Desirable and undesirable organoleptic properties can be measured by a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art, including, for example, organoleptic evaluation methods by which undesirable properties are detectable by sight, taste and/or smell and chemical tests, as well as by chemical analytical methods. For example, the provided beverage compositions retain the same or about the same organoleptic properties as the same beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates over a period of time, for example, at least or over 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or more days, at least or over 1, 2, 3, 4, or more weeks, at least or over 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or more months, or at least or over 1, 2, 3, 4, or more years.

In one example, the compositions retain the same or about the same taste as the same beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrate or powder. In one example, the provided beverage compositions retain the same or about the same odor as the same beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates. In one example, the provided beverage compositions retain the same or about the same appearance as the same beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates. In one example, the beverage compositions retain the same organoleptic properties at room temperature, for example, at 25° C. or at about 25° C. In another example, the compositions retain the same organoleptic properties at between 19° C. or about 19° C. and 25° C. or about 25° C. In another example, the beverage compositions retain the same organoleptic properties at elevated temperatures, for example, at 40° C. or at about 40° C. In another example, the compositions retain the same organoleptic properties at refrigerated temperatures, for example, at 4° C. or at about 4° C., or at frozen temperatures, for example, at −20° C. or at about −20° C. Typically, retaining the same or about the same organoleptic properties means that the shelf-life of beverage compositions that contain the provided concentrates is the same or about the same or longer than the beverage compositions not containing the provided concentrates. Any or all of the above organoleptic properties, particularly the desirable organoleptic properties, are retained for the shelf-life of the beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates under conditions in which the beverage composition is normally stored. Generally, beverage compositions remain free from organoleptic changes for at least 6 months, unless the beverage composition that does not contain the provided concentrates has a shorter shelf life. The beverage composition retains its desired organoleptic properties for this period of time.

As used herein, “retaining the organoleptic properties” refers to retention of these properties upon storage for a recited period of time, typically at room temperature.

As used herein, “shelf life” refers to a time period within which the provided compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties, for example, the ability of the provided compositions to retain desirable organoleptic properties for a period of time, for example, for at least or more than 1, 2, 3, 4, or more weeks, typically at least or more than 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, or more months, or at least or more than 1, 2, 3, 4, or more years. In one example, the compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties if they exhibit one or more of these described characteristics, over time, when kept at a particular temperature. In one example, the compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties at room temperature, for example, 25° C. or about 25° C. In another example, the compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties at between 19° C. and 25° C. In another example, the compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties at refrigerated temperatures, for example, 4° C. or about 4° C., or at frozen temperatures, for example, at −20° C. or about −20° C. In another example, the compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties at elevated temperatures, for example, at 40° C. or at about 40° C.

As used herein, “particle size” and “average particle size” refer synonymously to the average diameter of particles in a provided liquid, for example, the droplet diameter or micelle diameter in an emulsion. Particle size diameter can be expressed in terms of a unit of length, for example, nanometers (nm). Alternatively, information about particles in concentrates and liquid dilution compositions can be expressed in terms of particle density, for example, ppm (parts per million), or percent solids, in the compositions.

As used herein, “visible particles” are particles, for example, in a liquid, such as an emulsion, that are visible when viewing the liquid with the naked eye (i.e., without magnification). For example, the visible particles can be particles that are observed by the artisan formulating the compositions, for example, the concentrates or the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the diluted concentrates. In one example, the provided compositions contain no visible particles. In another example, the compositions contain few visible particles, for example, no more visible particles than another liquid, for example, a beverage. The presence of visible particles and the number of visible particles is determined by empirical observation.

As used herein, “turbidity” is a measure of the cloudiness or haziness of a liquid, caused by particles in suspension in the liquid. Turbidity can be measured optically, for example, using a nephelometer, an instrument with a light and a detector. The nephelometer measures turbidity by detecting scattered light resulting from exposure of the liquid to an incident light. The amount of scattered light correlates to the amount of particulate matter in the liquid. For example, a beam of light passes through a sample with low turbidity with little disturbance. Other methods for measuring turbidity are well known and can be used with the provided methods and compositions. The units of a turbidity value measured with a nephelometer are Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU). For purposes herein, the compositions provided herein typically have low turbidity, for example, a turbidity value (NTU) of less than or about 80. For example, the compositions provided herein can have a turbidity value (NTU) of less than or about 30.

As used herein, a “turbid liquid” is one that is thick or opaque with visible particles in suspension, for example, a liquid that is cloudy or muddy in appearance.

As used herein, “clear” can be used to describe the compositions provided herein, for example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the diluted nanoemulsion concentrates and/or the nanoemulsion concentrates themselves. In one example, a clear liquid is one that does not appear cloudy by empirical observation, such as to the naked eye, and/or does not contain particles or crystals that are visible to the naked eye, or that does not exhibit “ringing.” In another example, a clear liquid is one that has a low or relatively low turbidity value, for example an NTU value, that is less than or equal to a desired NTU value. For example, a liquid is described as clear that has an NTU value of less than or about 80. For example, a liquid can be clear and have an NTU value of less than or about 30. In another example, a clear liquid is one that has a small or relatively small average particle size, for example, less than or about 1000 nm. For example, a liquid can be described as clear and have an average particle size of less than or about 200 nm. In another example, clarity is expressed relatively. For example, it can be desired that a particular composition is equally as clear, about as clear, or more clear than another liquid (as measured empirically, or by measuring turbidity value or particle size). For example, clarity can be assessed relative to another aqueous liquid dilution composition, for example, a beverage. In one example, a liquid is clear if it is similar in appearance to another clear liquid, for example, a beverage, for example, water. In another example, it can be desired that a composition has a particle size that is less than or equal to another liquid, for example, a beverage. In another example, it can be desired that a composition has a turbidity value that is less than or equal to another liquid, for example, a beverage. In another example, it can be desired that a composition appears more clear or as clear as another liquid, for example, a beverage, for example, by having no more visible particles, no more crystal formation and/or no more cloudiness than the other liquid. In one example, the provided compositions are clear. In another example, they are relatively clear or as clear as or about as clear as another liquid, for example, a beverage that does not contain the non-polar ingredient or liquid nanoemulsion composition.

As used herein, “ringing” refers to the formation of a whitish or opaque ring around a container containing a liquid, for example, an aqueous liquid, for example a beverage, for example, a liquid dilution composition containing an emulsion or nanoemulsion. Typically, the ring forms around the perimeter of the container, typically at the surface level of the liquid in the container, for example, at the neck of the container. Ringing can occur over time and, if it occurs over a short period of time, can be a sign of instability. Ringing typically is undesirable, particularly in the case of a liquid for human consumption, for example, a beverage. Typically, the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions do not exhibit ringing or are stable, without ringing, for a period of time, for example, days, weeks, months or years.

As used herein, “stability” refers to a desirable property of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions, for example, the ability of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions to remain free from one or more changes over a period of time, for example, at least or longer than 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, 1 year, or more. For example, a concentrate or liquid dilution composition can be described as stable if it is formulated such that it remains free from oxidation or substantial oxidation over time, remains clear over time, remains safe and/or desirable for human consumption over time, has a lack of precipitates forming over time, has a lack of ringing over time, and/or does not exhibit any visible phase separation over a period of time. For example, the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions can be described as stable if they exhibit one or more of these described characteristics, over time, when kept at a particular temperature, for example, room temperature, e.g., at or about 25° C., slightly below room temperature, e.g., between or between about 19° C. and 25° C., at refrigerated temperatures, e.g., at or about 4° C., or at frozen temperatures, e.g., at or about −20° C. or lower.

As used herein, “phase separation” refers to the physical separation of a homogenous emulsion, for example, the separation of the oil and water phases of an emulsion, into two separate visible heterogeneous layers.

As used herein, “stabilize” means to increase the stability of one of the provided compositions.

As used herein, “room temperature” and “ambient temperature” are used to describe a temperature that is common in one or more enclosed spaces in which human beings typically are or reside. Room temperature can vary, but generally refers to temperatures between or between about 19° C. and 25° C. When a composition is stored at room temperature, it should be understood it is generally kept at a temperature within this range or about within this range.

As used herein, “refrigerated temperature” refers to a temperature that is common in a refrigerator, for example, a household or restaurant refrigerator, for example, a temperature that is cooler than room temperature, but typically a few degrees above the freezing point of water. Typically, refrigerated temperatures are between or between about 0° C. and 10° C., for example, at or about 4° C. When a composition is stored at a refrigerated temperature, it should be understood that it is kept at a temperature common to household or industrial refrigerators.

As used herein, “frozen temperature” refers to a temperature around or below the freezing point of water, e.g., a temperature commonly used in a household freezer, for example, 0° F. or about 0° F., or −19° C. or about −19° C. or −20° C. or about −20° C., or colder.

As used herein, “hydrophilic” and “polar” refer synonymously to ingredients and/or compounds having greater solubility in aqueous liquids, for example, water, than in fats, oils and/or organic solvents (e.g., methanol, ethanol, ethyl ether, acetone and benzene).

As used herein, a “solvent” is an ingredient that can be used to dissolve another ingredient. Solvents include polar and non-polar solvents. Non-polar solvents include oils and other non-polar ingredients that dissolve non-polar compounds. Typically, the non-polar solvent included in the concentrates or liquid dilution compositions provided herein is an oil that is in addition to the non-polar ingredient. The non-polar solvent typically is not the non-polar ingredient itself, i.e., is distinct from the non-polar ingredient. More than one non-polar solvent can be used. Certain compounds, for example, flaxseed oil and safflower oil, can be non-polar solvents and non-polar ingredients. Typically, the non-polar solvent contains one or more oils, typically oils other than the non-polar ingredient or oil(s) not contained in the non-polar ingredient. Exemplary non-polar solvents include, but are not limited to, oils (in addition to the non-polar ingredient), for example, vitamin E oil, flaxseed oil, CLA, borage oil, rice bran oil, D-limonene, canola oil, corn oil, MCT oil and oat oil. Other oils also can be used.

As used herein, “polar solvent” refers to a solvent that is readily miscible with water and other polar solvents. Polar solvents are well-known and can be assessed by measuring any parameter known to those of skill in the art, including dielectric constant, polarity index and dipole moment (see, e.g., Przybytek (1980) “High Purity Solvent Guide,” Burdick and Jackson Laboratories, Inc.). For example, polar solvents generally have high dielectric constants, such as greater than or about 15, generally have high polarity indices, typically greater than or about 3, and generally large dipole moments, for example, greater than or about 1.4 Debye. Polar solvents include polar protic solvents and polar aprotic solvents.

As used herein, a “polar protic solvent” is a polar solvent containing a hydrogen atom attached to an electronegative atom, such that the hydrogen has a proton-like character and/or the bond between the hydrogen and electronegative atom is polarized. Exemplary polar protic solvents include, but are not limited to, water, alcohols, including monohydric, dihydric and trihydric alcohols, including, but not limited to, methanol, ethanol, glycerin and propylene glycol.

As used herein, “monohydric alcohols” are alcohols that contain a single hydroxyl group including, but not limited to, methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol and t-butanol.

As used herein, “dihydric alcohols” are alcohols that contain two hydroxyl groups. Exemplary dihydric alcohols include, but are not limited to, glycols, e.g., propylene glycol, ethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, triethylene glycol and trimethylene glycol.

As used herein, “trihydric alcohols” are alcohols that contain three hydroxyl groups. Exemplary trihydric alcohols include, but are not limited to, glycerin, butane-1,2,3-triol, pentane-1,3,5-triol and 2-amino-2-hydroxymethyl-propane-1,3-diol.

As used herein, “non-polar,” “lipophilic” and “lipid-soluble” synonymously refer to compounds and/or ingredients, for example, non-polar compounds and non-polar ingredients, which have greater solubility in organic solvents (e.g., ethanol, methanol, ethyl ether, acetone and benzene), fats and oils than in aqueous liquids, for example, water. Non-polar ingredients include drugs, hormones, vitamins, nutrients and other lipophilic compounds. Typically, non-polar ingredients are poorly water-soluble, for example, water insoluble or compounds having low water solubility. Exemplary non-polar ingredients include ingredients that contain one or more non-polar compounds, for example, lipid-soluble drugs, hormones, essential fatty acids, for example, polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA), for example, omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids, vitamins, nutrients, nutraceuticals, minerals and other compounds. Additional exemplary non-polar ingredients are described herein. The provided compositions can be formulated with any non-polar ingredient, for example, any non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound.

As used herein, “non-polar compound” refers to a compound that contains an active component or is active such that, when administered to a subject, for example, a human, induces or is proposed to induce a desired response, such as altering body function at the cellular, tissue, organ or other level, and/or altering the cosmetic appearance or other property, or a compound that is ingested in order to achieve a desired effect. Non-polar compounds include any synthetic or natural non-polar ingredient or compound, including a pharmaceutical, drug, therapeutic, nutritional supplement, herb, hormone or other ingredient. Non-polar compounds can include the non-polar compounds listed herein, as well as other pharmaceutically acceptable or food-grade active derivatives of the non-polar compounds, for example, salts, esters, amides, prodrugs, active metabolites, isomers, fragments and analogs. Non-polar compounds can include compounds proven to have a desired effect and also compounds thought to produce such effects, for example, compounds typically ingested for nutritional supplementation purposes. The non-polar compound can be contained in a non-polar ingredient or is the non-polar ingredient.

As used herein, a “subject” includes an animal, typically a mammal, typically a human.

As used herein, an “additive” includes anything that one can add to a food, beverage, or other human consumable to enhance one or more of its nutritional, pharmaceutical, dietary, health, nutraceutical, health benefit, energy-providing, treating, holistic, or other properties. For example, the additives can be oil-based additives (e.g., non-polar ingredients), such as nutraceuticals; pharmaceuticals; vitamins, for example, oil-soluble vitamins, e.g., vitamin D, vitamin E and vitamin A; minerals; fatty acids, such as essential fatty acids, for example, polyunsaturated fatty acids, e.g., omega-3 fatty acids and omega-6 fatty acids, such as alpha-linolenic acid (ALA), docosahexaenoic acid (DHA), eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA), gamma-linolenic acid (GLA), CLA, saw palmetto extract, flaxseed oil, fish oil and algae oil; phytosterols; coenzymes, such as coenzyme Q10; and any other oil-based additives.

As used herein, “water insoluble” refers to a compound that does not dissolve when the compound is mixed with water, for example, when mixed with water at room temperature, for example, between or between about 25° C. and 50° C.

As used herein, “low water solubility” refers to a compound that has a solubility in water of less than or about 30 mg/mL, for example, when mixed with water at room temperature, such as between or between about 25° C. and 50° C. As used herein, “poorly water-soluble” can be used to refer to compounds, for example, non-polar compounds, that are water insoluble or have low water solubility.

As used herein, “pre-emulsion concentrate” is used to refer to the provided compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, i.e., water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain a mixture of monomers and dimers of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives, and contain a substantial amount (compared to prior art preparations), i.e., 13% to 95%, inclusive, such as at least 13%, 20%, 25%, 29%, up to as much as 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, or 95%, by weight, of the dimer form and generally less than 70%, 65%, 63%, 62%, 61% or 60%, or less of the monomer form; and one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and can be diluted in aqueous media, for example, in water, to form the provided aqueous liquid dilution compositions. The pre-emulsion concentrates can additionally include other ingredients, such as preservatives or non-polar solvents. The pre-emulsion concentrates typically do not contain any polar solvent, such as water. Typically, the pre-emulsion concentrates are semi-solid compositions, which typically have a waxy consistency, for example, the consistency of a substance such as wax, for example, a lip balm, at room temperature, for example, at 25° C. or about 25° C., and become liquid at higher temperatures, for example when heated to higher temperatures, such as to 125° F. or about 125° F., or to 50° C. or about 50° C. or to 60° C. or about 60° C.

As used herein, “waxy” is used to describe compositions and materials, typically oil-soluble compositions or materials, that are similar in consistency to one or more waxes. Pre-emulsion concentrates, particularly those with higher concentrations (greater than 25% or 30%) of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition described herein have a waxy consistency at room temperature. Compositions and compounds having waxy consistencies typically have melting points or melting ranges above ambient temperature (e.g., above room temperature, for example, above 25° C. or about 25° C.), meaning they are either solid or semi-solid (i.e., not liquid) at room temperature. Typically, waxy compositions are of relatively low viscosity a little above their liquefying point. Exemplary of waxes that have waxy consistencies are natural waxes, including waxes of vegetal origin, such as purcellin, shea butter, cocoa butter, Japan wax, esparto grass wax, cork wax, Guaruma wax, rice shoot wax, Ouricury wax, montan wax, sunflower wax, sugar cane wax, carnauba wax, candelilla wax; fruit-derived waxes, such as orange wax, lemon wax, grapefruit wax and bayberry wax; waxes of animal origin, such as beeswax, lanolin, wool wax, spermaceti and bear fat, shellac wax; mineral waxes such as ceresine and ozokerite waxes; and synthetic waxes, including petroleum-based waxes such as paraffin, petrolatum, micro wax, polyalkylene and polyethyleneglycol waxes, e.g. polyethylene wax; waxes based on chlorinated naphthalenes, such as “Halowax”; synthetic hydrocarbon waxes.

As used herein, “liquid concentrate” and “liquid nanoemulsion concentrate” are used synonymously to refer to the provided compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, i.e., water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain a mixture of monomers and dimers of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives, and contain a substantial amount (compared to prior art preparations), i.e., 13% to 95%, inclusive, such as least 13%, 20%, 25%, 29%, up to as much as 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, by weight, of the dimer form and generally less than 70%, 65%, 63%, 62%, 61% or 60% or less of the monomer form; one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain one or more non-polar compounds; a polar solvent; and optionally, additional ingredients. The liquid concentrates are liquid at room temperature, for example, at a temperature of at or about 25° C. or between or between about 25° C. and 50° C., and can be diluted in aqueous media, for example, in water, to form the provided aqueous liquid dilution compositions. Typically, the liquid concentrate is an emulsion that has a particle (droplet) size (or can be diluted to form an aqueous liquid dilution composition having a particle size) that is less than or about 1000 nm. For example, the particle size can be less than or about 200 nm.

As used herein, “aqueous liquid dilution composition,” “liquid dilution composition,” “dilution composition” and “liquid dilution” are used synonymously to refer to a composition that contains one or more of the provided concentrates (i.e., the pre-emulsion concentrates or liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein) diluted in a liquid, for example, an aqueous medium, e.g., water. For example, the concentrate forms the dispersion phase within the aqueous liquid, which is an emulsion (e.g., nanoemulsion). The liquid dilution compositions are typically beverages suitable for human consumption. Exemplary of liquid dilution compositions are aqueous compositions that contain the concentrates provided herein, for example, waters, sauces, soups, syrups, soda, juice, e.g., fruit juice, milk, coffee, tea, nutritional beverages, sports drinks, energy drinks, vitamin-fortified beverages, flavored waters and any other beverage containing the diluted concentrates. It is not necessary that the aqueous liquid dilution compositions be completely aqueous. For example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions can be primarily aqueous and can contain an aqueous portion, for example, an aqueous continuous phase, as well as an additional portion, for example, a dispersion phase, such as a lipophilic dispersion phase. Typically, the lipophilic dispersion phase contains one or more lipophilic substances, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and one or more non-polar ingredients, for example, non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds.

As used herein, a “beverage composition” or “beverage product” refers to a composition, typically an aqueous ingestible composition, that contains one or more of the provided concentrates, one or more stabilizers, and a beverage base that contains a polar solvent, such as water, a juice, a juice concentrate, a fruit juice extract or a fruit flavor. Typically, beverage compositions provided herein are provided for direct ingestion, that is they are directly consumed by a subject, e.g., a human. Beverage compositions can be formed by dissolving the pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein in an aqueous liquid, e.g., water, to form an aqueous liquid dilution composition.

As used herein, “food and beverage product” refers to a product that is suitable for human consumption. For example, “food and beverage product” can refer to a pre-emulsion concentrate or liquid nanoemulsion concentrate that is dissolved in a solvent, typically an aqueous solvent, e.g., water, to form a liquid dilution composition, i.e., beverage composition or beverage product. “Food and beverage product” can also refer to the final product that is suitable for human consumption, such as the liquid dilution composition, i.e., beverage composition or beverage product.

As used herein, a “beverage base” refers to an aqueous composition to which one or more non-polar ingredients can be added. A beverage base includes, but is not limited to, an aqueous composition that contains one or more of a polar solvent, typically water, a juice, such as a fruit juice, a fruit juice concentrate, a fruit juice extract, a fruit flavor, a soda, a flavored soda, a carbonated water, a carbonated juice and any combination thereof. The concentrates and/or powders provided herein a can be introduced into a beverage base (or beverage or other food).

As used herein, a “fruit juice,” “fruit juice concentrate,” “fruit juice extract” or “fruit flavor” refer to fruit-based juices and flavors that impart taste or smell to the provided beverage compositions (products). Any juice or fruit flavor can be added to the provided beverage compositions, including, but not limited to, plum, prune, date, currant, fig, grape, raisin, cranberry, pineapple, peach, nectarine, banana, apple, pear, guava, apricot, Saskatoon berry, blueberry, plains berry, prairie berry, mulberry, elderberry, Barbados cherry (acerola cherry), choke cherry, chocolate, vanilla, caramel, coconut, olive, raspberry, strawberry, huckleberry, loganberry, dewberry, boysenberry, kiwi, cherry, blackberry, honey dew, green tea, cucumber, quince, buckthorn, passion fruit, sloe, rowan, gooseberry, pomegranate, persimmon, mango, rhubarb, papaya, litchi, lemon, orange, lime, tangerine, mandarin and grapefruit juices, or any combination thereof. Exemplary beverage compositions provided herein include combinations of juices or flavors that impart peach mango, peach, citrus, pomegranate blueberry, tropical berry, cherry chocolate, vanilla, cherry vanilla, chocolate blueberry, chocolate caramel, cucumber, green tea, honey-dew melon, pineapple papaya, peach nectarine, raspberry lemonade, grape, orange tangerine, orange, lime and mixed berry flavors.

As used herein, “oil phase” refers to the portion (or phase) of a composition, such as the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions provided herein, that contains one or more lipophilic ingredients and/or amphiphilic ingredients (oil phase ingredients) and is, in general, the lipid-soluble phase. In the provided emulsion compositions (e.g., the nanoemulsion concentrates and the dilution compositions), the oil phase typically represents the dispersion phase. “Oil phase” also can be used to refer to the liquid containing the oil phase ingredients that is generated, typically in an oil phase vessel, while carrying out the methods for making the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates. For example, “oil phase” can refer to the mixture of the components (oil phase ingredients) that are combined, mixed and heated, for example, in the oil phase vessel (e.g., tank), prior to mixing with the water phase. “Oil phase” can refer to the oil phase mixture that is formed after all the ingredients are dissolved; alternatively, it can refer to the forming mixture, for example, as it is being mixed/heated.

As used herein, “oil phase ingredient(s)” refers to the components of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions that are included in the oil phase in the provided methods for making the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. Typical oil phase ingredients include the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions); non-polar ingredients, e.g., non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds; co-surfactants; oils, such as non-polar solvents; preservatives; and emulsion stabilizers. Other lipophilic and/or amphiphilic ingredients can be included in the oil phase.

As used herein, “water phase” is used to refer to the portion (or phase) of a composition, such as the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions provided herein, that contains one or more hydrophilic ingredients and/or amphiphilic ingredients (water phase ingredients) and is, in general, the water-soluble phase. Typically, in the provided emulsion compositions, for example, the nanoemulsion concentrates and the dilution compositions, the water phase is the continuous phase. “Water phase” also is used to refer to the liquid containing the water phase ingredients that is generated while carrying out the methods for making the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates. For example, “water phase” can refer to the mixture of the components (water phase ingredients) that are combined, mixed and heated, for example, in the water phase tank, prior to mixing with the oil phase. “Water phase” can refer to the water phase mixture that is formed after all the ingredients are dissolved; alternatively, “water phase” can refer to the forming mixture, for example, as it is being mixed/heated.

As used herein, “water phase ingredient(s)” refers to the components of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions that are included in the water phase (e.g., added to the water phase vessel) in the provided methods for making the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. Typical water phase ingredients include, but are not limited to, polar solvents, typically polar protic solvents, such as water and alcohols, typically alcohols having more than one hydroxy group such as dihydroxy and trihydroxy alcohols, e.g., glycerol and propylene glycol; co-surfactants; preservatives; and emulsion stabilizers. Other hydrophilic and/or amphiphilic ingredients can be included in the water phase.

As used herein, an “initial concentrate” is a concentrate (e.g., pre-emulsion concentrate and/or liquid nanoemulsion concentrate) that is made in the provided methods of formulating the provided concentrates, typically by selecting ingredients, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives provided herein, non-polar ingredient(s), polar solvent, and, optionally, other ingredients, and selecting starting concentrations of the ingredients from an appropriate concentration range as described herein.

As used herein, “fatty acid” refers to straight-chain hydrocarbon molecules with a carboxyl (—COOH) group at one end of the chain.

As used herein, “polyunsaturated fatty acid” and “PUFA” are used synonymously to refer to fatty acids that contain more than one carbon-carbon double bonds in the carbon chain of the fatty acid. PUFAs, particularly essential fatty acids, are useful as dietary supplements.

As used herein, “essential fatty acids” are PUFAs that mammals, including humans, cannot synthesize using any known chemical pathway. Thus, essential fatty acids must be obtained from diet or by supplementation. Exemplary of essential PUFA fatty acids are the omega-3 (ω3; n-3) fatty acids and omega-6 (w-6; n-6) fatty acids.

As used herein, “omega-3 (ω3; n-3) fatty acids” and “omega-3 fatty acids” are used synonymously to describe methylene-interrupted polyenes which have two or more cis double bonds separated by a single methylene group, in which the first double bond appears at the third carbon from the last (ω) carbon. Omega-3 fatty acids are used as dietary supplements, for example, for disease treatment and prevention. The provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions can contain non-polar ingredients that include at least one omega-3 fatty acid. Exemplary of omega-3 fatty acids are alpha-linolenic acid (α-linolenic acid; ALA) (18:3ω3) (a short-chain fatty acid); stearidonic acid (18:4ω3) (a short-chain fatty acid); eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) (20:5ω3); docosahexaenoic acid (DHA) (22:6ω3); eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4 ω3); docosapentaenoic acid (DPA, clupanodonic acid) (22:5ω3); 16:3 ω3; 24:5 ω3 and nisinic acid (24:6ω3). Longer chain omega-3 fatty acids can be synthesized from ALA (the short-chain omega-3 fatty acid). Exemplary of non-polar ingredients containing omega-3 fatty acids are non-polar ingredients containing DHA and/or EPA, for example, containing fish oil, krill oil and/or algae oil, for example, microalgae oil, and non-polar ingredients containing alpha-linolenic acid (ALA), for example, containing flaxseed oil.

As used herein, “omega-6 (ω-6; n-6) fatty acids” and “omega-6 fatty acids” are used synonymously to describe methylene-interrupted polyenes which have two or more cis double bonds separated by a single methylene group, in which the first double bond appears at the sixth carbon from the last (ω) carbon. The provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions can contain non-polar ingredients that include at least one omega-6 fatty acid. Exemplary of omega-6 fatty acids are linoleic acid (18:2ω6) (a short-chain fatty acid); gamma-linolenic acid (GLA) (18:3ω6); dihomo gamma linolenic acid (DGLA) (20:3ω6); eicosadienoic acid (20:2ω6); arachidonic acid (AA) (20:4ω6); docosadienoic acid (22:2ω6); adrenic acid (22:4ω6); and docosapentaenoic acid (22:5ω6). Exemplary of non-polar ingredients containing omega-6 fatty acids are ingredients containing GLA, for example, borage oil. Also exemplary of omega-6-containing non-polar ingredients are compounds containing conjugated fatty acids, for example, conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) and compounds containing saw palmetto extract.

As used herein, “algae oil” refers to any oil derived from marine dinoflagellates in, for example, microalgae, for example, Crypthecodinium sp, particularly, Crypthecodinium cohnii. Algae oil can be used as a non-polar ingredient, for example, as a non-polar ingredient that contains a non-polar compound, in the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. The algae oil typically contains DHA. The algae oil can be a source of EPA.

As used herein, “fish oil” refers to any oil derived from any fish, typically a cold water fish, for example, from fish tissue, such as from frozen fish tissue, for example, from cod liver. Fish oil can be used as a non-polar ingredient, for example, as a non-polar ingredient that contains a non-polar compound, in the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. The fish oil typically contains DHA. The fish oil can also contain EPA. For example, the fish oil can contain a mixture of DHA and EPA.

As used herein, “preservative” and “preservativer” are used synonymously to refer to ingredients that can improve the stability of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. Preservatives, particularly food and beverage preservatives, are well known. Any known preservative can be used in the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. Exemplary of the preservatives that can be used in the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions are oil-soluble preservatives, such as benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, methyl paraben, propyl paraben, antioxidants, for example, vitamin E, vitamin A palmitate and beta carotene. Typically, a preservative is selected that is safe for human consumption, for example, in foods and beverages, for example, a GRAS certified and/or Kosher-certified preservative, for example, benzyl alcohol.

As used herein, an “antioxidant” refers to a stabilizer or one component of a stabilizing system that acts as an antioxidant, and that, when added to a beverage composition in combination with the other required components (i.e., acid and/or bicarbonate or carbonate) yields beverage compositions that retain one or more desired organoleptic properties, such as, but not limited to, the taste, smell, odor and/or appearance, of the beverage composition over time. Typically, antioxidants are food-approved, e.g., edible antioxidants, for example, antioxidants that are safe and/or approved for human consumption. Exemplary antioxidants include, but are not limited to, ascorbic acid, vitamin C, ascorbate and coenzyme Q-containing compounds, including, but not limited to, coenzyme Q10.

As used herein, an “acid” or “ingestible acid” refers to a stabilizer or one component of a stabilizing system that, when added to a beverage composition in combination with the other components (i.e., antioxidant and/or bicarbonate or carbonate), yields beverage compositions that retain one or more desired organoleptic properties, such as, but not limited to, the taste, smell, odor and/or appearance of the beverage composition over time. Typically, the acids are food-approved, e.g., edible acids or ingestible acids, for example, acids that are safe and/or approved for human consumption. Exemplary acids include, but are not limited to, citric acid, phosphoric acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid and maleic acid.

As used herein, a “bicarbonate” or “carbonate” refers to a stabilizer or one component of a stabilizing system that, when added to a beverage composition in combination with the other components (i.e., the acid and/or antioxidant) yields beverage compositions that retain one or more desired organoleptic properties, such as, but not limited to, the taste, smell, odor and/or appearance of the beverage composition over time. Typically, bicarbonates or carbonates are food-approved, e.g., edible bicarbonates or carbonates, for example, bicarbonates or carbonates that are safe and/or approved for human consumption. Exemplary bicarbonates include, but are not limited to, potassium bicarbonate and sodium bicarbonate. Exemplary carbonates include, but are not limited to, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate and zinc carbonate.

As used herein, “carbonation” or “carbonated” refers to carbon dioxide dissolved in liquid, such as a beverage base, including water. A liquid, or beverage, can be carbonated by direct addition of carbon dioxide to the liquid or beverage.

As used herein, “emulsion stabilizer” refers to compounds that can be used to stabilize and/or emulsify and/or change the viscosity of the provided concentrates and aqueous compositions containing the diluted concentrates. For example, the emulsion stabilizer can increase the viscosity of the liquid concentrate. One or more emulsion stabilizers can be added, for example, during formulation after evaluation of an initial concentrate, particularly if the oil and water phases of the initial concentrate (or the aqueous liquid dilution composition resulting from dilution of the initial concentrate) appear to be separating. Addition of the emulsion stabilizer can prevent separation of the oil and water phases.

As used herein, a “pH adjuster” is any compound, typically an acid or a base, that is capable of changing the pH of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions, for example, to reduce the pH of the concentrates or liquid dilution composition or to increase the pH of the concentrates or liquid dilution composition, typically without altering other properties of the concentrates and liquid dilution composition, or without substantially altering other properties. pH adjusters are well known. Exemplary of the pH adjusters are acids, for example, citric acid and phosphoric acid, and bases.

As used herein, “flavor” is any ingredient that changes, typically improves, the taste and/or smell of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions, for example, the beverages.

As used herein, “natural” is used to refer to a composition, concentrate or liquid dilution composition, and/or ingredients in the composition, concentrate or liquid dilution composition, that can be found in nature and is not solely man-made. For example, benzyl alcohol is a natural preservative. Similarly, tocopheryl polyethylene glycol is a natural surfactant. The natural composition/ingredient can be GRAS and/or Kosher-certified. Typically, the provided compositions, concentrates and liquid dilution compositions are natural, semi-natural and/or contain one or more natural ingredients.

As used herein, “G.R.A.S.” and “GRAS” are used synonymously to refer to compounds, compositions and ingredients that are “Generally Regarded as Safe” by the USDA and FDA for use as additives, for example, in foods, beverages and/or other substance for human consumption, such as any substance that meets the criteria of sections 201(s) and 409 of the U.S. Federal Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act. Typically, the compositions, concentrates and liquid dilution compositions provided herein are GRAS certified.

As used herein, “kosher” is used to refer to substances that conform to Jewish Kosher dietary laws, for example, substances that do not contain ingredients derived from non-kosher animals or do not contain ingredients that were not made following kosher procedures. Typically, the compositions, concentrates and liquid dilution compositions provided herein are Kosher-certified.

As used herein, “vessel” refers to any container, for example, any tank, pot, vial, flask, cylinder or beaker that can be used to contain the ingredients and/or phases of the provided concentrates and liquid dilution compositions during the methods for making the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. The vessel can be a tank that is used to mix and/or heat one or more ingredients and/or phases of the composition, for example, the water phase tanks and oil phase tanks, such as during the provided scaled-up methods. The oil and the water phases can be mixed and heated in separate tanks before combining the phases to form an emulsion. The tank can be a packaging or holding tank, which holds the provided compositions after forming the compositions, for example, the emulsions. A number of tanks are available for mixing ingredients. Typically, the tanks are cleaned, for example, rinsed, soaped and/or sanitized according to known procedures prior to use and between uses. The tanks can be equipped with one or more mixers, for example, a standard mixer and/or homogenizer, which are used to mix the ingredients added to the tank. The tank can be equipped with a heating and/or cooling device. For example, the tank can be a water-jacketed tank. The temperature of the water jacketed tank is controlled through the water-jacket, for example, to heat the contents, for example, while mixing.

As used herein, a “water phase vessel” refers to a vessel used to mix and/or heat the water phase ingredients to generate the water phase of the provided compositions. The water phase vessel can be a tank. The tank can be a water-jacketed tank, which is a tank equipped with a water jacket that can be used to heat the contents of the tank.

As used herein, an “oil phase vessel” refers to a vessel used to mix and/or heat the oil phase ingredients to generate the oil phase of the provided compositions. The oil phase vessel can be an oil phase tank. The tank can be a water-jacketed tank.

As used herein, “transfer device” refers to any equipment, combination of equipment and/or system that can be used to transfer liquid, for example, from one tank to another tank, in the provided methods for making the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions. Exemplary of the transfer devices is a transfer pump and appropriate fittings, for example, sanitary fittings, ball valves and transfer hoses, for example, food grade hoses.

As used herein a “mixer” is any piece of equipment or combination of equipment that can be used to mix ingredients in the provided methods for making the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions, for example, standard mixers and homogenizers (shears). For example, mixers can be used to mix the ingredients of the water phase and the oil phase and/or to mix the additional ingredients.

As used herein, “standard mixers” are mixers that are used to combine a group of ingredients, for example, the oil phase ingredients or the water phase ingredients, or to mix one or more ingredients with a liquid, for example, with an emulsion, for example, to mix additional ingredients with the emulsion. Standard mixers can be any mixers that move the material, for example, the ingredients, during heating, for example, to promote dissolving of the ingredients.

As used herein, “homogenizer” and “shear” are used to refer to mixers that typically have high shear, which can be used, for example, to form an emulsion, for example, to emulsify the water phase and the oil phase, in the provided methods. The homogenizers typically are capable of high-shear mixing, which emulsifies the phases.

As used herein, a “cooling apparatus” is any piece of equipment or combination of equipment that can be used with the provided methods to cool the compositions and phases and ingredients thereof, for example, during mixing and/or homogenizing, for example, to chill the mixture while emulsifying the oil and water phases. Exemplary of the cooling apparatuses are coolers (chillers), for example, recirculating coolers which can be attached, for example, to the tanks used in the provided methods, for example, remotely or by a tank mounted in the cooler, to recirculate fluid from the tank, through the chiller and back to the tank, in order to rapidly cool and maintain the temperature of the mixture during mixing. Typically, the cooling apparatus can be used to cool the liquid to between or about between 25° C. and 45° C., for example, to at or about 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44 or 45° C.

As used herein, “rapid cooling” refers to a process by which a composition, for example, a liquid composition, for example, a forming emulsion, is cooled to a desired temperature, for example, between or between about 25° C. and 45° C., in less than or less than about 2 hours, typically less than or less than about 1 hour, for example, less than or less than about 30 minutes, such as 15 minutes.

As used herein, “w/w,” “by weight,” “% by weight,” “wt %” and “weight percent” are used synonymously to express the ratio of the mass of one component of a composition compared to the mass of the entire composition. For example, when the amount of a particular ingredient represents 1%, by weight (w/w), of a concentrate, the mass of that ingredient is 1% of the mass of the entire concentrate. Similarly, when the amount of an ingredient is 50% (w/w) of the concentrate, the mass of that ingredient is 50% of the entire mass of the concentrate. Similarly, when a composition and/or a compound contains 10%, by weight, of an ingredient, the mass of the ingredient is 10% of the total mass of the composition or compound. When a composition contains 10 wt % of an ingredient, the mass of that ingredient is 10% of the mass of the entire composition. When only a concentration, amount, or percentage (without units) is listed, it is to be understood that the concentration or percentage is a concentration or percentage by weight.

Similarly, as used herein “v/v” and “volume percent” are used synonymously to express the ratio of the volume of one component of a composition to the volume of the entire composition.

As used herein, “not more than” and “NMT” refer to a quantity that is less than or equal to the listed quantity. Similarly, “not less than” and “NLT” refer to a quantity that is greater than or equal to the listed quantity.

As used herein, the singular forms “a,” “an” and “the” include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to a composition containing “a non-polar ingredient” includes compositions with one or more non-polar ingredients.

As used herein, ranges and amounts can be expressed as “about” a particular value or range. About also includes the exact amount. Hence, “about 5 grams” means “about 5 grams” and also “5 grams.” It also is understood that ranges expressed herein include whole numbers within the ranges and fractions thereof. For example, a range of between 5 grams and 20 grams includes whole number values such as 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 and 20 grams, and fractions within the range including, but not limited to, 5.25, 6.72, 8.5 and 11.95 grams.

As used herein, “optional” or “optionally” means that the subsequently described event or circumstance does or does not occur and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not. For example, a reaction mixture that “optionally includes a catalyst” means that the reaction mixture contains a catalyst or it does not contain a catalyst.

As used herein, “consisting essentially of” means containing the following list of ingredient(s), and not including any additional non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound other than those listed.

As used herein, a soft gel shell is an oral dosage form for administration of pharmaceuticals and nutraceuticals, similar to capsules. Softgel shells are a combination of gelatin or gelatin alternative, water, opacifier and a plasticizer to lend flexibility, such as glycerin and/or sorbitol.

As used herein, a soft gel composition refers to a soft gel shell that contains the non-aqueous pre-gel compositions provided herein.

As used herein, a “concentrate,” particularly a “pre-gel concentrate” is a composition that generally is formulated for dilution, rather than direct ingestion, or for direct ingestion in a small quantity, such as in a capsule. For purposes herein, a “pre-gel concentrate,” refers to a composition that is formulated as a composition for dilution, but also is provided in capsules, such as soft gels, for direct ingestion, where a single capsule provides a single dosage or a fractional dosage.

As used herein, a “pre-gel concentrate” refers to a composition that contains in a particular volume to be encapsulated, contains a single dosage or fractional dosage of a composition containing non-polar ingredients.

As used herein, fractional dosage refers to an amount that is less that a full dosage so that, when provided as a capsule, a plurality of capsules will be required to provide a single dosage. Typically, a fractional dosage is at least 20%, 25%, 50% of a full dosage.

As used herein, “stability” of compositions, such as the pre-gel emulsions and concentrates and soft gels to remain free from one or more deleterious changes over a period of time, for example, at least or longer than 1 day, 1 week, 1 month, 1 year, or more. For example, a concentrate or soft gel can be described as stable if it is formulated such that it remains free from oxidation or substantial oxidation over time, remains clear over time, remains safe and/or desirable for human consumption over time, does not form precipitates and remains free of microbial or other contamination.

As used herein, “non-aqueous solvent” refers to any liquid other than water in which non-polar ingredients or compounds can be dissolved. Typically, a non-aqueous solvent is solvent that is not soluble in water or is partially soluble in water has no or only partial solubility in water. For purposes herein, the non-aqueous solvent is acceptable for human consumption. Benzyl alcohol is exemplary of such solvents.

As used herein, “excipients”, refer to any substance needed to formulate the composition to a desired form. For example, suitable excipients include but are not limited to, diluents or fillers, binders or granulating agents or adhesives, disintegrants, lubricants, antiadherents, glidants, wetting agents, dissolution retardants or enhancers, adsorbents, buffers, chelating agents, preservatives, colors, flavors and sweeteners. Typical excipients include, but are not limited to, starch, pregelatinized starch, maltodextrin, monohydrous dextrose, alginic acid, sorbitol and mannitol. In general, the excipient should be selected from non-toxic excipients (IIG, Inactive Ingredient Guide, or GRAS, Generally Regarded as safe, Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients).

As used herein, a binder is an excipient added to a composition to aid formation of a powder when the composition is dried. Non-limiting examples of suitable binders include, but are not limited to, acacia, dextrin, starch, povidone, carboxymethylcellulose, guar gum, glucose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, methylcellulose, polymethacrylates, maltodextrin, hydroxyethyl cellulose, whey, disaccharides, sucrose, lactose, polysaccharides and their derivatives such as starches, cellulose or modified cellulose such as microcrystalline cellulose and cellulose ethers such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, sugar alcohols such as xylitol, sorbitol or maltitol, protein, gelatins and synthetic polymers, such as polyvinylpyrrolidone (PVP) or polyethylene glycol (PEG).

As used herein, stabilizers refer to additives that aid in retaining organoleptic properties. These include, but are not limited to carbonate, bicarbonate and/or CO₂. Additional components, such as ingestible acids and antioxidants, such as, for example, ascorbic acid, ascorbate or a coenzyme Q-containing compound, improve organoleptic properties.

B. WATER-SOLUBLE VITAMIN E DERIVATIVES

Provided herein are concentrates, compositions and beverage compositions, such as liquid dilution compositions and aqueous beverages, soft gel compositions and powders, that provide non-polar compounds and contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as water-soluble tocopherol-derived compositions and tocotrienol-derived compositions. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) contain a relatively high concentration, as described herein, of the dimer form of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative. This composition is employed in the preparation of the compositions provided herein, including the powders, soft gels, concentrates, emulsions, beverage compositions and concentrates that contain non-polar ingredients, such as nutritional supplements, including water-insoluble vitamins, fatty acids, phytosterols, coenzyme Q and other such compounds, for addition to foods, particularly aqueous beverages. Also provided are compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) with a non-polar ingredient and other optional ingredients for direct consumption without dilution.

Provided herein is a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E mixture, such as a TPGS mixture, that is a high dimer-containing mixture (as described herein) of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative. These high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures can be used in any composition in which a water-soluble vitamin E derivative is included. As described herein, these include the soft-gel compositions, the pre-gel compositions and the powders and pre-spray emulsions. Also included are compositions described, for example, in U.S. application Ser. No. 14/207,310, and International PCT Application No. PCT/US14/25006, now published as US-2014-0271593-A1 and WO 2014/151109, respectively, that include concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, that contain one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain one or more non-polar compound.

Water-soluble vitamin E derivatives can be formed by covalently attaching the vitamin E moiety, a hydrophobic moiety, to another moiety, such as a hydrophilic moiety, for example, a polyalkylene glycol moiety, e.g., a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety, via a linker. For example, the vitamin E derivative compositions can include, but are not limited to, polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocopherol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocopherol, and polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocotrienol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocotrienol, and any other derivatized water-soluble form of vitamin E, such as those described in U.S. Pub. No. 2011-0184194. The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives include, for example, vitamin E TPGS (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives.

Polyethylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E, such as vitamin E TPGS (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate), are known. Compositions of PEG derivatives of vitamin E, for example, TPGS compositions, typically contain a mixture of monomers and dimers, where a monomer is a single vitamin E molecule covalently joined to a water-soluble moiety, such as a polyethylene glycol, through a linker, where the water-soluble moiety, e.g., PEG, has a free, unreacted, terminal reactive group, e.g., a free terminal hydroxyl group. A dimer is made up of two vitamin E molecules covalently joined to a water-soluble moiety, such as a polyethylene glycol, through one or more linkers, where both ends of the water-soluble moiety, e.g., both terminal hydroxyl groups of a PEG moiety, have reacted with a linker that is joined to a vitamin E molecule so that there are no free terminal reactive groups, e.g., hydroxyl groups. For example, the monomer and dimer are formed during the esterification reaction between the acid moiety of vitamin E succinate and the terminal hydroxyl groups of a polyethylene glycol to produce TPGS. Known TPGS compositions contain primarily TPGS monomer, e.g., between 70 wt % and 87 wt %, or higher, TPGS monomer. The monomer has been considered the effective component and the dimer considered to be a byproduct, thus the amounts of dimer are minimal, e.g., less than 12 wt %.

In contrast, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) employed in the concentrates and compositions provided herein are prepared so that they contain significantly more dimer, i.e., more than 12%, particularly at least 20%, 25%, 29%, or more, generally between about 29-55%, 35%-55%, or more such as up to 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% dimer, and contain some monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt % monomer. For example, described herein are TPGS compositions that contain less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer, such as at least 20%, 25%, 29%, or more, up to 75%, 80%, 85%, 90% or 95% dimer.

PEG derivatives of tocopherols or tocotrienols, e.g., TPGS, are water-soluble and can be added to products formulated for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, in particular aqueous food and beverage products, and for delivery of nutritional supplements and drugs that have little or no solubility in aqueous compositions. They have been used, for example, to increase bioavailability of vitamin E and/or to act as a surfactant for other water-insoluble compounds, for example, non-polar compounds.

The concentrates, powders, soft gels, and foods and beverages provided herein contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that have the higher concentrations of dimer, such as TPGS compositions containing, for example, less monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %.

It is shown herein that the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein have advantageous properties compared to vitamin E derivative compositions that contain higher concentrations (i.e., greater than 70%) monomer. In particular, the vitamin E derivative compositions provided herein contain at least about 13%, typically more, dimer form of the vitamin E derivative than previous preparations, in which the amount of monomer form is maximized. It is shown herein that the vitamin E derivative compositions that contain more dimer form are more effective in solubilizing non-polar additives (non-polar compounds) in aqueous compositions than compositions that contain the monomer form and very little dimer form, and result in compositions and concentrates that produce liquid dilution compositions, such as aqueous beverages, that are more clear and stable than comparable compositions produced from concentrates that contain low amounts of dimer and higher amounts of monomer. In addition, the higher dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein permit dissolution of higher concentrations of non-polar ingredients while retaining the clarity and stability of the resulting foods and beverages. As shown herein, higher concentrations of non-polar ingredients can be dissolved, resulting in beverages of greater clarity than beverages containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain lower concentrations of dimer. In addition, across all ranges of concentrations of non-polar ingredients, the resulting beverages are significantly more clear (see Examples below). Thus, provided herein are products formulated for human consumption, for example, food and beverage products, such as aqueous food and beverage products, that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain one or more non-polar compounds, and methods for producing such products.

The concentrates containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein can be used in aqueous compositions, for example, aqueous food and beverage products for human consumption. In some instances, the concentrates can be formulated for direct administration or direct consumption. Those compositions contain lower amounts of the vitamin E derivative composition as well as amounts of the non-polar ingredient that provide a dosage or effective amount upon consumption of a single serving, such as 1-10 mL.

The food and beverage products provided herein that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures with concentrations of dimer that are greater than 12%, particularly at least 20%, 25%, 29% and higher, contain non-polar ingredients, for example, non-polar ingredients that are poorly water-soluble (e.g., have low water solubility or are water-insoluble), that are or contain one or more non-polar compounds. The use of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain less monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt % monomer, and more dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt % dimer, than known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures with higher concentrations of monomer and lower concentrations of dimer, in aqueous food and beverage products allows for the addition of higher amounts (i.e., concentrations) of non-polar ingredients as compared to available food and beverage products without sacrificing clarity and stability of the resulting product. Thus, described herein are water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as TPGS compositions, that can be added to food and beverage products that allow for the addition of higher concentrations of non-polar ingredients that result in food and beverage products that retain desirable organoleptic properties.

1. Vitamin E

Vitamin E refers to a group of eight water-insoluble compounds that include tocopherols and tocotrienols. Both structures are similar, containing a chromal ring and a 16-carbon side chain. The 16-carbon side chain of the tocopherols is saturated, while the side chain of the tocotrienols is unsaturated, with double bonds at the 3′, 7′ and 11′ positions. Each tocopherol and tocotrienol exists in the α, β, γ and δ forms, differentiated by the number and position of methyl groups on the ring (labeled R₁, R₂ and R₃), as shown below.

Form R₁ R₂ R₃ α Me Me Me β Me H Me γ H Me Me δ H H Me

Vitamin E is an important natural antioxidant and has been shown to have anti-inflammatory and anti-carcinogenic activity (Yang et al. (2010) Ann. N.Y. Acad. Sci. 1203:29-34; Ju et al. (2010) Carcinogenesis 31(4):533-542; Li et al. (2011) Cancer Prev. Res. (Phila.) 4(3):404-413). The most common and biologically active form of vitamin E is α-tocopherol, and is the form often referred to as vitamin E. Since tocopherols, including α-tocopherol, cannot be synthesized in humans and animals, they must be obtained from dietary sources. Alpha-tocopherol, the main component of vitamin E in the American diet, is most commonly found in wheat germ, nuts and vegetable and plant oils, such as oils from soybean, corn, sesame, cottonseed, sunflower and almond.

2. Polyalkylene Glycol Derivatives of Vitamin E

The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein (e.g., water-soluble tocopherols or water-soluble tocotrienols) can include polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E, such as polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of vitamin E, for example, PEG derivatives of tocopherols or tocotrienols. Suitable PEG derivatives of vitamin E can contain one or more tocopherol or tocotrienol, attached to one or more PEG moiety via a linker, for example, a dicarboxylic acid linker. Exemplary dicarboxylic acid linkers include succinic acid and succinic anhydride. An exemplary water-soluble vitamin E derivative is shown schematically below:

where the line between the PEG and the linker, and the line between the linker and the vitamin E moiety, each independently represent a covalent bond, for example, a covalent bond that forms an ester, ether, amide or thioester.

Typically, the vitamin E-PEG derivatives are made by covalently attaching the PEG moiety, such as by esterification, to a vitamin E-linker conjugate (e.g., a tocopherol-linker conjugate). The vitamin E-linker conjugate can be formed through esterification of the hydroxyl group of the vitamin E moiety with a carboxylic acid group of a linker, such as a dicarboxylic acid linker. In one example, the vitamin E-linker conjugate can be a tocopherol-linker conjugate, such as a tocopherol ester, for example, tocopherol succinate. The esterification reaction can be performed by any of a number of known methods, including those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,680,749; 4,665,204; 3,538,119; and 6,632,443. The resulting vitamin E-linker conjugate can then be attached to a PEG moiety by another esterification reaction, for example, between a carboxylic acid group of the vitamin E-linker conjugate and a hydroxyl group of the PEG moiety, to form a vitamin E-PEG derivative.

PEG derivatives of a tocopherol-linker or tocotrienol-linker conjugate can be made by any other method known to those of skill in the art. Various methods known in the art for producing PEG derivatives can be used to attach a PEG molecule to tocopherol-linker or tocotrienol-linker compounds. For example, a tocopherol-linker conjugate can form a covalent bond to the PEG molecule via an amide, ether or thioether bond. For example, a tocopherol-linker conjugate that contains an amine group can be reacted with a PEG-NHS (N-hydroxysuccinimide) derivative to form an amide bond between the tocopherol-linker conjugate and the PEG molecule. A tocopherol-linker conjugate that contains an amine group can be reacted with a PEG-aldehyde derivative to form an amide bond between the tocopherol-linker conjugate and the PEG molecule. In another example, a tocopherol-linker conjugate that contains an carboxylic acid can be activated to the corresponding acid halide and reacted with a PEG-SH derivative to form a thioester bond between the tocopherol-linker conjugate and the PEG molecule.

a. Tocopherols and Tocotrienols

The tocopherols used to make the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein can be any natural or synthetic vitamin E tocopherol, including, but not limited to, alpha-tocopherols, beta-tocopherols, gamma-tocopherols and delta tocopherols, either in pure form or in a heterogeneous mixture of more than one form. Exemplary tocopherols are d-α-tocopherols and dl-α-tocopherols. To make the vitamin E-PEG derivative, the tocopherol typically is esterified with a linker, for example, a dicarboxylic acid, to form a tocopherol ester, which then is joined to a PEG moiety.

The tocotrienols used to make the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein can be any natural or synthetic vitamin E tocotrienol, including, but not limited to, alpha-tocotrienols, beta-tocotrienols, gamma-tocotrienols and delta tocotrienols, either in pure form or in a heterogeneous mixture of more than one form. Mixtures of tocopherols and tocotrienols are contemplated for use in the described methods and compositions. A tocotrienol can be esterified with a linker, such as a dicarboxylic acid, before joining with a PEG moiety to form a vitamin E-PEG derivative.

b. Linkers

Typically, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein include a vitamin E moiety, e.g., a tocopherol or tocotrienol, attached to a PEG moiety through a linker. The linker can be any linker that is capable of forming a covalent bond with both the vitamin E moiety and the PEG moiety. For example, the linker can be any linker capable of forming more than one covalent bond such as an ester bond, an amide bond, an ether bond, a thioether bond, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments, the linker is capable of forming more than one ester bond, for example, the linker can be a dicarboxylic acid or dicarboxylic acid derivative. Exemplary dicarboxylic acids and derivatives useful as linkers in the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein include succinic acid, succinic anhydride, sebacic acid, dodecanedioic acid, suberic acid (i.e., octanedioic acid), azelaic acid, citraconic acid, methylcitraconic acid, itaconic acid, maleic acid, glutaric acid, glutaconic acid, fumaric acid and phthalic acid. Accordingly, exemplary of the vitamin E-linker conjugates (i.e., tocopherol or tocotrienol attached to a linker through an ester bond) that can be further esterified to form the vitamin E-PEG derivatives (i.e., water-soluble vitamin E derivatives) described herein are tocopheryl succinate, tocopheryl sebacate, tocopheryl dodecanodioate, tocopheryl suberate, tocopheryl azelaate, tocopheryl citraconate, tocopheryl methylcitraconate, tocopheryl itaconate, tocopheryl maleate, tocopheryl glutarate, tocopheryl glutaconate, tocopheryl fumarate, tocopheryl phthalate, tocotrienol succinate, tocotrienol sebacate, tocotrienol dodecanodioate, tocotrienol suberate, tocotrienol azelaate, tocotrienol citraconate, tocotrienol methylcitraconate, tocotrienol itaconate, tocotrienol maleate, tocotrienol glutarate, tocotrienol glutaconate, tocotrienol fumarate and tocotrienol phthalate.

In other embodiments, the linker can be any compound capable of forming more than one covalent bond, for example, a succinate ester, such as N-hydroxysuccinimide; an amino acid, such as glycine, alanine, 5-aminopentanoic acid or 8-aminooctanoic acid; or an amino alcohol, such as ethanolamine.

c. PEG Moieties

The polyalkylene moiety used to produce the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein can be any polyalkylene moiety. Exemplary of a polyalkylene moiety is a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety. The PEG moiety used in the vitamin E derivatives described herein can be any of a plurality of known PEG moieties. Exemplary of suitable PEG moieties are PEG moieties having varying chain lengths and varying molecular weights, such as, for example, PEG 200, PEG 500, PEG 1000 and PEG 20,000, where the molecular weight of the PEG moiety is 200 Da, 500 Da, 1000 Da and 20,000 Da, respectively. Typically, the number following “PEG” indicates the molecular weight, in daltons (Da), of the PEG moiety. The PEG moiety of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein typically has a molecular weight of between or about between 200 Da to 20,000 Da, for example, between or about between 200 Da to 20,000 Da, 200 Da to 10,000 Da, 200 Da to 8000 Da, 200 Da to 6000 Da, 200 Da to 5000 Da, 200 Da to 3000 Da, 200 Da to 1000 Da, 200 Da to 800 Da, 200 Da to 600 Da, 200 Da to 400 Da, 400 Da to 20,000 Da, 400 Da to 10,000 Da, 400 Da to 8000 Da, 400 Da to 6000 Da, 400 Da to 5000 Da, 400 Da to 3000 Da, 400 Da to 1000 Da, 400 Da to 800 Da, 400 Da to 600 Da, 600 Da to 20,000 Da, 600 Da to 10,000 Da, 600 Da to 8000 Da, 600 Da to 6000 Da, 600 Da to 5000 Da, 600 Da to 3000 Da, 600 Da to 1000 Da, 600 Da to 800 Da, 800 Da to 20,000 Da, 800 Da to 10,000 Da, 800 Da to 8000 Da, 800 Da to 6000 Da, 800 Da to 5000 Da, 800 Da to 3000 Da, 800 Da to 1000 Da, 1000 Da to 20,000 Da, 1000 Da to 10,000 Da, 1000 Da to 8000 Da, 1000 Da to 6000 Da, 1000 Da to 5000 Da, 1000 Da to 3000 Da, 3000 Da to 20,000 Da, 3000 Da to 10,000 Da, 3000 Da to 8000 Da, 3000 Da to 6000 Da, 3000 Da to 5000 Da, 5000 Da to 20,000 Da, 5000 Da to 10,000 Da, 5000 Da to 8000 Da, 5000 Da to 6000 Da, 6000 Da to 20,000 Da, 6000 Da to 10,000 Da, 6000 Da to 8000 Da, 8000 Da to 20,000 Da, 8000 Da to 10,000 Da, or 10000 Da to 20,000 Da. For example, the PEG moiety of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein can have a molecular weight of 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 3000, 5000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, 20,000 Da or more.

Other known PEG analogs also can be used in the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein. The PEG moieties can be selected from among any reactive PEG moiety, including, but not limited to, PEG-OH, PEG-NHS, PEG-aldehyde, PEG-SH, PEG-NH₂, PEG-CO₂H, and branched PEG moieties.

Exemplary of a water-soluble vitamin E derivative having a PEG moiety with a molecular weight of 1000 Da is TPGS 1000 (i.e., D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate 1000).

d. Surfactant Properties

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, for example, the polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E described herein, are surfactants. Surfactants are molecules that contain hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions. For example, the hydrophobic portion can be a hydrophobic tail and the hydrophilic portion can be a hydrophilic head of the surfactant molecule. The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein can be natural surfactants, for example, surfactants that are G.R.A.S. certified (generally recognized as safe) by the FDA and/or Kosher certified.

Typically, surfactants aggregate in aqueous liquids, such as water, to form micelles. The hydrophilic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the outside of the micelle, in contact with the aqueous medium, while the hydrophobic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the center of the micelle. Surfactants also are capable of forming “inverse micelles,” which form in lipophilic medium, the hydrophobic tails being in contact with the lipophilic medium and the hydrophilic heads facing the center of the inverse micelle. Typically, however, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein are surfactants that form micelles in aqueous medium, for example, in aqueous liquids, such as water.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein can be represented by an HLB (hydrophilic-lipophilic balance) value. Generally, HLB is a value derived from a semi-empirical formula, which is used to index surfactants according to their relative hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity. An HLB value is a numerical representation of the relative representation of hydrophilic groups and hydrophobic groups in a surfactant or mixture of surfactants. The weight percent of these respective groups indicates properties of the molecular structure. See, for example, Griffin (1949) J. Soc. Cos. Chem. 1:311. Surfactant HLB values range from 1-45, while the range for non-ionic surfactants typically is from 1-20. The more lipophilic a surfactant is, the lower its HLB value. Conversely, the more hydrophilic a surfactant is, the higher its HLB value. Lipophilic surfactants have greater solubility in oil and lipophilic substances, while hydrophilic surfactants dissolve more easily in aqueous liquids. In general, surfactants with HLB values greater than 10 or greater than about 10 are called “hydrophilic surfactants,” while surfactants having HLB values less than 10 or less than about 10 are referred to as “hydrophobic surfactants.” It should be appreciated that HLB values for a given surfactant can vary, depending upon the empirical method used to determine the value. Thus, HLB values of surfactants provide a rough guide for formulating compositions based on relative hydrophobicity/hydrophilicity. For example, a surfactant typically is selected from among surfactants having HLB values within a particular range of the surfactant or co-surfactant that can be used to guide formulations. The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein, such as the polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E with greater than 12%, 20%, 25%, or 29% dimer, are surfactants in which the vitamin E moiety represents the hydrophobic region of the surfactant and is attached, via a linker, to a polyalkylene glycol moiety, such as a polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety, that provides the hydrophilic portion of the surfactant. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein contain more than 12%, such as at least 20%, 25% and 29%, up to 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75% of the dimer form of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative, such as PEG derivatives of vitamin E. Exemplary of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives that can be used as surfactants are tocopherol-derived surfactants, including polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocopherol, typically polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocopherol, such as tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives and tocotrienol-derived surfactants, including polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocotrienol, typically polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocotrienol. These are prepared as compositions containing the higher levels of dimers as described herein.

Exemplary of vitamin E derivatives that can be prepared for use herein are tocopheryl polyalkylene glycol derivatives, such as tocopheryl polyethylene glycol derivatives. These include tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), tocopheryl sebacate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl dodecanodioate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl suberate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl azelaate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl citraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl methylcitraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl itaconate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl maleate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl glutarate polyethylene glycol, tocopheryl glutaconate polyethylene glycol and tocopheryl phthalate polyethylene glycol, TPGS analogs and TPGS homologs. Other tocopheryl polyethylene glycol derivatives, such as those prepared as described in U.S. Pub. No. 2011-0184194, can be used in the compositions, including soft gels, powders, concentrates and food and beverage compositions described herein. These derivatives are prepared as described herein or using other methods such that the resulting compositions contain greater than 12%, such as at least 20%, 25% and 29%, up to 95%, 90%, 85%, 80%, or 75% of the dimer form of the vitamin E derivative. Concentrates and beverage compositions containing such compounds have advantageous properties shown herein.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein typically have an HLB value between or about between 12 and about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, or about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20. Exemplary of water-soluble vitamin E derivatives that can be used as surfactants are the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein, such as polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E, have an HLB value of between or about between 12 and about 20. Exemplary of a water-soluble vitamin E derivate having an HLB value between or about between 12 and about 20 is tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), such as the TPGS compositions described herein. TPGS typically has an HLB value of between or about between 12 and 14 or about 13.

The following discussion describes properties and preparations of the vitamin E derivative D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS) as exemplary of the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives that can be prepared in compositions with the higher levels of dimer as described herein.

3. Tocopheryl Polyalkylene Glycol Derivatives

In its natural water-insoluble state, vitamin E, e.g., tocopherol or tocotrienol, is easily absorbed and used in humans and animals. Processing of foods and feeds by industry for long-term storage can promote accelerated degradation of the effective vitamin E content. To compensate for the loss of natural vitamin E from food sources, nutritional supplements of natural or synthetic fat-soluble vitamin E have been developed. Not all humans and animals can sufficiently absorb the supplements though. To address this problem, water-soluble vitamin E derivatives have been developed that are an excellent source of vitamin E (i.e., maintain a high degree of vitamin E biological activity) in humans with impaired vitamin E absorption, for example, in humans with malabsorption syndromes (Traber et al. (1986) Am. J. Clin. Nutr. 44:914-923). Water-soluble vitamin E derivatives have been developed for this purpose. Tocopheryl polyethylene glycol derivatives, such as those listed above, are employed to produce the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) with higher levels of dimer as described herein. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS) is exemplary of the tocopheryl polyethylene glycol derivatives.

TPGS contains a hydrophilic (i.e., water-soluble) polyethylene glycol (PEG) chain and a lipophilic (i.e., water-insoluble) α-tocopherol head. The amphiphilic structure of TPGS, shown below, renders it much more water-soluble than traditional vitamin E, allowing TPGS to form a micellar solution at low concentrations (0.04-0.06 mmol/L) that can be absorbed by humans and animals in the absence of bile salts.

a. Uses i. Nutritional Supplement

TPGS has been approved by the FDA as a water-soluble vitamin E nutritional supplement. It is a GRAS (Generally Regarded As Safe)-listed supplement that can be taken orally at long-term doses of 13.4-16.8 mg/kg/day or up to 100 mg/kg/day for people with impaired uptake. In the body, TPGS undergoes enzymatic cleavage to deliver the lipophilic antioxidant α-tocopherol (vitamin E) to cell membranes. Cellular enzymatic hydrolysis by cytoplasmic esterases liberates free α-tocopherol, which then localizes in the cell membrane, and through free radical quenching, protects the membrane from lipid peroxidation and damage.

ii. Surfactant

TPGS also is used as a non-ionic surfactant and emulsifier. Non-ionic surface-active agents are used in oral formulations to enhance the bioavailability of water-insoluble pharmaceuticals, such as drugs, vitamins, or other biologically active compounds. TPGS is an effective absorption and bioavailability enhancer, and has been approved for use as a drug solubilizer in oral, parenteral, topical, nasal, and rectal/vaginal therapies (see, e.g., Constantinides et al. (2006) Pharm. Res. 23(2):243-255; Varma et al. (2005) Eur. J. Pharm. Sci. 25(4-5):445-453) and as a solubilizer for inhalation drug delivery (Fulzele et al. (2006) 23(9):2094-2106). TPGS improves the bioavailability of such water-insoluble drugs as the HIV protease inhibitor amprenavir (Yu et al. (1999) Pharm. Res. 16:1812-1817; Brouwers et al. (2006) J. Pharm. Sci. 95:372-383), the non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor UC 781 (Goddeeris et al. (2008) Eur. J. Pharm. Sci. 35:104-113), cyclosporin (Sokol et al. (1991) Lancet 338:212-215), paclitaxel (Zhao et al. (2010) J. Pharm. Sci. 99(8):3552-3560), estradiol (Sheu et al. (2003) J. Controlled Release 88:355-368), and fat-soluble vitamins such as vitamin D (Argao et al. (1992) Ped. Res. 31(2):146-150).

TPGS acts as a surfactant due to its hydrophilic polyethylene glycol (PEG) chain and its hydrophobic α-tocopherol portion. Surfactants aggregate and form micelles in aqueous mediums such that the hydrophilic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the outside of the micelle, in contact with the aqueous medium, while the hydrophobic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the center of the micelle. In the soft gels, powders, food and beverage products provided herein, TPGS can act as a surfactant by forming micelles in an aqueous medium, such as water, where the hydrophilic portion of TPGS, i.e., the polyethylene glycol (PEG) moiety, is oriented toward the outside of the micelle, in contact with the aqueous medium, while the hydrophobic portion of TPGS, i.e., the vitamin E moiety, is oriented toward the center of the micelle, in contact with the non-polar compound(s), which are thus contained in the center of the micelle.

The hydrophobic/hydrophilic character of a surfactant can be described in terms of an HLB, or hydrophilic-lipophilic balance, value. The HLB value is a numerical representation of the molecular balance of the hydrophobic and hydrophilic portions of the surfactant, relative to other surfactants. HLB values are derived from a semi-empirical formula, where the relative weight percentages of the hydrophobic and hydrophilic groups are indicative of surfactant properties, such as the types of aggregates the surfactant forms, and the solubility of the surfactant (Griffin (1949) J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 1:311-326). Surfactant HLB values range from 1-45, where the range for non-ionic surfactants typically is from 1-20. The more lipophilic a surfactant is, the lower its HLB value. Conversely, the more hydrophilic a surfactant is, the higher its HLB value. The exact HLB value for a given surfactant can vary, however, depending on the empirical method used to determine the value. Values have been determined for a number of surfactants (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,267,985). TPGS is a non-ionic surfactant that, as reported, has an HLB value of approximately 13.

4. Synthesis

Scheme 1 shows the synthesis of an exemplary water-soluble vitamin E derivative, TPGS, but any vitamin E moiety, i.e., any tocopherol or tocotrienol, can be used as the starting material and reacted with any linker, such as those described herein, that is capable of reacting with a polyalkylene glycol moiety to form a monomer form and dimer form of a water-soluble vitamin E derivative. As shown in Scheme 1 below, TPGS can be prepared by reacting vitamin E with succinic anhydride or succinic acid to obtain vitamin E succinate, i.e., D-α-tocopheryl succinate, followed by esterification with a polyethylene glycol molecule, to obtain TPGS (see U.S. Pat. No. 2,680,749). TPGS analogs varying in PEG chain length (e.g., TPGS 200, 238, 400, 600, 2000, 3400, 3500, 4000 and 6000) have been synthesized, but the most widely used form of TPGS is TPGS 1000, which incorporates PEG 1000, a polyethylene glycol molecule with a molecular weight of approximately 1,000 Daltons (Collnot et al. (2006) J. Controlled Release 111:35-40). TPGS 1000 is a pale yellow, waxy solid substance that is amphipathic and hydrophilic, with a molecular weight of approximately 1,513 Daltons.

TPGS compositions, as generally prepared, such as commercially available TPGS 1000, are mixtures that contain primarily TPGS monomer (between 70% and 87% or more) and a lesser amount of TPGS dimer (less than 12%). The monomer is considered the effective component in TPGS, while the dimer is viewed as a byproduct of the esterification reaction between polyethylene glycol and vitamin E succinate. For example, commercially available TPGS, such as the TPGS 1000 available from Eastman Chemical Company (Kingsport, Tenn.), contains primarily TPGS monomer (˜86% or more) and a small amount of TPGS dimer (˜11% or less) (Christiansen et al. (2011) J. Pharm. Sci. 100(5):1773-1782). TPGS synthesized according to standard methods, for example, the method described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,680,749, results in a TPGS composition that is composed primarily of TPGS monomer (70-87%) and a small amount of TPGS dimer (<12%) (US Pharmacopeia 23 (1998) Supp. 9:4712; Scientific Panel of the European Food Safety Authority (2007) EFSA J. 490:1-20). Because the separation of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer is difficult and because TPGS monomer is considered the effective component of TPGS, TPGS compositions containing primarily TPGS dimer have not been developed (Kong et al. (2011) J. Chromatography A 1218:8664-8671). TPGS dimer, shown below, is usually considered an unwanted byproduct of the esterification reaction between PEG and vitamin E succinate, formed due to the equal reactivity of both terminal hydroxyl groups of the PEG moiety.

5. Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixtures (Compositions)

Described herein are water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), for example, TPGS compositions, that contain varying amounts of monomer and dimer, particularly compositions that contain less monomer than is found in typical, known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), for example, less than 70 wt % monomer, and more dimer, i.e., greater than 12 wt % dimer, than in typical, known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), for example, known TPGS compositions. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein can contain between or between about 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer and between or between about 13 wt % and 95 wt % dimer, such as water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) containing between or about between 40 wt % and 60 wt % monomer and between or about between 25 wt % and 60 wt % dimer, such as 29% to 55%, 35% to 50% or 30% to 45%, dimer. Advantageous properties are exhibited by compositions that contain at least these amounts.

In the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, the total amount of monomer as a percentage (%), by weight, of the composition (wt %) can be, e.g., between or between about 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer, inclusive, such as between or between about 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 69%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 69%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 69%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 69%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 69%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 69%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 69%, and 65% and 69% monomer, by weight, of the composition. Generally, the compositions contain less than 69 wt % monomer. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein contain at least or about at least 25%, 30%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, but less than 69% (wt %), total monomer.

In the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, the total amount of dimer as a percentage (%), by weight, of the composition (wt %) can be, e.g., between or between about 13 wt % and 95 wt % dimer, inclusive, such as between or between about 13% and 20%, 13% and 25%, 13% and 30%, 13% and 35%, 13% and 40%, 13% and 45%, 13% and 50%, 13% and 55%, 13% and 60%, 13% and 65%, 13% and 70%, 13% and 75%, 13% and 80%, 13% and 85%, 13% and 90%, 13% and 95%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 20% and 65%, 20% and 70%, 20% and 75%, 20% and 80%, 20% and 85%, 20% and 90%, 20% and 95%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 70%, 25% and 75%, 25% and 80%, 25% and 85%, 25% and 90%, 25% and 95%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 70%, 30% and 75%, 30% and 80%, 30% and 85%, 30% and 90%, 30% and 95%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 70%, 35% and 75%, 35% and 80%, 35% and 85%, 35% and 90%, 35% and 95%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 40% and 80%, 40% and 85%, 40% and 90%, 40% and 95%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 45% and 80%, 45% and 85%, 45% and 90%, 45% and 95%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 70%, 50% and 75%, 50% and 80%, 50% and 85%, 50% and 90%, 50% and 95%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 55% and 80%, 55% and 85%, 55% and 90%, 55% and 95%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 60% and 80%, 60% and 85%, 60% and 90%, 60% and 95%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75%, 65% and 80%, 65% and 85%, 65% and 90%, 65% and 95%, 70% to 75%, 70% and 80%, 70% and 85%, 70% and 90%, 70% and 95%, 75% and 80%, 75% and 85%, 75% and 90%, 75% and 95%, 80% and 85%, 80% and 90%, 80% and 95%, 85% and 90%, 85% and 95% and 90% and 95% dimer, by weight, of the composition. Generally, the compositions contain less than 95 wt % dimer. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein contain at least or about at least 13%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, 75%, 76%, 77%, 78%, 79%, 80%, 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, but less than 95% (wt %) total dimer.

The compositions described herein containing less than 70 wt % monomer and greater than 12 wt % dimer exhibit decreased turbidity values when dissolved in an aqueous solution, for example, when dissolved in water, as compared to typical, known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), i.e., water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain more than 70 wt % monomer and less than 12 wt % dimer. The compositions described herein containing less than 70 wt % monomer and greater than 12 wt % dimer allow for the addition of a higher concentration of non-polar ingredients when used in the compositions provided herein, including the powders, soft gel compositions, aqueous food and beverage products as compared to available aqueous food and beverage products, while maintaining clarity and stability, for example, exhibiting decreased turbidity values.

Exemplary of the compositions described herein are TPGS compositions containing less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer, such as compositions containing between or about between 25 wt % and 69 wt % TPGS monomer and between or about between 13 wt % and 95 wt % TPGS dimer, such as TPGS compositions containing between or about between 40 wt % and 60 wt % TPGS monomer and between or about between 25 wt % and 60% TPGS dimer, are described herein. The compositions described herein containing less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and greater than 12 wt % TPGS dimer exhibit decreased turbidity values when dissolved, for example, when dissolved in water, as compared to typical, known TPGS compositions, i.e., TPGS compositions that contain more than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and less than 12 wt % TPGS dimer. The TPGS compositions described herein allow for the addition of a higher concentration of non-polar ingredients when used in aqueous food and beverage products as compared to available aqueous food and beverage products, while maintaining clarity and stability, for example, exhibiting decreased turbidity values.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), e.g., TPGS compositions, described herein contain a mixture of monomer and dimer, e.g., a mixture of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer. The monomer, for example, a TPGS monomer, can be present in an amount that is less than what is typically found in known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), e.g., known TPGS compositions, i.e., less than 70 wt % monomer. The dimer, for example, a TPGS dimer, can be present in an amount that is greater than what is typically found in known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), e.g., known TPGS compositions, i.e., greater than 12 wt % dimer. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as the TPGS compositions, described herein can also contain other components, such as, for example, unreacted PEG, unreacted vitamin E, e.g., D-α-tocopheryl succinate, and one or more catalysts.

Methods for preparing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as the TPGS compositions described herein, are described herein, for example, methods of preparing water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions, such as TPGS compositions, that contain less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer. Existing methods for preparing derivatives of vitamin E can be employed, except that the methods are modified to produce higher concentrations of the dimer form by modifying reaction conditions. Such modifications can be determined empirically if needed, such as by varying reaction parameters, such as time, temperature and reactant concentrations, to identify conditions that favor higher levels of dimer production.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures e.g., TPGS monomer-dimer mixtures, prepared according to the methods, can contain between or about between 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer, for example, at or about 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68 or 69 wt % monomer and between or about between 13 wt % and 95 wt % dimer, for example, at or about 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 or 95 wt % dimer.

Exemplary of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein that contain a mixture of monomer and dimer, for example, TPGS compositions that contain a mixture of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer, are compositions that contain between or about between 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer and between or about between 13 wt % and 95 wt %, such as 29% to 55%, dimer. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures can contain at or about at least 39.35 wt % monomer and at or about at least 35.56 wt % dimer; at or about 40.39 wt % monomer and at or about 54.90 wt % dimer; at or about 40.95 wt % monomer and at or about 53.15 wt % dimer; at or about 42.76 wt % monomer and at or about 51.10 wt % dimer; at or about 43.52 wt % monomer and at or about 49.80 wt % dimer; at or about 43.90 wt % monomer and at or about 53.90 wt % dimer; at or about 52.92 wt % monomer and at or about 33.70 wt % dimer; at or about 55.88 wt % monomer and at or about 29.27 wt % dimer; at or about 57.70 wt % monomer and at or about 40.40 wt % dimer; at or about 60.00 wt % monomer and at or about 38.10 wt % dimer; and at or about 70.90 wt % monomer and at or about 28.65 wt % dimer. Thus, described herein are water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as TPGS compositions, that contain less monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt % monomer, such as between 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer, and more dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt % dimer, such as between 13 wt % and 95% dimer, than typical commercial TPGS compositions.

The concentrates containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, such as tocopheryl polyalkylene glycol derivative compositions, including TPGS compositions, described herein, allow for the solubilization of higher amounts of non-polar ingredients, such as non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, in foods and beverages, particularly aqueous beverages to which the concentrate is added. Provided herein are powders, soft gel compositions, pre-gel compositions, pre-emulsion concentrates, liquid nanoemulsion concentrates and liquid dilution compositions, capsules, tablets and beverage compositions that contain the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein.

For example, these concentrates allow for the addition of non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds to products suitable for human consumption in amounts between or between about 1 wt % and 75 wt %, such as between or between about 1% and 5%, 1% and 10%, 1% and 15%, 1% and 20%, 1% and 25%, 1% and 30%, 1% and 35%, 1% and 40%, 1% and 45%, 1% and 50%, 1% and 55%, 1% and 60%, 1% and 65%, 1% and 70%, 1% and 75%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 5% and 45%, 5% and 50%, 5% and 55%, 5% and 60%, 5% and 65%, 5% and 70%, 5% and 75%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 10% and 45%, 10% and 50%, 10% and 55%, 10% and 60%, 10% and 65%, 10% and 70%, 10% and 75%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 15% and 45%, 15% and 50%, 15% and 55%, 15% and 60%, 15% and 65%, 15% and 70%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 20% and 65%, 20% and 70%, 20% and 75%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 70%, 25% and 75%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 70%, 30% and 75%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 70%, 35% and 75%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75% and 70% and 75% non-polar ingredient, by weight, of the food or beverage product. Generally, the products contain less than 75 wt % non-polar ingredient. For example, the food and beverage products containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, including the concentrates, provided herein contain at least or about at least 1%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, 50%, 51%, 52%, 53%, 54%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 59%, 60%, 61%, 62%, 63%, 64%, 65%, 66%, 67%, 68%, 69%, 70%, 71%, 72%, 73%, 74%, but less than 75% (wt %) total non-polar ingredient.

C. METHODS FOR MAKING WATER-SOLUBLE VITAMIN E DERIVATIVES

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) with higher amounts of dimer can be prepared by modification of methods that compositions with higher amounts of monomer and lower amounts of dimer are prepared by, appropriately varying reaction conditions to favor increased dimer formation. Alternatively, standard known methods can be employed and the dimers purified or partially purified and added to compositions to increase the percentage of dimer to a desired level.

For example, for production of compositions with higher amounts of TPGS dimer, the methods employ the use of vitamin E succinate, e.g., D-α-tocopheryl succinate, as a starting material. Methods that use vitamin E, e.g., tocopherol or tocotrienol, and succinic acid or succinic anhydride as the starting materials (to synthesize vitamin E succinate) also can be used to prepare the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein. The methods can be adapted for production of any desired water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition that contains the higher amounts of dimer.

As noted, these water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) exhibit decreased turbidity values as compared to known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), such as known TPGS compositions, when dissolved, such as, for example, when dissolved in water or other aqueous beverages. Thus, the described methods are advantageous over existing prior art methods of preparing TPGS compositions that exhibit high turbidity values, e.g., higher than 80 NTUs, when dissolved, such as when dissolved in water.

Water-soluble vitamin E derivatives, such as TPGS, can be prepared by esterifying vitamin E succinate, for example, D-α-tocopheryl acid succinate, with polyethylene glycol. The resulting vitamin E TPGS has a chemical formula of C₃₃O₅H₅₄(CH₂CH₂O)_(n), where “n” represents the number of polyethylene oxide moieties attached to the acid group of the vitamin E succinate. In an exemplary embodiment, the method includes preparing a crude water-soluble vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, composition by first preparing a reaction mixture containing vitamin E succinate, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), and optionally, a catalyst, in a solvent, and heating the reaction mixture to an elevated temperature to produce a crude water-soluble vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, composition containing less TPGS monomer and more TPGS dimer than what is typically found in known TPGS compositions, i.e., less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer. The crude water-soluble vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, composition then can be purified and concentrated to obtain a purified water-soluble vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, composition containing less TPGS monomer and more TPGS dimer than what is typically found in known TPGS compositions, i.e., less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer. Any purification process known in the art can be used to purify the reaction product.

1. Reaction Mixture

The methods include preparing a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a crude TPGS composition, by esterifying vitamin E succinate with polyethylene glycol in a solvent. The esterification procedure can be promoted by a catalyst, for example, an esterification catalyst. In the methods, the crude composition can be prepared from a reaction mixture containing vitamin E succinate, a polyethylene glycol (PEG), a solvent, and optionally, a catalyst. The components of the reaction mixture can be added in any order. In an exemplary embodiment, the polyethylene glycol is dissolved in the solvent before the addition of vitamin E succinate and the catalyst.

The methods produce a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a crude TPGS composition, that contains less TPGS monomer and more TPGS dimer than what is typically found in known TPGS compositions, i.e., less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer. In some instances, the crude TPGS composition contains between or between about 25 wt % and 69 wt % TPGS monomer and between or between about 13 wt % and 95 wt % TPGS dimer, such as between or between about 40 wt % and 60 wt % TPGS monomer and between or between about 25 wt % and 60 wt % TPGS dimer.

a. Vitamin E Succinate

The reaction mixtures of the methods contain vitamin E succinate, for example, D-α-tocopheryl succinate. Vitamin E succinate can be purchased from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Parchem (New Rochelle, N.Y.), Fisher Scientific (Fair Lawn, N.J.), and VWR International (Radnor, Pa.), or can be synthesized according to methods known to those of skill in the art. Typically, vitamin E succinate can be synthesized by reacting vitamin E (i.e., D-α-tocopherol) with succinic anhydride in a solvent (e.g., toluene) in the presence of a base (e.g., triethylamine) (see, for example, U.S. Patent Pub. Nos. 2011/0130562 and 2011/0184194; Lipshutz et al. (2011) J. Org. Chem. 76(11):4379-4391; Gelo-Pujic et al. (2008) Int. J. Cosmet. Sci. 30(3):195-204; and Vraka et al. (2006) Bioorg. Med. Chem. 14(8):2684-2696).

In the methods, the total amount of vitamin E succinate in the reaction mixture as a percentage (%), by weight, of the reaction mixture (wt %) can be, e.g., from at or about 0.1% to at or about 15%, such as 0.1% to 1%, 0.1% to 3%, 0.1% to 5%, 0.1% to 10%, 0.1% to 15%, 0.5% to 1%, 0.5% to 3%, 0.5% to 5%, 0.5% to 10%, 0.5% to 15%, 1% to 3%, 1% to 5%, 1% to 10%, 1% to 15%, 3% to 5%, 3% to 10%, 3% to 15%, 5% to 10%, 5% to 15%, or 10% to 15%, by weight, of the reaction mixture. Generally, the reaction mixtures contain less than 15 wt % vitamin E succinate. For example, the reaction mixtures described herein contain up to at or about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14% or 15% vitamin E succinate. Generally, the reaction mixtures described herein contain less than 15% (wt %) total vitamin E succinate.

b. Polyethylene Glycol

In the methods, the reaction mixtures include any polyethylene glycol that can react with the acid moiety of vitamin E succinate to form an ester. The polyethylene glycol can include, for example, any polyethylene glycol that gives the desired molecular weight of the water-soluble vitamin E compound, the desired polyethylene glycol chain length of the water-soluble vitamin E compound or the desired amount of water-soluble vitamin E water-solubility. The polyethylene glycol in the reaction mixtures of the methods can include, for example, any polyethylene glycol that is capable of forming an ester when reacted with vitamin E succinate to produce a vitamin E derivative that is water-soluble. For example, the polyethylene glycol can include PEG-OH, PEG-SH, PEG-NH₂ and branched PEGs. Typically, the polyethylene glycol is PEG-OH. The resulting water-soluble vitamin E product, for example, TPGS, formed by the reaction between vitamin E succinate and a polyethylene glycol contains at least polyethylene glycol esters of vitamin E succinate. The esters can be a mixture of esters, such as a mixture of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer.

The polyethylene glycols in the reaction mixtures of the methods can be any molecular weight, for example, any molecular weight that renders vitamin E succinate water-soluble after esterification with the polyethylene glycol (i.e., the resulting TPGS is water-soluble). Such polyethylene glycols are known in the art and can be purchased from suppliers such as Sigma-Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.), Fisher Scientific (Fair Lawn, N.J.), and VWR International (Radnor, Pa.). The polyethylene glycol can be added to the reaction mixture by any method suitable for transferring the PEG to the reaction mixture. For example, the PEG can be transferred to the reaction mixture in molten form.

Suitable polyethylene glycols for use in the methods include polyethylene glycols having an average molecular weight ranging from between or between about 100 Daltons (Da) and 20,000 Da. For example, the average molecular weight can be between or between about 200 Da and 10,000 Da, or 400 Da and 5,000 Da, or 500 Da and 1500 Da, or 750 Da and 1200 Da, or 1000 Da and 2,500 Da. Generally, the molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol is less than 20,000 Da. For example, the average molecular weight of the polyethylene glycol used in the reaction mixtures described herein can be or can be about 100, 200, 238, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750, 800, 1000, 1200, 1500, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3400, 3500, 4000, 6000, 8000, 10,000, or 12,000 Da, but less than 20,000 Da.

Exemplary polyethylene glycols include PEG 100 (where 100 represents the PEG chain molecular weight), PEG 200, PEG 238, PEG 300, PEG 400, PEG 500, PEG 600, PEG 750, PEG 800, PEG 1000, PEG 1200, PEG 1500, PEG 2000, PEG 2500, PEG 3000, PEG 3400, PEG 3500, PEG 4000, PEG 6000, PEG 8000, PEG 10,000, PEG 12,000 or PEG 20,000. Any other suitable polyethylene glycol known to those of skill in the art also can be used in the methods. In some embodiments described herein, the polyethylene glycol is PEG 1000.

In the methods, the total amount of PEG in the reaction mixture as a percentage (%), by weight, of the reaction mixture (wt %) can be, e.g., from at or about 1% to at or about 50%, such as 1% to 5%, 5% to 10%, 5% to 15%, 5% to 20%, 5% to 25%, 5% to 30%, 5% to 35%, 5% to 40%, 5% to 45%, 10% to 15%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 25%, 10% to 30%, 10% to 35%, 10% to 40%, 10% to 45%, 10% to 50%, 15% to 20%, 15% to 25%, 15% to 30%, 15% to 35%, 15% to 40%, 15% to 45%, 15% to 50%, 20% to 25%, 20% to 30%, 20% to 40%, 20% to 50%, 25% to 50%, or 30% to 50%, by weight, of the reaction mixture. Generally, the reaction mixtures contain less than 50 wt % PEG For example, the reaction mixtures described herein contain at least or about at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24%, 25%, 26%, 27%, 28%, 29%, 30%, 31%, 32%, 33%, 34%, 35%, 36%, 37%, 38%, 39%, 40%, 41%, 42%, 43%, 44%, 45%, 46%, 47%, 48%, 49%, but less than 50% (wt %) total PEG

c. Catalyst

The reaction mixtures of the methods can optionally contain a catalyst. Suitable catalysts include those catalysts that can be used to promote the esterification reaction between the PEG and the acid moiety of vitamin E succinate. Exemplary catalysts include acidic catalysts, such as p-toluenesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, hydrochloric acid, trichloroacetic acid, and any other known catalyst that can promote esterification.

In the reaction mixtures of the methods, the total amount of catalyst, as a percentage (%), by weight, of the reaction mixture (wt %) can be, e.g., from at or about 0% to at or about 15%, such as 0.01% to 0.05%, 0.01% to 0.1%, 0.01% to 0.5%, 0.01% to 0.75%, 0.01% to 1%, 0.01% to 3%, 0.01% to 5%, 0.01% to 10%, 0.01% to 15%, 0.05% to 0.1%, 0.05% to 0.5%, 0.05% to 0.75%, 0.05% to 1%, 0.05% to 3%, 0.05% to 5%, 0.05% to 10%, 0.05% to 15%, 0.1% to 0.5%, 0.1% to 0.75%, 0.1% to 1%, 0.1% to 3%, 0.1% to 5%, 0.1% to 10%, 0.1% to 15%, 0.5% to 0.75%, 0.5% to 1%, 0.5% to 3%, 0.5% to 5%, 0.5% to 10%, 0.5% to 15%, 1% to 3%, 1% to 5%, 1% to 10%, 1% to 15%, 3% to 5%, 3% to 10%, 3% to 15%, 5% to 10%, 5% to 15%, 10% to 15%, by weight, of the reaction mixture. Generally, the reaction mixtures contain less than 15 wt % catalyst. For example, the reaction mixtures described herein can contain up to at or about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14% or 15% catalyst, based on the weight of the reaction mixture.

d. Solvent

The reaction mixtures of the methods include a solvent or combination of solvents. Suitable solvents include those that do not prevent the esterification reaction between the PEG and acid moiety of vitamin E succinate from taking place. For example, the solvent or combination of solvents can be aprotic solvents.

Suitable solvents used in the methods include solvents that are inert to the reaction and are aprotic, for example, solvents that lack an acidic hydrogen, such as toluene, xylenes, ethers such as tetrahydrofuran (THF), diethyl ether and dioxane, ethyl acetate, acetone, dimethylformamide (DMF), N,N-dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile, methyl ethyl ketone (MEK), methyl isobutyl ketone (MIBK), dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO), ethyleneglycol dimethylether, hexanes, cyclohexane, pentane, cyclopentane and any combination thereof. An exemplary solvent used in the reaction mixtures of the methods is toluene.

In the reaction mixtures of the methods, the total amount of solvent as a percentage (%), by weight, of the reaction mixture (wt %) can be, e.g., from at or about 60% to at or about 95%, such as 60% to 65%, 60% to 70%, 60% to 75%, 60% to 80%, 60% to 85%, 60% to 90%, 60% to 95%, 65% to 70%, 65% to 75%, 65% to 80%, 65% to 85%, 65% to 90%, 65% to 95%, 70% to 75%, 70% to 80%, 70% to 85%, 70% to 90%, 70% to 95%, 75% to 80%, 75% to 85%, 75% to 90%, 75% to 95%, 80% to 85%, 80% to 90%, 80% to 95%, 85% to 90%, 85% to 95% and 90% to 95%, by weight, of the reaction mixture. Generally, the reaction mixtures contain less than 95 wt % solvent. For example, the reaction mixtures can contain at least or about at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, but less than 95% (wt %) total solvent.

e. Exemplary Reaction Mixtures

Exemplary reaction mixtures that can be used in the methods to ultimately produce a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a TPGS composition, that contains less TPGS monomer and more TPGS dimer than what is typically manufactured, i.e., less than 70 wt % TPGS monomer and more than 12 wt % TPGS dimer, are described. They are exemplified with TPGS, but similar reaction mixtures can be prepared and reactions performed to produce tocopherol sebacate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol dodecanodioate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol suberate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol azelaate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol citraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol methylcitraconate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol itaconate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol maleate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol glutarate polyethylene glycol, tocopherol glutaconate polyethylene glycol and tocopherol phthalate polyethylene glycol, TPGS analogs and TPGS homologs.

The reaction mixtures exemplified herein include vitamin E succinate, a polyethylene glycol, a solvent, and optionally, a catalyst. Exemplary of such reaction mixtures contain from at or about 0.1 wt % to at or about 15 wt % of vitamin E succinate; a polyethylene glycol, in an amount from at or about 1 wt % to at or about 50 wt %; a catalyst, in an amount from at or about 0.01 wt % to at or about 15 wt %; and from at or about 60% to at or about 95% of a solvent.

In some embodiments, the polyethylene glycol can be a polyethylene glycol with a molecular weight of around 1000 Da, for example, PEG 1000. For example, the exemplary reaction mixtures described herein can contain from at or about 0.1 wt % to at or about 15 wt % of vitamin E succinate; from at or about 1 wt % to at or about 50 wt % of a polyethylene glycol, for example, PEG 1000; from at or about 0.01 wt % to at or about 15 wt % of a catalyst, for example, p-toluenesulfonic acid; and from at or about 60% to at or about 95% of a solvent, for example, toluene.

2. Exemplary Methods

The methods include preparing a reaction mixture containing vitamin E succinate, a polyethylene glycol and optionally, a catalyst, in a solvent; heating the reaction mixture to a temperature equal to or higher than the boiling point of the solvent to form a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture; processing the reaction mixture to obtain the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture; and purifying the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture to obtain a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. In particular, the methods use the exemplary reaction mixtures described above. The methods to synthesize water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein result in water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, such as TPGS compositions, that are less turbid than known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, i.e., known compositions that contain more than 70% TPGS monomer and less than 12% TPGS dimer, when diluted in an aqueous medium, e.g., water.

The following methods are exemplary only and provide a platform from which adjustments can be made. It is understood that changes can be made to the steps of the method and to the reaction components while retaining some if not all of the desirable properties of the method. Further changes can be made by adding or altering steps or components of each step. For example, the order in which the steps are performed can be changed.

a. Preparation of a Crude Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixture

Exemplary of the methods is preparation of a high dimer-containing mixture of TPGS. The methods can be employed to produce high dimer-containing mixtures of any vitamin E derivative, including PEG derivatives of vitamin E. Exemplary of the methods is a method of preparing a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a crude TPGS composition, by providing a reaction mixture containing vitamin E succinate, e.g. D-α-tocopheryl succinate, a polyethylene glycol, e.g., PEG 1000, a catalyst, e.g., p-toluenesulfonic acid, and a solvent, e.g., toluene, heating the reaction mixture to a temperature of at least or about at least 110° C. and maintaining the elevated temperature for a period of up to at or about 6.5 hours before cooling, for example, to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., and washing the reaction mixture with an aqueous solution of a weak base, e.g., a 10% aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate.

A crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is prepared by providing a reaction mixture containing vitamin E succinate, a polyethylene glycol and optionally, a catalyst, in a solvent and heating the reaction mixture from room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., to an elevated temperature, and maintaining the elevated temperature for a period of time until a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a crude TPGS composition, is formed that contains the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer. The elevated temperature can be any temperature in the range of from 30° C. to about 300° C., generally between 80° C. and 250° C., such as between 100° C. and 200° C. The elevated temperature can be, for example, the boiling point of the solvent in the reaction mixture. A typical heating schedule can be heating the reaction mixture to a temperature of at least or about at least 110° C. with stirring, and once achieved, the elevated temperature, e.g., at least or about at least 110° C., is maintained for a total time of up to at or about 6.5 hours with stirring. Other heating temperatures and times can be used depending on the substrates, solvent and formation of the desired crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. For example, the total time the elevated temperature is maintained can be at least at or about 1 hour, at least at or about 1.5 hours, at least at or about 2 hours, at least at or about 2.5 hours, at least at or about 3 hours, at least at or about 3.5 hours, at least at or about 4 hours, at least at or about 4.5 hours, at least at or about 5 hours, at least at or about 5.5 hours, at least at or about 6 hours, or at least at or about 6.5 hours, or longer, before cooling.

After the elevated temperature has been maintained for the desired amount of time, e.g., the amount of time required to produce the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer, the reaction mixture can be cooled to a temperature lower than the elevated temperature. For example, the reaction mixture can be cooled to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., after heating at an elevated temperature for the desired amount of time. The reaction mixture can be heated to at least or about at least 110° C. for a total time of about 6.5 hours before cooling, e.g., to room temperature (i.e., at or about 20° C.), depending on the substrates, solvent and formation of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a crude TPGS composition, resulting in the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer. One of skill in the art can perform the methods and, if necessary, empirically determine the appropriate reaction duration to produce the desired ratio of dimer to monomer, based on the formation of the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer.

In the methods, the reaction mixture can be heated from room temperature (i.e., at or about 20° C.) to an elevated temperature of at least at or about 30° C., 40° C., 50° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C., 90° C., 100° C., 105° C., 110° C., 115° C., 120° C., 125° C., 130° C., 140° C., 150° C., 155° C., 160° C., 165° C., 170° C., 175° C., 180° C., 185° C., 190° C., 195° C., 200° C., 205° C., 210° C., 215° C., 220° C., 225° C., 230° C., 235° C., 240° C., 245° C., 250° C., 255° C., 260° C., 265° C., 270° C., 275° C., 280° C., 285° C., 290° C., 295° C., 300° C., or higher. The reaction mixture can be maintained at a temperature elevated from room temperature for at least at or about 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, 2.5 hours, 3 hours, 3.5 hours, 4 hours, 4.5 hours, 5 hours, 5.5 hours, 6 hours, 6.5 hours, or longer before cooling. In an exemplary method, the reaction mixture can be maintained at an elevated temperature for up to at or about 6.5 hours before cooling, e.g., to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C. The particular conditions depend upon the particular vitamin E derivative and the amount of monomer and dimer desired.

The amount of time that the reaction mixture is maintained at the temperature elevated from room temperature, for example, between or about between 30° C. and 300° C., such as the boiling point of the solvent in the reaction mixture, can be determined by monitoring the progress of reaction during heating. For example, the reaction mixture can be monitored during heating to determine the amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer present in the reaction mixture. The heating can then be terminated when the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer are formed. The monitoring can be done by any method of monitoring a reaction known to those of skill in the art, such as by chromatography, spectroscopy or spectrometry. For example, the reaction can be monitored by thin layer chromatography (TLC), high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC), infrared spectroscopy (IR), Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR), mass spectrometry (MS), nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) spectroscopy, or any combination thereof. In some embodiments of the methods, the reaction progress is monitored by TLC. In other embodiments, the reaction progress is monitored by HPLC. In yet other embodiments, the reaction progress is monitored by both TLC and HPLC. One of skill in the art, if necessary, can determine particular parameters empirically, such as appropriate reaction duration, based on monitoring the formation of the desired amounts of vitamin E derivative monomer and dimer, such as TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer.

The reaction mixture of the methods can be heated to an elevated temperature under an inert gas atmosphere, such as a nitrogen gas or argon gas atmosphere, or under air. The reaction mixture of the methods can be heated to an elevated temperature at atmospheric pressure or at an elevated pressure, i.e., a pressure higher than atmospheric pressure. The elevated pressure can be achieved, e.g., by performing the reaction in a closed vessel or in a vented vessel.

The progress of the reaction can be terminated after heating for the desired amount of time, for example, up to at or about 6.5 hours, by cooling the reaction mixture, for example, to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C. After cooling, such as cooling to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., the reaction mixture can be washed with an aqueous solution. The aqueous solution can be an aqueous solution of base, such as a weak base, i.e., bases that do not fully ionize in an aqueous solution. Suitable weak bases include, for example, carbonates or bicarbonates, e.g., sodium carbonate, sodium bicarbonate, potassium carbonate and potassium bicarbonate; amines, ammonias or ammoniums, e.g., methyl amine, methyl ethyl amine, dimethyl amine, aniline, ammonia, trimethyl ammonia and ammonium hydroxide; and pyridine. For example, the aqueous solution of base can be an aqueous solution of sodium bicarbonate. Suitable aqueous solutions of the weak base include solutions that contain, e.g., 1% to 20% weak base, such as at least or about 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, 5%, 5.5%, 6%, 6.5%, 7%, 7.5%, 8%, 8.5%, 9%, 9.5%, 10%, 10.5%, 11%, 11.5%, 12%, 12.5%, 13%, 13.5%, 14%, 14.5%, 15%, 15.5%, 16%, 16.5%, 17%, 17.5%, 18%, 18.5%, 19%, 19.5%, 20%, or more, weak base. For example, the aqueous solution can be an aqueous solution containing at or about 10% sodium bicarbonate. After the aqueous solution of a weak base has been added to the reaction mixture, the aqueous solution can be separated from the reaction mixture, such as by allowing the reaction mixture and aqueous solution of weak base to separate into layers, and removed. In some embodiments, the reaction mixture and aqueous solution of weak base can be stirred for a period of time before separating. For example, the reaction mixture and aqueous solution can be stirred for 1 minute, 2 minutes, 3 minutes, 4 minutes, 5 minutes, 6 minutes, 7 minutes, 8 minutes, 9 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, 20 minutes, or more, before allowing the reaction mixture and aqueous solution of weak base to separate into layers.

b. Processing the Reaction Mixture to Obtain a Crude Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixture

After preparing the reaction mixture, the reaction mixture can be further processed in order to obtain a crude water-soluble vitamin E mixture, for example, a crude TPGS composition that contains less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures. The further processing can be performed to remove impurities from the reaction mixture before obtaining the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The further processing can be performed in order to isolate the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture from the reaction mixture. For example, the reaction mixture can be further processed by treating the reaction mixture with an adsorbent, such as activated charcoal (i.e., activated carbon). Activated charcoal can be used as a decolorizer and to remove impurities by chemical adsorption. Any activated charcoal known to those of skill in the art can be used to treat the reaction mixture. Such activated charcoal is available from commercial sources under such trade names as Calgon-Type CPG®, Type PCB®, Type SGL®, Type CAL®, and Type OL®.

Further processing of the reaction mixture, for example, treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal, can take place for a period of time of from at or about 0.5 hours to at or about 5 hours, or longer if required. For example, treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal can take place for at least or about at least 0.5 hours, 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, or longer. The further processing, for example, treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal, can be done at any temperature of from at or about room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., to a temperature elevated from room temperature. For example, the temperature of the process, e.g., activated charcoal treatment, can be at or about 20° C., 30° C., 40° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C., 90° C., or 100° C., or any temperature between 20° C. and 100° C., such as between or about between 55° C. and 60° C. The treatment temperatures and times can be varied depending on the reaction mixture, the solvent, and the impurities present in the reaction mixture. In an exemplary process, such as an activated charcoal treatment process, the reaction mixture can be treated, e.g., with activate charcoal, for at least or about at least 1 hour at a temperature of between or about between 55° C. and 60° C., before cooling.

In the methods, the reaction mixture can be filtered and washed after cooling, such as cooling to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., after further processing, such as after treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal. The reaction mixture can be filtered and washed, for example, to remove the activated charcoal from the reaction mixture. For example, the reaction mixture can be filtered through a filter aid, such as diatomaceous earth. Suitable filter aids for use in the methods include, for example, those sold under the trademark Celite®, such as those sold under the trademark Hyflo®. After filtering through a filter aid, such as diatomaceous earth, the reaction mixture can be washed, for example, with the same solvent used in the reaction mixture. In an exemplary embodiment, after further processing, e.g., treatment with activated charcoal, and cooling, e.g., to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., the reaction mixture is filtered through diatomaceous earth, e.g., Hyflo® filter aid, and washed with solvent, e.g., toluene.

In the methods, the reaction mixture can be further processed in order to isolate the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture from the reaction mixture. For example, the reaction mixture can be further processed by removing the solvent from the reaction mixture, i.e., concentrating the reaction mixture, in order to obtain a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. Any method of removing a solvent from a reaction mixture known to those of skill in the art can be used, including, for example, vacuum distillation, rotary evaporation and filtration. Removing the solvent from the reaction mixture can be done at any temperature, for example at room temperature, i.e., 20° C., or at a temperature elevated from room temperature. For example, the solvent can be removed at a temperature of at or about 20° C., 30° C., 40° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C., or 90° C., but below or about below 100° C., such as below or about below 60° C. In an exemplary embodiment, the solvent can be removed from the reaction mixture by distillation, e.g., vacuum distillation, at a temperature elevated from room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., but below or about below 60° C.

Further processing of the reaction mixture of the methods can include further processing by treating the reaction mixture to remove impurities from the reaction mixture, such as by treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal. Further processing of the reaction mixture of the methods can include further processing by removing the solvent from the reaction mixture, such as by removing the solvent by vacuum distillation. The further processing can include treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal or removing the solvent from the reaction mixture or both. In an exemplary method, the further processing of the reaction mixture includes removing the impurities from the reaction mixture, e.g., treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal, and removing the solvent from the reaction mixture, e.g., removing the solvent by vacuum distillation, in order to obtain a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a crude TPGS composition, containing less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than in known TPGS compositions.

c. Purification of the Crude Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixture to Obtain a Purified High Dimer-Containing Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixture

The crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture obtained after further processing can be further purified in order to obtain a purified high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. For example, the purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, PTS, PTD and other TPGS analogs and PEG derivatives of vitamin E, mixture. The mixture contains less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12, 19, 24, 29 wt % dimer. The purification process removes impurities from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as impurities that were not removed by further processing of the reaction mixture. For example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be purified by performing one or more wash, i.e., extraction, steps. The wash can be performed using more than one solvent, such as more than one organic solvent, for example, two organic solvents that are not miscible with each other. For example, in the methods, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be dissolved in a first solvent, for example, a polar solvent, such as an alcohol, and can be washed with a second solvent, for example, a non-polar solvent, such as a hydrocarbon solvent that is not miscible with the first solvent. The purification process, e.g., the wash, can be performed one time, two times, three times, four times, or more, depending on the desired purity level of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture and the amount of impurities present. For example, the purification process, e.g., the wash, can be performed one or more times on the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., after the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is obtained after processing. In an exemplary method, the purification process can be performed three or more times on the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture after the further processing is complete.

The purification process, i.e., the wash, can be performed by dissolving the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture in a first solvent, for example, an organic solvent, such as a polar organic solvent. The polar organic solvent can be any solvent that can dissolve the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a polar protic solvent, for example, an alcohol, e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol or butanol. In the methods, the amount of first solvent, e.g., polar organic solvent, used to dissolve the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be based on the ratio of the volume of the first solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The ratio of the volume of the first solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can range from 0.1:1 to 10:1. In some embodiments, the ratio of the volume of the first solvent to the volume of the crude TPGS composition is or is about 0.1:1, 0.2:1, 0.25:1, 0.3:1, 0.4:1, 0.45:1, 0.5:1, 0.6:1, 0.7:1, 0.75:1, 0.8:1, 0.9:1, 1:1, 1.2:1, 1.25:1, 1.3:1, 1.4:1, 1.5:1, 1.6:1, 1.7:1, 1.75:1, 1.8:1, 1.9:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 3.6:1, 4:1, 4.5:1, 5:1, 5.5:1, 6:1, 6.5:1, 7:1, 7.5:1, 8:1, 8.5:1, 9:1, 9.5:1, or 10:1 or more. For example, the ratio of the volume of the first solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be 2:1.

The wash can be performed using a second solvent, for example, an organic solvent, that is not miscible with the first solvent, i.e., the solvent used to dissolve the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The second solvent can be any solvent that is not miscible with the first solvent, for example, any solvent that is not miscible with a polar protic solvent such as an alcohol. Suitable organic solvents that can be used as a second solvent include non-polar organic solvents, such as hydrocarbons, e.g., alkanes and cycloalkanes, such as hexane and cyclohexane; halogenated hydrocarbons, e.g., chloroform and dichloromethane; ethers, e.g., diethyl ether; and aromatics, e.g., benzene and toluene. In the methods, the amount of second solvent, e.g., a non-polar organic solvent immiscible with the first solvent, used to wash the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture dissolved in the first solvent can be based on the ratio of the volume of the second solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The ratio of the volume of the second solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can range from 0.1:1 to 10:1. In some embodiments, the ratio of the volume of second solvent to the volume of crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is or is about 0.1:1, 0.2:1, 0.25:1, 0.3:1, 0.4:1, 0.45:1, 0.5:1, 0.6:1, 0.7:1, 0.75:1, 0.8:1, 0.9:1, 1:1, 1.2:1, 1.25:1, 1.3:1, 1.4:1, 1.5:1, 1.6:1, 1.7:1, 1.75:1, 1.8:1, 1.9:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 3.6:1, 4:1, 4.5:1, 5:1, 5.5:1, 6:1, 6.5:1, 7:1, 7.5:1, 8:1, 8.5:1, 9:1, 9.5:1, or 10:1 or more. For example, the ratio of the volume of the second solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be 3:1.

The purification process of the methods, for example, a wash with organic solvent, can be performed one or more times on the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, two times, three times, four times, or more. The wash can be performed while stirring. In an exemplary method, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be dissolved in a first solvent, for example, a protic polar organic solvent, e.g., an alcohol, and washed three or more times with a second solvent, for example, a non-polar organic solvent not miscible in the first solvent, e.g., a hydrocarbon.

Exemplary of the methods is a method of purifying a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture by performing a purification process, such as a wash with an organic solvent, e.g., by dissolving the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture in methanol and washing with cyclohexane, and repeating the wash with the cyclohexane three or more times.

The crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be further purified in order to obtain a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a purified TPGS composition. The purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be a purified TPGS composition that contains less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than known TPGS compositions. The further purification can be performed to remove impurities from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The further purification can be performed in order to isolate the purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture from the first solvent. For example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be further purified by treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with an adsorbent, such as activated charcoal (i.e., activated carbon). Activated charcoal can be used as a decolorizer and to remove impurities by chemical adsorption. Any activated charcoal known to those of skill in the art can be used to treat the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. Such activated charcoal is available from commercial sources under such trade names as Calgon-Type CPG®, Type PCB®, Type SGL®, Type CAL®, and Type OL®.

Further purification of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with activated charcoal, can take place for a period of time of from at or about 0.5 hours to at or about 5 hours, or longer if required. The crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture to be treated can be dissolved in a solvent, for example, the first solvent used in the wash described above. Additional solvent can be added, for example, the same solvent used to dissolve the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture during the wash, e.g., a polar protic organic solvent. In the methods, the amount of additional solvent, e.g., polar protic organic solvent, added to the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be based on the ratio of the total volume of the solvent, e.g., the first solvent, such as a polar protic organic solvent, plus the additional solvent, to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. The ratio of the total volume of the first solvent plus the additional solvent to the volume of the crude TPGS composition can range from 0.1:1 to 10:1. In some embodiments, the ratio of the volume of total solvent to the volume of crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is or is about 0.1:1, 0.2:1, 0.25:1, 0.3:1, 0.4:1, 0.45:1, 0.5:1, 0.6:1, 0.7:1, 0.75:1, 0.8:1, 0.9:1, 1:1, 1.2:1, 1.25:1, 1.3:1, 1.4:1, 1.5:1, 1.6:1, 1.7:1, 1.75:1, 1.8:1, 1.9:1, 2:1, 2.5:1, 3:1, 3.5:1, 3.6:1, 4:1, 4.5:1, 5:1, 5.5:1, 6:1, 6.5:1, 7:1, 7.5:1, 8:1, 8.5:1, 9:1, 9.5:1, or 10:1 or more. For example, the ratio of the total volume of the first solvent plus additional solvent to the volume of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be 5:1.

In the methods, further purification, such as treating the reaction mixture with, for example, activated charcoal, can take place for at least or about at least 0.5 hours, 1 hour, 1.5 hours, 2 hours, 3 hours, 4 hours, 5 hours, or longer. The further purification, for example, treating the reaction mixture with activated charcoal, can be done at any temperature of from at or about room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., to a temperature elevated from room temperature. For example, the temperature of the purification process, e.g., activated charcoal treatment, can be at or about 20° C., 30° C., 40° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C., 90° C., or 100° C., or any temperature between 20° C. and 100° C., such as between or about between 55° C. and 60° C. The treatment temperatures and times can be varied depending on the nature of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, the solvent, and the impurities present in the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. In an exemplary purification process, such as an activated charcoal treatment process, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be treated, e.g., with activate charcoal, for at least or about at least 1 hour at a temperature of between or about between 55° C. and 60° C., before cooling.

In the methods, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be filtered and washed after cooling, such as cooling to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., after further purification, such as after treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with activated charcoal. The crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture dissolved in a solvent, can be filtered and washed, for example, to remove the activated charcoal from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. For example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture dissolved in a solvent, can be filtered through a filter aid, such as diatomaceous earth. Suitable filter aids for use in the methods include, for example, those sold under the trademarks Celite® and Hyflo®. After filtering through a filter aid, such as diatomaceous earth, the crude TPGS composition can be washed, for example, with the same solvent used to dissolve the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., the first solvent. In an exemplary embodiment, after further purification, e.g., treatment with activated charcoal, and cooling, e.g., to room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is filtered through diatomaceous earth, e.g., Hyflo® filter aid and washed with solvent, e.g., methanol.

In the methods, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be further purified in order to isolate the purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture from the solvent, e.g., the first solvent. For example, the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be further purified by removing the solvent from the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture dissolved in solvent, i.e., concentrating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, in order to obtain a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture. Any method of removing a solvent from a composition known to those of skill in the art can be used, including, for example, vacuum distillation, rotary evaporation and filtration. Removing the solvent from the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be done at any temperature, for example at room temperature, i.e., 20° C., or at a temperature elevated from room temperature. For example, the solvent can be removed at a temperature of at or about 20° C., 30° C., 40° C., 50° C., 55° C., 60° C., 70° C., 80° C., or 90° C., but below or about below 100° C., such as below or about below 60° C. In an exemplary embodiment, the solvent can be removed from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture by distillation, e.g., vacuum distillation, at a temperature elevated from room temperature, i.e., at or about 20° C., but below or about below 60° C. After removing the solvent, the purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be dried by any method of drying known to those of skill in the art. Suitable methods of drying include drying under an inert gas, for example, nitrogen or argon, or drying under vacuum, or any combination thereof.

In exemplary embodiments of the methods, further purification of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture produced by the methods can include further purification by treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture to remove impurities from the reaction mixture, such as by treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with activated charcoal. Further purification of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture produced by the methods can include further purification by removing the solvent from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture dissolved in a solvent, such as by removing the solvent by vacuum distillation. The further purification can include treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with activated charcoal or removing the solvent from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture or both. In an exemplary method, the further purification of the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture includes removing the impurities from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., treating the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture with activated charcoal, and removing the solvent from the crude water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., removing the solvent by vacuum distillation, in order to obtain a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, for example, a purified TPGS composition. The purified TPGS composition can contain less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than in known TPGS compositions.

The methods yield a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a purified TPGS composition, with the desired amount of dimer (greater than 12%) that can be used in any application where water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures are used, such as in food, beverage, pharmaceutical or nutraceutical products for human consumption, and particularly to prepare concentrates that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition and a non-polar ingredient(s) and other optional ingredients. For example, the methods produce a purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a purified TPGS composition, for example, a TPGS composition that contains less TPGS monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more TPGS dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than in known TPGS compositions, that can be used in products for human consumption, for example, food and beverage products, particularly aqueous food and beverage products, and any other application in which a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture can be added. Exemplary purified water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that can be prepared following the methods are those that contain less than 70 wt % monomer and more than 12 wt % dimer, such as such as compositions containing between or about between 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer and between or about between 13 wt % and 95 wt % dimer, such as compositions containing between or about between 40 wt % and 60 wt % monomer and between or about between 25 wt % to 60 wt % dimer. For example, the methods can be followed to obtain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) that contain between or about between 25 wt % and 69 wt % monomer, for example, at or about 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68 or 69 wt % monomer and between or about between 13 wt % and 95 wt % dimer, for example, at or about 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94 or 95 wt % dimer.

These methods are described with reference to TPGS and can be adapted to produce any higher dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. Other methods to produce compositions with the desired dimer or dimer and monomer concentrations can be employed, including purifying dimer from standard preparations and adding the dimer back to a standard preparation to increase its concentration. The resulting compositions are employed in the concentrates and dilution compositions described herein.

D. PRODUCTS CONTAINING HIGH DIMER-CONTAINING WATER-SOLUBLE VITAMIN E DERIVATIVE MIXTURES

Provided herein are products containing the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E mixtures. These include, for example, products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, in particular aqueous food and beverage products, and soft gel capsules containing emulsions for direct consumption, as well as methods for making the products. In particular, provided are pre-emulsion concentrates, pre-gel concentrates, liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, soft gel compositions (capsules), and liquid dilution (beverage) compositions containing the concentrates, and other beverage compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) as described herein. Also provided are compositions for direct consumption in that the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture and other ingredients are present in amounts for direct ingestion. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture is typically present in an amount of less than 10%, generally in an amount of about 1%-5%.

The compositions provided herein that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein can contain non-polar ingredients. Non-polar ingredients are poorly water-soluble (e.g., have low water solubility or are water-insoluble). Thus, it generally can be difficult to formulate non-polar ingredients into products for human consumption, particularly aqueous products, for example, food and beverage compositions. Poor water solubility of non-polar ingredients also can contribute to their poor bioavailability. Improved methods and compositions for formulating food and beverage products containing non-polar ingredients are provided herein. The products containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein can contain higher concentrations of non-polar ingredients as compared to available food and beverage products. The products containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) can solubilize higher amounts of non-polar ingredients than in products containing such water-soluble vitamin E with lower concentrations (i.e., less than 13%, 29%, 35%, 52%) of dimers. These resulting products retain desirable organoleptic properties, such as clarity (i.e., low turbidity). The products provided herein can contain high amounts of non-polar ingredient, such as non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, for example, between or between about 1 wt % and 75 wt % non-polar ingredient, such as between or between about 1% and 5%, 1% and 10%, 1% and 15%, 1% and 20%, 1% and 25%, 1% and 30%, 1% and 35%, 1% and 40%, 1% and 45%, 1% and 50%, 1% and 55%, 1% and 60%, 1% and 65%, 1% and 70%, 1% and 75%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 5% and 45%, 5% and 50%, 5% and 55%, 5% and 60%, 5% and 65%, 5% and 70%, 5% and 75%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 10% and 45%, 10% and 50%, 10% and 55%, 10% and 60%, 10% and 65%, 10% and 70%, 10% and 75%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 15% and 45%, 15% and 50%, 15% and 55%, 15% and 60%, 15% and 65%, 15% and 70%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 20% and 65%, 20% and 70%, 20% and 75%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 70%, 25% and 75%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 70%, 30% and 75%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 70%, 35% and 75%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75% and 70% and 75%, by weight, of the food or beverage product. The products that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures and high amounts of non-polar ingredient retain desirable organoleptic properties, such as remaining free from turbidity. For example, the products provided herein can contain up to twice the amount of non-polar ingredient as available products that contain known TPGS compositions and retain the same level of turbidity. Products that contain known TPGS compositions, such as products that contain TPGS compositions made up of mostly monomer (e.g., 70% or greater) and a small amount of dimer (e.g., 12% or less), and a high amount of non-polar ingredient, e.g., up to 75 wt % non-polar ingredient, exhibit higher turbidity levels, for example, a two-fold higher turbidity level, as compared to the products provided herein that contain the TPGS compositions provided herein and the same amount of non-polar ingredient, e.g., up to 75 wt % non-polar ingredient.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) provided herein can be formulated with non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds to form a pre-emulsion concentrate. The water-soluble vitamin E derivate compositions described herein can be formulated with non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and additional ingredients, such as a polar solvent, to form liquid nanoemulsion concentrates. The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and the non-polar ingredients can be diluted to form liquid dilution compositions that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds. The liquid dilution compositions that are produced are clear or remain clear.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) provided herein can be formulated with non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds or other ingredients to form a composition for direct consumption, such as a beverage composition. These compositions can be formulated in a variety of volumes and sizes, including, but not limited to, a single-serving shot and a multi-serving composition. The beverage compositions that are produced are clear and typically remain clear.

Concentrates and compositions for direct consumption that contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and a non-polar component are provided. The concentrates contain from 99% or more of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition with the remainder as a non-polar ingredient, to as little as 1%, typically 5%, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. The compositions for direct consumption contain from 50% or more of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition to as little as 0.1%, typically 1.5%, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. Further description and examples are provided below. The concentrates and compositions for direct consumption can contain additional optional ingredients, including polar solvents, such as water and/or alcohol.

Depending upon the amount of water-soluble derivative of vitamin E, the concentrates are waxy or creamy (semi-solids) or liquids, including emulsions, depending upon the particular components and amounts thereof. The concentrates are added to foods, particularly beverages, including aqueous beverages, that contain desired amounts of the non-polar ingredients, by adding an appropriate amount of an appropriate concentrate to the beverage. For example, the concentrate can be dissolved and diluted to form a liquid dilution composition. Alternatively, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) can be formulated directly into a beverage composition. For example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) can be added to the beverage composition without formulating a concentrate. The resulting food/beverage compositions retain desirable organoleptic properties, such as improved clarity (e.g., small particle size, low turbidity), stability (e.g., lack of separation), taste and smell. Food and beverage compositions that retain desirable organoleptic properties are needed. The emulsions provided herein address those needs among others.

Among the compositions for direct consumption and concentrates described herein are concentrates that are semi-solid waxes and emulsions, where the concentrates and compositions for direct consumption also contain a polar solvent, such as water or alcohol. The emulsions provided herein contain the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein.

It is shown herein that the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (high dimer-containing) described herein permit higher amounts of non-polar ingredients to be dispersed in an aqueous liquid than compositions containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures with low dimer amounts. For example, oil-in-water emulsions are provided that contain water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures and non-polar ingredients dispersed in an aqueous liquid that have desirable properties, including improved clarity, stability, smell and taste. The provided emulsions (and methods for making the emulsions) can be used to formulate any non-polar ingredient in an aqueous composition, including the non-polar ingredients (e.g., non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds) described herein and other known non-polar compounds and ingredients. Typically, the provided compositions containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives are emulsions. Typically, the provided emulsion compositions are oil-in-water nanoemulsions that contain the non-polar ingredients dispersed in aqueous liquid.

The provided emulsion compositions can be further stabilized by inclusion of one or more co-surfactants and/or emulsion stabilizers in addition to the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein. Surfactants form an interfacial film in the emulsion between the oil and water phase, providing stability. Typically, the nanoemulsions of the provided compositions contain micelles in which one or more surfactants surround the non-polar compound. The micelles are dispersed in the water phase.

The provided emulsion compositions include liquid nanoemulsion concentrates containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein and non-polar ingredients, which can be diluted to provide non-polar ingredients in aqueous compositions, such as beverage products. The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates can be diluted into a medium, for example, an aqueous medium, to form a liquid dilution composition (e.g., an aqueous liquid dilution composition) containing the non-polar ingredients. Also exemplary of the provided compositions are the liquid dilution compositions (e.g., aqueous liquid dilution compositions) made by diluting the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates in the medium, that remain clear.

The emulsion compositions and food and beverage products provided herein can contain any non-polar ingredient or compound. The non-polar ingredients typically are non-polar compounds, for example, pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals, vitamins and minerals. The non-polar ingredients include, but are not limited to, polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA)-containing compounds, such as omega-3-containing ingredients, for example, compounds containing ALA, DHA and/or EPA, e.g., oils derived from fish and microalgae, krill and/or flaxseed extract, and omega-6-containing non-polar compounds, for example, gamma-linolenic acid (GLA)-containing compounds, e.g., borage oil; saw palmetto oil-containing compounds; conjugated fatty acid containing-ingredients, for example, conjugated linoleic acid (CLA)-containing compounds; coenzyme Q-containing ingredients, for example, coenzyme Q10 (coQ10), e.g., oxidized coQ10 (ubidecarenone)-containing compounds; and compounds containing phytosterols (plant sterols). Additional exemplary non-polar ingredients and other compounds are described herein. Any non-polar compound or ingredient can be used in the provided emulsion compositions and food and beverage products provided herein.

1. Exemplary Ingredients and Exemplary Concentration Ranges

The following sections describe ingredients used in the provided pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates or other forms of concentrates and beverage compositions. As noted, the form of the resulting composition containing the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture depends upon the concentration ranges and types of ingredients. Concentrates typically are intended for dilution prior to consumption, and, thus, contain non-polar ingredients in higher than single dosage concentrations. Where high concentration of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures are employed (typically greater than 25% or about 25%), particularly without any liquid components, the compositions are waxy. Where lower concentrations are used, the compositions can be more liquid; where polar solvents and or other polar ingredients are included, the concentrates are emulsions. All can be used as vehicles for solubilizing desired non-polar ingredients in food and beverages.

Each of the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, and semi-solids, and beverage compositions, e.g., liquid dilution compositions and single-serving shots, contain at least one surfactant that is a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture described herein, for example, the TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivative mixtures described herein. The surfactant typically has an HLB value of between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20, or about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19, or about 20, typically between at or about 12 and at or about 14. For example, TPGS, such as the TPGS described herein, has an HLB value of about 12 to 14, generally about 13.

For compositions that are to be diluted, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., TPGS, is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%), by weight, of the concentrate (wt %), e.g., from at or about 20% to at or about 90%, such as 20% to 25%, 20% to 30%, 20% to 35%, 20% to 40%, 20% to 45%, 20% to 50%, 20% to 55%, 20% to 60%, 20% to 65%, 20% to 70%, 20% to 75%, 20% to 80%, 20% to 85%, 20% to 90%, 25% to 30%, 25% to 35%, 25% to 40%, 25% to 45%, 25% to 50%, 25% to 55%, 25% to 60%, 25% to 65%, 25% to 70%, 25% to 75%, 25% to 80%, 25% to 85%, 25% to 90%, 30% to 35%, 30% to 40%, 30% to 45%, 30% to 50%, 30% to 55%, 30% to 60%, 30% to 65%, 30% to 70%, 30% to 75%, 30% to 80%, 30% to 85%, 30% to 90%, 35% to 40%, 35% to 45%, 35% to 50%, 35% to 55%, 35% to 60%, 35% to 65%, 35% to 70%, 35% to 75%, 35% to 80%, 35% to 85%, 35% to 90%, 40% to 45%, 40% to 50%, 40% to 55%, 40% to 60%, 40% to 65%, 40% to 70%, 40% to 75%, 40% to 80%, 40% to 85%, 40% to 90%, 45% to 50%, 45% to 55%, 45% to 60%, 45% to 65%, 45% to 70%, 45% to 75%, 45% to 80%, 45% to 85%, 45% to 90%, 50% to 55%, 50% to 60%, 50% to 65%, 50% to 70%, 50% to 75%, 50% to 80%, 50% to 85%, 50% to 90%, 55% to 60%, 55% to 65%, 55% to 70%, 55% to 75%, 55% to 80%, 55% to 85%, 55% to 90%, 60% to 65%, 60% to 70%, 60% to 75%, 60% to 80%, 60% to 85%, 60% to 90%, 65% to 70%, 65% to 75%, 65% to 80%, 65% to 85%, 65% to 90%, 70% to 75%, 70% to 80%, 75% to 85%, 75% to 90%, 80% to 85%, 80% to 90%, or 85% to 90%, by weight, of the concentrate. Exemplary concentrations of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, e.g., TPGS, in the pre-emulsion concentrate are at or about 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 49.5%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 68%, 69.5%, 70%, 75%, 79.5%, 80%, 85%, 89.5% and 90% (wt %) of the concentrate. The concentrates can contain lower amounts of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, and the compositions for direct consumption contain lower amounts, such as 1%-15%, generally 1%-5%.

Each of the provided compositions, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, further contains a non-polar ingredient including, but not limited to, the exemplary non-polar ingredients described herein below. Typically, the non-polar ingredient is or contains one or more non-polar compounds, for example, an oil-based non-polar ingredient, such as a polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA), a coenzyme Q or a phytochemical. The concentrates provided herein can contain one non-polar ingredient or more than one non-polar ingredient, such as two, three, four, five or more non-polar ingredients. The concentrates provided herein can contain higher amounts (i.e., concentrations) of non-polar ingredients than can available concentrates, such as up to at or about 75 wt % non-polar ingredients.

For formulating the concentrates, the total amount of non-polar ingredient(s) that is or contains one or more non-polar compounds is typically present in a total amount as a percentage (%), by weight, of the concentrate (wt %), e.g., from at or about 1% to at or about 75 wt %, such as between or between about 1% and 5%, 1% and 10%, 1% and 15%, 1% and 20%, 1% and 25%, 1% and 30%, 1% and 35%, 1% and 40%, 1% and 45%, 1% and 50%, 1% and 55%, 1% and 60%, 1% and 65%, 1% and 70%, 1% and 75%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 5% and 45%, 5% and 50%, 5% and 55%, 5% and 60%, 5% and 65%, 5% and 70%, 5% and 75%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 10% and 45%, 10% and 50%, 10% and 55%, 10% and 60%, 10% and 65%, 10% and 70%, 10% and 75%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 15% and 45%, 15% and 50%, 15% and 55%, 15% and 60%, 15% and 65%, 15% and 70%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 20% and 65%, 20% and 70%, 20% and 75%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 25% and 65%, 25% and 70%, 25% and 75%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 30% and 65%, 30% and 70%, 30% and 75%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 35% and 65%, 35% and 70%, 35% and 75%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 69%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75%, or 70% to 75% non-polar ingredient, by weight, of the concentrate. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of non-polar ingredient(s) in the concentrate is at or about 5%, 10%, 12.5%, 15%, 15.5%, 16.7%, 20%, 22%, 25%, 30%, 31.5%, 35%, 40%, 45.5% and 50% (wt %) of the concentrate.

The concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can further contain additional ingredients, for example, preservatives and/or non-polar solvents. In some examples, the preservative is a natural preservative, such as benzyl alcohol. In some examples, the non-polar solvent is an oil, other than the non-polar ingredient, for example, vitamin E oil, flaxseed oil or rice bran oil.

The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates additionally contain at least one polar solvent. Exemplary polar solvents include water, propylene glycol and glycerin (glycerol). One or more, typically more than one, additional ingredients can be added to the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate. Exemplary of other additional ingredients that can be added to the liquid concentrates include emulsion stabilizers, for example, a blend of gums; a pH adjuster, for example, citric acid or phosphoric acid; one or more flavoring agents, for example, D-limonene or lemon oil; a co-surfactant, for example, a phospholipid, e.g., phosphatidylcholine, or a sucrose fatty acid ester surfactant.

The appropriate concentration ranges for the additional ingredients are described in individual sections below. Typically, the concentration of the additional ingredients depends, in part, on the concentrations of the non-polar ingredient and the water-soluble vitamin E derivative surfactant. Typically, the concentrations of these ingredients (surfactant and non-polar ingredient) are the focus of the formulating methods. For example, when it is determined that modifications to ingredient concentrations in the initial concentrate should be made, it typically is the concentrations of one or more of these ingredients that are adjusted.

In one example, it can be desirable to add one or more of the additional ingredients after evaluation of the initial concentrate, for example, in order to improve the concentrate with respect to one or more desired properties.

a. Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivatives

The compositions for direct consumption, the pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein, contain the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein, for example, the TPGS compounds noted above, including TPGS, TPGS homologs, TPGS analogs and TPGS derivatives and other vitamin E derivatives. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures can act as surfactants. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures can be any of the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein, for example, tocopherol-derived compositions and tocotrienol-derived compositions, including, but not limited to, polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocopherol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocopherol, such as vitamin E TPGS (D-α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate), and polyalkylene glycol derivatives of tocotrienol, e.g., polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivatives of tocotrienol. The high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), e.g., compositions of TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs or TPGS derivatives, contain less water-soluble vitamin E derivative monomer, i.e., less than 70 wt %, and more water-soluble vitamin E derivative dimer, i.e., more than 12 wt %, than in known water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions).

In the concentrates provided herein, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates, pre-gel concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives can act as surfactants by aggregating in aqueous liquids, such as water, to form micelles, which contain the non-polar ingredient(s). The hydrophilic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the outside of the micelle, in contact with the aqueous medium, while the hydrophobic portion(s) of the surfactant molecules are oriented toward the center of the micelle, in contact with the non-polar ingredient(s), which is contained in the center of the micelle. Properties of the provided food and beverage products, for example, the particle size of the concentrates and desirable properties related to the particle size, are influenced by the choice of surfactant(s) and the relative amount (concentration) of surfactant. For example, the HLB of the surfactant(s) can affect particle size, clarity, taste, smell, crystal formation and other properties of the provided food and beverage products. Similarly, the concentration of the surfactant compared with the concentration(s) of other ingredients, particularly compared with the concentration of the polar solvent(s) and the concentration of the non-polar ingredient(s), can affect various desirable properties, for example, the ability to disperse or dissolve in aqueous media, e.g., to form a clear aqueous liquid dilution composition or pleasant taste and/or smell. The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein can be used to increase the amount of non-polar ingredient that can be added to a concentrate, such as the concentrates provided herein, without sacrificing the various desirable properties of the food and beverage products containing the concentrate, such as particle size, clarity, taste, smell, crystal formation and other desirable properties of food and beverage products.

The water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein and others known to those of skill in the art and used in the concentrates provided herein, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, typically have an HLB value between or about between 12 and 20, for example, at least 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, up to 20, about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20. Typically, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative is a natural surfactant, for example, a surfactant that is GRAS (generally recognized as safe) certified by the FDA and/or Kosher certified, for example, TPGS, such as the TPGS derivative mixtures described herein. In one example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture used in the provided concentrates is a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, for example, a polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS. TPGS has an HLB value of or about 13.

At room temperature, TPGS typically is a waxy low-melting solid. TPGS can be heated prior to use, for example, to at least the melting temperature, such as between or about between 37° C. and 41° C. or about 41° C. and the desired amount is poured out. Alternatively, TPGS can be added as a waxy solid to a vessel and heated with the heating apparatus.

b. Non-Polar Ingredients

All of the compositions described and provided herein include a water-soluble vitamin E derivative, such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as a TPGS, that is a high dimer-containing mixture (as described herein) of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative. The compositions all include a non-polar ingredient or mixture thereof. The non-polar ingredient is or contains a non-polar compound, such as a non-polar bioactive compound, for example, a nutritional supplement or a drug. The non-polar ingredients include, but are not limited to, drugs, hormones, vitamins, nutrients and other lipophilic compounds. Exemplary non-polar ingredients are listed herein below. The provided methods and compositions can be used to dilute (e.g., dissolve/disperse) any non-polar ingredient in aqueous medium, such as water.

The non-polar ingredient is not a water-soluble vitamin E derivative. Exemplary of non-polar ingredients that can be used in the provided pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates are:

non-polar ingredients containing essential fatty acids, such as polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs), for example, gamma-linolenic acid (GLA), e.g., borage oil and evening primrose (Oenothera biennis) oil, blackcurrant seed oil, hemp seed oil and spirulina extract; compounds containing omega-3 fatty acids, such as natural and synthetic omega-3 fatty acids, for example, compounds containing omega-3 polyunsaturated long-chain fatty acids, including eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA) (20:5ω3); docosahexaenoic acid (DHA) (22:6ω3); eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4 ω3); docosapentaenoic acid (DPA, clupanodonic acid) (22:5ω3); 16:3 ω3; 24:5 ω3 and/or nisinic acid (24:6ω3), e.g., fish oil, algae oil, krill oil, canola oil, flaxseed oil, soybean oil and walnut oil; compounds containing short-chain omega-3 fatty acids, for example, alpha-linolenic acid (α-linolenic acid; ALA; 18:3ω3) and stearidonic acid (18:4ω3), esters of an omega-3 fatty acid and glycerol, for example, monoglycerides, diglycerides and triglycerides, esters of omega-3 fatty acid and a primary alcohol, for example, fatty acid methyl esters and fatty acid esters, precursors of omega-3 fatty acid oils, for example, EPA precursor, DHA precursor, derivatives such as polyglycolized derivatives or polyoxyethylene derivatives, oils containing the omega-3 fatty acids, for example, fish oil (marine oil), e.g., highly purified fish oil concentrates, perilla oil, krill oil, and algae oil, e.g., microalgae oil; compounds containing omega-6 fatty acids, such as compounds containing linoleic acid (18:2ω6) (a short-chain fatty acid); gamma-linolenic acid (GLA; 18:3ω6); dihomo gamma linolenic acid (DGLA; 20:3ω6); eicosadienoic acid (20:2ω6); arachidonic acid (AA; 20:4ω6); docosadienoic acid (22:2ω6); adrenic acid (22:4ω6); and/or docosapentaenoic acid (22:5ω6), for example, borage oil, corn oil, cottonseed oil, grapeseed oil, peanut oil, primrose oil, e.g., evening primrose (Oenothera biennis) oil, blackcurrant seed oil, hemp seed oil, spirulina extract, safflower oil, sesame oil, coconut oil and soybean oil;

other fatty acids, such as triglycerides, including medium chain triglycerides, polar lipids, for example, ether lipids, phosphoric acid, choline, fatty acids, glycerol, glycolipids, triglycerides, and phospholipids (e.g., phosphatidylcholine (lecithin), phosphatidylethanolamine, and phosphatidylinositol); saw palmetto extract; ethyl linoleate; herb oils, for example, garlic oils and scordinin; short-chain saturated fatty acids (4:0-10:0), lauric acid (12:0), myristic acid (14:0), pentadecanoic acid (15:0), palmitic acid (16:0), palmitoleic acid (16:1 ω7), heptadecanoic acid (17:0), stearic acid (18:0), oleic acid (18:1 ω9), and arachidic acid (20:0);

micronutrients, such as vitamins, minerals, co-factors, for example, coenzyme Q10 (coQ10, also called ubiquinone), ubiquinol, turmeric extract (curcuminoids), saw palmetto lipid extract (saw palmetto oil), echinacea extract, hawthorn berry extract, ginseng extract, lipoic acid (thioctic acid), ascorbyl palmitate, kava extract, St. John's Wort (hypericum, Klamath weed, goat weed), extract of quercitin, dihydroepiandrosterone, and indol-3-carbinol;

carotenoids, including hydrocarbons and oxygenated, alcoholic derivatives of hydrocarbons, for example, beta carotene, mixed carotenoid complex, lutein, lycopene, zeaxanthin, cryptoxanthin, for example, beta-cryptoxanthin, beta carotene, astaxanthin, bixin, canthaxanthin, capsanthin, capsorubin, apo-carotenal, beta-12′-apo-carotenal, “Carotene” (mixture of alpha- and beta-carotene), gamma carotene, ciolerythrin, and esters of hydroxyl- or carboxyl-containing members thereof;

fat-soluble vitamins, for example, vitamins A, D, E and K, and corresponding pro-vitamins and vitamin derivatives, such as esters, with an action resembling that of vitamin A, D, E or K, for example; retinol (vitamin A) and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, such as palmitate ester of retinol and other esters of retinol, calciferol (vitamin D) and its pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof and precursors of vitamin D, d-alpha tocopherol (vitamin E) and derivatives thereof, including pharmaceutical derivatives thereof, for example, tocotrienols, d-alpha tocopherol acetate and other esters of d-alpha tocopherol, and ascorbyl palmitate, a fat-soluble version of vitamin C;

phytochemicals, including phytoestrogens, for example, genistein and daidzein, such as isoflavones, e.g., soy isoflavones, flavonoids, phytoalexins, for example, resveratrol (3,5,4′-trihydroxystilbene), red clover extract, and phytosterols;

lipid-soluble drugs, including natural and synthetic forms of immunosuppressive drugs, such as cyclosporin, protease inhibitors such as ritonavir, macrolide antibiotics and oil soluble anesthetics such as propofol, natural and synthetic forms of steroidal hormones, for example, estrogens, estradiols, progesterone, testosterone, cortisone, phytoestrogens, dehydroepiandrosterone (DHEA), growth hormones and other hormones; and oil-soluble acids and alcohols, for example, tartaric acid, lactylic acid, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, lignin, sterols, polyphenolic compounds, oryzanol, cholesterol, phytosterols, flavonoids, such as quercetin and resveratrol, and diallyl disulfides.

i. Polyunsaturated Fatty Acid (PUFA)-Containing Ingredients

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients contained in the concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are ingredients containing fatty acids, for example, non-polar ingredients containing the non-polar compounds polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs). Fatty acids are straight-chain hydrocarbon molecules with a carboxyl (COOH) group at one end of the chain. PUFAs are fatty acids that contain more than one carbon-carbon double bonds in the carbon chain of the fatty acid. PUFAs, particularly essential fatty acids, are useful as dietary supplements.

Different nomenclature is used to describe fatty acid molecules. Lipid nomenclature, for example, 18:3 ω-3, indicates the carbon chain length, number of double bonds and the position along the carbon chain of the first carbon-carbon double bond in a fatty acid. Using this nomenclature, each carbon along the chain is labeled according to its position relative to one end of the chain. For example, the first carbon away from the carboxylate end is named α, the second is named β, and so forth. The last carbon in the molecule (furthest from the carboxy group) always is labeled ω (or omega, or n). The number of carbons and the number of double bonds are listed first in the lipid name of a fatty acid, separated by a colon. For example, the name “18:3” indicates that the molecule has eighteen (18) carbons and three (3) double bonds. Following these numbers, the position at which the first double bond appears, relative to the last (ω) carbon, is listed. For example, the nomenclature, 18:3 ω-3 (or 18:3 omega-3; or 18:3 n-3), describes a fatty acid with eighteen (18) carbons and three (3) double bonds, the first of which occurs at the third carbon away from the omega carbon.

Alternatively, chemical nomenclature can be used. The chemical name of a fatty acid describes the position of each double bond. In the chemical naming, the carbons are numbered, beginning with 1, starting with the carbon that is part of the carboxy (COOH) group. Thus, with this numbering system, the α carbon is labeled “2.” The chemical name of the fatty acid lists the first carbon (from the COOH end) to participate in each double bond.

Certain PUFAs are called essential fatty acids because they are required for biological processes and mammals, including humans, cannot synthesize them using any known chemical pathway, and therefore must obtain them from diet or by supplementation (U.S. Pat. No. 6,870,077; Covington (2004) American Family Physician 70(1):133-140). The essential PUFAs are the omega-3 (ω3; n-3) fatty acids and the omega-6 (ω-6; n-6) fatty acids. Omega-3 and omega-6 fatty acids are methylene interrupted polyenes which have two or more cis double bonds separated by a single methylene group. Exemplary of omega-3 fatty acids are alpha-linolenic acid (α-linolenic acid; ALA; 18:3ω3) (a short-chain fatty acid); stearidonic acid (18:4ω3) (a short-chain fatty acid); eicosapentaenoic acid (EPA; 20:5ω3); docosahexaenoic acid (DHA; 22:6ω3); eicosatetraenoic acid (20:4 ω3); docosapentaenoic acid (DPA; clupanodonic acid; 22:5ω3); 16:3 ω3; 24:5 ω3 and nisinic acid (24:6ω3). Longer chain omega-3 fatty acids can be synthesized from ALA (the short-chain omega-3 fatty acid). Exemplary of omega-6 fatty acids are linoleic acid (18:2ω6) (a short-chain fatty acid); gamma-linolenic acid (GLA; 18:3ω6); dihomo gamma linolenic acid (DGLA; 20:3ω6); eicosadienoic acid (20:2ω6); arachidonic acid (AA; 20:4ω6); docosadienoic acid (22:2ω6); adrenic acid (22:4ω6); and docosapentaenoic acid (22:5ω6).

While the longer chain omega-3 and omega-6 essential fatty acids can be synthesized from ALA (the short-chain omega-3 fatty acid) and linolenic acid (LA), respectively, evidence suggests that conversion of these short chain fatty acids in humans is slow. Thus, a major source of long chain essential PUFAs is dietary (see, e.g., Ross et al. (2007) Lipids in Health and Disease 6:21 and Lands (1992) FASEB J. 6(8):2530). Dietary supplements containing PUFAs, particularly essential PUFAs, are desirable for protection against cardiovascular disease, inflammation and mental illnesses (see, e.g., Ross et al. (2007) Lipids in Health and Disease 6:21; Lands (1992) FASEB J. 6(8):2530; and U.S. Pat. No. 6,870,077). Evidence suggests that essential fatty acids, particularly EPA and DHA, in the form of food and nutritional supplements, play a role in preventing a number of disease states, including cardiovascular diseases, inflammation, mental health and behavioral diseases and disorders (see, e.g., Ross et al. (2007) Lipids in Health and Disease 6:21; Lands (1992) FASEB J. 6(8):2530; U.S. Pat. No. 6,870,077; and Covington (2004) American Family Physician 70(1):133-140).

Omega-9 fatty acids are non-essential PUFAs. Exemplary of omega-9 fatty acids are oleic acid (which is monounsaturated) (18:1 ω9); eicosenoic acid (20:1 ω9); mead acid (20:3 ω9); erucic acid (22:1 ω9); and nervonic acid (24:1 ω9).

Conjugated fatty acids are PUFAs with two or more conjugated double bonds. Conjugated fatty acids can be used as nutritional supplements. Exemplary of conjugated fatty acids are conjugated linoleic acid (CLA), for example, 18:2 ω7, 18:2 ω6; conjugated linolenic acid, for example, 18:3ω6, 18:3ω5; and other conjugated fatty acids, for example, 18:3 ω3, 18:4 ω3, and 20:5 ω6.

(a) Omega-3 Fatty Acid Compounds

Exemplary of the PUFA-containing non-polar ingredients that can be used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are non-polar ingredients that contain one or more of the non-polar compound omega-3 (ω3; n-3) fatty acids, for example, ingredients containing DHA and/or EPA fatty acids, for example, marine oils, e.g., fish oil, krill oil and algae oil; and compounds containing ALA fatty acids, for example, flax seed oil.

Typically, oils and aqueous compositions containing long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA) are susceptible to oxidation, making them unstable and giving them an unpleasant taste. The ingredients and relative concentrations thereof, as well as the methods for making the concentrates, contribute to desirable properties of DHA/EPA-containing concentrates. For example, the ingredients and methods used to make the concentrates provided herein minimize the “fishy” odor and/or taste of DHA/EPA compositions and increase their stability over time. For example, the compounds in the concentrates can have low oxidation, contributing to these desirable properties.

(1) DHA/EPA

Exemplary of non-polar ingredients that contain one or more omega-3 fatty acids, which can be used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are ingredients containing DHA and/or EPA, for example, marine oil, e.g., fish oil, krill oil and algae oil. Any oil containing DHA and/or EPA can be used. In one example, the non-polar ingredient contains between 10% or about 10% and 40% or about 40% DHA. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains between 25% or about 25% and 45% or about 45% DHA. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains at least 60% or about 60%, by weight (w/w), DHA, for example, at least 65% or about 65%, at least 70% or about 70%, at least 75% or about 75%, at least 80% or about 80%, at least 85% or about 85%, or at least 90% or about 90%, by weight (w/w), DHA. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains between 5% or about 5% and 15% or about 15% EPA, for example, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14 or 15%, by weight (w/w), EPA. In another example, the non-polar ingredient comprises not more than 10% or about 10% EPA or less than 10% or about 10%, EPA. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains DHA and EPA, for example, DHA representing at least 20% or about 20%, by weight, of the non-polar ingredient and EPA representing not more than 13% or about 13% of the non-polar ingredient, for example, not more than 10% or about 10%, by weight, of the non-polar ingredient. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains DHA, representing at least 35% or about 35% of the non-polar ingredient and EPA representing not more than 13% or about 13% of the non-polar ingredient, for example, not more than 10% or about 10% of the non-polar ingredient. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains DHA and EPA, for example, DHA representing at least 70% or about 70% of the non-polar ingredient and EPA representing not more than 13% or about 13% of the non-polar ingredient, for example, not more than 10% or about 10% of the non-polar ingredient. In one example, the non-polar ingredient contains DHA and EPA, for example, the total of DHA and EPA represents at least 30% or about 30% of the non-polar ingredient. In another example, the non-polar ingredient contains DHA and EPA, for example, the total of DHA and EPA represents at least 61% or about 61% of the non-polar ingredient.

(i) Fish Oils

Exemplary of the PUFA-containing non-polar ingredients that can be used in the provided concentrates, e.g. pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are oils derived from fish which contain DHA, EPA or both DHA and EPA. Particularly, cold water marine fish are a known source of omega-3 fatty acids (U.S. Pat. No. 4,670,285). Suitable fish oils containing DHA, EPA or both DHA and EPA can be obtained from any of a number of commercial sources, for example, fish oils available from Jedwards International, Inc., any of which can be used with the provided compositions.

Fish oils typically are extracted from fish tissue, for example, frozen fish tissue. For example, the fish oil can be a tasteless fish oil, for example, a cod liver oil, which has been isolated from fish, for example, from cod liver, and then refined and deodorized, or in some other way treated so its taste becomes neutral, such as described in International Publication Nos. WO 00/23545 and WO 2004/098311. In one example, these fish oils are isolated from frozen fish tissue by a process that minimizes oxidation. Exemplary of such a tasteless fish oil is a fish oil sold under the trademark Denomega™ 100 (Borregaard Ingredients, Sarpsborg, Norway; distributed by Denomega Nutritional Oils AS, Boulder, Colo.). Typically, the tasteless fish oil, for example, cod liver oil, contains between or about between 25% and 35% omega-3 fatty acids, for example, 34% omega-3 fatty acids. In one example, the fish oil, for example, the Denomega™ 100 oil, contains 13% or about 13% DHA and 13% or about 13% EPA.

Also exemplary of the fish oils that can be included in the provided concentrates are fish oils containing high amounts of omega-3 fatty acids, for example, high amounts of DHA. One example of such a fish oil contains at least or about at least 85% DHA, typically greater than 85% DHA, and at least or about at least 90% omega-3 fatty acids, typically greater than 90% omega-3 fatty acids. In another example, the fish oil can contain 98% PUFA, 89% omega-3 fatty acids, about 70% DHA, about 10% EPA, 8.9% omega-6 fatty acids and 0.7% omega-9 fatty acids.

Exemplary of a fish oil containing high amounts of omega-3 fatty acids that can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided concentrates is an omega-3 fish oil EE (O3C Nutraceuticals; supplied by Jedwards International Inc., Quincy, Mass.), which contains 89% omega-3 fatty acids, 8.9% omega-6 fatty acids, 0.7% omega-9 fatty acids, 0.1% saturated fatty acids, 1.0% monounsaturated fatty acids, 74.5% docosahexanoic (DHA) fatty acids, 9.3% eicosapentaenoic (EPA) fatty acids and 98% polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFA). This fish oil also contains 0.1% (16:0) palmitic acid, 0.1% (16:1 ω7) palmitoleic acid, 0.1% (18:0) stearic acid, 0.6% (18:1 ω9) oleic acid, 0.1% (18:1 ω 7) oleic acid, 0.3% (18:2 ω6) linoleic acid, 0.2% (18:3 ω3) linolenic acid, 0.2% (18:4 ω 3) octadecatetraenoic acid, 0.1% (20:1 ω 9) eicosanoic acid, 0.1% (20:2 ω6) eicosadienoic acid, 0.2% (20:3 ω6) eicosatrienoic acid, 2.4% (20:4 ω6) arachidonic acid, 0.6% (20:4 ω3) arachidonic acid, 0.1% (22:1 ω11) erucic acid, 0.6% (21:5 ω3) uncosapentaenoic acid, 0.5% (22:4 ω6) docosatetraenoic acid, 5.4% (22:5 ω6) docosapentaenoic acid, 3.6% (22:5 ω3) docosapentaenoic acid and 0.9% other fatty acids.

Also exemplary of a fish oil containing high amounts of omega-3 fatty acids that can be used in the provided concentrates is Omega Concentrate 85 DHA TG Ultra (O3C Nutraceuticals AS, Oslo, Norway), which contains greater than 85% DHA (C22:6n-3) and greater than 90% total omega-3 fatty acids and is isolated from fatty fish species in the Eugraulidae, Clupeidae and Scombridae families. This fish oil is produced by purifying and concentrating the oils from these fish with gentle technologies to increase the concentration of omega-3 fatty acid DHA. Any fish oil containing DHA and/or EPA can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Also exemplary of the fish oils are other fish oils made by O3C Nutraceuticals, AS and other fish oils supplied by Jedwards International, Inc.

Any fish oil containing DHA and/or EPA can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided concentrates. Exemplary of the fish oils that can be included in the provided compositions is Eterna™ Omegasource™ Oil (supplied by Hormel Foods Specialty Products Division, Austin, Minn.), which contains at least 30% omega-3 fatty acids (DHA, EPA and ALA), is odorless, virtually free of cholesterol and bland in flavor. This fish oil contains about 28% DHA and EPA, typically 17% EPA and 11% DHA, and additionally contains 4.5% omega-6 fatty acids. Also exemplary of the fish oils that can be included in the provided compositions are Omega 30 TG Food Grade (Non-GMO) MEG-3™ Fish Oil (supplied by Ocean Nutrition Canada, Dartmouth, Nova Scotia, Canada), a kosher fish oil which contains about 30% DHA/EPA and Marinol C-38 (supplied by Lipid Nutrition B.V., Channahon, Ill.), which contains about 52% omega-3 fatty acids, including at least 38% DHA/EPA, more specifically includes about 22% EPA and 14% DHA. Also exemplary of fish oils are Marinol D-40 (supplied by Lipid Nutrition B.V., Channahon, Ill.), which contains about 40% DHA and 7% EPA; omega-3 fish oil 70TG that is 61% by weight DHA/EPA; fish oils sold by GC Rieber Oils (Kristiansund, Norway) that contain 30% or 65% DHA; ONC TG fish oil sold by Ocean Nutrition Canada (Dartmouth, Nova Scotia); Omevital™ 30% MP Gold, a fish oil that contains 30% DHA/EPA (Cognis, Monheim am Rhein, North Rhine-Westphalia, Germany); and a fish oil containing 60% DHA (sold by FINA LLC, Cincinnati, Ohio). Also exemplary of the fish oils are krill oils, such as those made according to International Publication No. WO 2007/080515.

(ii) Algae Oil

Also exemplary of non-polar ingredients containing omega-3 PUFAs, particularly DHA (and optionally EPA), that can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are oils derived from microorganisms, for example, oils derived from marine dinoflagellates, such as microalgae, e.g., Crypthecodinium sp, particularly Crypthecodinium cohnii. Microalgae oils, like fish oils, are an excellent source of omega-3 fatty acids, particularly DHA (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,397,591; 5,407,957; 5,492,938; and 5,711,983). Exemplary of oils derived from microalgae are the oils disclosed in (and oils made according to the methods described in) U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,397,591; 5,407,957; 5,492,938; and 5,711,983 and U.S. Publication No. 2007/0166411, including DHASCO® and DHASCO-S® (Martek Biosciences Corporation).

For example, U.S. Pat. No. 5,397,591 describes, inter alia, single-cell edible oils (algae oils) (and methods for making the oils), which contain at least 70% triglycerides, which contain about 20-35% DHA and lack EPA, isolated from Crypthecodinium cohnii, preferably containing more than 70% triglycerides, having 15-20% myristic acid; 20-2 5% palmitic acid; 10-15% oleic acid; 30-40% DHA; and 0-10% other triglycerides. U.S. Pat. No. 5,407,957 describes, inter alia, algae oils (and methods for making the oils) derived from Crypthecodinium cohnii, preferably containing greater than about 90% triglycerides, at least 35% DHA, by weight (w/w), in one example, having 15-20% myristic acid; 20-25% palmitic acid; 10-15% oleic acid; 40-45% DHA; and 0-5% other oils. U.S. Pat. No. 5,492,938 describes, inter alia, single cell edible oils (and methods for making the oils) containing at least 70% triglycerides, which contain about 20-35% DHA and lack EPA, isolated from Crypthecodinium cohnii, in one example containing more than 70% triglycerides, having 15-20% myristic acid; 20-25% palmitic acid; 10-15% oleic acid; 30-40% DHA; and 0-10% other triglycerides. U.S. Pat. No. 5,711,983 describes, inter alia, single cell edible oils (and methods for making the oils) containing at least 70% triglycerides, which contain about 20-35% DHA and lack EPA, isolated from Crypthecodinium cohnii, in one example, containing more than 70% triglycerides, having 15-20% myristic acid; 20-25% palmitic acid; 10-15% oleic acid; 30-40% DHA; and 0-10% other triglycerides.

Also exemplary of suitable microalgae oils are those disclosed, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,977,166 and U.S. Publication No. US 2004/0072330. Any oil derived from dinoflagellate, for example, microalgae, which contains DHA, and optionally EPA, is suitable as an algae oil for use with the provided compositions, for example, V-Pure algae oil (Water4Life, Switzerland), which contains EPA and DHA, and Martek DHA™-S (supplied by Martek Biosciences Corporation, Columbia, Md.), derived from the marine alga Schizochytrium sp., containing not less than 35% DHA and 16.1% (22:5 ω6) docosapentaenoic acid, 1.3% (20:5 ω3) eicosapentaenoic acid, 0.6% (20:4 ω6) arachidonic acid, 1.6% (18:2 ω6) linoleic acid, 16.9% (18:1 ω9) oleic acid and 19.8% other fatty acids.

(2) Flax Seed Oil—Omega 3 (ALA)

Also exemplary of the omega-3 containing non-polar ingredients used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, is flaxseed oil (linseed oil). Flaxseed oils, which are good sources of omega-3 fatty acids, particularly alpha-linolenic acid, have been used as nutritional supplements. Flaxseed oils are produced by pressing the flax seed and refining the oil from the flax seeds. Exemplary of flaxseed oil that can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions is flaxseed oil derived from Linum usitatissimum L. Exemplary of flaxseed oils suitable for use in the concentrates provided herein include flaxseed oil supplied by Sanmark LLC (Greensboro, N.C.; Sanmark Limited, Dalian, Liaoning Province, China), which contains not less than (NLT) 50% C18:3 alpha-linolenic acid, and further contains other fatty acids, for example, 3-8% C16:0 palmitic acid, 2-8% C18:0 stearic acid, 11-24% C18:1 oleic acid, 11-24% C18:2 linoleic acid and 0-3% other fatty acids. Also exemplary of suitable flaxseed oil is a flaxseed oil containing 6% palmitic acid, 2.5% stearic acid, 0.5% arachidic acid, 19% oleic acid, 24.1% linoleic acid, 47.4% linolenic acid, and 0.5% other fatty acids. The fatty acid composition of flaxseed oil can vary. Any flaxseed oil can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. For example, the flaxseed oil can contain at least or about at least 50%, at least or about at least 65%, or at least or about at least 70% alpha-linolenic acid. Exemplary of a flaxseed containing greater than 65% linolenic acid content (of total fatty acid content), for example, 70-80% or 70-75%, is the flaxseed described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,870,077.

(b) Omega-6 Compounds

Also exemplary of the non-polar ingredients used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are ingredients containing omega-6 PUFAs, for example, gamma-linolenic acid (GLA), for example, borage oil and evening primrose (Oenothera biennis) oil, blackcurrant seed oil, hemp seed oil, fungal oil and spirulina extract. Any oil containing omega-6 fatty acids can be used in the provided compositions.

Exemplary of the omega-6 containing non-polar ingredients are ingredients containing GLA, for example, borage oil. GLA is an omega-6 PUFA, which primarily is derived from vegetable oils, for example, evening primrose (Oenothera biennis) oil, blackcurrant seed oil, hemp seed oil, and spirulina extract. GLA has been used as a nutritional supplement. It has been proposed that GLA has a role in treating various chronic diseases and in particular that it has anti-inflammatory effects (Fan and Chapkin (1998) J. Nutr. 128(9):1411-1414). In one example, the non-polar ingredient contains at least or about at least 22 wt % of GLA, for example, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 50, 60 wt % or more, by weight, of GLA.

Borage (Borago officinalis), also known as “starflower,” is an herb with seeds containing high amounts of GLA. Exemplary of borage oils that can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions are borage oils supplied by Sanmark LLC (Greensboro, N.C.; Sanmark Limited, Dalian, Liaoning Province, China), derived by pressing and isolating oil from the seeds of Borago officinalis L. This oil contains not less than (NLT) 22% C18:3 gamma-linolenic acid (GLA), between 9 and 12% C16:0 palmitic acid, between 3% and 5% C18:0 stearic acid, between 15% and 20% C18:1 oleic acid, between 35% and 42% C18:2 linoleic acid, between 3% and 5% C20:1 ocosenoic acid, between 1% and 4% C22:1 docosenoic acid and between 0% and 4% other fatty acids. Other borage oils can be used. Other GLA-containing oils also can be used as the non-polar ingredient.

(c) Saw Palmetto Extract

Also exemplary of the non-polar ingredients used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, is saw palmetto extract, a lipophilic extract of the ripe berries of the American dwarf palm (also called Serenoa repens or Sabal serrulata), which has been used to treat genitourinary and other diseases and to enhance sperm production, breast size and libido, as a mild diuretic, a nerve sedative, an expectorant and a digestive tract tonic, and particularly to treat benign prostate hyperplasia (BHP) (Ernst (2002) Acad. Clin. 136:42-53; and Gordon and Shaughnessy (2003) Comp. Alt. Med. 76(6):1281-1283). Saw palmetto extract is commercially available from a number of sources. Any saw palmetto lipid extract can be used in the provided concentrates. Exemplary of the saw palmetto extract that can be used in the provided concentrates is Saw Palmetto, Lipophilic Extract, commercially available from Natural Medicinals, Inc. (Felda, Fla.). This saw palmetto lipophilic extract is carbon dioxide extracted and, in one example, contains 85.9% total fatty acids, including 0.8% caproic acid, 2% caprylic acid, 2.4% capric acid, 27.% lauric acid, 10.3% myristic acid, 8.1% palmitic acid, 0.2% palmitoleic acid, 2% stearic acid, 26.7% oleic acid, 4.9% linoleic acid, 0.7% linolenic acid, 0.42% phytosterols, including 0.42% beta sitosterol, 0.09% campesterol, 0.03% stigmasterol; and 0.2% moisture. Other sources of saw palmetto extract can be used.

(d) Conjugated Linoleic Acid (CLA)

Also exemplary of the PUFA non-polar ingredients that can be used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are non-polar ingredients containing conjugated fatty acids. Conjugated fatty acids are PUFAs with two or more conjugated double bonds. Conjugated fatty acids can be used as nutritional supplements. Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients containing conjugated fatty acids are compounds containing conjugated linoleic acid (CLA), for example, 18:2 ω7 and 18:2 ω6; conjugated linolenic acid, for example, 18:3ω6 and 18:3ω5; and other conjugated fatty acids, for example, 18:3 ω3, 18:4 ω3 and 20:5 ω6. CLA refers to a family of linoleic acid isomers found primarily in meat and dairy products of ruminants. Typically, the CLA compounds contain a mixture of different CLA isomers, for example, C18:2 CLA c9, t11, CLA t10, c12 and other CLA isomers. Exemplary of the CLA that can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions is CLA (70%) commercially available from Sanmark, LTD (Dalian, Liaoning Province, China; product code 01057-A80). This CLA is a clear white to pale yellow oil and has the following fatty acid composition: NMT (not more than) 9.0% C16:0 palmitic acid, NMT 4.0% stearic acid, NMT 15.0% C18:1 oleic acid, NMT 3.0% C18:2 linoleic acid, NLT (not less than) 80% C18:2 CLA (including the following isomers: NLT 37.5% C18:2 CLA c9, t11, 37.5% C18:2 CLA t10, c12, and NMT 5.0% other CLA isomers); and NMT 5.0% other fatty acids. Another exemplary CLA compound is a CLA that contains 74.5% CLA (Clarinol® CLA, Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.). Other CLA-containing compounds can be used.

ii. Coenzyme Q Compounds

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients are ingredients that are or contain the non-polar compound coenzyme Q, for example, coenzyme Q10 (also called coQ10, ubiquinone, ubidecarenone, ubiquinol and vitamin Q10). Coenzyme Q compounds are benzoquinone compounds containing isoprenyl units. The number of isoprenyl units in each of the different CoQ species is indicated with a number following CoQ. For example, coQ10 contains 10 isoprenyl units. Coenzyme Q10 is a predominant coenzyme Q species.

Coenzyme Q can exist in two different forms: an oxidized form and a reduced form. When the oxidized form of a coenzyme Q species is reduced by one equivalent, it becomes a ubisemiquinone, denoted QH, which contains a free radical on one of the oxygens in the benzene ring of the benzoquinone. Both oxidized and reduced coenzyme Q-containing compounds can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions.

Exemplary of the coenzyme Q-containing non-polar ingredients that can be used in the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, are non-polar ingredients containing coenzyme Q10 (also called coQ10, ubiquinone, ubidecarenone, ubiquinol and vitamin Q10), a benzoquinone compound that contains 10 isoprenoid units. The “Q” in the name refers to quinone and the 10 refers to the number of isoprenoid units. CoQ10 typically refers to the oxidized form of coQ10, which also is referred to as ubidecarenone, as opposed to the reduced form of coQ10. Both the reduced and oxidized forms of coQ10 are exemplary of the coenzyme Q species that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided concentrates.

CoQ10 has electron-transfer ability and is present in cellular membranes, such as those of the endoplasmic reticulum, peroxisomes, lysosomes, vesicles and the mitochondria. A decrease in natural coQ10 synthesis has been observed in sick and elderly people. Because of this observation and its potent antioxidant properties, coQ10 is used as a dietary supplement and a treatment for diseases such as cancer and heart disease. CoQ10, however, exhibits relatively poor bioavailability.

CoQ10 containing compounds are available commercially. Any coQ10 compound or reduced coQ10 compound can be used with the provided concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates. Exemplary of the coQ10 compounds that can be used are coenzyme Q10 compounds containing greater than 98% or greater than about 98% ubidecarenone, for example, the compound sold under the name Kaneka Q10™ (USP Ubidecarenone) by Kaneka Nutrients, L.P. (Pasadena, Tex.). The compound sold under the name Kaneka Q10™ is fermented entirely from yeast and is identical to the body's own coQ10 and free from the cis isomer found in some synthetically produced coQ10 compounds. Any coQ10 compound can be used in the provided concentrates.

iii. Phytochemical-Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds in the provided compositions are phytochemical-containing compounds, for example, phytosterols (plant sterols), phytoestrogens, for example, genistein and daidzein, flavonoids, for example, isoflavones, for example, soy isoflavones, phytoalexins, for example, resveratrol (trans-3,5,4′-trihydroxystilbene) and red clover extract.

Typically, phytochemical-containing ingredients are added to the compositions in amounts such that when diluted in a beverage, one serving of the beverage provides between at or about 0.5 and at or about 10 mg, typically, between at or about 1 and at or about 10 mg, between at or about 1 and at or about 5 mg, for example, at or about 0.5, at or about 1, at or about 2, at or about 3, at or about 4, at or about 5 mg, at or about 6 mg, at or about 7 mg, at or about 8 mg, at or about 9 mg or at or about 10 mg phytochemical-containing compound, for example phytochemical-containing compound, per serving of the beverage, such as for example, 8 ounces of a beverage.

(a) Phytosterols

Exemplary of the phytochemical-containing compounds that contain non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are phytosterols (plant sterols). Plant sterols are structurally similar to cholesterol and have been found to reduce the absorption of dietary cholesterol, which can affect the levels of serum cholesterol. According to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA), two servings per day, each containing 0.4 grams of plant sterols, for a total daily intake of at least 0.8 grams, as part of a diet low in saturated fat and cholesterol, is reported to reduce the risk of heart disease. Thus, plant sterols are used in nutritional supplements.

Phytosterol non-polar ingredients are typically added to the compositions in amounts such that when diluted in a beverage, one serving of the beverage provides between at or about 100 and at or about 1000 mg, typically between at or about 100 and at or about 500 mg, between at or about 100 and at or about 800 mg, between at or about 300 and at or about 500 mg, between at or about 300 and at or about 800 mg, between at or about 500 and at or about 1000 mg, for example, at or about 100, at or about 200, at or about 300, at or about 400, at or about 500, at or about 600, at or about 700, at or about 800, at or about 900 or at or about 1000 mg phytosterols, per serving of the beverage, such as for example, 8 ounces of a beverage.

Any phytosterol-containing compound can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Exemplary of the phytosterol-containing compounds that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are compounds containing plant sterols, for example, the compound sold under the name CardioAid™, distributed by B&D Nutrition and manufactured by ADM Natural Health and Nutrition, Decatur, Ill. This compound contains kosher, pareve, and halal plant sterols that are produced under current food GMPs. The sterols are PCR negative and the material is derived from genetically modified organisms (GMOs). This phytosterol compound contains a minimum of 95% plant sterols, which can include up to 5 plant sterols. The compound can contain, for example, 40-58% beta sitosterol, 20-30% campesterol, 14-22% stigmasterol, 0-6% brassicasterol and 0 5% sitostanol. The compound further can contain tocopherols, for example, 0-15 mg/g tocopherols. The compound is tested and is negative for microorganisms, such as Salmonella, E. coli and Staphylococcus aureus.

(b) Resveratrol

Exemplary of the phytochemical-containing compounds used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions is resveratrol. Resveratrol, or trans-resveratrol (trans-3,5,4′-trihydroxystilbene), is a phytoalexin that is naturally produced by several plants, such as the Japanese knotweed, and also is found in the skin and seeds of grapes, numerous berries, including mulberry, blueberries, bilberries and cranberries, and in peanuts. This polyphenolic compound can act as an antioxidant and additionally aid in cancer prevention and reduction of cardiovascular disease.

Any resveratrol-containing compound can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Exemplary of the resveratrol-containing compounds that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are compounds containing trans-resveratrol, for example the compounds sold under the name ReserveNature™, sold by Jiaherb, Shaanxi, China. This compound contains trans-resveratrol from the botanical source Polygonum cuspidatum (Japanese knotweed). This resveratrol compound contains a minimum of 98.5% trans resveratrol and does not contain emodin. The compound is tested and is negative for microorganisms, such as Salmonella, E. coli, yeast and mold.

iv. Carotenoid-Containing Compounds

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and are use in the provided compositions are carotenoid-containing ingredient, for example, carotenoids, including hydrocarbons (carotenes) and oxygenated, alcoholic derivatives of hydrocarbons (xanthophylls), for example, beta carotene, mixed carotenoids complex, lutein, zeaxanthin, cryptoxanthin, for example, beta-cryptoxanthin, lycopene, beta carotene, mixed carotenoids complex, astaxanthin, bixin, canthaxanthin, capsanthin, capsorubin, apo-carotenal, beta-12′-apo-carotenal, “carotene” (mixture of alpha and beta-carotene), gamma carotene, ciolerythrin and esters of hydroxyl- or carboxyl-containing members thereof. Carotenoids are efficient free-radical scavengers, or anti-oxidants, and are capable of enhancing the vertebrate immune system.

Typically, carotenoid-containing compounds are used in the provided compositions within a concentration range of between 0% or about 0% and 10% or about 10%, typically between 0% or about 0% and 5% or about 5%, for example, at or about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9% or 10%, w/w, of the beverage composition.

(a) Carotenes

Exemplary of the carotenoid-containing compounds used as non-polar ingredients in the provided beverage compositions are carotenes, for example, alpha-carotene, beta-carotene and lycopene. Any carotene-containing compound can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Exemplary of the carotene-containing compounds that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions is lycopene, sold by Zhejiang Medicine CO., LTD, Xinchang Pharmaceutical Factory, Xinchang, China, a purple or red crystalline powder containing not less than 70% all E-lycopene, not more than 23% 5-Z-lycopene and not more than 9% related substances.

(b) Xanthophylls

Exemplary of the carotenoid-containing compounds used in the provided compositions are xanthophylls, for example, neoxanthin, violaxanthin, α- and β-cryptoxanthins, lutein and zeaxanthin. Xanthophylls, or phylloxanthins, are oxygen containing carotenoids that are typically yellow pigments. Any carotene-containing compound can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Exemplary of the carotene-containing compounds that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are lutein and zeaxanthin, sold under the name Xanmax®-80 (Lutein crystals), by Katra Phytochem (India) Private Limited, Bangalore, India, containing 80% lutein and 4.5% zeaxanthin.

v. Micronutrient-Containing Compounds

Exemplary of the non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds that are used in the provided compositions are micronutrient-containing ingredients, for example, vitamins, including vitamins A, B, C, D, E and K, and corresponding provitamins and vitamin derivatives with an action resembling that of vitamin A, B, C, D, E or K, and alpha lipoic acid (thioctic acid), yerba mate, ginseng and ginkgo biloba.

(a) Vitamins

Exemplary of the vitamins used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are fat-soluble vitamins, for example, vitamins A, B, C, D, E and K, and corresponding provitamins and vitamin derivatives, such as esters with an action resembling that of vitamin A, B, C, D, E or K, for example, retinol (vitamin A) and pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, for example, palmitate ester of retinol and other esters of retinol, for example, vitamin A palmitate; B vitamins, for example, thiamin (vitamin B1), riboflavin (vitamin B2), niacin (vitamin B3), pantothenic acid (vitamin B5), pyridoxine (vitamin B6), biotin (vitamin B7), folic acid or folate (vitamin B9), and cyanocobalamin, cobalamin, or reduced forms of cobalamin (vitamin B12); calciferol (vitamin D) and its pharmaceutically acceptable derivatives thereof, for example, for example, cholecalciferol (vitamin D3), and precursors of vitamin D; d-alpha tocopherol (vitamin E) and derivatives thereof, including pharmaceutical derivatives thereof, for example, tocotrienols, d-alpha tocopherol acetate and other esters of d-alpha tocopherol; and ascorbyl palmitate, a fat-soluble version of vitamin C.

Any vitamin can be used as a non-polar ingredient in the provided compositions. Exemplary of the vitamins that can be used as non-polar ingredients in the provided compositions are vitamin A palmitate, for example, vitamin A palmitate containing 1.7 mIU/g, produced by DSM Nutritional Products, Inc., Belvidere, N.J., and distributed through Stauber Performance Ingredients, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.; vitamin D3, for example, vitamin D3 in corn oil, containing about 1 mIU/g, produced by DSM Nutritional Products, Inc., Belvidere, N.J., and distributed through Stauber Performance Ingredients, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.; vitamin B12; vitamin B1; vitamin B3; vitamin B5; and vitamin B6.

Typically, vitamin non-polar ingredients are included in the provided compositions within a concentration range of between 0.0001% or about 0.0001% and 1% or about 1%, more typically between at or about 0.001% and at or about 0.1%, for example, at or about 0.0001%, 0.0005%, 0.0008%, 0.0009%, 0.001%, 0.002%, 0.003%, 0.004%, 0.005%, 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.1%, 0.5% or 1%, w/w, of the beverage composition. Vitamin non-polar ingredients are typically added to the beverage compositions in amounts such that one serving of the beverage provides an amount of the vitamin that corresponds to the dietary reference intakes. For example, vitamin A is added such that a serving of the beverage provides between at or about 10 to at or about 2000 micrograms (mcg), for example, between at or about 20 to at or about 900 mcg, more typically between at or about 40 to at or about 400 mcg of vitamin A per serving, for example, between at or about 40 and at or about 200 mcg, or between at or about 100 and at or about 400 mcg, or between at or about 100 and at or about 300 mcg per serving. For example, the beverage composition can contain 40 or about 40, 50 or about 50, 60 or about 60, 70 or about 70, 80 or about 80, 90 or about 90, 100 or about 100, 110 or about 110, 120 or about 120, 130 or about 130, 140 or about 140, 150 or about 150, 200 or about 200, 250 or about 250, 300 or about 300, 350 or about 350, or 400 or about 400 mcg vitamin A per serving. In another example, vitamin D3 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 100 to at or about 2000 International Units (IU), for example, between at or about 100 to at or about 1000 IU, more typically, between at or about 400 and at or about 800 IU, per serving, for example between at or about 400 and at or about 600 or between at or about 500 and at or about 800, or between at or about 600 and at or about 800 IU per serving. For example, the beverage composition can contain 400 or about 400, 450 or about 450, 500 or about 500, 550 or about 550, 600 or about 600, 650 or about 650, 700 or about 700, 750 or about 750 or 800 or about 800 IU vitamin D3 per serving. In another example, vitamin B12 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 1 and 12 mcg, such as 1 or about 1, 2 or about 2, 2.4 or about 2.4, 3 or about 3, 4 or about 4, 5 or about 5, 6 or about 6, 8 or about 8, 10 or about 10 or 12 or about 12 mcg vitamin B12 per serving. In another example, vitamin B1 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 0.2 and 1.4 mg, such as 0.2 or about 0.2, 0.3 or about 0.3, 0.4 or about 0.4, 0.5 or about 0.5, 0.6 or about 0.6, 0.7 or about 0.7, 0.8 or about 0.8, 0.9 or about 0.9, 1.0 or about 1.0, 1.1 or about 1.1, 1.2 or about 1.2, 1.3 or about 1.3 or 1.4 or about 1.4 mg vitamin B1 per serving. In another example, vitamin B3 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 2 and 18 mg, such as 2 or about 2, 3 or about 3, 4 or about 4, 5 or about 5, 6 or about 6, 7 or about 7, 8 or about 8, 9 or about 9, 10 or about 10, 11 or about 11, 12 or about 12, 13 or about 13, 14 or about 14, 15 or about 15, 16 or about 16, 17 or about 17 or 18 or about 18 mg vitamin B3 per serving. In another example, vitamin B5 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 1.7 and 7 mg, such as 1.7 or about 1.7, 1.8 or about 1.8, 1.9 or about 1.9, 2 or about 2, 3 or about 3, 4 or about 4, 5 or about 5, 6 or about 6 or 7 or about 7 mg vitamin B5 per serving. In another example, vitamin B6 is added such that a serving of the beverage composition provides between at or about 0.1 and 2.0 mg, such as 0.1 or about 0.1, 0.2 or about 0.2, 0.3 or about 0.3, 0.4 or about 0.4, 0.5 or about 0.5, 0.6 or about 0.6, 0.7 or about 0.7, 0.8 or about 0.8, 0.9 or about 0.9, 1.0 or about 1.0, 1.1 or about 1.1, 1.2 or about 1.2, 1.3 or about 1.3, 1.4 or about 1.4, 1.5 or about 1.5, 1.6 or about 1.6, 1.7 or about 1.7, 1.8 or about 1.8, 1.9 or about 1.9 or 2.0 or about 2.0 mg vitamin B6 per serving.

(b) Alpha-Lipoic Acid (Thioctic Acid)

The alpha lipoic acid non-polar ingredients include the alpha-lipoic acids sold by NutriChem Resources Company (Walnut, Calif.) and Zhejiang Medicines & Health Products Import & Export Co., Ltd (Hangzhou, China) and other alpha-lipoic acids. Typically, alpha-lipoic acid is used in the provided compositions within a concentration range of between 0% or about 0% and 10% or about 10%, typically between 0% or about 0% and 5% or about 5%, for example, at or about 1%, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9% or 10%, w/w, of the beverage composition.

vi. Boswellia Extracts

Exemplary of non-polar ingredients included in the compositions herein are non-polar ingredients containing extracts of a Boswellia plant or a boswellic acid or derivative thereof. Extracts of the Boswellia family of plants, including, for example, Boswellia serrata, exhibit anti-inflammatory, anti-arthritic and anti-ulcerogenic activity (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,589,516). Extracts derived from Boswellia plants and suitable for use in the pre-gel concentrates provided herein include extracts derived from Boswellia cartenii, Boswellia frereana, Boswellia bhau-dajaina, Boswellia serrata, and Boswellia thurifera. The extracts derived from Boswellia plants can be gums, oleo-gums, resins, essential oils and residues, or mixtures thereof. A typical extract of a Boswellia plant suitable for use herein includes at least one boswellic acid, for example, acetyl-11-keto-β-boswellic acid (AKBA). Exemplary of a Boswellia extract-containing compound that can be used as the non-polar ingredient in the provided pre-gel concentrates is sold under the trademark ApresFLEX®, which is a formulation that includes a Boswellia serrata extract that contains acetyl-11-keto-β-boswellic acid (AKBA), sold by PLT Health Solutions, Morristown, N.J.

vii. Alkaloids

Exemplary of non-polar ingredients in the provided pre-gel concentrates are non-polar ingredients that are or contain an alkaloid, for example, any edible or food-approved alkaloid. Exemplary suitable alkaloids include, but are not limited to, caffeine, synephrine, and γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA) derivatives, e.g., 4-amino-3-phenylbutyric acid (i.e., phenibut). Other exemplary non-polar ingredients containing alkaloids include herbal extracts, medicinal extracts and compounds from plants and drugs. Suitable alkaloids for inclusion in the provided pre-gel concentrates are a matter of design choice and well within the skill of the skilled artisan.

The amount of alkaloid depends upon the desired or intended dosage and the particular compound. For example, the amount of alkaloid, e.g., caffeine, included in the provided beverage compositions is typically between or between about 0.01% and 10%, by weight, of the composition, for example, between at or about 0.01% and 9%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 8%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 7%, between at or about 1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 7%, between at or about 2% and at or about 5%, between at or about 2% and at or about 4%, between at or about 3% and at or about 7%, between at or about 3% and at or about 5%, between at or about 4% and at or about 7%, between at or about 6% and at or about 7%, between at or about 5% and at or about 7%, or between at or about 5% and at or about 6%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of alkaloid used in the provided beverage compositions is less than 7% or about 7%, typically less than 5% or about 5%, for example at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9%, 3.0%, 3.1%, 3.2%, 3.3%, 3.4%, 3.5%, 3.6%, 3.7%, 3.8%, 3.9%, 4%, 4.1%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.4%, 4.5%, 4.6%, 4.7%, 4.8%, 4.9%, 5%, 5.1%, 5.2%, 5.3%, 5.4%, 5.5%, 5.6%, 5.7%, 5.8%, 5.9%, 6%, 6.2%, 6.5%, 6.7%, or 7%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

The alkaloid-containing non-polar ingredients include caffeine that is added in the form of caffeine anhydrous, such as the Caffeine Anhydrous powder (white, crystalline powder), sold by Pacific Rainbow International, Inc., City of Industry, Calif., which is a white crystalline powder containing caffeine anhydrous. The amount of alkaloid, e.g., caffeine, in the composition can be between at or about 0% and at or about 50%, by weight, of the composition, and typically is between at or about 0% and at or about 25%, such as at or about 0% and at or about 10%, or between at or about 0% and at or about 5%, e.g., at or about 0%, 0.01%, 0.015%, 0.02%, 0.025%, 0.03%, 0.035%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.15%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1% 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, or 10%, such as between at or about 0% and at or about 3%, by weight, of the composition, e.g., between at or about 0% and 2%, e.g., at or about 2%, by weight, of the composition, or is less than 5%, by weight, of the composition, e.g., at or about 5, 4, 3, 2 or 1%, by weight, of the composition, or less. In one example, the composition contains at or about 2%, by weight, caffeine. In another example, the composition contains between at or about 1 mg and at or about 500 mg caffeine per mL or per serving, such as a 4 mL serving of the composition, e.g., at or about 200, 150, 125, 100, 80, 75, 50 or 25 milligrams (mg) caffeine per serving of the composition, e.g., per 4 mL of the composition.

Other exemplary ingredients including alkaloids include herbal extracts, medicinal extracts and compounds from plants and drugs. Example 10 below describes additional exemplary non-polar ingredients.

viii. Cannabinoids

Cannabinoids and cannabinoid-containing compounds are exemplary of non-polar ingredients that can be included the compositions provided herein. Cannabinoids include phytocannabinoids (found in the Cannabis sativa plant and some other plants), endocannabinoids (produced naturally in the body by humans and animals), and synthetic cannabinoids. Cannabinoids that can be included in the pre-gel concentrates provided herein can be natural cannabinoids, synthetic cannabinoids, semi-synthetic cannabinoids, or mixtures thereof. Actual or potential therapeutic applications for cannabinoids include the treatment of multiple sclerosis and other forms of muscular spasm, migraine headache, glaucoma, asthma, inflammation, insomnia, high blood pressure, nausea and vomiting, and the stimulation of appetite. Other potential therapeutic applications include the use of cannabinoids as oxytoxic, anxiolytic, anti-convulsive, anti-depressive, anti-psychotic, and anti-cancer agents.

Exemplary phytocannabinoids derived from the Cannabis sativa plant (commonly known as marijuana) are the terpenophenolic compounds Δ⁹-tetrahydrocannabinol (THC), Δ⁸-tetrahydrocannabinol (Δ⁸-THC) and other compounds structurally related to THC, cannabidiol (CBD), cannabigerol (CBG), cannabichromene (CBC), cannabinol (CBN), cannabicyclol (CBL), cannabivarin (CBV), tetrahydrocannabivarin (THCV), cannabidivarin (CBDV), cannabielsoin (CBE), cannabicitran (CBT), cannabinodiol (CBDL), cannabichromevarin (CBCV), cannabigerovarin (CBGV), cannabigerol monoethyl ether (CBGM), and mixtures and derivatives thereof, for example, nabiximols (Sativex®), a mixture of THC and CBD. Suitable phytocannabinoids also include those derived from plants other than Cannabis sativa, such as, for example, lipophilic alkamides (alkylamides) derived from Echinacea plants, and other cannabinoids derived from plants including, but not limited to, Echinacea purpurea, Echinacea angustifolia, Echinacea pallida, Acmella oleracea, Helichrysum umbraculigerum, and Radula marginata plants.

Endogenous cannabinoids are lipid-like substances produced in the brain and peripheral tissues that bind to and activate cannabinoid receptors present in the cell membrane, including, but not limited to, arachidonate acid-based lipids such as anandamide (N-arachidonoylethanolamide, AEA), 2-arachidonoylglycerol (2-AG), noladin ether (2-arachidonyl glyceryl ether), N-arachidonoyl dopamine (NADA), and virodhamine (OAE).

Synthetic cannabinoids are among the cannabinoids that can be included as non-polar ingredients. Synthetic cannabinoids include any compound having a cannabinoid-like structure or that produces effects similar to those of cannabinoids that is manufactured using chemical means, including, for example, synthetic Δ⁹-THC; dronabinol (Marinol®; (6aR-trans)-6a,7,8,10a-tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-3-pentyl-6H-dibenzo[b,d]pyran-1-ol); nabilone (Cesamet™; (±)-trans-3-(1,1-dimethylheptyl)-6,6a,7,8,10,10a-hexahydro-1-hydroxy-6-6-dimethyl-9H-dibenzo[b, d]pyran-9-one); dexanabinol ((6aS,10aS)-9-(hydroxymethyl)-6,6-dimethyl-3-(2-methyl octan-2-yl)-6a,7,10,10a-tetrahydrobenzo[c]chromen-1-ol); ajulemic acid (Resunab™; (6aR,10aR)-3-(1,1-dimethylheptyl)-6a,7,10,10a-tetrahydro-1-hydroxy-6,6-dimethyl-6H-dibenzo(b,d)pyran-9-carboxylic acid); cannabinor ((E)-4-(2-((1R,2R,5R)-6,6-dimethyl-4-oxobicyclo[3.1.1]heptan-2-yl)-3-hydroxy-5-(2-methyloctan-2-yl)phenoxy)-4-oxobut-2-enoic acid); HU 308 ([(1R,2R,5R)-2-[2,6-dimethoxy-4-(2-methyloctan-2-yl)phenyl]-7,7-dimethyl-4-bicyclo[3.1.1]hept-3-enyl]methanol); rimonabant (Acomplia™; 5-(4-chlorophenyl)-1-(2,4-dichloro-phenyl)-4-methyl-N-(piperidin-1-yl)-1H-pyrazole-3-carboxamide); taranabant (MK-0364; N-[(2S,3S)-4-(4-chlorophenyl)-3-(3-cyanophenyl)-2-butanyl]-2-methyl-2-{[5-(trifluoromethyl)-2-pyridinyl]oxy}propanamide); levonantradol ([(6S,6aR,9R,10aR)-9-hydroxy-6-methyl-3-[(2R)-5-phenylpentan-2-yl]oxy-5,6,6a,7,8,9,10,10a-octahydrophenanthridin-1-yl] acetate); WIN55212-2 ((R)-(+)-[2,3-dihydro-5-methyl-3-(4-morpholinylmethyl) pyrrolo[1,2,3-de]-1,4-benzoxazin-6-yl]-1-napthalenylmethanone); HU 331 (3-hydroxy-2-[(1R)-6-isopropenyl-3-methyl-cyclohex-2-en-1-yl]-5-pentyl-1,4-benzoquinone); and any other compound having a cannabinoid-based structure or that produces effects similar to those of cannabinoids that is manufactured using chemical means.

ix. Hops-Containing Compounds

Exemplary of non-polar ingredients that can be included in the provided compositions are ingredients that contain hops (Humulus lupulus L.), including ingredients isolated or derived from hops, such as extracts of hops cones, for example, hops oils, hops resins or hops resin derivatives, hops acids or hops acid derivatives, or mixtures thereof. Hops oils include, but are not limited to, humulene, beta-caryophyllene, mycrene, farnescene, gamma-cadinene, alpha-selinene, and alpha-cadinene. Hops contain alpha-acids, such as humulone (α-lupulic acid), cohumulone, adhumulone, hulupone, and isoprehumulone, and beta-acids, such as lupulone, colupulone, adlupulone, tetrahydroisohumulone, and hexahydrocolupulone. Both alpha- and beta-acids have demonstrated antibacterial, antioxidant, and antiinflammatory properties. An exemplary non-polar ingredient containing hops is sold under the trademark Perluxan™, and that is a compound containing a supercritical extract of hops cones that includes a minimum of 30% alpha-acids (including humulone, cohumulone, adhumulone, iso-cohumulone and iso-adhumulone) and 10% beta-acids (including lupulone and colupulone), such as sold by Pharmachem Laboratories, Kearny, N.J.

x. Antioxidants

Exemplary of non-polar ingredients that can be included in the compositions provided herein are ingredients that contain an antioxidant or have antioxidant properties, for example, a molecule that is capable of inhibiting the oxidation of other molecules. Antioxidants include molecules that scavenge free radicals. Suitable antioxidants include those that are used as ingredients in dietary supplements. The antioxidant can be a natural antioxidant or a synthetic antioxidant.

Examples of antioxidants include, but are not limited to hormones, carotenoids, carotenoid terpenoids, non-carotenoid terpenoids, flavonoids, flavonoid polyphenolics (e.g., bioflavonoids), flavonols, flavones, phenols, polyphenols, esters of phenols, esters of polyphenols, nonflavonoid phenolics, isothiocyanates, vitamins and vitamin cofactors, such as vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, vitamin E phosphate and ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10), ubiquinol, pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ), ascorbic acid, citric acid, rosemary oil, minerals, such as mineral selenium and manganese, melatonin, α-carotene, β-carotene, lycopene, lutein, zeanthin, crypoxanthin, resveratrol, eugenol, quercetin, catechin, gossypol, hesperetin, curcumin, turmeric, turmeric/curcumin blend, ferulic acid, thymol, hydroxytyrosol, thyme, olive oil, lipoic acid, including alpha-lipoic acid, glutathione, oxalic acid, tocopherol, tocopherol-derived compounds, di-alpha-tocopheryl phosphate, tocotrienols, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, tert-butylhydroquinone, acetic acid, pectin, zeaxanthin, astaxanthin, canthaxanthin, saponins, limonoids, kaempferol, myricetin, isorhamnetin, proanthocyanidins, quercetin, rutin, luteolin, apigenin, tangeritin, naringenin, eriodictyol, flavan-3-ols (e.g., anthocyanadins), gallocatechins, epicatechin and its gallate forms, epigallocatechin and its gallate forms, theaflavin and its gallate forms, thearubigins, isoflavone phytoestrogens, genistein, daidzein, glycitein, anythocyanins, delphinidin, malvidin, pelargonidin, peonidin, and hops (Humulus lupulus L.)-containing compounds. In one example, the antioxidant includes ubiquinol. In another example, the antioxidant includes alpha-lipoic acid. In another example, the antioxidant includes pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ). In yet another example, the antioxidant includes a turmeric/curcumin composition.

Any non-polar ingredient that is an antioxidant or has antioxidant properties can be included in the provided compositions. Exemplary of an antioxidant that can be used in the provided compositions is alpha-lipoic acid, for example, the alpha-lipoic acids sold by NutriChem Resources Company (Walnut, Calif.) and Zhejiang Medicines & Health Products Import & Export Co., Ltd (Hangzhou, China), and any other alpha-lipoic acid. Another exemplary antioxidant that can be used in the provided compositions is pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ), such as PureQQ, sold by Nascent Health Science (Allentown, N.J.). Exemplary of a non-polar ingredient that contains antioxidants that can be included in the provided compositions is a turmeric/curcumin composition, for example, the turmeric/curcumin composition that is 95% curcumin, sold by Siddharth International, Mumbai, India.

c. Non-Polar Solvents

The pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein can further contain a non-polar solvent, for example, an oil. The non-polar solvent can be included in the composition in addition to the non-polar ingredient and can be used to dissolve the non-polar ingredient. For example, the solvent can be an oil that does not contain the non-polar ingredient. When a non-polar solvent is included in the concentrates, it typically is used to dissolve the non-polar ingredient before mixing with the other ingredients, for example, before mixing with the other oil phase ingredients. For example, use of a non-polar solvent can reduce the crystal size and/or increase the clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate. Exemplary of non-polar solvents that can be used in the provided concentrates are oils (in addition to the non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds) such as vitamin E oil, flaxseed oil, CLA, borage oil, rice bran oil, D-limonene, canola oil, corn oil, MCT oil and oat oil. Other oils also can be used. Exemplary of a non-polar solvent suitable for use in the concentrates provided herein includes vitamin E oil, such as the vitamin E oil sold by ADM Natural Health and Nutrition under the name Novatol™ 5-67 Vitamin E (D-alpha-tocopherol; product code 410217; Decatur, Ill.), which contains at least 67.2% tocopherol and approximately 32.8% soybean oil. Another exemplary oil includes a flaxseed oil solvent, such as the flaxseed oil from Sanmark LLC (Greensboro, N.C.; Sanmark Limited, Dalian, Liaoning Province, China), which contains not less than (NLT) 50% C18:3 alpha-linolenic acid.

When present in the pre-emulsion concentrates provided herein, the non-polar solvent typically represents less than or about 50%, by weight (w/w), of the pre-emulsion concentrate, for example, less than or about 45%, 40%, 35%, 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5% or less, by weight (w/w), of the concentrate.

When present in the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein, the non-polar solvent typically represents less than or about 15%, by weight (w/w), of the pre-emulsion concentrate, for example, less than or about 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1% or less, by weight (w/w), of the concentrate.

d. Preservatives and Sterilizers

The concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates or liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, provided herein can further contain one or more preservatives (or preservativers) and/or sterilizers. The preservative or sterilizer can be included to improve the stability of the concentrate and the compositions made by diluting the concentrate, over time. Preservatives can be added to preserve the ingredients, for example, in order to prevent oxidation of the ingredients, for example, the non-polar ingredients, for example, the omega-3 containing compounds, for example, the DHA. Preservatives, particularly food and beverage preservatives, are well known. Any known preservative can be used in the provided concentrates. Exemplary of the preservatives that can be used in the provided concentrates are oil soluble preservatives, for example, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, methyl paraben, propyl paraben, and antioxidants, for example, vitamin E, vitamin A palmitate and beta carotene. Typically, a preservative is selected that is safe for human consumption, for example, in foods and beverages, for example, a GRAS certified and/or Kosher-certified preservative, for example, benzyl alcohol.

The preservative typically represents less than 1%, less than about 1%, 1% or about 1%, by weight (w/w), of the pre-emulsion concentrate or liquid concentrate or between 0.1% or about 0.1% and 1% or about 1%, by weight (w/w), of the concentrate, for example, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.725%, 0.75%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1%, about 0.1%, about 0.2%, about 0.3%, about 0.4%, about 0.5%, about 0.6%, about 0.7%, about 0.8%, about 0.9%, about 1%, by weight (w/w), of the concentrate.

e. Polar Solvents

The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates and the liquid dilution compositions (i.e., beverages), further include polar solvents. Polar solvents are well known in the art. The polarity of a solvent generally indicates which compounds are soluble in the solvent, and with which other solvents/liquids the solvent is miscible. Generally speaking, polar compounds are more readily solubilized in water and other polar solvents than are non-polar ingredients. Polar solvents are more likely to be miscible with water and other polar solvents and liquids.

The polarity of a solvent can be assessed by measuring a number of different parameters according to well-known methods (see, e.g., Przybytek, “High Purity Solvent Guide,” Burdick and Jackson Laboratories, Inc., 1980), such as by determining a property of the solvent, such as the dielectric constant, the dipole moment or the polarity index. For example, polar solvents generally have high dielectric constants, typically dielectric constants greater than at or about 15 (see, e.g., Lowery et al., “Mechanism and Theory in Organic Chemistry,” Harper Collins Publishers, 3rd ed., 1987, p. 177), such as at or about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80 85, 90 or greater than 90. For example, the dielectric constant of water is at or about 80.10 at 20° C. Polar solvents generally have high polarity indices, typically greater than at or about 3 (see, e.g., Snyder, “Classification of the solvent properties of common liquids” (1974) J. Chromatog. A 92:223-230), such as at or about 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 or greater than 9. Polar solvents generally have large dipole moments, typically greater than at or about 1.4 Debye, such as at or about 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.0, 3.5, 4 or greater than 4 Debye (see, e.g., “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001, p. 15(14)-15(18)). Other methods of assessing solvent polarity are known in the art, including, but not limited to, the Kosower Z scale (Kosower, “An introduction to physical organic chemistry,” Wiley, 1969, p. 293), the donor number and donor acceptor scale (Gutmann, “Solvent effects on the reactivities of organometallic compounds” (1976) Coord. Chem. Rev. 18:225-255), and the Hildebrand solubility parameters (see, e.g., Giddings et al., “High pressure gas chromatography of nonvolatile species. Compressed gas is used to cause migration of intractable solutes” (1968) Science 162:67-73).

Polar solvents include polar protic solvents and polar aprotic solvents. A polar protic solvent (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol) contains a hydrogen atom attached to an electronegative atom, such that the hydrogen has a proton-like character and/or the bond between the hydrogen and electronegative atom is polarized. Polar aprotic solvents, on the other hand (e.g., acetone, acetonitrile), generally do not contain positively polarized hydrogen atoms.

The polar solvents in the provided compositions typically are polar protic solvents, including, but not limited to, water; alcohols, such as dihydric alcohols which contain two hydroxyl groups (for example, glycols, e.g., propylene glycol, ethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, trimethylene glycol), trihydric alcohols which contain three hydroxyl groups (e.g., glycerin, butane-1,2,3-triol, pentane-1,3,5-triol, 2-amino-2-hydroxymethyl-propane-1,3-diol), monohydric alcohols (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol and t-butanol) and other alcohols; and acids, such as acetic acid and formic acid. Other polar solvents include, but are not limited to, acetone, acetonitrile, butyl acetate, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, ethyl acetate, tetrahydrofuran and hexamethylphosphoric triamide. Typically, the polar solvent is water, or is an alcohol that typically contains two or more hydroxyl groups, such as a trihydric or dihydric alcohol, such as, but not limited to, glycerol and propylene glycol. The polar solvents further include low molecular weight polyethylene glycols (PEGs), such as PEGs having a molecular weight not more than at or about 600 kDa, such as between or about between 200 kDa and 600 kDa, typically not more than at or about 400 kDa, for example, not more than 200 kDa.

In one example, the polar solvent has a dielectric constant greater than at or about 15, and typically between at or about 20 and at or about 80, such as at or about 80.1. In another example, the polar solvent has a polarity index between at or about 3 and at or about 9. In another example, the dipole moment of the polar solvent is between 1.5 and 3, and typically between at or about 1.8 and 2.8, such as 1.85 (for dielectric constants of solvents, see, for example, Landolt-Bornstein, New Series IV/17, “Static Dielectric Constants of Pure Liquids and Binary Liquid Mixtures,” Springer, 2008; and “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001; for dipole moment of solvents, see, for example, “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001; and for polarity indices of solvents, see, for example, Snyder, “Classification of the solvent properties of common liquids,” J. Chromatography A, 92:223-230, 1974).

When present, such as in the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, the amount of the polar solvent typically is present in a high concentration, for example, the total amount of polar solvent as a percentage (%), by weight, of the liquid concentrate (wt %) can be, e.g., from at or about 45% to at or about 80%, such as 45% to 50%, 45% to 55%, 45% to 60%, 45% to 65%, 45% to 70%, 45% to 75%, 50% to 55%, 50% to 60%, 50% to 65%, 50% to 70%, 50% to 75%, 50% to 80%, 55% to 60%, 55% to 65%, 55% to 70%, 55% to 75%, 55% to 80%, 60% to 65%, 60% to 70%, 60% to 75%, 60% to 80%, 65% to 70%, 65% to 75%, 65% to 80%, 70% to 75%, 70% to 80% and 75% to 80%, by weight, of the liquid concentrate. Exemplary concentrations of the polar solvent in the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate are at or about 50%, 52%, 55%, 58%, 60%, 62%, 65%, 68%, 70%, 72% and 76% (w/w) of the concentrate.

In the provided methods for making the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, the polar solvent is added to the water phase. In one example, the polar solvent is water, e.g., purified water, such as water that is purified prior to adding it to the concentrate formula, for example, by charcoal filter, ion exchange, reverse osmosis, UV sterilization and/or filtering using a filter, for example, a 50-100 micron filter. Typically, when a filter is used, it is an end point of use filter, which filters the water before it reaches the tank in the provided process. Alternatively, previously filtered water can be added to the concentrates.

f. Co-Surfactants (Emulsifiers)

The concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can further contain one or more co-surfactants (emulsifiers). For example, a co-surfactant can be included to improve emulsification of the non-polar ingredient and/or the stability of the composition, for example, by preventing or slowing oxidation of the non-polar ingredient. Exemplary of a co-surfactant that can be used in the provided concentrates is a phospholipid, for example, phosphatidylcholine. Other exemplary co-surfactants include non-ionic surfactants, such as sugar-derived surfactants, including fatty acid esters of sugars and sugar derivatives, and PEG-derived surfactants, such as PEG derivatives of sterols, PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters.

When present, such as in the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, the amount of the co-surfactant typically is present in a concentration less than or less than about 10%, typically less than or less than about 5%, for example, the total amount of co-surfactant as a percentage (%), by weight, of the liquid concentrate (wt %) can be, e.g., less than or less than about 10%, such as less than or about 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3.15%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.75%, 1.5%, 1.25%, 1%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.25%, 0.15% or less, by weight, of the liquid concentrate.

i. Phospholipids

Exemplary of the co-surfactants that can be used in the provided compositions are phospholipids. Phospholipids are amphipathic lipid-like molecules, typically containing a hydrophobic portion at one end of the molecule and a hydrophilic portion at the other end of the molecule. A number of phospholipids can be used as ingredients in the provided compositions, for example, lecithin, including phosphatidylcholine (PC), phosphatidylethanolamine (PE), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), phosphatidylserine (PS), phosphatidylglycerol (PG), phosphatidic acid (PA), phosphatidylinositol (PI), sphingomyelin (SPM) or a combination thereof. Typically, the phospholipid is phosphatidylcholine (PC), which sometimes is referred to by the general name “lecithin.” Exemplary of the phospholipids that can be used as co-surfactants in the provided compositions are the phospholipids sold by Lipoid, LLC (Newark, N.J.), for example, Purified Egg Lecithins, Purified Soybean Lecithins, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Lecithins, Egg Phospholipids, Soybean Phospholipids, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Phospholipids, Synthetic Phospholipids, PEG-ylated Phospholipids and phospholipid blends. Exemplary of the phosphatidylcholine that can be used as a co-surfactant in the provided compositions is the phosphatidylcholine composition sold by Lipoid, LLC, under the name Lipoid 5100, which is derived from soy extract and contains greater than or greater than about 95% phosphatidylcholine.

ii. Sugar-Derived Surfactants

Exemplary sugar-derived surfactants include, but are not limited to, sugar fatty acid esters including fatty acid esters of sucrose, glucose, maltose and other sugars, esterified to fatty acids of varying lengths (e.g., containing a varying numbers of carbons). The fatty acids typically have carbon chains between 8 and 28 carbons in length, and typically between 8 and 20, or between 8 and 18 or between 12 and 18, such as, but not limited to, stearic acid (18 carbons), oleic acid (18 carbons), palmitic acid (16 carbons), myristic acid (14 carbons) and lauric acid (12 carbons). Typically, the sugar ester surfactants are sucrose ester surfactants, typically sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants.

iii. PEG-Derived Surfactants

Exemplary PEG-derived surfactants include, but are not limited to, PEG derivatives of sterols, e.g., a cholesterol or a sitosterol (including, for example, any of the PEG derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,632,443); PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins, for example, some forms of vitamin A (e.g., retinol) or vitamin D (e.g., vitamin D1-D5); and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as polysorbates, including polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (also called polysorbate 80) and analogs (e.g., homologs) of polysorbate 80, such as, for example, polysorbate 20 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate), polysorbate 40 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate) and polysorbate 60 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate); and stearic acid derivatives, including, for example, polyethylene glycol 400 distearate (PEG 400 DS), such as the PEG 400 DS sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition (Maywood, N.J.).

iv. Sucrose Fatty Acid Ester Surfactants

Sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE) surfactants contain one or more sucrose fatty acid esters, which are non-ionic surfactants that contain sucrose in the hydrophilic portions and fatty acids in the hydrophobic portions. The sucrose fatty acid esters can be made by well-known methods (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,480,616; 3,644,333; 3,714,144; 4,710,567; 4,898,935; 4,996,309; 4,995,911; 5,011,922 and 5,017,697 and International Patent Pub. No. WO 2007/082149), typically in an esterification reaction as described in U.S. Pub. No. 2012-0016026.

Because sucrose contains eight hydroxy (OH) groups, the esterification reaction can join the sucrose molecule to one fatty acid molecule, or can join it to a plurality of fatty acid molecules, producing different degrees of esterification, e.g., mono-, di-, tri- and poly-(up to octa-) fatty acid esters, but primarily mono-, di- and/or tri-esters. The degree of esterification can depend on conditions of esterification. The esterification reaction can be carried out with a single type of fatty acid, or a plurality of fatty acids, such as fatty acids with varying carbon chain lengths, branched and linear fatty acids, and/or saturated or unsaturated fatty acids. The esterification reaction with a single fatty acid can produce a single ester, and typically forms more than one ester, such as mono- di-, tri- and/or poly-esters, formed from one reaction. The relative amounts of mono- di-tri- and/or poly-esters can depend on reaction conditions.

The fatty acid in the sucrose fatty acid ester can be any fatty acid, and can contain between 4 and 28 carbon atoms, typically between 8 and 28 carbon atoms, and typically between 8 and 25 carbon atoms, such as between 8 and 18 carbon atoms, such as 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 carbon atoms. The fatty acid can be synthetic or naturally occurring, and include linear and branched fatty acids. The fatty acids include, but are not limited to, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, caproic acid, capric (or decanoic) acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid and pelargonic (or nonanoic) acid.

Thus, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, and mixtures thereof, and typically contain sucrose monoesters. The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include single fatty acid esters and also include homogeneous mixtures of sucrose esters, containing members with different lengths of fatty acid carbon chain and/or members with different degrees of esterification. For example, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include mixtures of monoesters, diesters, triesters, and/or polyesters. The sugar ester surfactants further include sucrose fatty acid ester analogs and homologs and mixtures thereof. In general, sucrose fatty acid esters, including mixtures of sucrose fatty acid esters, can have varying HLB values, such as HLB values ranging from at or about 1 to at or about 20. The HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester generally depends on the degree of esterification (e.g., the average degree of esterification in a mixture of different esters). Typically, the lower the degree of esterification (e.g., average degree), the higher the HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester or mixture thereof. Exemplary sucrose esters include sucrose distearate (HLB=3), sucrose distearate/monostearate (HLB 12), sucrose dipalmitate (HLB=7.4), sucrose monostearate (HLB=15), sucrose monopalmitate (HLB>10), sucrose monolaurate (HLB 15). Typically, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants in the provided concentrates have an HLB value of between at or about 13 and at or about 20, such as at or about 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, and typically between at or about 13 and at or about 18, such as, but not limited to, HLB values of at or about 15, 16 and 17, such as, for example, sucrose ester surfactants including sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monolaurate and sucrose monostearate.

The sugar ester surfactants include sucrose ester blends, for example, sucrose ester mixtures containing a specified amount (e.g., percent, by weight) of sucrose monoesters. Exemplary surfactants include sucrose ester mixtures having at least at or about 50%, by weight (w/w), monoester, such as at least or about at least 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100%, by weight (w/w), sucrose monoesters, and typically at least at or about 60%, by weight, or at least at or about 70%, by weight (w/w), monoesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid monoesters, such as sucrose monocaprylate, sucrose monodecanoate, sucrose monolaurate, sucrose monomyristate, sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monostearate, sucrose monopelargonate, sucrose monoundecanoate, sucrose monotridecanoate, sucrose monopentadecanoate and sucrose monoheptadecanoate. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include mixtures containing varying percentages of monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, such as, but not limited to, a mixture having at or about 72% monoesters, 23% diesters, 5% triesters and 0% polyesters; a mixture having at or about 61% monoesters, 30% diesters, 7% triesters, and 2% polyesters; and a mixture having at or about 52% monoesters, 36% diesters, 10% triesters and 2% polyesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan (which, in some examples, can be produced according to the methods described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,898,935; 4,996,309; 4,995,911; 5,011,922 and 5,017,697), and distributed through Montello Inc., Tulsa, Okla., such as the F-160 and F-140 grade esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, and sucrose esters sold under the trade name SURFHOPE® SE PHARMA, by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. These sucrose fatty acid esters are mixtures of esters with different degrees of esterification. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include Ryoto sugar esters, which are food-grade esters sold by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. Other exemplary sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants are described in Youan et al. (2003) AAPS PharmaSci 5(2): Article 22 (1-9) and in Okamoto et al. (2005) Biol. Pharm. Bull. 28(9):1689-1694.

g. Emulsion Stabilizers (Co-Emulsifiers)

The provided liquid concentrates can further contain one or more emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers), which can be used to stabilize the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate and/or the aqueous compositions containing the diluted concentrates. For example, the emulsion stabilizer can increase the viscosity of the liquid concentrate. One or more emulsion stabilizers can be added, for example, during formulation after evaluation of an initial concentrate, particularly if the oil and water phases of the initial concentrate (or the aqueous liquid dilution composition resulting from dilution of the initial concentrate) appear to be separating. Addition of the emulsion stabilizer can prevent separation of the oil and water phases.

Exemplary of an emulsion stabilizer that can be used in the provided compositions is a composition containing a blend of gums, for example, gums used as emulsifying agents, for example, a blend containing one or more of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate. Exemplary of such an emulsion stabilizer includes the emulsion stabilizer sold under the brand name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other gums can be included in the emulsion stabilizer, for example, gum acacia, ester gums and sugar beet pectin. Exemplary emulsion stabilizers include modified food starches. These include the modified gum acacia sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ticamulsion® A-2010 Powder, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other exemplary emulsion stabilizers containing an ester gum are, for example, the emulsion stabilizer sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ester Gum 8BG, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.) or Ester Gum 8BG, available from Hercules/Pinova (Brunswick, Ga.). Others sold by Ingredion, Inc (Westchester, Ill.) under the trademarks CAPSUL®, FIRMTEX®, THERMFLO®, THERMTEX®, and TEXTRA® and others, can be included in the compositions provided herein. Other blends of similar gums can also be used as emulsion stabilizers.

The emulsion stabilizer can be added to the water phase, the oil phase, or both the water and the oil phase, during formation of the liquid concentrates and compositions. In one example, the emulsion stabilizer is added to the water phase at a concentration, such that it represents less than 1% or about 1% w/w of the liquid concentrate. In another example, the emulsion stabilizer is added for a final concentration of greater than 1%, such as at or about 1.5% w/w of the liquid concentrate. In one example, the emulsion stabilizer is added to the water phase for a final concentration of between 0.1% or about 0.1% and 1% or about 1%, for example, 0.1%, 0.12%, 0.13%, 0.14%, 0.15%, 0.16%, 0.17%, 0.18%, 0.19%, 0.2%, 0.25%, 0.3%, 0.31%, 0.32%, 0.33%, 0.34%, 0.35%, 0.36%, 0.37%, 0.38%, 0.39%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9% or 1% w/w of the liquid concentrate. In one example, the emulsion stabilizer is added to the oil phase such that it represents less than 0.1% or about 0.1%, for example, between 0.01% or about 0.01% and 0.1% or about 0.1%, for example, 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.061%, 0.062%, 0.063%, 0.0635%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09% or 0.1%, by weight (w/w), of the concentrate. In one example, the emulsion stabilizer is added to the water phase and the oil phase, for example, at a concentration within the oil and water phase concentration ranges listed above. In one such example, the emulsion stabilizer represents less than 1%, for example, between 0.01% or about 0.01% and 1% or about 1% (w/w), emulsion stabilizer, for example, 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.061%, 0.062%, 0.063%, 0.0635%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.12%, 0.13%, 0.14%, 0.15%, 0.16%, 0.17%, 0.18%, 0.19%, 0.2%, 0.25%, 0.3%, 0.31%, 0.32%, 0.33%, 0.34%, 0.35%, 0.36%, 0.37%, 0.38%, 0.39%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9% or 1%, by weight (w/w), of the liquid concentrate. The emulsion stabilizer, such as Ticamulsion, can be added in higher concentrations, including 5%, 10%, 15%, 18%, 20%, or 25%, by weight, or more.

h. Flavors

The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates and compositions provided herein can further contain one or more flavors or flavoring agents, for example, any compound that can add flavor to the concentrate and/or to the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate, for example, the food or beverage product containing the concentrate. Several flavors are well known. Any flavor can be added to the concentrates, for example, any flavor sold by Mission Flavors (Foothill Ranch, Calif.). Exemplary of flavors that can be used are fruit flavors, such as guava, kiwi, peach, mango, papaya, pineapple, banana, strawberry, raspberry, blueberry, orange, grapefruit, tangerine, lemon, lime and lemon-lime; cola flavors, tea flavors, coffee flavors, chocolate flavors, dairy flavors, root beer and birch beer flavors, methyl salicylate (wintergreen oil, sweet birch oil), citrus oils and other flavors. Typically, the flavors are safe and/or desirable for human consumption, for example, GRAS or Kosher-certified flavors. An exemplary flavoring agent that can be used in the concentrates and compositions provided herein are lemon oil, for example lemon oil sold by Mission Flavors (Foothill Ranch, Calif.), and D-limonene, for example, 99% GRAS certified D-Limonene, sold by Florida Chemical (Winter Haven, Fla.). The flavor can be added, using the provided methods, to the nanoemulsion concentrates after combining the oil and water phases. Alternatively, flavor(s) can be added to the water and/or oil phase directly.

i. pH Adjusters

One or more pH adjusters can be added to the provided liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, typically to the emulsion that is formed after combining the water and oil phases according to the provided methods. In particular, the pH adjuster can be used in compositions containing water. Alternatively, the pH adjuster can be added, at an appropriate concentration to achieve a desired pH, to the oil phase and/or the water phase. Typically, the pH adjuster is added to adjust the pH of the concentrate to within a range of 2.0 or about 2.0 to 4.0 or about 4.0. One or more of a plurality of pH adjusting agents can be used. Typically, the pH adjusting agent is safe for human consumption, for example, GRAS certified. The pH adjuster can be citric acid. An exemplary pH adjuster suitable for use with the concentrates provided herein includes the citric acid sold by Mitsubishi Chemical (Dublin, Ohio). Another exemplary pH adjuster is phosphoric acid, such as Food Grade 80% Phosphoric Acid, sold by Univar.

Typically, the concentration of pH adjuster added to the provided liquid concentrates is less than 5% or about 5%, for example, less than or about 4%, 3.5%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.5%, 1%, 0.9%, 0.8%, 0.7%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1% or less, by weight, of the liquid concentrate.

j. Soluble Fibers

The liquid nanoemulsion concentrates provided herein can contain soluble fiber. Soluble fibers include any soluble dietary fiber that can be readily fermented in the colon, typically a plant based dietary fiber, for example, a soluble fiber from legumes, vegetables, such as broccoli and carrots, root vegetables, such as potatoes, sweet potatoes and onions, oats, rye, chia, barley and fruits, such as prunes, plums, berries, bananas, apples and pears. Typically, soluble dietary fiber contains non-starch polysaccharides, such as arabinoxylans, cellulose, dextrans, inulin, beta-glucans, fructo-oligosaccharides, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides. Soluble fibers include, but are not limited to, fructo-oligosaccharides, for example, inulins, for example, inulins found in chicory, Jerusalem artichoke, dahlia, garlic, leeks and onions, fructans and water-soluble soybean fiber. Exemplary of a soluble fiber is an inulin, for example, Oliggo-Fiber Instant Inulin (Fibruline® Instant) (supplied by Cosucra-Groupe Warcoing SA, Belgium, sold by Gillco Products, San Marcos, Calif.), containing chicory inulin.

k. Additional Ingredients

The compositions, e.g., liquid dilution compositions and compositions for direct consumption, such as the soft gels and powders and pre-spray emulsions, provided herein additionally can contain further ingredients. For example, compositions provided herein can contain one or more stabilizers (i.e., stabilizing system). The beverage compositions can additionally contain sweeteners. The compositions provided herein also can contain, for example, pH adjusters and/or antifoaming agents.

i. Additional Non-Polar Compounds

The compositions provided herein can contain one or more additional non-polar compounds. The compositions, for example, the compositions for direct consumption, such as the soft gels and powders and pre-spray emulsions, can contain a non-polar ingredient that is a non-polar compound or can contain an additional non-polar compound or both. Suitable additional non-polar compounds include any compound that can induce, promote or enhance one or more effects, such as upon delivery to a subject or upon administration to a sample, for example, sympathomimetic effects, stimulatory effects, vasoconstriction, decongestion (e.g., bronchial or nasal decongestion), increased energy, endurance, mood-enhancement, appetite suppression and/or weight loss. The additional non-polar compounds include, but are not limited to, alkaloids, e.g., caffeine, synephrine, and γ-aminobutyric acid (GABA) derivatives, e.g., 4-amino-3-phenylbutyric acid (i.e., phenibut), plant extracts, particularly those with medicinal and herbal effects, and any combination thereof (such as those described above in section D.1.b.vii.). Typically, the additional non-polar compounds are food-approved, i.e., edible or ingestible, non-polar compounds, for example, non-polar compounds that are safe and/or approved for human consumption.

In general, the compositions provided herein contain at least one non-polar ingredient, i.e., at least one non-polar ingredient containing non-polar compound, or an additional non-polar ingredient. Typically, when included in a beverage composition, the total amount of additional non-polar compound included in the provided beverage composition is less than 30% or about 30%, typically less than 20% or about 20%, for example, less than 30%, 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.5%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

ii. Stabilizers

The compositions provided herein contain one or more stabilizers, or a stabilizing system. Stabilizers include any compound used to stabilize the non-polar ingredients in the beverage compositions. The stabilizer or stabilizing system can aid in retaining one or more desirable properties of the compositions, for example the appearance, taste or odor. The compositions provided herein containing non-polar ingredients and a stabilizer or stabilizing system can retain one or more desirable properties of the beverage composition for a period of time after formulation, such as at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 days, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 weeks, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 months, or at or about 1, 2, 3, or 4 years. The stabilizers include, but are not limited to, carbonates and bicarbonates, acids, antioxidants, and any combination thereof. Typically the stabilizers or stabilizing system are food-approved, i.e., edible or ingestible, stabilizers, for example, stabilizers that are safe and/or approved for human consumption.

In general, the beverage compositions contain more than one stabilizer.

Typically, the total amount of stabilizers included in the provided beverage compositions is less than 20% or about 20%, typically less than 10% or about 10%, for example, less than 20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.5%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(a) Bicarbonates or Carbonates

Exemplary of a stabilizer used in the provided beverage compositions is a bicarbonate or carbonate, for example, any edible or food-approved bicarbonate or carbonate. Examples of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates include sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and any combination thereof. In some examples, the carbonate or bicarbonate is a carbonated beverage, such as a soda, flavored soda, carbonated water or carbonated juice. Alternatively, the beverage can be carbonated by the addition of carbon dioxide. Selection of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates for use in the provided beverage compositions is within the skill of the skilled artisan.

Typically, the amount of bicarbonate or carbonate used in the provided beverage compositions is between or between about 0.01% and 7%, by weight, of the composition, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 7%, between at or about 1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 7%, between at or about 2% and at or about 5%, between at or about 2% and at or about 4%, between at or about 3% and at or about 7%, between at or about 3% and at or about 5%, between at or about 4% and at or about 7%, between at or about 6% and at or about 7%, between at or about 5% and at or about 7%, or between at or about 5% and at or about 6%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of bicarbonate or carbonate used in the provided beverage compositions is less than 7% or about 7%, typically less than 5% or about 5%, for example at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9%, 3.0%, 3.1%, 3.2%, 3.3%, 3.4%, 3.5%, 3.6%, 3.7%, 3.8%, 3.9%, 4%, 4.1%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.4%, 4.5%, 4.6%, 4.7%, 4.8%, 4.9%, 5%, 5.1%, 5.2%, 5.3%, 5.4%, 5.5%, 5.6%, 5.7%, 5.8%, 5.9%, 6%, 6.2%, 6.5%, 6.7%, or 7%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(b) Acids

In one example, the stabilizer used in the beverage compositions contains one or more acids, for example, any compound added to the beverage composition that can lower the pH of the composition. The acid can be, for example, an edible, ingestible or food-approved acid. Exemplary of suitable acids for use in the provided beverage compositions are citric acid, phosphoric acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, maleic acid, and any combination thereof. In one example, the acid is citric acid.

Typically, the amount of acid added to the provided beverage compositions is between or between about 0.01% and 5%, by weight, of the composition, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 5%, between at or about 2% and at or about 4%, between at or about 2% and at or about 3%, between at or about 3% and at or about 5%, between at or about 3% and at or about 4%, or between at or about 4% and at or about 5%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of acid added to the provided beverage compositions is less than 5% or about 5%, typically less than 4% or about 4%, for example, at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9%, 3.0%, 3.1%, 3.2%, 3.3%, 3.4%, 3.5%, 3.6%, 3.7%, 3.8%, 3.9%, 4%, 4.1%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.4%, 4.5%, 4.6%, 4.7%, 4.8%, 4.9% or 5%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(c) Antioxidants

In one example, the stabilizer used in the beverage compositions contains an antioxidant, for example, a molecule that is capable of inhibiting the oxidation of other molecules. Antioxidants include molecules that scavenge free radicals. Suitable antioxidants include those that are used as ingredients in dietary supplements. The antioxidant can be a natural antioxidant or a synthetic antioxidant.

Examples of antioxidants include, but are not limited to hormones, carotenoids, carotenoid terpenoids, non-carotenoid terpenoids, flavonoids, flavonoid polyphenolics (e.g., bioflavonoids), flavonols, flavones, phenols, polyphenols, esters of phenols, esters of polyphenols, nonflavonoid phenolics, isothiocyanates, vitamins and vitamin cofactors, such as vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, vitamin E phosphate and ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10), ascorbic acid, citric acid, rosemary oil, minerals, such as mineral selenium and manganese, melatonin, α-carotene, β-carotene, lycopene, lutein, zeanthin, crypoxanthin, resveratrol, eugenol, quercetin, catechin, gossypol, hesperetin, curcumin, ferulic acid, thymol, hydroxytyrosol, tumeric, thyme, olive oil, lipoic acid, glutathione, glutamine, oxalic acid, tocopherol-derived compounds, di-alpha-tocopheryl phosphate, tocotrienols, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, tert-butylhydroquinone, acetic acid, pectin, tocotrienol, tocopherol, coenzyme Q10 (coQ10), zeaxanthin, astaxanthin, canthaxanthin, saponins, limonoids, kaempferol, myricetin, isorhamnetin, proanthocyanidins, quercetin, rutin, luteolin, apigenin, tangeritin, hesperetin, naringenin, eriodictyol, flavan-3-ols (e.g., anthocyanadins), gallocatechins, epicatechin and its gallate forms, epigallocatechin and its gallate forms theaflavin and its gallate forms, thearubigins, isoflavone phytoestrogens, genistein, daidzein, glycitein, anythocyanins, cyaniding, delphinidin, malvidin, pelargonidin and peonidin. In one example, the antioxidant is vitamin C. In another example, the antioxidant is a coenzyme Q-containing compound, such as ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10).

Typically, the amount of antioxidant added to the provided beverage compositions is between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 1% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 3%, between at or about 2% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 2.5% and at or about 3%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of antioxidant added to the provided beverage compositions is less than 5% or about 5%, typically less than 3% or about 2%, for example, at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9% or 3.0%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

2. Concentrates

a. Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Exemplary of the provided compositions are pre-emulsion concentrates containing one or more non-polar ingredients. The pre-emulsion concentrates can be semi-solid compositions, typically having a waxy or creamy consistency, for example, the consistency of a substance such as wax, for example, a lip balm, at room temperature, for example, at 25° C. or about 25° C., and become liquid at higher temperatures, for example, when heated to higher temperatures, such as to 125° F. or about 125° F., or to 50° C. or about 50° C. or to 60° C. or about 60° C.

The pre-emulsion concentrates can be diluted into aqueous media, using the provided methods, to form the provided liquid dilution compositions containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) and non-polar ingredients. The pre-emulsion concentrates are formulated such that dilution of the concentrates, for example, in aqueous media, yields a composition having one or more desirable properties, for example, clarity; safety; taste; smell; stability, for example, lack of phase separation, “ringing” and/or precipitation over time; and/or bioavailability. In one example, the desirable property is the ability of the provided pre-emulsion concentrates to yield a clear or partially clear aqueous liquid dilution composition when it is diluted into aqueous medium, for example, a beverage such as water. In another example, the desirable property relates to the safety of the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the desirability of the pre-emulsion concentrates for human consumption, for example, in foods and beverages. In another example, it can be desirable that the pre-emulsion concentrate contains less than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients. In another example, it can be desirable that the pre-emulsion concentrate contains greater than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients.

In addition to the non-polar ingredients, the pre-emulsion concentrates contain at least one surfactant, such as the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein. Typically, the surfactant has an HLB value between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19, or about 20. Exemplary of suitable surfactants are tocopherol polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), such as the TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives described herein, and other surfactants having similar properties to TPGS, for example, other surfactants having HLB values between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20. Typically, the surfactant is a natural surfactant, for example, a surfactant that is GRAS (generally recognized as safe)-certified by the FDA and/or Kosher certified, for example, TPGS.

Typically, the pre-emulsion concentrates further contain one or more additional ingredients. Exemplary of additional ingredients that can be included in the pre-emulsion compositions are preservatives, solvents, co-surfactants, emulsion-stabilizers, additional non-polar ingredients, and flavoring agents, as described herein.

Typically, the pre-emulsion concentrates are formulated such that, when diluted into an aqueous medium (e.g., water), they yield a dilution composition that is a nanoemulsion, in which the non-polar ingredient(s) are present in micelles. These micelles, containing the non-polar ingredient surrounded by the one or more surfactants, facilitate the dispersion of the non-polar ingredient among the polar solvent(s) of the aqueous medium in the dilution compositions. Typically, the pre-emulsion concentrates are formulated such that the micelles in the dilution composition have a small or relatively small particle size, for example, less than 1000 or about 1000 nm, less than 500 or about 500 nm, typically less than 300 or about 300 nm, typically less than 250 or about 250 nm, typically less than 200 or about 200 nm, for example, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150 or 200 nm. Smaller particle size correlates with increased clarity of the dilution compositions that results from diluting the pre-emulsion concentrates. For example, a liquid with a smaller particle size can be more clear than a liquid with a larger particle size. Small particle size also can contribute to other desirable properties, for example, stability.

A number of parameters of the pre-emulsion concentrates, including ingredients, their relative concentrations, and methods for making the pre-emulsion concentrates, affect the particle size of the liquid dilution compositions made by diluting the pre-emulsion concentrates. By extension, these parameters of the pre-emulsion concentrates also affect the desirable properties of the dilution compositions, for example, the clarity of the dilution compositions. In particular, the nature of the surfactant, particularly the HLB of the surfactant, and the relative concentrations of the surfactant and the non-polar ingredient in the pre-emulsion concentrates, contribute to small particle size and clarity of the dilution compositions. Typically, several of these parameters and properties relate to one another. For example, several of the parameters contribute to the particle size, typically small particle size. Particle size contributes directly to clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the pre-emulsion concentrates. Particle size also can relate to other properties, for example, stability, lack of “ringing” and/or precipitate formation of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the pre-emulsion concentrates.

Accordingly, properties of the ingredients and their relative concentrations in the pre-emulsion concentrates are important for the ability of the pre-emulsion concentrate to yield desirable dilution compositions. Determining the appropriate ingredients, and relative concentrations thereof, that yield dilution compositions having desirable properties is carried out using the provided methods for formulating the pre-emulsion concentrates.

i. Formulating the Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Using the provided formulation methods, the pre-emulsion concentrates are formulated by selecting ingredients and concentration ratios of the ingredients that yield compositions having one or more desired properties. When formulating the pre-emulsion concentrates, selected ingredients and starting concentrations are used to make initial pre-emulsion concentrates, which typically are diluted, evaluated and modified, if necessary.

As a first step in formulating the provided pre-emulsion concentrates, one or more initial pre-emulsion concentrates are made and evaluated for desired properties. For this step, ingredients are selected, for example, from one or more of the lists of ingredients provided below. A starting concentration (weight percentage) of each selected ingredient is selected from within an appropriate concentration range for that ingredient or category of ingredient. For example, a starting surfactant concentration, such as a water-soluble vitamin E derivative, e.g., TPGS, is selected from within an appropriate surfactant concentration range. In some cases, the initial pre-emulsion concentrate is formulated based on the ingredients, and concentrations thereof, of an existing pre-emulsion concentrate having one or more desired properties.

The initial pre-emulsion concentrate(s) is then made, using the methods for making the pre-emulsion concentrates provided below, adding each ingredient at its starting concentration at the appropriate step. In one example, more than one initial pre-emulsion concentrate is made. For example, multiple initial pre-emulsion concentrates, each having a different concentration of one or more ingredients, can be made and compared. For example, multiple initial pre-emulsion concentrates can be made in order to test various representative concentrations within an appropriate concentration range for one or more particular ingredients.

In a typical example, the initial pre-emulsion concentrate is made by including at least one surfactant, such as the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, having an HLB value between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, typically a tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS) surfactant.

In one example, the starting concentration of the surfactant, for example, a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture described herein, e.g., TPGS, is greater than 50% or about 50%, typically greater than 60% or about 60%, typically greater than 65% or about 65%, for example, greater than 70% or about 70%, for example, a starting concentration within the concentration range of between 50% or about 50% and 95% or about 95%, between 60% or about 60% and 95% or about 95%, typically between 65% or about 65% and 90% or about 90%, for example, between 69% or about 69% and 90% or about 90%, for example, between 69% or about 69% and 89% or about 89%, for example, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 69.5, 69.9, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 79.5, 79.9, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 89.5, 89.9, or 90%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate.

In another example, the starting concentration of the surfactant, for example, a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture described herein, e.g., TPGS, is greater than 20% or about 20%, typically greater than 30% or about 30%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 55% or about 55%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 50% or about 50%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 45% or about 45%, for example, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate. This example is typically used for pre-emulsion concentrates where the non-polar ingredient includes a phytosterol.

Also, in this typical example, the initial pre-emulsion concentrate further includes at least one non-polar ingredient (e.g., non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound). In one example, the starting concentration of the non-polar ingredient (e.g., non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound), or the total of all of the one or more non-polar ingredients, is chosen from within a concentration range of between 5% or about 5% and 35% or about 35%, typically between 10% or about 10% and 30% or about 30%, for example, between 10% or about 10% and 20% or about 20%, or between 20% or about 20% and 30% or about 30%, for example, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate.

In another example, the starting concentration of the non-polar ingredient (e.g., non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound), or the total of all of the one or more non-polar ingredients, is chosen from within a concentration range of between 1% or about 1% and 50% or about 50%. In this example, which typically is used when using more than one non-polar ingredient, the total concentration of the non-polar ingredients is chosen from within a concentration range of between 30% or about 30% and 55% or about 55%, for example between 40% or about 40% and 50% or about 50%, by weight, of the composition. Exemplary of starting concentrations for individual non-polar ingredients used in this example are between 1% and 50%, for example, 1%, 10.5%, 34%, or 45%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate, and other concentrations within the range.

In one example, the initial pre-emulsion concentrate further includes other ingredients, for example, preservative(s), for example, benzyl alcohol; co-surfactant(s), for example, a phospholipid, e.g., phosphatidylcholine; a non-polar solvent, for example, an oil, and/or an emulsion stabilizer. Typically, a polar solvent, e.g., water, is not added as an ingredient to the pre-emulsion concentrate.

After making the initial pre-emulsion concentrate(s), the pre-emulsion concentrate(s) is evaluated for one or more desired properties, for example, the ability to form dilution compositions (e.g., clear dilution compositions or dilution compositions having a particular turbidity value, particle size or other property). The ability to form dilution compositions having one or more properties is assessed by diluting the pre-emulsion concentrate in aqueous medium, for example, diluting the pre-emulsion composition in the aqueous medium at a dilution factor of between 1:10 or about 1:10 and 1:1000 or about 1:1000 or more, typically between 1:10 or about 1:10 and 1:500 or about 1:500 or more, for example, diluted not more than 1:10 or about 1:10, 1:20 or about 1:20, 1:25 or about 1:25, 1:50 or about 1:50, 1:100 or about 1:100, 1:200 or about 1:200, 1:250 or about 1:250, 1:300 or about 1:300, 1:400 or about 1:400, 1:500 or about 1:500, for example, 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:35, 1:40, 1:50, 1:55, 1:60, 1:65, 1:70, 1:75, 1:80, 1:90, 1:100, 1:110, 1:120, 1:130, 1:140, 1:150, 1:160, 1:170, 1:180, 1:190, 1:200, 1:210, 1:220, 1:230, 1:235, 1:240, 1:250, 1:260, 1:270, 1:280, 1:290, 1:300, 1:350, 1:400, 1:450, 1:500, or more. In one example, the dilution is carried out by including one or more drops of the heated pre-emulsion concentrate in the aqueous medium, for example, in 25 mL or more of the aqueous medium.

After evaluation, the ingredients, and/or concentrations thereof, can be adjusted in order to generate the desired properties in the final pre-emulsion concentrate. Typically, the concentration of the non-polar ingredient and/or the surfactant, for example, a water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition, e.g., TPGS, is the concentration that is adjusted after evaluating the initial pre-emulsion concentrate. Similarly, when formulating multiple initial pre-emulsion concentrates, one or more of the non-polar ingredients and the surfactant are varied among the multiple initial pre-emulsion concentrates. In some cases, following evaluation, it can be determined that additional ingredients (not included in the initial formulation) are needed or desirable for achieving the desired properties of a particular pre-emulsion concentrate. This process can be repeated until a pre-emulsion concentrate having the desired property or properties is generated.

ii. Exemplary Ingredients and Typical Concentration Ranges

Each of the provided pre-emulsion concentrates and other compositions contains at least one non-polar ingredient, for example, a non-polar ingredient that is or contains one or more non-polar compounds, and a surfactant, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, e.g., mixtures of monomers and dimers of TPGS. Any non-polar ingredient that is or contains one or more non-polar compounds can be formulated with the provided methods and pre-emulsion concentrates. Several exemplary non-polar ingredients that can be incorporated into the provided concentrates are described herein below. Typically, the non-polar ingredient is or contains a non-polar compound, for example, an oil-based non-polar compound, for example, a polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA), a coenzyme Q, or a phytochemical.

In one example, for formulating the initial pre-emulsion concentrates, the starting concentration of the non-polar ingredient, or the total of all the non-polar ingredients, typically is chosen from within a concentration range of between 5% or about 5% and 35% or about 35%, typically between 10% or about 10% and 30% or about 30%, for example, between 10% or about 10% and 20% or about 20%, or between 20% or about 20% and 30% or about 30%, for example, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate. In another example, the starting concentration of the non-polar ingredient (e.g., non-polar ingredient that is or contains a non-polar compound), or the total of all the non-polar ingredients, is chosen from within a concentration range of between 1% or about 1% and 50% or about 50%. In this example, which typically is used when using more than one non-polar ingredient, the total concentration of the non-polar ingredients is chosen from within a concentration range of between 30% or about 30% and 55% or about 55%, for example between 40% or about 40% and 50% or about 50%, by weight, of the concentrate. Exemplary of starting concentrations for individual non-polar ingredients used in this example are between 1% and 50%, for example, 1%, 10.5%, 34% or 45%, by weight, of the concentrate, and other concentrations within the range.

In addition to the non-polar ingredient, the pre-emulsion concentrates contain at least one surfactant that is the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture described herein, such as TPGS. The surfactant has an HLB value of between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20. Exemplary of suitable surfactants are the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, such as TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives and other surfactants having similar properties, for example, any surfactant having an HLB value between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, where vitamin E derivative is provided as a mixture of dimer and monomer with at least 13% percent dimer, typically at least 29%, 35%, or 50% dimer, and the remainder monomer and about or no more than 10%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, or 1% other minor contaminants, impurities or higher forms of polymer. Surfactants, HLB values and methods for determining HLB values are well known.

In one example, the starting concentration of water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, e.g., TPGS, is greater than 50% or about 50%, typically greater than 60% or about 60%, typically greater than 65% or about 65%, for example, greater than 70% or about 70%, for example, a starting concentration within the concentration range of between 50% or about 50% and 95% or about 95%, between 60% or about 60% and 95% or about 95%, typically between 65% or about 65% and 90% or about 90%, for example, between 69% or about 69% and 90% or about 90%, for example, between 69% or about 69% and 89% or about 89%, for example, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 69.5, 69.9, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 79.5, 79.9, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 89.5, 89.9, or 90%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate.

In another example, the starting concentration of the surfactant, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein, e.g., TPGS, is greater than 20% or about 20%, typically greater than 30% or about 30%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 55% or about 55%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 50% or about 50%, for example, between 30% or about 30% and 45% or about 45%, for example, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55%, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate. This example is typically used for pre-emulsion concentrates where the non-polar ingredient includes a phytosterol.

One or more, typically more than one, additional ingredients can be added to the initial pre-emulsion concentrate. For example, the pre-emulsion concentrates typically contain at least one preservative, typically a natural preservative, for example, benzyl alcohol. Exemplary of other additional ingredients that can be added to the pre-emulsion concentrates, including the initial pre-emulsion concentrates, are emulsion stabilizers, for example, a blend of gums; a non-polar solvent for the non-polar ingredient, for example, an oil other than the non-polar ingredient, e.g., vitamin E oil or flax seed oil; a pH adjuster, for example, citric acid or phosphoric acid; one or more flavoring agents, for example, D-limonene or lemon oil; a co-surfactant, for example, a phospholipid, e.g., phosphatidylcholine.

The appropriate concentration ranges for the additional ingredients are described in individual sections below. Typically, the concentration of the additional ingredients depends, in part, on the concentrations of the non-polar ingredient and/or of the surfactant. Typically, the concentrations of these three ingredients are the focus of the formulating methods. For example, when it is determined that modifications to ingredient concentrations in the initial pre-emulsion concentrate should be made, it typically is the concentration of one or more of these two ingredients, i.e., the non-polar ingredient and/or surfactant, that is/are adjusted.

In one example, it can be desirable to add one or more of the additional ingredients after evaluation of the initial pre-emulsion concentrate, for example, in order to improve the pre-emulsion concentrate with respect to one or more desired properties.

b. Liquid Nanoemulsion Concentrates

Provided herein are liquid nanoemulsion concentrates (also called “liquid concentrates”) containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein, one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain one or more non-polar compounds, and a polar solvent. The liquid concentrates, which include emulsions, can be diluted into aqueous medium to form aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein and non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds. The liquid concentrates are formulated based on one or more desirable properties, such as clarity; safety; taste; smell; stability, for example, lack of phase separation, “ringing” and/or precipitation over time; and/or bioavailability of the concentrate and/or the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the concentrate. In one example, the desirable property is the ability of the provided concentrate to yield a clear or partially clear aqueous liquid dilution composition when it is diluted into aqueous medium, e.g., water, such as in a beverage product. In another example, the desirable property relates to the safety of the concentrates and/or the desirability of the liquid concentrates for human consumption, for example, in food and beverage products. In another example, it can be desirable that the liquid concentrate contains less than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients. In another example, it can be desirable that the liquid concentrate contains greater than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients.

In addition to the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures described herein and non-polar ingredients, the liquid concentrates further contain a polar solvent, such as water (e.g., filtered water), or any other edible aqueous liquid (e.g., propylene glycol or glycerin), or combination thereof. Typically, the liquid concentrates contain a high amount of the polar solvent, for example, between or between about 50% and about 80%, by weight (w/w), of the liquid concentrate, typically between or between about 50% and about 79%, by weight, of the liquid concentrate.

Typically, the liquid concentrates further contain one or more additional ingredients. Exemplary of additional ingredients that can be included in the liquid concentrates are preservatives, non-polar solvents, co-surfactants, emulsion stabilizers, pH adjusters, additional non-polar ingredients and flavoring agents.

The non-polar ingredients in the liquid concentrates and dilution compositions provided herein are contained in micelles. These micelles, containing the non-polar ingredients surrounded by the one or more surfactants, allow dispersion of the non-polar ingredients among polar solvents, for example, when the liquid concentrates are diluted to form aqueous liquid dilution compositions. The micelles containing the non-polar ingredients typically have a small or relatively small particle size, for example, less than or less than about 1000 nm, less than or less than about 500 nm, less than or less than about 300 nm, less than or less than about 200 nm, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150 or 200 nm. Smaller particle size correlates with clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the diluted liquid concentrates. For example, a liquid with a smaller particle size can be more clear than a liquid with a larger particle size. Small particle size also can contribute to other desirable properties, for example, stability.

A number of factors, including ingredients, their relative concentrations, and methods for making the liquid concentrates, affect the particle size of the compositions, and other desirable properties of the compositions, such as clarity. In particular, the nature of the surfactant, particularly the HLB of the surfactant, and the relative concentrations of polar solvent (e.g., water), surfactant and the non-polar ingredient contribute to small particle size and clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions. Typically, several of these parameters and properties are related to one another. For example, several of the parameters contribute to the particle size, typically small particle size, of the compositions. Particle size contributes directly to clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the liquid concentrates. Particle size also can relate to other properties, for example, stability, lack of “ringing” and/or precipitate formation of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the liquid concentrates.

Accordingly, properties of the ingredients and their relative concentrations in the liquid concentrates are important for the ability of the concentrate to yield desirable dilution compositions. Provided are methods for formulating the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates. Determining the appropriate ingredients, and relative concentrations thereof, that yield dilution compositions having desirable properties is performed using provided methods for formulating the liquid concentrates.

i. Formulating the Liquid Nanoemulsion Concentrates

In the provided formulation methods, the liquid concentrates are formulated by selecting ingredients and amounts of the ingredients that yield compositions having one or more desired properties. When formulating the liquid concentrates, selected ingredients and starting amounts (concentrations) are used to make initial liquid concentrates, which are evaluated and modified, if necessary.

As a first step in formulating the provided liquid concentrates, one or more initial concentrates are made and evaluated for desired properties. For this step, ingredients are selected, for example, from among the ingredients described herein. The ingredients generally include surfactants, for example, the water-soluble vitamin E derivatives described herein, e.g., TPGS, polar solvents, non-polar ingredients, and other ingredients. A starting concentration (weight percentage) of each selected ingredient is selected from within the appropriate range for that ingredient or category of ingredient, for example, the appropriate concentration range for the surfactant. In some cases, the initial liquid concentrate is formulated based on the ingredients and amounts (concentration) thereof of an existing liquid concentrate having one or more desired properties.

The initial liquid concentrate is made, for example, using the methods for making the liquid concentrates, provided below, adding each ingredient at its starting concentration at the appropriate step. More than one initial liquid concentrate, e.g., multiple initial liquid concentrates, each having a different concentration of one or more ingredients, can be made and compared. For example, multiple initial liquid concentrates can be produced to test various representative concentrations within an appropriate concentration range for one or more particular ingredients.

In a typical example, the initial liquid concentrate is made by including at least one surfactant, for example, a water-soluble vitamin E derivative described herein, e.g., TPGS, that has an HLB value of between or about between 12 and 20, at a starting concentration within the concentration range of between or about between 5 wt % and 35 wt % of the liquid concentrate; at least one non-polar ingredient, at a starting concentration within the concentration range of between or about between 1 wt % and 30 wt % of the liquid concentrate; and a polar solvent, at a starting concentration of between or about between 40 wt % and 85 wt % of the liquid concentrate. In one example, the initial liquid concentrate further includes other ingredients, for example, preservatives, co-emulsifiers, pH adjusters and/or other ingredients as described herein.

After making an initial liquid concentrate, the liquid concentrate can be evaluated for one or more desired properties, for example, the ability to form dilution compositions (e.g., clear dilution compositions or dilution compositions having a particular turbidity value, particle size or other property). The ability to form dilution compositions having one or more properties can be assessed by diluting the liquid concentrate in an aqueous medium, such as water. For example, the liquid concentrate can be diluted in an aqueous medium at a dilution factor of between or about between 1:10 and 1:1000 or more, typically between or about between 1:10 and 1:500 or more, for example, diluted not more than 1:10 or about 1:10, 1:20 or about 1:20, 1:25 or about 1:25, 1:50 or about 1:50, 1:100 or about 1:100, 1:200 or about 1:200, 1:250 or about 1:250, 1:300 or about 1:300, 1:400 or about 1:400, 1:500 or about 1:500, for example, 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:35, 1:40, 1:50, 1:55, 1:60, 1:65, 1:70, 1:75, 1:80, 1:90, 1:100, 1:110, 1:120, 1:130, 1:140, 1:150, 1:160, 1:170, 1:180, 1:190, 1:200, 1:210, 1:220, 1:230, 1:235, 1:240, 1:250, 1:260, 1:270, 1:280, 1:290, 1:300, 1:350, 1:400, 1:450, 1:500 or more, or according to other dilutions provided herein.

After evaluation, the ingredients and/or amounts (concentrations) thereof can be adjusted in order to generate the desired properties in the final liquid concentrate. Typically, the concentrations of the non-polar ingredient, the surfactant, e.g., water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, and/or the polar solvent are the concentrations that are adjusted after evaluating the initial liquid concentrate. Similarly, when formulating multiple initial liquid concentrates, one or more of the non-polar ingredients, surfactant, e.g., water-soluble vitamin E derivative, and polar solvent concentrations are varied among the multiple initial liquid concentrates. In some cases, following evaluation, it can be determined that additional ingredients (not included in the initial formulation) are needed or desirable for achieving the desired properties of a particular concentrate. This process can be repeated until a liquid concentrate having the desired property or properties is generated.

c. Liquid Dilution Compositions Containing the Concentrates

Among the products provided herein are liquid dilution compositions, typically aqueous liquid dilution compositions (i.e., beverages), containing the described concentrates containing the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and non-polar ingredients. The aqueous liquid dilution compositions are made by diluting the provided liquid nanoemulsion concentrates into aqueous media, for example, beverages, for example, water, flavored water, soda, milk, juices, including fruit juices, sauces, syrups, soups, sports drinks, nutritional beverages, energy drinks, vitamin-fortified beverages, or any beverage. Any beverage can be prepared or modified using the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions) described herein and other water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures (compositions), for example, see U.S. Pub. No. 2008-0254188 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,045,826.

In one example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition contains between 0.05 grams (g) or about 0.05 g and 10 g or about 10 g, typically between 0.05 g and 5 g, of the concentrate per 8 fluid ounces or about 8 fluid ounces, at least 8 fluid ounces or at least about 8 fluid ounces, or less than 8 fluid ounces or less than about 8 fluid ounces, or per serving size, of the aqueous medium, for example, 0.05 g, 0.06 g, 0.07 g, 0.08 g, 0.09 g, 0.1 g, 0.2 g, 0.3 g, 0.4 g, 0.5 g, 0.6 g, 0.7 g, 0.8 g, 0.9 g, 1 g, 2 g, 3 g, 4 g, 5 g, 6 g, 7 g, 8 g, 9 g, or 10 g of the concentrate per 8 fluid ounces, about 8 fluid ounces, or at least 8 fluid ounces or at least about 8 fluid ounces of the aqueous medium, for example 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 100, 200 or more fluid ounces, of aqueous medium.

In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition contains between 1 mL or about 1 mL and 10 mL or about 10 mL of the concentrate, for example, 1 mL, 2 mL, 3 mL, 4 mL, 5 mL, 6 mL, 7 mL, 8 mL, 9 mL or 10 mL of the concentrate, per 8 fluid ounces, about 8 fluid ounces, at least 8 fluid ounces or at least about 8 fluid ounces, or less than 8 fluid ounces or less than about 8 fluid ounces, or per serving size, of the aqueous medium, for example 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 100, 200 or more fluid ounces, of aqueous medium.

In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition contains at least 10 mg or about 10 mg, typically at least 25 mg or about 25 mg, typically at least 35 mg, of the non-polar ingredient, for example, a non-polar ingredient that is or contains the non-polar ingredient, per 8 fluid ounces or about 8 fluid ounces, at least 8 fluid ounces or at least about 8 fluid ounces of the aqueous medium, or less than 8 ounces or less than about 8 ounces, or per serving size, of the aqueous medium; for example, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 25, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, 200, 210, 220, 230, 240, 250, 260, 270, 280, 290, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 550, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1500, 2000 mg, or more, of the non-polar ingredient per at least 8 fluid ounces or at least about 8 fluid ounces of aqueous medium. In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition contains the concentrate diluted at a dilution factor of between 1:10 or about 1:10 and 1:1000 or about 1:1000 or more, typically between 1:10 or about 1:10 and 1:500 or about 1:500 or more, for example, diluted not more than 1:10 or about 1:10, 1:20 or about 1:20, 1:25 or about 1:25, 1:50 or about 1:50, 1:100 or about 1:100, 1:200 or about 1:200, 1:250 or about 1:250, 1:300 or about 1:300, 1:400 or about 1:400, 1:500 or about 1:500, for example, 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:35, 1:40, 1:50, 1:55, 1:60, 1:65, 1:70, 1:75, 1:80, 1:90, 1:100, 1:110, 1:120, 1:130, 1:140, 1:150, 1:160, 1:170, 1:180, 1:190, 1:200, 1:210, 1:220, 1:230, 1:235, 1:240, 1:250, 1:260, 1:270, 1:280, 1:290, 1:300, 1:350, 1:400, 1:450, or 1:500, or more. In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions contain the liquid concentrate diluted to any amount. In another example, the dilution is less than 1:10 or about 1:10.

Properties of the provided concentrates that are diluted into the aqueous medium contribute to various properties of the provided resulting aqueous liquid dilution compositions, for example, clarity; desirability for human consumption, for example, pleasant taste, and/or smell, for example, lack of “fishy” taste/smell, lack of “ringing” and lack of crystal formation; stability, for example, lack of oxidation, “ringing” and/or precipitation over time; and safety for human consumption. As described herein, the liquid concentrates are formulated according to the desired properties of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the concentrates.

d. Evaluation of the Concentrates and Liquid Dilution Compositions

The formulation methods can further include analysis of the initial concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, based on one or more desired properties, for example, properties of an aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate such as clarity, color, smell, taste, safety, stability, “ringing” or forming of precipitates and/or the presence of crystals. For example, the methods typically include analyzing the ability of the initial concentrate to form a clear liquid upon dilution in an aqueous medium, such as by analysis of the clarity/turbidity of the resulting aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the initial concentrate.

For evaluation of properties of the initial concentrates in an aqueous liquid dilution composition, the initial concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be diluted into an aqueous medium, for example, water or another polar solvent, at a dilution factor of between or about between 1:10 and 1:1000, typically between or about between 1:10 and 1:500, for example, diluted at least or about 1:10, at least or about 1:20, at least or about 1:25, at least or about 1:50, at least or about 1:100, at least or about 1:200, at least or about 1:250, at least or about 1:300, at least or about 1:400, or at least or about 1:500, for example, 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:35, 1:40, 1:50, 1:55, 1:60, 1:65, 1:70, 1:75, 1:80, 1:90, 1:100, 1:110, 1:120, 1:130, 1:140, 1:150, 1:160, 1:170, 1:180, 1:190, 1:200, 1:210, 1:220, 1:230, 1:235, 1:240, 1:250, 1:260, 1:270, 1:280, 1:290, 1:300, 1:350, 1:400, 1:450, or 1:500, or any other dilution, such as others provided herein. Typically, clarity of the resulting aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted initial concentrate is evaluated using one or more approaches. Additionally, other properties can be evaluated, for example, smell and/or taste properties of the liquid. For example, when the non-polar ingredient is a polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA), particularly fish oil or algae oil, the aqueous liquid dilution composition can be evaluated empirically for a “fishy” smell.

i. Clarity

Dilution of the provided concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, in aqueous media can yield clear liquids. The clarity of the resulting aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the initial concentrate can be evaluated by one or more of a plurality of approaches, such as by empirical observation, by measuring particle size and/or by measuring the turbidity value of the liquid.

For example, the concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be diluted to form clear liquids (or liquids that are equal in clarity to known liquids), by adding between or about between 0.05 grams (g) and 10 g of the concentrate, such as between or about between 0.05 g and 5 g, for example, about 0.05 g, 0.06 g, 0.07 g, 0.08 g, 0.09 g, 0.1 g, 0.2 g, 0.3 g, 0.4 g, 0.5 g, 0.6 g, 0.7 g, 0.8 g, 0.9 g, 1 g, 2 g, 3 g, 4 g, 5 g, 6 g, 7 g, 8 g, 9 g, or 10 g of the concentrate, to aqueous medium, for example, to at least or about at least 8 fluid ounces, such as at least or about at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 100, or 200, or more fluid ounces of aqueous medium, e.g., water, to form a clear aqueous liquid dilution composition that contains the concentrate that contains the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition and non-polar ingredient. The concentrates can be diluted to form clear aqueous liquid dilution compositions by adding between or about between 1 mL and 10 mL of the concentrate, for example, about 1 mL, 2 mL, 3 mL, 4 mL, 5 mL, 6 mL, 7 mL, 8 mL, 9 mL or 10 mL of the concentrate to at least or about at least 8 fluid ounces of aqueous medium, for example at least or about at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 100, or 200, or more fluid ounces of aqueous medium, e.g., water, to form a clear aqueous liquid dilution composition that contains the concentrate that contains the water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition and non-polar ingredient.

The provided concentrates, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be formulated using any non-polar ingredient for dilution in an aqueous medium. The concentrate can be diluted in an aqueous medium, such as water, to form a clear aqueous liquid dilution composition at a dilution factor of between or about between 1:10 and 1:1000, such as between or about between 1:10 and 1:500, for example, when diluted not more than 1:10 or about 1:10, 1:20 or about 1:20, 1:25 or about 1:25, 1:50 or about 1:50, 1:100 or about 1:100, 1:200 or about 1:200, 1:250 or about 1:250, 1:300 or about 1:300, 1:400 or about 1:400, 1:500 or about 1:500, for example, 1:10, 1:20, 1:25, 1:30, 1:35, 1:40, 1:50, 1:55, 1:60, 1:65, 1:70, 1:75, 1:80, 1:90, 1:100, 1:110, 1:120, 1:130, 1:140, 1:150, 1:160, 1:170, 1:180, 1:190, 1:200, 1:210, 1:220, 1:230, 1:235, 1:240, 1:250, 1:260, 1:270, 1:280, 1:290, 1:300, 1:350, 1:400, 1:450, 1:500 or more. The clear liquid can be formed at dilutions less dilute than 1:10 of the concentrate. Typically, the clarity of the liquid is maintained with increasing dilutions, for example, to infinity.

Clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be evaluated using one or more of a plurality of approaches, for example, qualitatively, such as by empirical evaluation, or quantitatively, such as by measuring particle size and/or by measuring the turbidity value of the liquid. In one example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions are clear aqueous liquid dilution compositions or non-turbid aqueous liquid dilution compositions, for example, as determined, as described below, empirically or by measuring turbidity and/or particle size. In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions are not clear, or not completely clear. The liquid dilution compositions can be more or less clear, or have the same clarity as another liquid, for example, an aqueous liquid dilution composition made according to the provided methods or a beverage, for example, a beverage that does not contain the diluted concentrate.

For example, a particular quantitative or qualitative clarity value can be desired. The emulsions and compositions provided herein, as well as the aqueous liquid dilution compositions provided herein, are more clear than the same compositions made with a corresponding low dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative composition. An aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the concentrate diluted in a beverage product can be as clear or about as clear as the same beverage containing no concentrate. The evaluation can be done qualitatively, for example by empirical observation, or quantitatively, for example, by calculating particle size and/or turbidity value (NTU) for the liquid(s).

Properties of the liquid concentrates can affect the clarity of the liquid. A number of parameters can vary the clarity of the liquids, for example, the relative concentration of surfactant, non-polar ingredient and/or water; the type of non-polar ingredient; the concentration of excipient(s) in the particular non-polar ingredient; and the purity of the non-polar ingredient, for example, whether it has been standardized to a high purity, or whether it is an extract or a filtered extract. For example, an aqueous liquid dilution composition made by diluting a concentrate containing a non-polar ingredient that contains lecithin, for example a high amount of lecithin, can be less clear than one made with a concentrate containing a non-polar ingredient that does not contain lecithin. In another example, a liquid concentrate containing a non-polar ingredient that is a filtered extract can produce a clearer aqueous liquid dilution composition when diluted than a concentrate containing a crude extract.

(a) Empirical Evaluation

The relative clarity/turbidity of the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be assessed qualitatively by observation. For example, a liquid can be considered clear if it does not have a cloudy appearance and/or if no particles are visible when looking at the liquid with the naked eye. Clarity can be assessed empirically by comparison to other liquids, for example, water, fruit juice, soda and/or milk. For example, it can be desirable that the liquid is as clear or about as clear as water or another liquid, for example a beverage. For example, the liquid (containing the concentrate diluted in an aqueous medium, for example, a beverage product) can be as clear or about as clear as the same aqueous medium not containing the concentrate. In some cases, the aqueous liquid dilution composition is as clear or about as clear as water or another liquid, for example a beverage. In some examples, there is no substantial difference, for example, no observable difference, between the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the concentrate and the same aqueous medium without the concentrate. A clear liquid is not necessarily colorless, for example, a yellow liquid that contains no visible particles or cloudiness can be considered clear. In another example, the liquid is clear or partially clear or substantially clear if no crystals are visible and/or if no “ringing” is observed on the container containing the liquid.

(b) Particle Size or Number of Particles

Alternatively, the clarity of the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can be assessed by measuring the particle size and/or number of particles of the liquid. Methods for measuring particle size are known and any method for measuring particle size that can measure particle sizes in the appropriate ranges as described below, can be used.

Particle size can be analyzed by commercial services, for example, from Delta Analytical Instruments, Inc., such as by using a light-scattering analyzer, for example, a dynamic light scattering analyzer, e.g., the Horiba® LB-550, which can measure particle sizes within a range of 0.001 microns to 6 microns and uses a Fourier-transform/iterative deconvolution technique for reporting data and can measure sample concentrations from ppm to 40% solids; the Horiba® LA-920, which is a laser light-scattering instrument having an He—Ne laser and a tungsten lamp and can determine particle sizes from 0.02 microns to 2000 microns using Mie theory; or other analyzers known to those of skill in the art, for example, analyzers available from Delta Analytical Instruments, Inc.

Alternatively, the particle size can be measured microscopically, for example, by viewing the liquid under a microscope, for example, at 640× magnification. With this method, particle size can be quantified by comparing to a measuring device, for example, a ruler, which is visible when viewing the liquid under the microscope. If any particles are observable at this magnification, they are measured by comparison to the measuring device. At a magnification of 640X, for example, any particle that is about or greater than 25 nm is visible, while particle sizes smaller than 25 nm typically are not visible.

Typically, it is desired that the aqueous liquid dilution compositions have a particle size less than or about less than 200 nm, for example, 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190 or 200 nm. Typically, it is desired that the aqueous liquid dilution compositions have a particle size less than or about less than 100 nm, less than or about less than 50 nm, or less than or about less than 25 nm. Typically, the particle size of the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the concentrate is between or about between 5 nm and 200 nm, or between 5 nm or about 5 nm and 50 nm or about 50 nm.

Typically, the particle size of the provided aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the liquid concentrate, which contains the non-polar ingredient, is smaller than the particle size of a liquid containing the non-polar ingredient (not formulated in a liquid concentrate).

(c) Turbidity Measurement

Clarity of the liquid dilution composition can be analyzed by taking optical turbidity measurements, which indicate the level of cloudiness or haziness of a liquid, correlating to the size and number of particles in suspension in a liquid. For example, turbidity can be measured optically, to get a value indicating the cloudiness or haziness of the liquid, which correlates with particles in suspension in the liquid. The units of a turbidity value measured with a nephelometer are expressed as Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU). The more clear a particular liquid, the lower its turbidity (i.e., NTU) value.

Turbidity can be measured optically, for example, using a nephelometer, an instrument with a light and a detector. The nephelometer measures turbidity by detecting scattered light resulting from exposure of the liquid to an incident light. The amount of scattered light correlates to the amount of particulate matter in the liquid. For example, a beam of light passes through a sample with low turbidity with little disturbance. Other methods for measuring turbidity are well known and can be used with the provided methods and compositions.

The aqueous liquid dilution composition containing a diluted concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, has low turbidity, for example, a turbidity value (NTU) less than or about 80, such as less than or about 70, less than or about 60, less than or about 50, less than or about 40, less than or about 30, less than or about 29, less than or about 28, less than or about 27, less than or about 26, less than or about 25, less than or about 24, less than or about 23, less than or about 22, less than or about 21, less than or about 20, less than or about 19, less than or about 18, less than or about 17, less than or about 16, less than or about 15, less than or about 14, less than or about 13, less than or about 12, less than or about 11, less than or about 10, less than or about 9, less than or about 8, less than or about 7, less than or about 6, less than or about 5, less than or about 4, less than or about 3, less than or about 2, less than or about 1, or about 0. For example, the turbidity value of the aqueous liquid dilution compositions provided herein typically is less than or about 80, for example, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25, 20, 15, 10, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 or less. The turbidity depends upon the components of the compositions and amounts thereof. In all instances, a composition provided herein that contains a high dimer-containing form of a water-soluble derivative of vitamin E, such as a high dimer-containing TPGS composition, is less turbid than the same composition that contains a low dimer-containing composition of the same water-soluble derivative of vitamin E.

In one example, the clear aqueous liquid dilution composition has a turbidity value (NTU) less than or about 80, such as less than or about 70, less than or about 60, less than or about 50, less than or about 40, less than or about 30, less than or about 29, less than or about 28, less than or about 27, less than or about 26, less than or about 25, less than or about 24, less than or about 23, less than or about 22, less than or about 21, less than or about 20, less than or about 19, less than or about 18, less than or about 17, less than or about 16, less than or about 15, less than or about 14, less than or about 13, less than or about 12, less than or about 11, less than or about 10, less than or about 9, less than or about 8, less than or about 7, less than or about 6, less than or about 5, less than or about 4, less than or about 3, less than or about 2, less than or about 1, or about 0. In another example, the turbidity value of the aqueous liquid dilution composition is less than or about 80, for example, 80, 70, 60, 50, 40, 30, 25, 20, 15, or 10, or less.

ii. Stability

Typically, the provided aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the concentrates are stable, for example, free from one or more changes over a period of time, for example, 1 or more days, 1 or more weeks, 1 or more months, or one or more years, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or more days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 or more months or 1, 2, 3, 4 or more years.

In one example, the liquid dilution compositions are stable because they are free from oxidation or substantial oxidation over time. In another example, they are stable because they remain clear over time. In another example, the stable compositions remain safe and/or desirable for human consumption over time. In one example, stability refers to the lack of precipitates forming in the compositions over the period of time. In a related example, the compositions are stable because they do not exhibit “ringing,” formation of a whitish or opaque ring around the perimeter of the container holding the liquid, typically at the surface of the liquid. Ringing typically is undesirable, particularly in the case of a liquid for human consumption, for example, a beverage.

In another example, the liquid dilution composition is stable if it does not exhibit any visible phase separation over a period of time, for example, after 24 hours, after one week or after one month. In one example, the compositions are stable if they exhibit one or more of these described characteristics, over time, when kept at a particular temperature. In one example, the liquid dilution compositions remain stable at room temperature, for example, 25° C. or about 25° C. In another example, the liquid dilution compositions remain stable at between 19° C. and 25° C. In another example, the liquid dilution compositions remain stable at refrigerated temperatures, for example, 4° C. or about 4° C., or at frozen temperatures, for example, at −20° C. or about −20° C.

Stability refers to a desirable property of the provided liquid dilution compositions, for example, the ability of the provided liquid dilution compositions to remain free from one or more changes over a period of time, for example, 1 or more days, 1 or more weeks, 1 or more months, or one or more years, for example, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 or more days, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 or more weeks, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12 or more months or 1, 2, 3, 4 or more years. In one example, the liquid dilution composition is stable if it is formulated such that it remains free from oxidation or substantial oxidation over time. In another example, the stable liquid dilution compositions remain clear over time. In another example, the stable liquid dilution compositions remain safe and/or desirable for human consumption over time. In one example, stability refers to the lack of precipitates forming in the liquid dilution compositions over the period of time. In a related example, stability refers to the lack of “ringing” over the period of time. In another example, the liquid dilution composition is stable if it does not exhibit any visible phase separation over a period of time, for example, after 24 hours, after one week or after one month. In one example, the liquid dilution compositions are stable if they exhibit one or more of these described characteristics, over time, when kept at a particular temperature.

In one example, the liquid dilution compositions are stable at room temperature, for example, 25° C. or about 25° C. In another example, the liquid dilution compositions remain stable at between 19° C. and 25° C. In another example, the liquid dilution compositions remain stable at refrigerated temperatures, for example, 4° C. or about 4° C., or at frozen temperature, for example, at −20° C. or about −20° C.

iii. Advantageous Characteristics of Compositions for Human Consumption

A variety of properties of the concentrates and liquid dilution compositions can contribute to its desirability as a consumable product. For example, taste, smell, clarity, color, crystal formation, precipitation and “ringing,” are properties of interest. In one example, the liquid dilution composition has a pleasant taste and/or smell, for example, due to one or more flavors added to the concentrate and/or to the aqueous medium. In another example, the liquid dilution composition containing the concentrate is free from an unpleasant taste or smell, for example, a “fishy” taste or smell. In one example, the liquid dilution composition smells or tastes less unpleasant, for example, less fishy, compared to another aqueous liquid dilution composition. In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition does not have crystals or has fewer crystals compared with another aqueous liquid dilution composition. In another example, the aqueous liquid dilution composition is desirable because it does not exhibit ringing.

iv. Safety

Typically, the aqueous liquid dilution compositions containing the concentrates are safe for human consumption, for example, containing only ingredients approved by the FDA for human consumption, for example GRAS-certified ingredients. In one example, one or more of the ingredients, for example, all the ingredients, are Kosher-certified. Safety of the liquid dilution compositions also relates to stability over time. Lack of or minimum oxidation of the liquid dilution compositions over time can contribute to the safety of the compositions.

v. Oral Bioavailability

In one example, the non-polar ingredients, for example, the non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, contained in the aqueous liquid dilution compositions exhibit a high or relatively high bioavailability, for example, a bioavailability that is higher than a liquid containing the non-polar ingredient alone (i.e., not formulated in the liquid concentrate). Bioavailability relates to the ability of the body to absorb the non-polar ingredient into a particular space, tissue cell and/or cellular compartment. Typically, non-polar ingredients in liquids having small particle sizes are better absorbed than those with larger particle sizes.

e. Selecting a Formulation and Modifying Formulations

After evaluating a concentrate, e.g., a pre-emulsion concentrate and/or a liquid nanoemulsion concentrate, or a liquid dilution composition, either a particular formula can be chosen or one or more modifications can be made to the initial concentrate formula based on the results of the evaluation. When an initial concentrate does not display one or more desired properties, e.g., to the desired extent, based on the evaluation, the concentration of one or more ingredients can be adjusted and another initial concentrate made. The process can be repeated until a concentrate with the desired properties is made. For modification of the initial concentrate, the amount of the polar solvent (in the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates), surfactant, e.g., water-soluble vitamin E derivative, and/or non-polar ingredient can be adjusted, for example, by adjusting the concentration within the appropriate concentration range. Additional ingredients also can be chosen. For example, modification of the initial concentrates can involve the addition of one or more additional ingredients. For example, if evaluation reveals that the oil and water phases of the concentrate or aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate are separating, an emulsion stabilizer can be added to the formulation. In another example, a co-surfactant can be added to help emulsify the components of the concentrate. In another example, the phase (oil phase or water phase), to which a particular ingredient is added, can be modified. For example, the formulation can be modified to change whether an ingredient is added to the oil phase or the water phase.

When evaluation of the initial concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, reveals that it has the desired properties, no modifications are made. In this example, the formula of the initial concentrate is used for making the concentrate. When two or more initial concentrates are made, for example, with increasing concentrations of an ingredient, the formula of one of the initial concentrates can be chosen. Which formula is chosen can be based on which formula has the most desirable properties. Alternatively, desirable properties can be balanced with relative amounts of ingredients. For example, a formulation that contains the lowest or the highest concentration of a particular ingredient, but still provides a concentrate that yields a clear liquid upon dilution in an aqueous medium, for example, when formulating a liquid dilution composition, can be selected.

Modifications can be effected even if the initial concentrate, e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrates and/or the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, possesses the desired properties. For example, upon determining that a particular concentrate formulation results in desired properties, the concentration of one or more ingredients can be varied to determine whether the same properties can be achieved if a higher or lower concentration of the ingredient is included. For example, the lowest concentration of surfactant that can be used, while still generating a concentrate with a desired property, for example, the ability to form a clear liquid upon dilution in an aqueous medium, can be determined. In another example, the highest concentration of the non-polar ingredient that can be incorporated into a concentrate, while still maintaining the desired property, for example, the ability of the concentrate to form a clear liquid upon dilution in an aqueous medium, can be determined. In another example, one or more additional ingredients can be added after making an initial concentrate with desirable properties, for example, flavoring agents and/or pH adjusting agents.

3. Soft Gel and Pre-Gel Compositions Containing Non-Polar Ingredients and the High Dimer-Containing PEG Derivative of Vitamin E Mixture

Methods and compositions for formulating compositions containing non-polar ingredients are provided herein. Provided herein are soft gel compositions containing a non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate in a shell or coating that is suitable for human consumption, and methods for preparing the compositions. The soft gel compositions containing a non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate contain one or more non-polar ingredients, a surfactant, and a high amount (greater than 2%, 3%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 10%, up to 20%) of non-aqueous solvent. The pre-gel compositions also are provided. By virtue of the ingredients, including the high amount of non-aqueous solvent, the pre-gel compositions exhibit advantageous properties, such as, for example, the formulation of the ingredients results in stable pre-gel concentrates that do not form precipitates and exhibit enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients, for example, when consumed.

In particular, the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein contain non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and/or mixtures of non-polar compounds, at least one surfactant, and one or more non-aqueous solvents. The pre-gel concentrates are encapsulated by enclosing the pre-gel concentrates in a desired coating or shell to form the soft gel compositions provided herein. The pre-gel concentrates contain from 40% to as much as 90% of the non-polar ingredient, by weight, of the concentrate and between 5% and 20% non-aqueous solvent, and the remainder is/are surfactant(s), such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E, particularly TPGS. The resulting compositions do not contain precipitated non-polar ingredients or compounds. The compositions described herein, in particular, the soft-gel compositions and pre-gel compositions, contain high concentrations of non-polar ingredients and have enhanced bioavailability, for example, after human consumption. Further description and examples of the pre-gel concentrates and soft gel compositions are provided below.

For purposes herein, the pre-gel compositions include a non-aqueous solvent that also can be a preservative. Exemplary of such solvents is benzyl alcohol, in an amount that is significantly higher than the amount at which it is effective as an anti-microbial preservative. Hence, the compositions provided herein generally do not require additional preservatives.

a. Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Compositions Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

Non-aqueous pre-gel compositions (also referred to as concentrates) that contain non-polar ingredients, a surfactant(s), and one or more non-aqueous solvents are provided. The pre-gel concentrates are formulated by selecting ingredients and concentrations of the ingredients as described herein that yield non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates having one or more desired properties, for example, pre-gel concentrates that do not contain any precipitated non-polar ingredients or compounds. The pre-gel concentrates contain high concentrations of the non-polar ingredients ranging from at or about 30%-90% by weight of the pre-gel concentrate, from or about more than 5% to about or 20% by weight of the non-aqueous solvent, and a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, in an amount that is about or at 5% to 65%, by weight, of the pre-gel concentrate. Additional optional ingredients, such as other surfactants, emulsifiers, and co-solvents, in amounts totaling less than 5% or less than about 5% can be included.

By virtue of the high concentration of the non-polar ingredients, and also the surfactant, the pre-gel concentrates as provided herein can be waxy, having the consistency of a substance such as wax, for example, a lip balm, or a semi-solid at room temperature, for example, at 25° C. or about 25° C., and become liquid at higher temperatures, for example when heated to higher temperatures, such as to 125° F. or about 125° F., or to 50° C. or about 50° C. or to 60° C. or about 60° C., or the concentrates can be liquid. Whether the pre-gel concentrate is waxy (i.e., semi-solid) or a liquid depends upon the particular components and amounts thereof.

The pre-gel concentrates are then introduced into or formulated with materials, such as gelatins and/or gelatin replacements and other ingredients to form soft gel capsules. Each capsule is designed for oral administration and typically contains an amount of the pre-gel composition sufficient to provide a single dosage or fractional amount of the non-polar ingredients or non-polar compounds.

i. Non-Polar Ingredients

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein contain one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain one or more non-polar compounds. Non-polar ingredients include any lipophilic or lipid-soluble compound that has greater solubility in organic solvents (e.g., benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, d-limonene, ethanol, methanol, ethyl ether, acetone, and benzene) and in fats and oils, than in polar solvents, for example, water. Typically, the non-polar ingredients are poorly water-soluble, for example, water insoluble, or are compounds that have low water solubility. The non-polar ingredients include, but are not limited to, drugs, hormones, vitamins, nutrients and other lipophilic compounds. Exemplary non-polar ingredients are listed herein below. The non-polar ingredient differs from the surfactant, e.g., polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, for example, the non-polar ingredient is not a polyalkylene glycol vitamin E derivative.

The non-polar ingredients are included in the pre-gel concentrate in an amount from about or at 30% to 90%, typically 35% to 85% or 40% to 90%, inclusive, or 45%-90%, 40%-85%, or 40%-75%, all inclusive by weight of the composition. The amount included depends upon the particular ingredient and desired dosage.

The non-polar ingredients are any non-polar ingredients of interest, and include all described above (see, section D1, which is incorporated here) and elsewhere herein.

ii. Surfactants (High Dimer-Containing Water-Soluble Vitamin E Derivative Mixtures)

In addition to the one or more non-polar ingredients, each of the provided pre-gel concentrates contains at least one surfactant selected from among the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivatives provided and described herein. In particular, the pre-gel concentrations contain a high dimer-containing PEG derivative of vitamin E composition, such as a higher dimer TPGS composition as described herein. The pre-gel concentrates contain from about or at 5% to 50%, by weight, such as least 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20% of the vitamin E derivative.

iii. Non-Aqueous Solvents

The pre-gel concentrates provided herein contain at least one non-aqueous solvent, for example, any pharmaceutically acceptable solvent that is non-aqueous that can dissolve the non-polar ingredients provided herein. The non-aqueous solvent, such as, but is not limited to, benzyl alcohol, is included in the composition in a high amount, e.g., between 5% or about 5% and 20% or about 20%, such as, 5-15%, 10%-15%, 5%-10%, at least 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, up to about or 20% or 25%. The non-aqueous solvent dissolves the non-polar ingredients. The non-aqueous solvent is one that dissolves the non-polar ingredients and is different than or does not contain the non-polar ingredient. The non-aqueous solvent prevents the non-polar ingredients from precipitating out of the concentrate. The use of these higher amounts of non-aqueous solvent has been found herein to provide advantageous properties, for example, in the pre-gel concentrates and the soft gel compositions provided herein, when the soft gel compositions contain a pre-gel concentrate containing non-polar ingredients and a surfactant along with high amounts of non-aqueous solvent. For example, the concentrates and soft gels do not contain precipitated non-polar ingredients and provide enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients in the soft gel compositions, for example, after consumption.

The one or more non-aqueous solvents included in the pre-gel concentrates are typically insoluble or only partial soluble in water. For example, the non-aqueous solvents can include, but are not limited to, alkanes, e.g., hydrocarbons and cyclic hydrocarbons, e.g., d-limonene; aromatic compounds, such as aromatic alcohols, ethers and esters, e.g., benzyl alcohol and benzyl benzoate; haloalkanes, ethers, esters and ketones; organic solvents of natural origin, such as natural hydrocarbons, for example, cyclic hydrocarbons, e.g., terpenes, for example, d-limonene, alpha-pinene, beta-pinene, myrcene, linalol, citronellol, geraniol, menthol, citral, citronellal, or oxidized organic derivatives, in particular ethers, aldehydes, alcohols and esters; lactams, e.g., N-methyl pyrrolidone (NMP); alkylene glycols, e.g., propylene glycol and polyethylene glycol (e.g., PEG300, PEG400); dimethyl sulfoxide; dimethyl acetamide; 2-pyrrolidone; C2-C6 alkanols; 2-ethoxyethanol; alkyl esters such as 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, ethylene glycol diethyl ether, or ethylene glycol dimethyl ether; (S)-(−)-ethyl lactate; acetone; glycerol; alkyl ketones such as methylethyl ketone or dimethyl sulfone; tetrahydrofuran; cyclic alkyl amides such as caprolactam; decylmethylsulfoxide; oleic acid; aromatic amines such as N,N-diethyl-m-toluamide; 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one; natural products, such as oils, including olive oils and fatty acids, which can be saturated or non-saturated; and acyl glycerols. The pre-gel concentrates provided herein can contain one non-aqueous solvent or more than one non-aqueous solvent, for example, two, three, or more non-aqueous solvents.

Typically, the non-aqueous solvent is an alcohol, an alcohol derivative, and/or a hydrocarbon that has little or no solubility in water. Exemplary of non-aqueous solvents that can be included in the pre-gel concentrates are alcohols, for example, aromatic alcohols, e.g., benzyl alcohol, such as the benzyl alcohol sold by Sigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.); alcohol derivatives, for example, ester derivatives of alcohols, such as aromatic esters, e.g., benzyl benzoate; hydrocarbons, for example, cyclic hydrocarbons, e.g., d-limonene, such as d-limonene that is 99% GRAS-certified, sold by Florida Chemical, Winter Haven, Fla.; and any other non-aqueous solvent that is insoluble or has only partial solubility in water.

iv. Co-Surfactants (Emulsifiers)

The concentrates, e.g., pre-emulsion concentrates and liquid nanoemulsion concentrates, can further contain one or more co-surfactants (emulsifiers). For example, a co-surfactant can be included to improve emulsification of the non-polar ingredient and/or the stability of the composition, for example, by preventing or slowing oxidation of the non-polar ingredient. Exemplary of a co-surfactant that can be used in the provided concentrates is a phospholipid, for example, phosphatidylcholine. Other exemplary co-surfactants include non-ionic surfactants, such as sugar-derived surfactants, including fatty acid esters of sugars and sugar derivatives, and PEG-derived surfactants, such as PEG derivatives of sterols, PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters.

When present, the amount of the co-surfactant typically is present in a concentration less than or less than about 10%, typically less than or less than about 5%, for example, the total amount of co-surfactant as a percentage (%), by weight, of the liquid concentrate (wt %) can be, e.g., less than or less than about 10%, such as less than or about 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3.15%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.75%, 1.5%, 1.25%, 1%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.25%, 0.15% or less, by weight, of the liquid concentrate.

(a) Phospholipids

Exemplary of the co-surfactants that can be used in the provided compositions are phospholipids. Phospholipids are amphipathic lipid-like molecules, typically containing a hydrophobic portion at one end of the molecule and a hydrophilic portion at the other end of the molecule. A number of phospholipids can be used as ingredients in the provided compositions, for example, lecithin, including phosphatidylcholine (PC), phosphatidylethanolamine (PE), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), phosphatidylserine (PS), phosphatidylglycerol (PG), phosphatidic acid (PA), phosphatidylinositol (PI), sphingomyelin (SPM) or a combination thereof. Typically, the phospholipid is phosphatidylcholine (PC), which sometimes is referred to by the general name “lecithin.” Exemplary of the phospholipids that can be used as co-surfactants in the provided compositions are the phospholipids sold by Lipoid, LLC (Newark, N.J.), for example, Purified Egg Lecithins, Purified Soybean Lecithins, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Lecithins, Egg Phospholipids, Soybean Phospholipids, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Phospholipids, Synthetic Phospholipids, PEG-ylated Phospholipids and phospholipid blends. Exemplary of the phosphatidylcholine that can be used as a co-surfactant in the provided compositions is the phosphatidylcholine composition sold by Lipoid, LLC, under the name Lipoid S100, which is derived from soy extract and contains greater than or greater than about 95% phosphatidylcholine.

(b) Sugar-Derived Surfactants

Exemplary sugar-derived surfactants include, but are not limited to, sugar fatty acid esters including fatty acid esters of sucrose, glucose, maltose and other sugars, esterified to fatty acids of varying lengths (e.g., containing a varying numbers of carbons). The fatty acids typically have carbon chains between 8 and 28 carbons in length, and typically between 8 and 20, or between 8 and 18 or between 12 and 18, such as, but not limited to, stearic acid (18 carbons), oleic acid (18 carbons), palmitic acid (16 carbons), myristic acid (14 carbons) and lauric acid (12 carbons). Typically, the sugar ester surfactants are sucrose ester surfactants, typically sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants.

(c) PEG-Derived Surfactants

Exemplary PEG-derived surfactants include, but are not limited to, PEG derivatives of sterols, e.g., a cholesterol or a sitosterol (including, for example, any of the PEG derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,632,443); PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins, for example, some forms of vitamin A (e.g., retinol) or vitamin D (e.g., vitamin D1-D5); and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as polysorbates, including polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (also called polysorbate 80) and analogs (e.g., homologs) of polysorbate 80, such as, for example, polysorbate 20 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate), polysorbate 40 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate) and polysorbate 60 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate); and stearic acid derivatives, including, for example, polyethylene glycol 400 distearate (PEG 400 DS), such as the PEG 400 DS sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition (Maywood, N.J.).

(d) Sucrose Fatty Acid Ester Surfactants

Sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE) surfactants contain one or more sucrose fatty acid esters, which are non-ionic surfactants that contain sucrose in the hydrophilic portions and fatty acids in the hydrophobic portions. The sucrose fatty acid esters can be made by well-known methods (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,480,616; 3,644,333; 3,714,144; 4,710,567; 4,898,935; 4,996,309; 4,995,911; 5,011,922 and 5,017,697 and International Patent Pub. No. WO 2007/082149), typically in an esterification reaction as described in U.S. Pub. No. 2012-0016026.

Because sucrose contains eight hydroxy (OH) groups, the esterification reaction can join the sucrose molecule to one fatty acid molecule, or can join it to a plurality of fatty acid molecules, producing different degrees of esterification, e.g., mono-, di-, tri- and poly-(up to octa-) fatty acid esters, but primarily mono-, di- and/or tri-esters. The degree of esterification can depend on conditions of esterification. The esterification reaction can be carried out with a single type of fatty acid, or a plurality of fatty acids, such as fatty acids with varying carbon chain lengths, branched and linear fatty acids, and/or saturated or unsaturated fatty acids. The esterification reaction with a single fatty acid can produce a single ester, and typically forms more than one ester, such as mono- di-, tri- and/or poly-esters, formed from one reaction. The relative amounts of mono- di-tri- and/or poly-esters can depend on reaction conditions.

The fatty acid in the sucrose fatty acid ester can be any fatty acid, and can contain between 4 and 28 carbon atoms, typically between 8 and 28 carbon atoms, and typically between 8 and 25 carbon atoms, such as between 8 and 18 carbon atoms, such as 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 carbon atoms. The fatty acid can be synthetic or naturally occurring, and include linear and branched fatty acids. The fatty acids include, but are not limited to, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, caproic acid, capric (or decanoic) acid, lauric acid, caprylic acid and pelargonic (or nonanoic) acid.

Thus, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, and mixtures thereof, and typically contain sucrose monoesters. The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include single fatty acid esters and also include homogeneous mixtures of sucrose esters, containing members with different lengths of fatty acid carbon chain and/or members with different degrees of esterification. For example, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include mixtures of monoesters, diesters, triesters, and/or polyesters. The sugar ester surfactants further include sucrose fatty acid ester analogs and homologs and mixtures thereof.

In general, sucrose fatty acid esters, including mixtures of sucrose fatty acid esters, can have varying HLB values, such as HLB values ranging from at or about 1 to at or about 20. The HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester generally depends on the degree of esterification (e.g., the average degree of esterification in a mixture of different esters). Typically, the lower the degree of esterification (e.g., average degree), the higher the HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester or mixture thereof. Exemplary sucrose esters include sucrose distearate (HLB=3), sucrose distearate/monostearate (HLB 12), sucrose dipalmitate (HLB=7.4), sucrose monostearate (HLB=15), sucrose monopalmitate (HLB>10), sucrose monolaurate (HLB 15). Typically, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants in the provided concentrates have an HLB value of between at or about 13 and at or about 20, such as at or about 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, and typically between at or about 13 and at or about 18, such as, but not limited to, HLB values of at or about 15, 16 and 17, such as, for example, sucrose ester surfactants including sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monolaurate and sucrose monostearate.

The sugar ester surfactants include sucrose ester blends, for example, sucrose ester mixtures containing a specified amount (e.g., percent, by weight) of sucrose monoesters. Exemplary surfactants include sucrose ester mixtures having at least at or about 50%, by weight (w/w), monoester, such as at least or about at least 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100%, by weight (w/w), sucrose monoesters, and typically at least at or about 60%, by weight, or at least at or about 70%, by weight (w/w), monoesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid monoesters, such as sucrose monocaprylate, sucrose monodecanoate, sucrose monolaurate, sucrose monomyristate, sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monostearate, sucrose monopelargonate, sucrose monoundecanoate, sucrose monotridecanoate, sucrose monopentadecanoate and sucrose monoheptadecanoate. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include mixtures containing varying percentages of monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, such as, but not limited to, a mixture having at or about 72% monoesters, 23% diesters, 5% triesters and 0% polyesters; a mixture having at or about 61% monoesters, 30% diesters, 7% triesters, and 2% polyesters; and a mixture having at or about 52% monoesters, 36% diesters, 10% triesters and 2% polyesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan (which, in some examples, can be produced according to the methods described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,898,935; 4,996,309; 4,995,911; 5,011,922 and 5,017,697), and distributed through Montello Inc., Tulsa, Okla., such as the F-160 and F-140 grade esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, and sucrose esters sold under the trade name SURFHOPE® SE PHARMA, by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. These sucrose fatty acid esters are mixtures of esters with different degrees of esterification. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include Ryoto sugar esters, which are food-grade esters sold by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. Other exemplary sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants are described in Youan et al. (2003) AAPS PharmaSci 5(2): Article 22 (1-9) and in Okamoto et al. (2005) Biol. Pharm. Bull. 28(9):1689-1694.

v. Emulsion Stabilizers (Co-Emulsifiers)

The compositions can further contain one or more emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers), which can be used to stabilize the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate and/or the aqueous compositions containing the diluted concentrates. For example, the emulsion stabilizer can increase the viscosity of the liquid concentrate. One or more emulsion stabilizers can be added, for example, during formulation after evaluation of an initial concentrate, particularly if the oil and water phases of the initial concentrate (or the aqueous liquid dilution composition resulting from dilution of the initial concentrate) appear to be separating. Addition of the emulsion stabilizer can prevent separation of the oil and water phases.

Exemplary of an emulsion stabilizer that can included in the provided compositions is a composition containing a blend of gums, for example, gums used as emulsifying agents, for example, a blend containing one or more of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate. Exemplary of such an emulsion stabilizer includes the emulsion stabilizer sold under the brand name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other gums can be included in the emulsion stabilizer, for example, gum acacia, ester gums and sugar beet pectin. Exemplary emulsion stabilizers include modified food starches. These include the modified gum acacia sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ticamulsion® A-2010 Powder, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other exemplary emulsion stabilizers containing an ester gum are, for example, the emulsion stabilizer sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ester Gum 8BG, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.) or Ester Gum 8BG, available from Hercules/Pinova (Brunswick, Ga.). Others sold by Ingredion, Inc (Westchester, Ill.) under the trademarks CAPSUL®, FIRMTEX®, THERMFLO®, THERMTEX®, and TEXTRA® and others, can be included in the compositions provided herein. Other blends of similar gums can also be used as emulsion stabilizers.

In another example, the emulsion stabilizer is added for a final concentration of greater than 1%, such as at or about 1.5% w/w of the liquid concentrate. In one example, the emulsion stabilizer is added to the water phase for a final concentration of between 0.1% or about 0.1% and 1% or about 1%, for example, 0.1%, 0.12%, 0.13%, 0.14%, 0.15%, 0.16%, 0.17%, 0.18%, 0.19%, 0.2%, 0.25%, 0.3%, 0.31%, 0.32%, 0.33%, 0.34%, 0.35%, 0.36%, 0.37%, 0.38%, 0.39%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9% or 1% w/w of the composition. In one such example, the emulsion stabilizer represents less than 1%, for example, between 0.01% or about 0.01% and 1% or about 1% (w/w), emulsion stabilizer, for example, 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.061%, 0.062%, 0.063%, 0.0635%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.12%, 0.13%, 0.14%, 0.15%, 0.16%, 0.17%, 0.18%, 0.19%, 0.2%, 0.25%, 0.3%, 0.31%, 0.32%, 0.33%, 0.34%, 0.35%, 0.36%, 0.37%, 0.38%, 0.39%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9% or 1%, by weight (w/w), of the liquid concentrate. The emulsion stabilizer, such as Ticamulsion, can be added in higher concentrations, including 5%, 10%, 15%, 18%, 20%, or 25%, by weight, or more.

vi. Flavors

The compositions provided herein can further contain one or more flavors or flavoring agents, for example, any compound that can add flavor to the concentrate and/or to the aqueous liquid dilution composition containing the diluted concentrate, for example, the food or beverage product containing the concentrate. Several flavors are well known. Any flavor can be added to the concentrates, for example, any flavor sold by Mission Flavors (Foothill Ranch, Calif.). Exemplary of flavors that can be used are fruit flavors, such as guava, kiwi, peach, mango, papaya, pineapple, banana, strawberry, raspberry, blueberry, orange, grapefruit, tangerine, lemon, lime and lemon-lime; cola flavors, tea flavors, coffee flavors, chocolate flavors, dairy flavors, root beer and birch beer flavors, methyl salicylate (wintergreen oil, sweet birch oil), citrus oils and other flavors. Typically, the flavors are safe and/or desirable for human consumption, for example, GRAS or Kosher-certified flavors. An exemplary flavoring agent that can be used in the concentrates and compositions provided herein are lemon oil, for example lemon oil sold by Mission Flavors (Foothill Ranch, Calif.), and D-limonene, for example, 99% GRAS certified D-Limonene, sold by Florida Chemical (Winter Haven, Fla.). The flavor can be added, using the provided methods, to the nanoemulsion concentrates after combining the oil and water phases. Alternatively, flavor(s) can be added to the water and/or oil phase directly.

vii. pH Adjusters

One or more pH adjusters can be added to the compositions at an appropriate concentration to achieve a desired pH. One or more of a plurality of pH adjusting agents can be used. The pH adjusting agent is safe for human consumption, for example, GRAS certified. The pH adjuster can be citric acid. An exemplary pH adjuster includes the citric acid sold by Mitsubishi Chemical (Dublin, Ohio). Another exemplary pH adjuster is phosphoric acid, such as Food Grade 80% Phosphoric Acid, sold by Univar.

viii. Soluble Fibers

The compositions provided herein can contain soluble fiber. Soluble fibers include any soluble dietary fiber that can be readily fermented in the colon, typically a plant based dietary fiber, for example, a soluble fiber from legumes, vegetables, such as broccoli and carrots, root vegetables, such as potatoes, sweet potatoes and onions, oats, rye, chia, barley and fruits, such as prunes, plums, berries, bananas, apples and pears. Typically, soluble dietary fiber contains non-starch polysaccharides, such as arabinoxylans, cellulose, dextrans, inulin, beta-glucans, fructo-oligosaccharides, oligosaccharides and polysaccharides. Soluble fibers include, but are not limited to, fructo-oligosaccharides, for example, inulins, for example, inulins found in chicory, Jerusalem artichoke, dahlia, garlic, leeks and onions, fructans and water-soluble soybean fiber. Exemplary of a soluble fiber is an inulin, for example, Oliggo-Fiber Instant Inulin (Fibruline® Instant; supplied by Cosucra-Groupe Warcoing SA, Belgium, sold by Gillco Products, San Marcos, Calif.), containing chicory inulin.

ix. Stabilizers

The compositions provided herein contain one or more stabilizers, or a stabilizing system. Stabilizers include any compound used to stabilize the non-polar ingredients in the beverage compositions. The stabilizer or stabilizing system can aid in retaining one or more desirable properties of the compositions, for example the appearance, taste or odor. The compositions provided herein containing non-polar ingredients and a stabilizer or stabilizing system can retain one or more desirable properties of the beverage composition for a period of time after formulation, such as at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 days, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 weeks, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 months, or at or about 1, 2, 3, or 4 years. The stabilizers include, but are not limited to, carbonates and bicarbonates, acids, antioxidants, and any combination thereof. Typically the stabilizers or stabilizing system are food-approved, i.e., edible or ingestible, stabilizers, for example, stabilizers that are safe and/or approved for human consumption.

In general, the beverage compositions contain more than one stabilizer. Typically, the total amount of stabilizers included in the provided beverage compositions is less than 20% or about 20%, typically less than 10% or about 10%, for example, less than 20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.5%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(a) Bicarbonates or Carbonates

Exemplary of a stabilizer used in the provided beverage compositions is a bicarbonate or carbonate, for example, any edible or food-approved bicarbonate or carbonate. Examples of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates include sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and any combination thereof. In some examples, the carbonate or bicarbonate is a carbonated beverage, such as a soda, flavored soda, carbonated water or carbonated juice. Alternatively, the beverage can be carbonated by the addition of carbon dioxide. Selection of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates for use in the provided beverage compositions is within the skill of the skilled artisan.

Typically, the amount of bicarbonate or carbonate used in the provided beverage compositions is between or between about 0.01% and 7%, by weight, of the composition, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 7%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 6%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 7%, between at or about 1% and at or about 6%, between at or about 1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 7%, between at or about 2% and at or about 5%, between at or about 2% and at or about 4%, between at or about 3% and at or about 7%, between at or about 3% and at or about 5%, between at or about 4% and at or about 7%, between at or about 6% and at or about 7%, between at or about 5% and at or about 7%, or between at or about 5% and at or about 6%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of bicarbonate or carbonate used in the provided beverage compositions is less than 7% or about 7%, typically less than 5% or about 5%, for example at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9%, 3.0%, 3.1%, 3.2%, 3.3%, 3.4%, 3.5%, 3.6%, 3.7%, 3.8%, 3.9%, 4%, 4.1%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.4%, 4.5%, 4.6%, 4.7%, 4.8%, 4.9%, 5%, 5.1%, 5.2%, 5.3%, 5.4%, 5.5%, 5.6%, 5.7%, 5.8%, 5.9%, 6%, 6.2%, 6.5%, 6.7%, or 7%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(b) Acids

In one example, the stabilizer included in the compositions contains one or more acids, for example, any compound added to the beverage composition that can lower the pH of the composition. The acid can be, for example, an edible, ingestible or food-approved acid. Exemplary of suitable acids for use in the provided beverage compositions are citric acid, phosphoric acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, maleic acid, and any combination thereof. In one example, the acid is citric acid.

Typically, the amount of acid added to the provided beverage compositions is between or between about 0.01% and 5%, by weight, of the composition, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 4%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 4%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 5%, between at or about 2% and at or about 4%, between at or about 2% and at or about 3%, between at or about 3% and at or about 5%, between at or about 3% and at or about 4%, or between at or about 4% and at or about 5%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of acid added to the provided beverage compositions is less than 5% or about 5%, typically less than 4% or about 4%, for example, at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%, 2.9%, 3.0%, 3.1%, 3.2%, 3.3%, 3.4%, 3.5%, 3.6%, 3.7%, 3.8%, 3.9%, 4%, 4.1%, 4.2%, 4.3%, 4.4%, 4.5%, 4.6%, 4.7%, 4.8%, 4.9% or 5%, by weight, of the beverage composition.

(c) Antioxidants

In one example, the stabilizer contains an antioxidant, for example, a molecule that is capable of inhibiting the oxidation of other molecules. Antioxidants include molecules that scavenge free radicals. Suitable antioxidants include those that are used as ingredients in dietary supplements. The antioxidant can be a natural antioxidant or a synthetic antioxidant.

Examples of antioxidants include, but are not limited to hormones, carotenoids, carotenoid terpenoids, non-carotenoid terpenoids, flavonoids, flavonoid polyphenolics (e.g., bioflavonoids), flavonols, flavones, phenols, polyphenols, esters of phenols, esters of polyphenols, nonflavonoid phenolics, isothiocyanates, vitamins and vitamin cofactors, such as vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, vitamin E phosphate and ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10), ascorbic acid, citric acid, rosemary oil, minerals, such as mineral selenium and manganese, melatonin, α-carotene, β-carotene, lycopene, lutein, zeanthin, crypoxanthin, resveratrol, eugenol, quercetin, catechin, gossypol, hesperetin, curcumin, ferulic acid, thymol, hydroxytyrosol, tumeric, thyme, olive oil, lipoic acid, glutathione, glutamine, oxalic acid, tocopherol-derived compounds, di-alpha-tocopheryl phosphate, tocotrienols, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, tert-butylhydroquinone, acetic acid, pectin, tocotrienol, tocopherol, coenzyme Q10 (coQ10), zeaxanthin, astaxanthin, canthaxanthin, saponins, limonoids, kaempferol, myricetin, isorhamnetin, proanthocyanidins, quercetin, rutin, luteolin, apigenin, tangeritin, hesperetin, naringenin, eriodictyol, flavan-3-ols (e.g., anthocyanadins), gallocatechins, epicatechin and its gallate forms, epigallocatechin and its gallate forms theaflavin and its gallate forms, thearubigins, isoflavone phytoestrogens, genistein, daidzein, glycitein, anythocyanins, cyaniding, delphinidin, malvidin, pelargonidin and peonidin. In one example, the antioxidant is vitamin C. In another example, the antioxidant is a coenzyme Q-containing compound, such as ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10).

Typically, the amount of antioxidant added to the compositions is between at or about 0.01% and at or about 3%, for example, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.01% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.05% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 1%, between at or about 0.1% and at or about 0.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 0.5% and at or about 1%, between at or about 1% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 1% and at or about 2%, between at or about 1% and at or about 1.5%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 3%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 1.5% and at or about 2%, between at or about 2% and at or about 3%, between at or about 2% and at or about 2.5%, between at or about 2.5% and at or about 3%, by weight, of the beverage composition. In some examples, the amount of antioxidant added to the provided beverage compositions is less than 5% or about 5%, typically less than 3% or about 2%, for example, at or about 0.01%, 0.02%, 0.03%, 0.04%, 0.05%, 0.06%, 0.07%, 0.08%, 0.09%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 0.6%, 0.7%, 0.8%, 0.9%, 1.0%, 1.1%, 1.2%, 1.3%, 1.4%, 1.5%, 1.6%, 1.7%, 1.8%, 1.9%, 2.0%, 2.1%, 2.2%, 2.3%, 2.4%, 2.5%, 2.6%, 2.7%, 2.8%,

b. Formulating the Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contain one or more non-polar ingredients; at least one surfactant, for example, a polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS; and one or more non-aqueous solvents, for example, solvents that have little or no solubility in water, for example, an alcohol, ester, or hydrocarbon, or mixtures thereof.

As a first step in formulating the provided pre-gel concentrates, one or more initial pre-gel concentrates are made and evaluated for desired properties. For this step, ingredients are selected, for example, from one or more of the lists of ingredients provided below. A starting concentration (weight percentage) of each selected ingredient is selected from within an appropriate concentration range for that ingredient or category of ingredient. For example, a starting surfactant concentration, such as a polyethylene glycol derivate of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, is selected from within an appropriate surfactant concentration range. In some cases, the initial pre-gel concentrate is formulated based on the ingredients, and concentrations thereof, of an existing pre-gel concentrate, having one or more desired properties.

The initial pre-gel concentrate(s) is then made, using the methods for making described below, adding each ingredient at its starting concentration at the appropriate step. In one example, more than one initial pre-gel concentrate is made. For example, multiple initial pre-gel concentrates, each having a different concentration of one or more ingredients, can be made and compared. For example, multiple initial pre-gel concentrates can be made in order to test various representative concentrations within an appropriate concentration range for one or more particular ingredient.

Each of the provided non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contains at least one non-polar ingredient, typically more than one non-polar ingredient, for example, non-polar ingredients that contain one or more non-polar compounds. Any non-polar ingredient that contains one or more non-polar compounds can be formulated with the provided methods and pre-gel concentrates. Several exemplary non-polar ingredients that can be incorporated into the provided concentrates are described herein below. Typically, the non-polar ingredient is or contains a non-polar compound, for example, an oil-based ingredient, for example, a polyunsaturated fatty acid (PUFA), a coenzyme Q, or a vitamin.

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein contain high amounts of non-polar ingredients, for example, between or between about 30% or 35% or 40 wt % and 90 wt % non-polar ingredient, such as between or between about 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 40% and 80%, 40% and 85%, 40% and 90%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 45% and 80%, 45% and 85%, 45% and 90%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 70%, 50% and 75%, 50% and 80%, 50% and 85%, 50% and 90%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 55% and 80%, 55% and 85%, 55% and 90%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 60% and 80%, 60% and 85%, 60% and 90%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75%, 65% and 80%, 65% and 85%, 65% and 90%, 70% and 75%, 70% and 80%, 70% and 85%, 70% and 90%, 75% and 80%, 75% and 85%, 75% and 90%, 80% and 85%, 80% and 90%, and 85% and 90%, by weight of the pre-gel concentrate. The pre-gel concentrates that contain high amounts of non-polar ingredients and high amounts of non-aqueous solvent exhibit desirable properties, for example, the non-polar ingredients remain in solution in the non-aqueous solvent and do not precipitate out.

In addition to the non-polar ingredients, the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contain at least one surfactant, for example, a polyethylene glycol derivate of vitamin E. Typically, the surfactant has an HLB value between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20. Exemplary of surfactants are those described above, including polyethylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E described herein, such as tocopherol polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), such as the TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives described herein, and other surfactants having similar properties to TPGS, for example, other surfactants having HLB values between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20. Typically, the surfactant is a natural surfactant, for example, a surfactant that is GRAS (generally recognized as safe)-certified by the FDA and/or Kosher certified, for example, TPGS.

In the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein, the concentration of the surfactant, for example, the polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, is greater than 5% or about 5%, typically greater than 10% or about 10%, typically greater than 20% or about 20%, for example, greater than 25% or about 25%, for example, a concentration within the concentration range of between 5% or about 5% and 40% or about 40%, between 10% or about 10% and 40% or about 40%, typically between 20% or about 20% and 40% or about 40%, for example, between 25% or about 25% and 40% or about 40%, for example, at least, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 28.25, 28.4, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 34.6, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, or 40%, by weight, of the pre-gel concentrate.

The pre-gel concentrates contain one or more non-aqueous solvents, such as solvents that are insoluble or only partial soluble in water. Typically, the non-aqueous solvent is an alcohol, a hydrocarbon, and/or an ester that has little or no solubility in water. Exemplary of non-aqueous solvents that can be included in the pre-gel concentrates are aromatic alcohols, including, but are not limited to, benzyl alcohol, cyclic hydrocarbons, e.g., d-limonene, aromatic esters, e.g., benzyl benzoate, and any non-aqueous solvent that is insoluble or has only partial solubility in water. Typically, an aqueous solvent, e.g., water, is not added as an ingredient to the pre-gel concentrate. In the pre-gel concentrates provided herein, the concentration of the non-aqueous solvent, or the total of all of the one or more non-aqueous solvents, is chosen from within a concentration range of between 5% or about 5% and 20% or about 20%, for example, at least 5, 6, 7, 7.5, 8, 9, 10, 10.6, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 15.4, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20%, by weight, of the pre-gel concentrate.

A number of parameters of the pre-gel concentrates, including ingredients, their relative concentrations, and methods for making the pre-gel concentrates, affect the desirable properties of the concentrate, for example, the ability of the non-polar ingredients to remain in solution and not precipitate when a high concentration of non-polar ingredient is present. By extension, these parameters of the pre-gel concentrates also affect the desirable properties of the soft gel compositions, for example, the bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients in the soft gel composition after consumption, for example, human consumption. In particular, the nature of the surfactant, particularly the HLB of the surfactant, and the non-aqueous solvent, and the relative concentrations of the surfactant, non-aqueous solvent, and non-polar ingredients in the pre-gel concentrates, contribute to the desirable properties of the pre-gel concentrates and thus, the soft gel compositions.

Accordingly, properties of the ingredients and their relative concentrations in the pre-gel concentrates are important for the ability of the pre-gel concentrates to yield desirable soft gel compositions. Selecting the appropriate ingredients and relative concentrations thereof, within the ranges described herein, produce pre-gel concentrates that can be introduced into gel capsules to yield soft gel compositions having desirable properties.

c. Soft Gel Compositions Containing Non-Polar Ingredients i. Capsules

The pre-gel concentrates are introduced into soft gel capsules to produce the soft gels provided. The soft gel compositions contain a non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate within a shell or coating, typically, a gel or similar capsule. The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates described herein that contain non-polar ingredients, a surfactant, and non-aqueous solvent, are encapsulated in a coating or shell, such as a gel coating, to form the soft gel compositions provided herein. The resulting soft gel compositions provided herein display advantageous properties, such as enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients, for example, after the soft gel has been consumed. Methods for encapsulating non-aqueous pre-gel compositions are well known, and include encapsulation into gelatin shells, or into shells composed of alternative materials or combinations of materials are known to those of skill in the art. Numerous vendors and companies provide such services and compositions. The soft gels containing the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing the non-polar ingredients provide a more bioavailable product compared to tablets or powders. When consumed, the soft gel coating dissolves, releasing the contents.

Materials for encapsulation are well known. Capsules generally include a high proportion of gelatin (or a gelatin substitute) and additional ingredients, for example a plasticizer, to make the gel soft and pliable. Examples of the capsular materials include, but are not limited to, natural or synthetic gelatin, pectin, casein, collagen, protein, modified starch, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acrylic, natural or synthetic polymers, cellulose derivatives (such as, but not limited to, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose (HPMC)), and combinations thereof, optionally with one or more plasticizers and/or water. In some examples, soft gel capsules are made to accommodate vegetarian or vegan lifestyles. For such applications, alternative animal-free capsules, such as capsules made from seaweed extract and gluten free starch without modified sugars, can be used. Capsular materials also optionally include one or more preservatives, coloring and opacifying agents such as titanium dioxide to decrease the clarity of the shell of the soft gel capsule, flavorings and sweeteners, sugars, gastroresistant substances, fillers, binders, lubricants, disintegrates, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, additional coatings on the capsules, such as immediate release coatings, protective coatings, enteric or delayed release coatings, sustained release coatings, barrier coatings, and combinations thereof can be placed upon the soft gel coating. Flavors and up to 5% sucrose are added in certain examples in order to increase palatability of the soft gel prior to ingestion. In another example, in cases of decreased bioavailability of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients, additional coatings can be added to the soft gel that increase delivery of the non-polar ingredients.

Methods of manufacturing soft capsules are well known to the skilled artisan. Exemplary processes for manufacture of soft capsules include, but are not limited to, the plate process, the rotary die process, the reciprocating die process, the bubble process, and the continuous process (Ebert (1978), “Soft Elastic Gelatin Capsules: A Unique Dosage Form,” Pharm. Tech. 1(5); Reich (2004), “Chapter 11: Formulation and physical properties of soft capsules,” Pharmaceutical Capsules, 2d Ed., Pharmaceutical Press, 201-212; Gullapalli, R. P. (2010) “Soft Gelatin Capsules (Softgels),” J. Pharm. Sci. 99(10):4107-4146). Soft gel capsules can be made using standard rotary die encapsulation technology, detailed in Stanley's Chapter 13 of “The Theory and Practice of Industrial Chemistry” (Lachman, Lieberman, and Kanig, Copyright Lea & Febiger, 1970) and in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2012/0301546 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,769,226 and 7,213,511). Capsules can be manufactured and then hermetically sealed to form a one-piece hermetically sealed gelatin shell encasing the concentrate containing the non-polar ingredients. Capsules also can be manufactured according to methods to create seamless capsules (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,478,508, 5,882,680 and 4,780,316).

The capsules, for example, a gelatin capsule, can be manufactured in accord with conventional methods, for example, as a two-piece hard gelatin capsule, sealed or unsealed, typically in standard shape and various standard sizes or as a soft gelatin capsule that is a one-piece hermetically sealed gelatin shell. The shape and size of the capsules can vary in accordance with the method of preparation and the planned use of the capsule. Capsule shapes can be tailored to the requirements of specific products, including, but not limited to, tube-shaped topical disposable capsules, aplicaps for ophthalmic preparations, suppositories, or an oral dosage form. Additional capsule shapes include, but are not limited to, round, oval, tubular, oblong, twist off, or a non-standard shape (e.g., a fish, tree, star, heart, or bear), and are preferably oblong. In some embodiments, non-standard shapes can be used. The size of the capsule used will vary in accordance with the volume of the fill composition, for example the volume of a pre-gel concentrate containing non-polar ingredients, such as the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients described herein, that are intended to be contained therein.

The soft gel capsules are filled with non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein. Compositions for encapsulation by soft gel, such as compositions containing non-polar ingredients, can be formulated in any conventional manner by adding a selected amount of the concentrate, into an acceptable soft gel capsule, such as a soft gelatin capsule.

Soft gel capsule fill volume typically depends upon the density of the encapsulated material, the particular ingredients and dosages desired of non-polar components thereof desired. A single-body soft gelatin capsule, for example, in oval, oblong or other shapes, typically is provided, for example, in sizes from 3 to 22 US minims (1 US minim being equal to 0.0616 mL or about 1/60 of a fluid dram (about one drop)). A minim is a unit of volume occupied by a fluid or semi-fluid matrix such as, for example, the volume occupied by a concentrate containing non-polar ingredients. For example, an oblong or oval capsule that is 4.0 minims in size can contain 0.246 mL of material, for example, a concentrate containing non-polar ingredients. In another example, an oblong or oval capsule that is 8.0 minims in size can contain 0.493 mL of material, for example, a concentrate containing non-polar ingredients. Capsule sizes are designated by convention as (000), (00), (0), (1), (2), (3), (4), and (5), with a larger number corresponding to a smaller size. For example, one teaspoon can fill approximately seven size “0” capsules and about five size “00” capsules. Size “00” capsules are generally the largest size utilized for human consumption. Soft gels can contain, for example, at least 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 150, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 800 or 1000 mg of the pre-gel composition. Dosage amount depends upon the non-polar components, a daily dosage thereof and the number of soft gels to be consumed per day. The soft gel composition can provide a single dose or a fractional dose.

The soft capsules can be manufactured, for example, according to the conventional methods listed above with the addition of a printed item on the capsule. Examples of printed items include, but are not limited to, bandings, brandings, designations, identifications, images, and other printed items, and are exerted by methods well known in the art (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,449,139; 2,623,494; 2,703,047; 2,688,775; 3,124,840; 3,203,347; 3,333,031; and 5,246,635). A soft gel capsule, for example, a soft gelatin capsule, that has been manufactured in accordance with conventional methods an be characterized by several properties of the capsule, including, but not limited to, Bloom strength and hardness. The Bloom test measures the strength of the gel capsule in which the majority is composed of gelatin, by determining the weight (in grams) of a probe that is needed to deflect the surface of the gel 4 mm without puncturing the surface of the gel. Results of the Bloom test are expressed in Bloom units and generally vary between 30-300 Bloom. The specific procedure of characterization by the Bloom method are well known to the skilled artisan. In other instances, the strength of the capsule wall is measured by an alternative device that assesses the elasticity, integrity and/or strength of the gel capsule, including seam strength. The optimal range for a characteristic soft gel, such as the soft gel capsules described herewith, is 150-250. In addition to Bloom strength, soft gel capsules can also be characterized by their hardness. The hardness of a soft gel capsule is largely determined by the ratio of the plasticizer component to gelatin. Following the drying process during capsule manufacturing, a Bareiss Hardness tester, or an equivalent device, is used to measure the hardness of the soft gel capsule. Measures of soft gel capsule integrity are essential for quality control prior to packaging; moreover, measurements that fall within acceptable ranges, such as values known to the skilled artisan, are used to predict and prevent failure during packaging.

Soft gel capsules, such as the soft gel capsules containing the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients provided herein, can be packaged in containers, for example packaging for the soft gels can include, but is not limited to, plastic or glass or metal containers, or blister cards. Soft gel packaging can provide enhanced protection against various insults, including, but not limited to, humidity, oxygen, light, and other toxicities. Plastic containers can be made of any suitable plastic materials including, for example, high density polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyethylene terephthalate, and can also include an integrated or separate desiccant and/or oxygen absorber. Glass bottles can be colored glass, induction sealed, and have a plastic or metal lid. In some embodiments, the packaging of soft gels in bottles can include bottles that are opaque, tamper-resistant, or tamper-evident. In some embodiments, the bottles contain sufficient desiccant material to protect the soft gels from damage from increased water or humidity where the desiccant can be integrated into the container, separate, or as a film.

In some examples, the soft gels compositions are packaged in containers. Containers used for packaging soft gels, such as the soft gels containing non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients provided herein, can be filled with any number of soft gel capsules. For example, a container can contain, for example, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 500, 1000, or more than 1000, soft gel capsules, such as the soft gel capsules containing the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients provided herein. In other examples, the soft gel compositions are packaged in blister cards. Blister cards used for packaging soft gels, such as the soft gels containing non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients provided herein, can contain any number of soft gel tablets, e.g., a blister card can hold 3, 5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, or more than 100 soft gel capsules, such as the soft gel capsules containing the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients provided herein. Blister cards can, for example, contain a foil backing as a barrier. Blister cards or packaging can include, for example, triplex blister film of different types, such as standard and high barrier films, including, for example, triplex Flexafarm Sbc (e.g., PVC 250 my+PE 25 my+PVDC 150 g/mq sbc grade) and Aquaba-PVC (e.g., PVC 250 my+AQUABA 160 g/mq), Aclar, Alu-Alu formats, triple layer blister foil (OPA) with soft tempered aluminium in central position, other layers PVC and polyamide, and new generation multilayer blister combined materials.

d. Formulating the Soft Gel Compositions

The provided non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contain a high amount of non-aqueous solvent and have displayed advantageous properties after encapsulation, such as encapsulation in a shell or coating, e.g., a gelating shell or coating, to form a soft gel composition. For example, the soft gel compositions provided herein that contain a high amount of non-aqueous solvent have advantageous properties, such as, for example, the soft gel compositions contain a high amount of non-polar ingredient that does not precipitate out of the composition. Additionally, the soft gel compositions provided herein that contain a high amount of non-polar ingredient display enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients after consumption, for example, human consumption, of the soft gel composition, as compared to tablets or powders.

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates provided herein are formulated such that encapsulation of a concentrate, for example, in a coating or shell, e.g., a gelatin coating or shell, yields a soft gel composition that contains a homogenous concentrate, i.e., a concentrate in which the non-polar ingredients are dissolved in the non-aqueous solvent and do not precipitate out. The high solubility of the non-polar ingredients in the non-aqueous solvent leads to advantageous properties, for example, enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients when the soft gel is consumed, for example, by a human.

A number of parameters of the pre-gel concentrates, including ingredients, their relative concentrations, and methods for making the pre-gel concentrates, affect the ability of the non-polar ingredients to remain in solution and not precipitate when a high concentration of non-polar ingredient is present. By extension, these parameters of the pre-gel concentrates also affect the advantageous properties of the soft gel compositions, for example, the bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients in the soft gel composition upon consumption, for example, human consumption.

Thus, the pre-gel concentrates are formulated such that after encapsulation, the resulting soft gel composition displays one or more advantageous properties, for example, lack of phase separation and/or precipitation over time, and/or enhanced bioavailability of the non-polar ingredients. In one example, the advantageous property is the ability of the provided pre-gel concentrates to yield soft gel compositions that have a lack of precipitation of the non-polar ingredients when encapsulated, for example, in a coating or shell. In another example, the advantageous property relates to the ability of pre-gel concentrates to be encapsulated for human consumption, for example, in a consumable shell or coating. In another example, it can be advantageous that the pre-gel concentrate contains less than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients. In another example, it can be advantageous that the pre-gel concentrates contains greater than or equal to a particular concentration of one or more ingredients.

e. Ingredients and Concentration Ranges

Each of the provided soft gel compositions contains a pre-gel concentrate encapsulated in a shell or coating, such as a gelatin shell or coating. The pre-gel concentrates, and thus, the encapsulated soft gel compositions provided herein, contain one or more non-polar ingredients, at least one surfactant, and one or more non-aqueous solvents. Typically, encapsulation of a pre-gel concentrate to form a soft gel composition does not change or alter the identity or concentration of the ingredients in the pre-gel concentrate, e.g., the identity and concentration of ingredients in a particular pre-gel concentrate remain the same in the corresponding soft gel composition after encapsulation.

Each of the provided soft gel compositions contains a non-polar ingredient including, but not limited to, the exemplary non-polar ingredients described herein above. Typically, the non-polar ingredient is or contains one or more non-polar compounds. The soft gel compositions provided herein can contain one non-polar ingredient or more than one non-polar ingredient, such as two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or more non-polar ingredients. The soft gel compositions provided herein can contain high amounts (i.e., concentrations) of non-polar ingredients, such as up to at or about 90 wt % non-polar ingredients.

The soft gel compositions provided herein contain pre-gel concentrates that contain one or more non-polar ingredients, where the total amount of non-polar ingredients is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the soft gel compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 40 wt % to at or about 90 wt %, such as between or between about 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 40% and 65%, 40% and 70%, 40% and 75%, 40% and 80%, 40% and 85%, 40% and 90%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 45% and 65%, 45% and 70%, 45% and 75%, 45% and 80%, 45% and 85%, 45% and 90%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, 50% and 65%, 50% and 70%, 50% and 75%, 50% and 80%, 50% and 85%, 50% and 90%, 55% and 60%, 55% and 65%, 55% and 70%, 55% and 75%, 55% and 80%, 55% and 85%, 55% and 90%, 60% and 65%, 60% and 70%, 60% and 75%, 60% and 80%, 60% and 85%, 60% and 90%, 65% and 70%, 65% and 75%, 65% and 80%, 65% and 85%, 65% and 90%, 70% and 75%, 70% and 80%, 70% and 85%, 70% and 90%, 75% and 80%, 75% and 85%, 75% and 90%, 80% and 85%, 80% and 90%, and 85% and 90% non-polar ingredient by weight of the soft gel compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of non-polar ingredients in the soft gel compositions are at or about 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, and 90% (wt %) of the soft gel compositions.

Each of the provided soft gel compositions contain pre-gel concentrates that contain at least one surfactant that is a polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, for example, TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives described herein. The surfactant typically has an HLB value of between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20, or about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20, typically between at or about 12 and at or about 14. For example, TPGS, such as the TPGS described herein, has an HLB value of about 13.

The polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the soft gel compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 5% to at or about 40%, such as 5% to 10%, 5% to 15%, 5% to 20%, 5% to 25%, 5% to 30%, 5% to 35%, 5% to 40%, 10% to 15%, 10% to 20%, 10% to 25%, 10% to 30%, 10% to 35%, 10% to 40%, 15% to 20%, 15% to 25%, 15% to 30%, 15% to 35%, 15% to 40%, 20% to 25%, 20% to 30%, 20% to 35%, 20% to 40%, 25% to 30%, 25% to 35%, 25% to 40%, 30% to 35%, 30% to 40%, 30% to 30%, 30% to 35%, 30% to 40%, and 35% to 40%, by weight of the soft gel compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, in the soft gel compositions are at or about 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, 20%, 22%, 25%, 27%, 30%, 32%, 35%, 37%, and 40% (wt %) of the soft gel compositions.

The soft gel compositions contain pre-gel concentrates that contain one or more non-aqueous solvents. Typically, the non-aqueous solvents include those that are insoluble or only partially soluble in water. Exemplary non-aqueous solvents include alcohols, such as aromatic alcohols, e.g., benzyl alcohol, alcohol derivatives, such as esters, e.g., benzyl benzoate, and hydrocarbons, such as cyclic hydrocarbons, e.g., d-limonene. In one example, the soft gel composition contains benzyl alcohol as a non-aqueous solvent. In another example, the soft gel composition contains a mixture of benzyl alcohol and d-limonene as the non-aqueous solvents. The soft gel compositions provided herein can contain one non-aqueous solvent or more than one non-aqueous solvent, such as two, three, four, five, or more non-aqueous solvents.

The soft gel compositions provided herein contain pre-gel concentrates that contain one or more non-aqueous solvents, where the total amount of non-aqueous solvent is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the soft gel compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 5 wt % to at or about 20 wt %, such as between or between about 5% and 7%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 12%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 17%, 5% and 20%, 7% and 10%, 7% and 12%, 7% and 15%, 7% and 17%, 7% and 20%, 10% and 12%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 17%, 10% and 20%, 12% and 15%, 12% and 17%, 12% and 20%, 15% and 17%, 15% and 20%, and 17% and 20% non-aqueous solvent(s) by weight of the soft gel compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of non-aqueous solvent(s) in the soft gel compositions are at or about 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, and 20% (wt %) of the soft gel composition.

f. Exemplary Dosages and Administration of the Soft Gel Compositions

The soft gel compositions provided herein that contain non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients, can be formulated, for example, for single dosage (direct) administration, multiple dosage administration, or for dilution or other modification. The concentration of the non-polar ingredients in the soft gel compositions is typically effective for delivery of an amount, upon administration, that is effective for the intended treatment or benefit. Those of skill in the art can readily formulate a composition for administration in accord with the methods herein. For example, to formulate a soft gel composition, the weight fraction of a non-polar ingredient is dissolved, suspended, dispersed, or otherwise mixed, for example as detailed in the Examples, below, and then the composition encapsulated by a shell or coating, such as a soft shell or coating, e.g., gelatin, and the resulting soft gel capsule is utilized as a vehicle for delivering an effective concentration of non-polar ingredient. For example, an effective concentration of non-polar ingredient can be delivered via the soft gel to a human, for example, by consumption of the soft gel composition.

The precise amount or dose of the non-polar ingredient administered via the soft gel composition depends upon one or more considerations, including, for example, the condition to be treated, the benefit to be conferred, the weight and general state of the subject, and/or the particular characteristics of the subject. If necessary, a particular dosage and duration and treatment protocol can be empirically determined or extrapolated. For example, exemplary doses of non-polar ingredients, such as the non-polar ingredients provided herein, if necessary, can be used as a starting point to determine appropriate dosages for a particular subject and condition or benefit.

The soft gel compositions containing pre-gel concentrates that contain non-polar ingredients can be formulated so that the dose of non-polar ingredient contained within a single soft gel capsule is from, for example, 100 g or about 100 g to 2000 g or about 2000 g, or 200 g or about 200 g to 2000 g or about 2000 g, such as at or at least about 100 g, 150 g, 200 g, 250 g, 300 g, 350 g, 400 g, 450 g, 500 g, 600 g, 700 g, 800 g, 900 g, 1000 g, 1100 g, 1200 g, 1300 g, 1400 g, 1500 g, 1600 g, 1700 g, 1800 g, 1900 g, or 2000 g, for direct administration.

Typically, the concentration of non-polar ingredient is not more than 90% or about 90% of the weight of the soft gel composition, for example, between 40% or about 40% and 90% or about 90% of the weight of the soft gel composition. For example, when the non-polar ingredient is administered as a component of the pre-gel concentrate encapsulated by a shell or coating, e.g., a gelatin shell or coating, as described herein, the non-polar ingredient is administered at a concentration of between 40% or about 40% and 90% or about 90%, although more dilute or higher concentrations can be used. Generally, the level of non-polar ingredient can be increased or decreased according to the judgment of a person of skill in the art. The amount of the remaining ingredients can be adjusted as needed.

In the methods described herein, soft gel compositions containing non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates containing non-polar ingredients, such as the soft gel compositions described herein, can be administered to a subject for treating a variety of conditions or conferring a particular beneficial effect. In particular, the soft gel compositions provided herein are intended for use in methods in which other pharmaceuticals, nutraceuticals and/or dietary supplements, such as known treatments, can be used to convey a benefit to the subject. The non-polar ingredients contained within the soft gel compositions provided herein are typically included in an amount sufficient to confer a beneficial effect in the absence of undesirable side effects on the subject. The amount of non-polar ingredient to be administered can be determined by one of skill in the art. The precise dosage, which can be determined empirically, can depend on the particular composition, the type of condition to be treated and the seriousness of the condition, the type of benefit to be conferred, in addition to other characteristics known to those of skill in the art.

4. Powders and Pre-Spray Emulsions

The high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivatives, such as the PEG derivatives of vitamin E, particularly the high dimer-containing TPGS mixtures, are included in emulsion compositions that are for drying, such as by spray-drying, to form powders. The pre-spray emulsions include all of the ingredients in the powders and additionally a polar compound, such as water, which is removed by spray drying, evaporation or other drying process. The ingredients include the non-polar ingredient(s), the high dimer-containing PEG derivative of vitamin E, in particular, a TPGS mixture, a sugar fatty acid, a binder, such as a maltodextrin, and other optional ingredients, such as stabilizers, such as a carbonate or bicarbonate, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or a co-enzyme Q-containing product, and/or an ingestible acid. The emulsions are prepared and then dried to produce the powders.

Typically, drying an emulsion with a high oil load results in a product that is not free-flowing and is more like a sludge than a powder. Provided are water-soluble powder products that contain high concentrations (more than 20%, and particularly, more than 25%, 27%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 47%, or 50%, by weight of the composition) of non-polar ingredients. In order to produce powders for spray drying, it is necessary to include a threshold amount of solids for forming the powder. To achieve this, the TPGS is reduced in amount, and sugar fatty acid esters, such as SFAEs, are added in its place and in addition to or in place of a binder, such as a dextrin. In the absence of the added SFAE, when dried, the emulsions, and particularly the emulsions with higher amounts of non-polar ingredient, do not form a dry free-flowing powder, but form a sludge-like oil with too high a moisture content. The dry powders are added in any desired amount to a beverage, particularly an aqueous beverage, and/or to a food, to supplement the beverage or as a way to deliver the non-polar ingredient(s) therein.

The powders contain sugar fatty acids in place of or in addition to the binders, such as a dextrin, generally used to produce powders from emulsions. The resulting powders are free-flowing (not sticky or sludge-like) and water-soluble. Also provided are pre-spray emulsions from which the powders are produced. Addition of a sucrose (or other sugar) fatty acid ester in place of maltodextrin or other such binder in a pre-spray emulsion permits production of free-flowing dry powders with a higher concentration of non-polar ingredients than previously available.

The pre-spray emulsions also can include additional ingredients, such as stabilizers, include carbonates and bicarbonates, as described above, and antioxidants. The sugar fatty acid esters, such as SFAEs, and the carbonate, such as KHCO₃, improve the stability of the powders and also the resulting beverages and foods into which the powders are dissolved. The sugar fatty acid esters, such as SFAEs, act as emulsifiers in the pre-spray emulsion and powders, and also act as a solid for drying the pre-spray emulsions to produce the powders. Compared to prior art powders prepared from emulsions containing a PEG derivative of vitamin E and/or other such surfactants that are not solids, such as TPGS alone, only contribute to stability of the pre-spray emulsion, but do not contribute to formation of a powder. By including the sugar fatty acid esters, such as SFAEs, the properties of the powders are improved, and higher levels of non-polar ingredients can be included.

Exemplary pre-spray emulsions and powders are described in the examples and below. All contain up to about or at 60% non-polar ingredient; 1-10% TPGS; and a binder and sugar fatty acid esters, such as SFAE and maltodextrin (or other such binder). Additional optional ingredients include stabilizers, emulsifiers and antioxidants. For example, one powder described herein includes: 45-55% oil/non polar compound(s); 1-2% TPGS; 15-20% SFAE (emulsifier and binder); 3-10% carbonate, such as KHCO₃, which serves as an antioxidant, binder and keeps the powder dry and/or acts as a leavener); 15-20% green tea extract, which contains 50% EGCG powder (antioxidant); 1-2% saponin (quillaja bark; emulsifier); and 0.1-0.2% Saladizer® (thickener and emulsifier). Another exemplary powder contains 55-60% oil/non polar compound(s); 1-2% TPGS (emulsifier); 5-10% SFAE (emulsifier and binder); 3-10% carbonate, such as KHCO₃ (antioxidant, binder and keeps the powder dry or acts as a leavener); 15-25% whey protein/gelatin powder (binder); 1-2% saponin (quillaja bark; emulsifier) and 0.1-0.2% Saladizer® (thickener and emulsifier). These amounts and compositions are exemplary only. Further examples are described below. It is understood that for purposes herein, the water-soluble vitamin E derivative, such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, is a high dimer-containing form described and defined above. Such description is incorporated into this section by reference.

Provided are pre-spray emulsions, which contain the non-polar ingredient(s) as described herein above, the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture, such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, as described and defined above, and the non-polar ingredient, as well as the sugar fatty acid esters, such as an SFAE or mixture thereof, and a binder, such as maltodextrin, whey and others described herein and/or known to those of skill in the art, and any other ingredients to be included in the powder. As described below, these are combined to form a pre-spray emulsion which is then dried to form a powder. To form the powder, the pre-spray emulsion can be dried, and then dissolved in an aqueous medium, such as water, and dried again.

a. Pre-Spray Emulsions Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

Provided herein are pre-spray emulsions that contain the pre-emulsion concentrates containing non-polar ingredients dispersed in aqueous liquid and have desirable properties, including improved clarity, stability, smell and taste. The provided emulsions (and methods for making the emulsions) can be used to formulate any non-polar ingredient in aqueous compositions, including the non-polar ingredients (e.g., non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds) described herein and other known non-polar ingredients.

In general, emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water emulsions) are colloidal dispersions of two immiscible liquids (e.g., oil and water or other aqueous liquid), containing a continuous and a dispersed phase. Emulsions can be used to disperse non-polar ingredients in aqueous liquids. In an oil-in-water emulsion, the dispersed phase is an oil phase and the continuous phase is an aqueous (water) phase. There is a need for emulsions (e.g., oil-in-water emulsions) containing non-polar ingredients in aqueous liquids and methods and compositions for generating products, such as the water-soluble powders, that are free-flowing, i.e., not sticky. In particular, emulsions are needed that are more suitable and desirable for human consumption of the non-polar ingredients, for example, beverages. For example, emulsions having improved clarity (e.g., small particle size, low turbidity), stability (e.g., lack of separation), taste and smell, that can form powders that are free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, and water-soluble are provided herein.

Typically, the provided emulsions containing the concentrates containing non-polar ingredients are nanoemulsions, which are emulsions having dispersed droplets (particles) with diameters less than 1000 nm or less than about 1000 nm, typically, less than 500 nm or less than about 500 nm, typically less than 300 nm or about 300 nm, typically less than 250 or less than about 250 nm, typically less than 200 nm or less than about 200 nm, for example, less than or less than about 5, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190, or 200 nm. Typically, the provided nanoemulsion compositions are oil-in-water nanoemulsions, containing the non-polar ingredients dispersed in aqueous liquid.

The provided emulsion compositions are stabilized by one or more surfactants and/or co-surfactants and/or emulsion stabilizers. Surfactants form an interfacial film in the emulsion, between the oil and water phase, providing stability. Typically, the nanoemulsions of the provided compositions contain micelles, in which one or more surfactant surrounds the non-polar ingredient. The micelles are dispersed in the water phase.

The provided pre-spray emulsions contain the pre-emulsion concentrates containing non-polar ingredients, which can be spray-dried to provide non-polar ingredients in a powder, such as free-flowing, water-soluble powder. The pre-spray emulsions can be made using any concentrate containing non-polar ingredients, a sugar fatty acid ester, and a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin, such as the pre-emulsion concentrates provided herein.

i. Formulating the Pre-Spray Emulsions

In the provided methods, the pre-spray emulsions are formulated by selecting ingredients and concentration ratios of the ingredients that yield compositions having one or more desired properties. The ingredients include a concentrate that contains non-polar ingredients and a polyalkylene glycol vitamin E derivative, e.g., a high dimer-containing TPGS, a surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester; and a polar solvent, e.g., water. In some examples, the pre-spray emulsions further include one or more of a stabilizer, a binder, e.g., maltodextrin, a co-surfactant, an emulsion stabilizer, and a pH adjuster. In the provided emulsions, a surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, is present in place of or in combination with a binder, e.g., maltodextrin. For example, the pre-spray emulsions provided herein can contain a surfactant, such as such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, and not contain a binder, e.g., maltodextrin. In other examples, the pre-spray emulsions provided herein contain a mixture of surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, and binder, e.g., maltodextrin.

The pre-spray emulsions provided herein contain high concentrations of non-polar ingredients, for example, at least 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30% or more non-polar ingredients, such that when the emulsion is dried the resulting powder includes up to as much as 60% non-polar ingredient. The emulsions are formulated such that drying the emulsion, e.g., spray drying, yields a powder composition that contains high concentrations of non-polar ingredient, yet is free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, and water-soluble. The emulsion dry to form a free-flowing, i.e., not sticky or sludgy, powder even where a high concentration of non-polar ingredient is present.

ii. Exemplary Ingredients and Typical Concentration Ranges (a) Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Each pre-spray emulsion provided herein contains a pre-emulsion concentrate, such as the pre-emulsion concentrates provided herein, that contain non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, for example, a polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin, e.g., TPGS. In some examples, the pre-emulsion concentrate contains a preservative, for example, benzyl alcohol.

The pre-emulsion concentrates used in formulating the pre-spray emulsions contain between or between about 30 wt % and 99 wt % non-polar ingredient, typically at least 40 wt %, or at least 50 wt %, or more, such as at least 55%, 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or 99% non-polar ingredient, by weight, of the pre-emulsion concentrate. When formulating the pre-spray emulsions provided herein that contain the pre-emulsion concentrates containing between or between about 30 wt % and 99 wt % non-polar ingredients, the emulsions will contain, for example, between or between about 1 wt % and 40 wt % concentrate, such as between or between about 1% and 5%, 1% and 10%, 1% and 15%, 1% and 20%, 1% and 25%, 1% and 30%, 1% and 35%, 1% and 40%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, and 35% and 40% concentrate containing non-polar ingredients, by weight, of the emulsion. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of concentrate containing non-polar ingredients in the emulsions are at or about 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, and 20% (wt %) of the emulsion. By extension, the amount of non-polar ingredient present in the pre-spray emulsions is typically between or between about 5 wt % and 30 wt % of the emulsion, for example, between or between about 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, and 25% and 30% non-polar ingredient, by weight of the pre-spray emulsion.

(b) Surfactants

The provided pre-spray emulsions contain surfactants. In particular, the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative, such as a PEG derivative of vitamin E, particularly the high dimer-containing TPGS as described above. Additionally, the compositions include sugar fatty acid esters, such as one or more SFAEs. In the provided methods for producing the emulsions, the surfactant is added to the water phase, the oil phase, or to the water and the oil phase. The emulsions further can contain one or more co-surfactants or emulsifiers. Typically, the surfactants are natural surfactants, for example, a surfactant that is G.R.A.S. (generally recognized as safe) by the FDA and/or Kosher certified. In an exemplary embodiment, the surfactant is a sugar-derived surfactant, for example, a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester.

Exemplary of surfactants, in addition to the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative compositions, such as a TPGS, and the sugar fatty acid esters, such as used in the provided methods and compositions, are other surfactants having an HLB value of between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20. The surfactants typically are, and typically have an HLB value between at or about 12 and at or about 20.

Particular examples of suitable sugar fatty acid esters for use in the provided compositions include the sugar derived surfactants, including fatty acid esters of sugars and sugar derivatives. For example, sugar fatty acid esters include fatty acid esters of sucrose, glucose, maltose and other sugars, esterified to fatty acids of varying lengths (e.g., varying numbers of carbons). The fatty acids typically have carbon chains between 8 and 28 carbons in length, and typically between 8 and 20, or between 8 and 18 or between 12 and 18, such as, but not limited to, stearic acid (18 carbons), oleic acid (18 carbons), palmitic acid (16 carbons), myristic acid (14 carbons) and lauric acid (12 carbons). Typically, the sugar ester surfactants are sucrose ester surfactants, typically sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants.

The pre-spray emulsions provided herein contain a surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, where the total amount of surfactant, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the emulsion (wt %), e.g., from at or about 1 wt % to at or about 20 wt %, such as between or between about 1% and 3%, 1% and 5%, 1% and 7%, 1% and 10%, 1% and 12%, 1% and 15%, 1% and 17%, 1% and 20%, 3% and 5%, 3% and 7%, 3% and 10%, 3% and 12%, 3% and 15%, 3% and 17%, 3% and 20%, 5% and 7%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 12%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 17%, 5% and 20%, 7% and 10%, 7% and 12%, 7% and 15%, 7% and 17%, 7% and 20%, 10% and 12%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 17%, 10% and 20%, 12% and 15%, 12% and 17%, 12% and 20%, 15% and 17%, 15% and 20%, and 17% and 20%, sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, by weight of the soft gel compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester in the pre-spray emulsions are at or about 1%, 3%, 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, and 20% (wt %) of the pre-spray emulsions.

(1) Sucrose Fatty Acid Ester Surfactants

Sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants contain one or more sucrose fatty acid esters, which are non-ionic surfactants that contain sucrose in the hydrophilic portions and fatty acids in the hydrophobic portions. The sucrose fatty acid esters can be made by well-known methods (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,480,616, 3,644,333, 3,714,144, 4,710,567, 4,898,935, 4,996,309, 4,995,911, 5,011,922 and 5,017,697 and International Patent Application Publication No. WO 2007/082149), typically in an esterification reaction as described below.

Because sucrose contains eight hydroxy (—OH) groups, the esterification reaction can join the sucrose molecule to one fatty acid molecule, or can join it to a plurality of, fatty acid molecules, producing different degrees of esterification, e.g., mono-, di-, tri- and poly-(up to octa-) fatty acid esters, but primarily mono-, di-, and/or tri-esters. The degree of esterification can depend on conditions of esterification. The esterification reaction can be carried out with a single type of fatty acid, or a plurality of fatty acids, such as fatty acids with varying carbon chain lengths, branched and linear fatty acids, and/or saturated or unsaturated fatty acids. The esterification reaction with a single fatty acid can produce a single ester, and typically forms more than one ester, such as mono- di-, tri- and/or poly-esters, formed from one reaction. The relative amounts of mono- di- tri- and/or poly-esters can depend on reaction conditions.

The fatty acid in the sucrose fatty acid ester can be any fatty acid, and can contain between 4 and 28 carbon atoms, typically between 8 and 28 carbon atoms, and typically between 8 and 25 carbon atoms, such as between 8 and 18 carbon atoms, such as 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 and 18 carbon atoms. The fatty acid can be synthetic or naturally occurring, and include linear and branched fatty acids. The fatty acids include, but are not limited to, myristic acid, palmitic acid, stearic acid, oleic acid, caproic acid, capric acid, myristic acid, decanoic acid and pelargonic acid.

Thus, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, and mixtures thereof, and typically contain sucrose monoesters. The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include single fatty acid esters and also include homogeneous mixtures of sucrose esters, containing members with different lengths of fatty acid carbon chain and/or members with different degrees of esterification. For example, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include mixtures of monoesters, diesters, triesters, and/or polyesters. The sugar ester surfactants further include sucrose fatty acid ester analogs and homologs and mixtures thereof.

Sucrose fatty acid esters are compounds having the following formula shown below:

where each of X¹, X², X³, X⁴, X⁵, X⁶, X⁷ and X⁸ independently is:

a hydroxyl (—OH) group, or

where:

each R is an alkyl group having 3-27 carbon atoms; and

when more than one of X¹, X², X³, X⁴, X⁶, X⁷ and X⁸ is

each R can be a different alkyl group (e.g., having different number of carbon atoms and/or different saturation), or can be the same alkyl group.

Typically, in the provided sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants, each R has between 7 and 27 carbon atoms, and typically between 7 and 19 atoms, such as 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, or 19 carbon atoms or between 7 and 17 carbon atoms.

An alkyl group can be a straight chain or branched alkyl group, can be substituted or unsubstituted, and can be a saturated “saturated alkyl group,” meaning that it does not contain any alkene or alkyne groups; or an “unsaturated alkyl group,” meaning that it contains at least one alkene or alkyne group. An alkyl group that includes at least one carbon-carbon double bond (C═C) also is referred to by the term “alkenyl,” and alkenyl groups optionally can be substituted. An alkyl group that includes at least one carbon-carbon triple bond (C≡C) also is referred to by the term “alkynyl,” and alkynyl groups optionally can be substituted.

Typically, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants contain sucrose fatty acid monoesters, having the structure set forth below, where one of X¹, X², X³, X⁴, X⁵, X⁶, X⁷ and X⁸ (typically X¹) is

and the other seven of X¹, X², X³, X⁴, X⁶, X⁷ and X⁸ are each, independently, —OH. An exemplary monoester has the following structure:

where R is an alkyl group having 3-27 carbons, and typically 7-27 carbons.

The sucrose fatty acid esters include blends of sucrose fatty acid esters, which typically include monoesters, and can also include diesters, triesters and polyesters, which have structures according to Scheme V, above, where two (diesters), three (triesters) or more (polyesters) of X¹, X², X³, X⁴, X⁵, X⁶, X⁷ and X⁸, (and typically X¹ and X⁸) independently, are

In general, sucrose fatty acid esters, including mixtures of sucrose fatty acid esters, can have varying HLB values, such as HLB values ranging from at or about 1 to at or about 20. The HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester generally depends on the degree of esterification (e.g., the average degree of esterification in a mixture of different esters). Typically, the lower the degree of esterification (e.g., average degree), the higher the HLB value of the sucrose fatty acid ester or mixture thereof. Exemplary sucrose esters include sucrose distearate (HLB=3), sucrose distearate/monostearate (HLB 12), sucrose dipalmitate (HLB=7.4); sucrose monostearate (HLB=15), sucrose monopalmitate (HLB>10); Sucrose monolaurate (HLB 15). Typically, the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants in the provided compositions have an HLB value of between at or about 14 and at or about 20, such as at or about 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20, and typically between at or about 14 and at or about 18, such as, but not limited to, HLB values of at or about 15, 16 and 17, such as, for example, sucrose ester surfactants including sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monolaurate and sucrose monostearate.

The sugar ester surfactants include sucrose ester blends, for example, sucrose ester mixtures containing a specified amount (e.g., percent, by weight) of sucrose monoesters. Exemplary surfactants include sucrose ester mixtures having at least at or about 50%, by weight (w/w), monoester, such as at or about or at least at or about 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84, 85, 86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99 or 100%, by weight (w/w), sucrose monoesters, and typically at least at or about 60%, by weight or at least at or about 70%, by weight (w/w), monoesters. The surfactants include mixtures of sucrose esters containing at least at or about 50% sucrose monoesters, mixtures of sucrose esters containing at least at or about 60% sucrose monoesters, mixtures of sucrose esters containing at least at or about 70% sucrose monoesters, mixtures of sucrose esters containing at least at or about 80% sucrose monoesters, and mixtures of sucrose esters containing at least at or about 90% sucrose monoesters, for example, mixtures containing at or about 72% sucrose monoesters, at or about 61% sucrose monoesters, or at or about 90% sucrose monoesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid monoesters, such as sucrose monocaprylate, sucrose monodecanoate, sucrose monolaurate, sucrose monomyristate, sucrose monopalmitate, sucrose monostearate, sucrose monopelargonate, sucrose monoundecanoate, sucrose monotridecanoate, sucrose monopentadecanoate and sucrose monoheptadecanoate. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include mixtures containing varying percentages of monoesters, diesters, triesters and polyesters, such as, but not limited to, a mixture having at or about 72% monoesters, 23% diesters, 5% triesters and 0% polyesters; a mixture having at or about 61% monoesters, 30% diesters, 7% triesters, and 2% polyesters; and a mixtures having at or about 52% monoesters, 36% diesters, 10% triesters and 2% polyesters.

The sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants include sucrose fatty acid esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan (which, in some examples, can be produced according to the methods described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,898,935, 4,996,309, 4,995,911, 5,011,922 and 5,017,697, and distributed through Montello Inc., Tulsa, Okla., such as the F-160 and F-140 grade esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, and sucrose esters sold under the trade name SURFHOPE® SE PHARMA, by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. These sucrose fatty acid esters are mixtures of esters with different degrees of esterification. The sucrose fatty acid esters further include Ryoto sugar esters, which are food-grade esters sold by Mitsubishi-Kagaku Foods Corporation, distributed by Mitsubishi Chemical Performance Polymers, Inc. Exemplary sucrose fatty acid esters sold under the trade name DK Ester®, and those sold under the trade name SURFHOPE® SE PHARMA and Ryoto sugar esters, are listed in the table below. The table lists the average degree of esterification or the fatty acid composition within the mixture, and the HLB of the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactant. Any of the surfactants in the table below can be used. Typically, the surfactant (e.g., a surfactant listed in the table below), has an HLB value between at or about 12 and at or about 20, typically between at or about 15 and at or about 18, e.g., but not limited to, those surfactants in the table having an HLB of 15 or 16, such as the sucrose fatty acid ester surfactant sold under the name DK ESTER® F-160, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan, and distributed through Montello Inc., Tulsa, Okla. Other exemplary sucrose fatty acid ester surfactants are described in Youan et al., AAPS PharmaSci 2003; 5(2) Article 22; 1-9 and in Okamoto et al., Biol. Pharm. Bull. 28(9): 1689-1694 (2005).

Exemplary Sucrose Fatty Acid Ester (SFAE) Surfactants

Average Distribution (by weight) Sucrose Fatty Degree of Fatty acid of Ester Acid Ester Esterification composition H.L.B. Mono:Di:Tri:Poly DK Ester ® F-160 1.23 16 72% monoester; 23% diester; 5% triester DK Ester ® F-140 1.35 13 61% monoester; 30% diester; 7% triester; 2% polyester DK Ester ® F-110 1.48 11 52% monoester; 36% diester; 10% triester; 2% polyester DK Ester ® F-90 1.53 9.5 45% monoester; 39% diester; 12% triester; 4% polyester DK Ester ® F-70 1.60 8 39% monoester; 45% diester; 12% triester; 4% polyester DK Ester ® F-50 1.69 6 34% monoester; 46% diester; 17% triester; 3% polyester DK Ester ® F-20W 3.11 2 11% monoester; 21% diester; 14% triester; 54% polyester DK Ester ® F-10 4.85 1 0% monoester; 5% diester; 11% triester; 84% polyester SURFHOPE ® SE C12 (100%) 5 32% monoester; PHARMA 68% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1205 SURFHOPE ® SE C12 (100%) 16 81% monoester; PHARMA 19% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1216 SURFHOPE ® SE C16 (80%); C18 16 79% monoester; PHARMA (20%) 21% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1616 SURFHOPE ® SE C16 (70%); C18 5 30% monoester; PHARMA (30%) 70% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1805 SURFHOPE ® SE C16 (70%); C18 7 41% monoester; PHARMA (30%) 59% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1807 SURFHOPE ® SE C16 (70%); C18 16 75% monoester; PHARMA (30%) 25% di-/tri-/poly-esters J-1816 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 3 Approximately 20% PHARMA (approximately monoester; approximately D-1803 70% stearate) 80% di-/tri-/poly-esters SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 3 20% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 80% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1803F SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 5 30% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 70% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1805 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 7 40% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 60% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1807 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 9 50% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 50% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1809 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 11 55% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 45% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1811 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 11 55% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 45% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1811F SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 15 70% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 30% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1815 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose stearate 16 75% monoester; PHARMA (70% stearate) 25% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1816 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose palmitate 15 70% monoester; PHARMA (80% palmitate) 30% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1615 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose palmitate 16 80% monoester; PHARMA (80% palmitate) 20% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1616 SURFHOPE ® SE Sucrose laurate 16 80% monoester; PHARMA (95% laurate) 20% di-/tri-/poly-esters D-1216 Ryoto S-970 Sucrose stearate 9 50% monoester Ryoto S-1170 Sucrose stearate 11 55% monoester Ryoto S-1570 Sucrose stearate 15 70% monoester Ryoto S-1670 Sucrose stearate 16 75% monoester Ryoto P-1570 Sucrose palmitate 15 70% monoester Ryoto P-1670 Sucrose palmitate 16 80% monoester Ryoto LWA-1570 Sucrose laurate 15 70% monoester Ryoto L-1695 Sucrose laurate 16 80% monoester Ryoto OWA-1570 Sucrose oleate 15 70% monoester

As noted above, methods for producing sucrose esters are well known (see, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,480,616, 3,644,333, 3,714,144, 4,710,567, 4,898,935, 4,996,309, 4,995,911, 5,011,922 and 5,017,697 and International Patent Application, Publication No. WO 2007/082149). The sucrose fatty acid surfactants can be produced by any well-known method, and typically in an esterification reaction, for example, by reacting sucrose with a methyl ester of the desired fatty acid, such as a solvent process, where sucrose is reacted with a methyl ester of a fatty acid in the presence of a catalyst (e.g., potassium carbonate) and an organic solvent (e.g., dimethyl formamide (DMF) or dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO)), followed by purification, or in an aqueous medium process, where sucrose is mixed in a molten mixture with fatty acid salt using water without an organic solvent and then reacted with a higher fatty acid methyl ester in the presence of a catalyst, followed by purification, and such as by any of the methods described in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 2007/082149, whereby a sucrose molecule (which is a disaccharide containing one six-carbon aldo-sugar glucose linked to a five-carbon keto-sugar fructose, having the formula: C12H22O11) is joined to one or more fatty acids.

For example, the sucrose fatty acid ester can be produced by esterification using dimethyl formamide (DMF) as a solvent, by producing a methyl ester of the fatty acid and then reacting the methyl ester with sucrose in DMF in the presence of a catalyst (e.g., potassium carbonate), for example, for 4-6 hours at 83-95° C., for example, using 30 to 127 parts sucrose to 30 parts methyl ester of the fatty acid (e.g., methyl stearate), 2 parts potassium carbonate and 300 parts solvent; by a similar method, but using dimethyl sulfoxide (DMSO) as the solvent, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,480,616; or, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,644,333, by mixing sucrose with methyl fatty acid and sodium fatty acid and previously prepared sucrose ester, using potassium carbonate as a catalyst and water as a solvent; or, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,714,144, where sodium, potassium or lithium soap of the fatty acid is reacted in a molten sugar solution for two to twenty minutes under vacuum at 170-190° C., and purified, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,710,567, by adding aqueous salt solution followed by three-phase separation. In one example, the sucrose fatty acid esters are prepared and purified as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,898,935, 4,996,309, 4,995,911, 5,011,922 and 5,017,697, by producing the esters by chemical catalysis, such as with the solvent process, e.g., using a DMSO solvent and potassium carbonate catalyst, or aqueous solution method, followed by extraction and purification of the sucrose fatty acid esters, e.g., by adjusting pH, precipitation, separation and neutralization and filtration.

In another example, the sucrose fatty acid esters can be produced, as described in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 2007/082149, by mixing and reacting sucrose and vinyl esters of the fatty acids which can produce sucrose fatty acid ester mixtures with a monoester content of at or about 90%, and/or an acid value of less than 1. Briefly, this process can be carried out by dissolving sucrose in a solvent (e.g., DMSO), at a reaction temperature of between at or about 30° C. and at or about 60° C., such as between about 40° C. and 60° C. (e.g., at 60° C.), and a catalyst added and the mixture stirred, such as for 30 minutes, followed by removal of undissolved catalyst by decanting or filtration, followed by addition of vinyl fatty acid, and reaction, such as for at or about 15 minutes, with monitoring to measure amount of vinyl fatty acid ester, for example, until the amount of vinyl fatty acid ester reaches no more than at or about 10%, by weight (w/w), of the starting amount. The amount of sucrose and vinyl ester can vary. In one example, the ratio of sucrose to vinyl ester is between at or about 2:1 and at or about 8:1. In one example, the sucrose is added at a concentration of at or about 400 nM and the vinyl ester added at a concentration of at or about 100 nM. The catalyst can be catalyzed by a base, such as metal oxides, metal hydroxides and metal carbonates, such as potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium carbonate, sodium carbonate and lithium carbonate, which can be added at a concentration of between at or about 1.5 grams/L and at or about 6 g/L of reaction volume. In one example, the vinyl ester is vinyl stearate and the catalyst is potassium carbonate. The resulting mixture can then purified, such as by vacuum distillation and addition of sodium chloride to effect emulsification and purification methods described in International Patent Application Publication No. WO 2007/082149.

(c) Stabilizers

The pre-spray emulsions provided herein can contain a stabilizer or a stabilizing system. Stabilizers include any compound used to stabilize the non-polar ingredients in the emulsions. The stabilizer or stabilizing system can aid in retaining one or more desirable properties of the compositions, for example the appearance, taste or odor. The compositions provided herein, including the pre-spray emulsions and spray-dried powders, containing non-polar ingredients and a stabilizer or stabilizing system can retain one or more desirable properties of the composition for a period of time after formulation, such as at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 days, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 weeks, at or about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 18, 24, or 36 months, or at or about 1, 2, 3, or 4 years. The stabilizers include, but are not limited to, carbonates and bicarbonates, acids, antioxidants, and any combination thereof. Typically the stabilizer or stabilizing system are food-approved, i.e., edible or ingestible, stabilizers, for example, stabilizers that are safe and/or approved for human consumption.

Typically, when present, the total amount of stabilizers included in the provided emulsions is less than 20% or about 20%, typically less than 10% or about 10%, for example, less than 20%, 15%, 10%, 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.5%, 1%, 0.5% or 0.1%, by weight, of the emulsion.

(1) Bicarbonates and Carbonates

Exemplary of a stabilizer used in the provided pre-spray emulsions is a bicarbonate or carbonate, for example, any edible or food-approved bicarbonate or carbonate. Examples of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates include sodium bicarbonate, potassium bicarbonate, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, magnesium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and any combination thereof. In some examples, the carbonate or bicarbonate is a carbonated beverage, such as a soda, flavored soda, carbonated water or carbonated juice. Alternatively, the beverage can be carbonated by the addition of carbon dioxide. Selection of suitable bicarbonates and carbonates for use in the provided beverage compositions is within the skill of the skilled artisan.

(2) Ingestible Acids

The stabilizer used in the pre-spray emulsions can contain one or more acids, for example, any compound added to the emulsion that can lower the pH of the emulsion. The acid can be, for example, an edible, ingestible or food-approved acid. Exemplary of suitable acids for use in the provided pre-spray emulsions are citric acid, phosphoric acid, adipic acid, ascorbic acid, lactic acid, malic acid, fumaric acid, gluconic acid, succinic acid, tartaric acid, maleic acid, and any combination thereof. In one example, the acid is citric acid.

(3) Antioxidants

The stabilizer used in the pre-spray emulsion can contain an ingestible antioxidant, for example, a molecule that is capable of inhibiting the oxidation of other molecules. Antioxidants include molecules that scavenge free radicals. Suitable antioxidants include those that are used as ingredients in dietary supplements. The antioxidant can be a natural antioxidant or a synthetic antioxidant.

Examples of antioxidants include, but are not limited to hormones, carotenoids, carotenoid terpenoids, non-carotenoid terpenoids, flavonoids, flavonoid polyphenolics (e.g., bioflavonoids), flavonols, flavones, phenols, polyphenols, esters of phenols, esters of polyphenols, nonflavonoid phenolics, isothiocyanates, vitamins and vitamin cofactors, such as vitamin A, vitamin C, vitamin E, vitamin E phosphate and ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10), ascorbic acid, citric acid, rosemary oil, minerals, such as mineral selenium and manganese, melatonin, α-carotene, β-carotene, lycopene, lutein, zeanthin, crypoxanthin, resveratrol, eugenol, quercetin, catechin, gossypol, hesperetin, curcumin, ferulic acid, thymol, hydroxytyrosol, tumeric, thyme, olive oil, lipoic acid, glutathione, glutamine, oxalic acid, tocopherol-derived compounds, di-alpha-tocopheryl phosphate, tocotrienols, butylated hydroxyanisole, butylated hydroxytoluene, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid, tert-butylhydroquinone, acetic acid, pectin, tocotrienol, tocopherol, coenzyme Q10 (coQ10), zeaxanthin, astaxanthin, canthaxantin, saponins, limonoids, kaempferol, myricetin, isorhamnetin, proanthocyanidins, quercetin, rutin, luteolin, apigenin, tangeritin, hesperetin, naringenin, erodictyol, flavan-3-ols (e.g., anthocyanidins), green tea extract, gallocatechins, epicatechin and its gallate forms, epigallocatechin and its gallate forms, theaflavin and its gallate forms, thearubigins, isotlavone phytoestrogens, genistein, daidzein, glycitein, anythocyanins, cyaniding, delphinidin, malvidin, pelargonidin and peonidin. In one example, the antioxidant is vitamin C. In another example, the antioxidant is a coenzyme Q-containing compound, such as ubiquinone (ubidecarenone, coenzyme Q, coenzyme Q10).

(d) Polar Solvents

The pre-spray emulsions provided herein include one or more polar solvents. Polar solvents are well known in the art. The polarity of a solvent generally indicates which compounds are soluble in the solvent, and with which other solvents/liquids the solvent is miscible. Generally speaking, polar compounds are more readily solubilized in water and other polar solvents than are non-polar ingredients. Polar solvents are more likely to be miscible with water and other polar solvents and liquids.

The polarity of a solvent can be assessed by measuring a number of different parameters according to well-known methods (see, e.g., Przybytek, “High Purity Solvent Guide,” Burdick and Jackson Laboratories, Inc., 1980), such as by determining a property of the solvent, such as the dielectric constant, the dipole moment or the polarity index. For example, polar solvents generally have high dielectric constants, typically dielectric constants greater than at or about 15 (see, e.g., Lowery et al., “Mechanism and Theory in Organic Chemistry,” Harper Collins Publishers, 3rd ed., 1987, p. 177), such as at or about 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80 85, 90 or greater than 90. For example, the dielectric constant of water is at or about 80.10 at 20° C. Polar solvents generally have high polarity indices, typically greater than at or about 3 (see, e.g., Snyder, “Classification of the solvent properties of common liquids” (1974) J. Chromatog. A 92:223-230), such as at or about 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 or 9 or greater than 9. Polar solvents generally have large dipole moments, typically greater than at or about 1.4 Debye, such as at or about 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, 1.7, 1.8, 1.9, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 3.0, 3.5, 4 or greater than 4 Debye (see, e.g., “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001, p. 15(14)-15(18)). Other methods of assessing solvent polarity are known in the art, including, but not limited to, the Kosower Z scale (Kosower, “An introduction to physical organic chemistry,” Wiley, 1969, p. 293), the donor number and donor acceptor scale (Gutmann, “Solvent effects on the reactivities of organometallic compounds” (1976) Coord. Chem. Rev. 18:225-255), and the Hildebrand solubility parameters (see, e.g., Giddings et al., “High pressure gas chromatography of nonvolatile species. Compressed gas is used to cause migration of intractable solutes” (1968) Science 162:67-73).

Polar solvents include polar protic solvents and polar aprotic solvents. A polar protic solvent (e.g., water, methanol, ethanol) contains a hydrogen atom attached to an electronegative atom, such that the hydrogen has a proton-like character and/or the bond between the hydrogen and electronegative atom is polarized. Polar aprotic solvents, on the other hand (e.g., acetone, acetonitrile), generally do not contain positively polarized hydrogen atoms.

The polar solvents in the provided compositions typically are polar protic solvents, including, but not limited to, water; alcohols, such as dihydric alcohols which contain two hydroxyl groups (for example, glycols, e.g., propylene glycol, ethylene glycol, tetraethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, trimethylene glycol), trihydric alcohols which contain three hydroxyl groups (e.g., glycerin, butane-1,2,3-triol, pentane-1,3,5-triol, 2-amino-2-hydroxymethyl-propane-1,3-diol), monohydric alcohols (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, n-butanol and t-butanol) and other alcohols; and acids, such as acetic acid and formic acid. Other polar solvents include, but are not limited to, acetone, acetonitrile, butyl acetate, dimethylformamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, dioxane, ethyl acetate, tetrahydrofuran and hexamethylphosphoric triamide. Typically, the polar solvent is water, or is an alcohol that typically contains two or more hydroxyl groups, such as a trihydric or dihydric alcohol, such as, but not limited to, glycerol and propylene glycol. The polar solvents further include low molecular weight polyethylene glycols (PEGs), such as PEGs having a molecular weight not more than at or about 600 kDa, such as between or about between 200 kDa and 600 kDa, typically not more than at or about 400 kDa, for example, not more than 200 kDa.

In one example, the polar solvent has a dielectric constant greater than at or about 15, and typically between at or about 20 and at or about 80, such as at or about 80.1. In another example, the polar solvent has a polarity index between at or about 3 and at or about 9. In another example, the dipole moment of the polar solvent is between 1.5 and 3, and typically between at or about 1.8 and 2.8, such as 1.85 (for dielectric constants of solvents, see, for example, Landolt-Bornstein, New Series IV/17, “Static Dielectric Constants of Pure Liquids and Binary Liquid Mixtures,” Springer, 2008; and “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001; for dipole moment of solvents, see, for example, “CRC Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,” Lide, ed., 82nd edition, CRC Press, 2001; and for polarity indices of solvents, see, for example, Snyder, “Classification of the solvent properties of common liquids,” J. Chromatography A, 92:223-230, 1974).

When present, such as in the pre-spray emulsions, the amount of the polar solvent typically is present in a high concentration, for example, the total amount of polar solvent as a percentage (%) by weight of the liquid concentrate (wt %) can be, e.g., between or between about 25% and 70%, such as between or between about 35% and 65%, such as 35% to 40%, 35% to 45%, 35% to 50%, 35% to 55%, 35% to 60%, 35% to 65%, 40% to 45%, 40% to 50%, 40% to 55%, 40% to 60%, 40% to 65%, 45% to 50%, 45% to 55%, 45% to 60%, 45% to 65%, 50% to 55%, 50% to 60%, 50% to 65%, 55% to 60%, 55% to 65%, and 60% to 65% polar solvent, by weight, of the pre-spray emulsion. Exemplary concentrations of the polar solvent in the pre-spray emulsions are at or about 45%, 48%, 50%, 52%, 55%, 56%, 57%, 58%, 60%, 62%, 65%, 68%, and 70% (w/w) of the pre-spray emulsion.

In the provided methods for making the pre-spray emulsions, the polar solvent is added to the water phase. In one example, the polar solvent is water, e.g., purified water, such as water that is purified prior to adding it to the concentrate formula, for example, by charcoal filter, ion exchange, reverse osmosis, UV sterilization and/or filtering using a filter, for example, a 50-100 micron filter. Typically, when a filter is used, it is an end point of use filter, which filters the water before it reaches the tank in the provided process. Alternatively, previously filtered water can be added to the concentrates.

(e) Binders

As discussed above, the provided pre-spray emulsions contain a binder for forming a powder when dried. The binder is any ingestible material that capable of adhering other materials together during drying, such as spray-drying and/or lyophilization. Exemplary binders include, but are not limited to, polysaccharides, polyols, starches, and gums. For example, the binder can be, maltodextrin, lactose, sucrose, maltodextrin, starch, polyethylene glycol, gums, hypromellose, methylcellulose, macrocrystalline cellulose, polyethylene glycol, sorbitol, other sugars, and pectin. An exemplary binder is maltodextrin, a moderately sweet polysaccharide produced from starch as a creamy white hygroscopic powder. Maltodextrin is easily digestible, being absorbed as rapidly as glucose. Maltodextrin can be derived from any starch. In the U.S., this starch is usually corn or potato, whereas elsewhere (e.g., Europe), it is commonly wheat.

When present, the amount of binder, such as maltodextrin, typically is present in an amount of between or between about 5% and 30% binder, such as between or between about 5% and 7%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 12%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 17%, 5% and 20%, 7% and 10%, 7% and 12%, 7% and 15%, 7% and 17%, 7% and 20%, 7% and 28%, 10% and 12%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 17%, 10% and 20%, 15% and 17%, 15% and 20%, and 17% and 20%, 15%-28%, 15%-25%, by weight of the emulsion.

As described herein, the sugar fatty acid esters, such as the SFAE(s), are included, not only for the surfactant properties, but also in addition to the binder or in place of some or all of the binder. Typically, when a binder, e.g., maltodextrin, is present, the total amount of binder, e.g., maltodextrin, and surfactant, for example, sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, is between about 5% and 40% binder and sugar fatty acid ester, such as between or between about 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, and 35% and 40% total binder and surfactant, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, by weight of the emulsion.

(f) Co-Surfactants (Emulsifiers)

The pre-spray emulsions can further contain one or more co-surfactants (emulsifiers). For example, a co-surfactant can be included to improve emulsification of the non-polar ingredients and/or the stability of the emulsion, for example, by preventing or slowing oxidation of the non-polar ingredients. Exemplary of a co-surfactant that can be used in the provided concentrates is a phospholipid, for example, phosphatidylcholine. Other exemplary co-surfactants include non-ionic surfactants, such as sugar-derived surfactants, including fatty acid esters of sugars and sugar derivatives, and PEG-derived surfactants, such as PEG derivatives of sterols, PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters. Other exemplary co-surfactants are fish collagen, for example, the fish collagen sold by Norland Products Inc. (Cranbury Township, N.J.) and saponin, such as saponin from quillaja bark, including the saponin from quillaja bark sold by Desert King International (San Diego, Calif.) and Sigma Aldrich (St. Louis, Mo.).

When present, the amount of the co-surfactant typically is present in a concentration less than or less than about 10%, typically less than or less than about 5%, for example, the total amount of co-surfactant as a percentage (%), by weight, of the emulsion (wt %) can be, e.g., less than or less than about 10%, such as less than or about 5%, 4.5%, 4%, 3.5%, 3.15%, 3%, 2.5%, 2%, 1.75%, 1.5%, 1.25%, 1%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.25%, 0.15% or less, by weight, of the emulsion.

(1) Phospholipids

Exemplary of the co-surfactants that can be used in the provided emulsions are phospholipids. Phospholipids are amphipathic lipid-like molecules, typically containing a hydrophobic portion at one end of the molecule and a hydrophilic portion at the other end of the molecule. A number of phospholipids can be used as co-surfactants in the provided compositions, for example, lecithin, including phosphatidylcholine (PC), phosphatidylethanolamine (PE), distearoylphosphatidylcholine (DSPC), phosphatidylserine (PS), phosphatidylglycerol (PG), phosphatidic acid (PA), phosphatidylinositol (PI), sphingomyelin (SPM) or a combination thereof. Typically, the phospholipid is phosphatidylcholine (PC), which sometimes is referred to by the general name “lecithin.” Exemplary of the phospholipids that can be used as co-surfactants in the provided compositions are the phospholipids sold by Lipoid, LLC (Newark, N.J.), for example, Purified Egg Lecithins, Purified Soybean Lecithins, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Lecithins, Egg Phospholipids, Soybean Phospholipids, Hydrogenated Egg and Soybean Phospholipids, Synthetic Phospholipids, PEG-ylated Phospholipids and phospholipid blends. Exemplary of the phosphatidylcholine that can be used as a co-surfactant in the provided compositions is the phosphatidylcholine composition sold by Lipoid, LLC, under the name Lipoid S100, which is derived from soy extract and contains greater than or greater than about 95% phosphatidylcholine.

(2) PEG-Derived Surfactants

Exemplary PEG-derived surfactants include, but are not limited to, PEG derivatives of sterols, e.g., a cholesterol or a sitosterol (including, for example, any of the PEG derivatives disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,632,443); PEG derivatives of fat-soluble vitamins, for example, some forms of vitamin A (e.g., retinol) or vitamin D (e.g., vitamin D1-D5); and PEG-sorbitan fatty acid esters, such as polysorbates, including polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monooleate (also called polysorbate 80) and analogs (e.g., homologs) of polysorbate 80, such as, for example, polysorbate 20 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monolaurate), polysorbate 40 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monopalmitate) and polysorbate 60 (polyoxyethylene (20) sorbitan monostearate); and stearic acid derivatives, including, for example, polyethylene glycol 400 distearate (PEG 400 DS), such as the PEG 400 DS sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition (Maywood, N.J.).

(g) Emulsion Stabilizers (Co-Emulsifiers)

The pre-spray emulsions can further contain one or more emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers), which can be used to stabilize the emulsions containing the pre-emulsion concentrates. For example, the emulsion stabilizer can increase the viscosity of the concentrate. One or more emulsion stabilizers can be added, for example, during formulation after evaluation of an initial emulsion, particularly if the oil and water phases of the initial emulsion appear to be separating. Addition of the emulsion stabilizer can prevent separation of the oil and water phases.

Exemplary of an emulsion stabilizer that can be included in the provided emulsions is a composition containing a blend of gums, for example, gums used as emulsifying agents, for example, a blend containing one or more of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate. Exemplary of such an emulsion stabilizer includes the emulsion stabilizer sold under the brand name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other gums can be included in the emulsion stabilizer, for example, gum acacia, ester gums and sugar beet pectin. Exemplary emulsion stabilizers include modified food starches. These include the modified gum acacia sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ticamulsion® A-2010 Powder, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.). Other exemplary emulsion stabilizers containing an ester gum are, for example, the emulsion stabilizer sold under the name Tic Pretested® Ester Gum 8BG, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.) or Ester Gum 8BG, available from Hercules/Pinova (Brunswick, Ga.). Others sold by Ingredion, Inc. (Westchester, Ill.) under the trademarks CAPSUL®, FIRMTEX®, THERMFLO®, THERMTEX®, and TEXTRA® and others, can be included in the compositions provided herein. Other blends of similar gums can also be used as emulsion stabilizers.

Also exemplary of an emulsion stabilizer that also can serve as a binder is whey protein. Whey protein is a protein contained in the milk serum (whey) obtained by removing casein and other components from milk, and comprises lactoalbumin, lactoglobulin, and lactoferrin as main components. Whey protein is known to have such functions as a stamina improver, a fatigue reliever, and an immunity enhancer. In addition, it is used as a protein supplement material in athletic nutrient foods and diet foods. Whey proteins are often used in food emulsion systems because of their ability to stabilize oil-in-water (O/W) emulsions. An exemplary whey protein is the whey protein isolate sold by Marquez Brothers International (Hanford, Calif.).

Another exemplary emulsion stabilizer is green tea extract, which is high in epigallocatechin gallate (EGCG) and epicatechin gallate (ECG). Green tea extract is known to have high antioxidant activity and the ability to provide stability to emulsions. An exemplary green tea extract that can be used in the pre-spray a green tea extract that contains 40% EGCG, such as one sold by Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients, Corp. (Guilin, China).

When present, the emulsion stabilizer is typically present at a concentration of less than 10%, such as less than or less than about 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, or 1%, by weight, of the emulsion. For example, the emulsion stabilizer can be added to the water phase at a concentration of between 0.01% or about 0.01% and 10% or about 10%, for example, 0.01%, 0.1%, 0.2%, 0.3%, 0.4%, 0.5%, 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9% or 10% w/w of the emulsion.

(h) pH Adjusters

One or more pH adjusters can be added to the emulsions at an appropriate concentration to achieve a desired pH. One or more of a plurality of pH adjusting agents can be used. The pH adjusting agent typically is safe for human consumption, for example, GRAS certified. The pH adjuster can be citric acid. An exemplary pH adjuster includes the citric acid sold by Mitsubishi Chemical (Dublin, Ohio). Another exemplary pH adjuster is phosphoric acid, such as Food Grade 80% Phosphoric Acid, sold by Univar.

b. Powder Compositions Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

The pre-spray emulsions containing the pre-emulsion concentrates provided herein are dried, such as by evaporation of the water, spray drying or lyophilization or other drying method to produce the powders The water-soluble powders are prepared b removing all of the polar solvent, such as water, from the pre-spray emulsion, to form a free-flowing powder that does not contain any, or only minimal amounts, of polar solvent. The resulting powders contain high concentrations of non-polar ingredients and display advantageous properties. They are free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, powder rather than a sludge-like, oily substance. They contain high concentration of non-polar ingredients. The powders provided herein typically contain the same ingredients as the corresponding pre-spray emulsion, with the exception of the polar solvent, e.g., water, that is removed during the drying process. Removal of the polar solvent, e.g., water, from the pre-spray emulsion results in an increased concentration (i.e., wt %) of each ingredient in the powder compared to the corresponding emulsion. For example, the pre-spray emulsions provided herein contain between or between about 5 wt % and 30 wt % non-polar ingredient(s) and produce powders that contain between or between about 10 wt % and 60 wt %, such as greater than 30% non-polar ingredient(s) after spray drying. The provided powders (and methods for making the powders) can be used to formulate any non-polar ingredient in a water-soluble powder, including the non-polar ingredients (e.g., non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds) described herein and other known non-polar ingredients.

Methods of producing powders from liquid compositions are well known to the skilled artisan. Exemplary processes for producing powders include, but are not limited to spray drying, freeze drying and absorption plating. The methods for forming the powders include spray drying. Spray drying processes and spray drying equipment are described generally in Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, pp. 20-57 (Sixth Edition 1984). More details on spray drying processes and equipment are reviewed by Marshall (1954) “Atomization and Spray-Drying,” Chem. Eng. Prog. Monogr. 50: Series 2 and Masters, “Spray Drying Handbook” (Fourth Edition 1985). Methods for spray drying are well known (see, e.g. U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,430,021 and 6,534,085 and U.S. Publication No. US 2007/0184117). In general, spray drying is used to dry a heated liquid by passing it through hot gas. One or more spray nozzles is used to atomize the liquid in a cooling tower or chamber. As the material is atomized (sprayed), the surface tension causes a uniform spherical particle to form, which is passed through the cooling chamber and hardens into a solid intact sphere. The spray dried particles can be between at or about 0.5 microns and at or about 100 microns, and typically are less than at or about 10 microns, typically less than at or about 5 microns, and typically less than at or about, or at or about, 1 micron.

The powder compositions provided herein can be made from any emulsion containing non-polar ingredients, a sugar fatty acid ester, and a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, such as the pre-spray emulsions provided herein. As noted, for purposes herein the PEG derivative of vitamin E is a high dimer-containing composition as described herein.

i. Formulating the Powder Compositions

The powder compositions provided herein are water-soluble and have high concentrations of non-polar ingredients, for example, at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 55% and more, such as 60%, and are stable and free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, sludgy or oily. The powders also contain a sugar fatty acid ester(s), e.g., a sucrose fatty acid ester, that also acts as a binder and/or in combination with a binder, that does not contribute to the oil load of the powder, resulting in a powder with the high concentrations of non-polar ingredients. The sugar fatty acid esters, such as sucrose fatty acid esters, are present in the water-soluble powders in place of or in combination with a binder, and result in powders that are water-soluble, free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, and contain high concentrations of non-polar ingredients.

The pre-emulsion concentrates and pre-spray emulsions provided herein are formulated such that drying the resulting emulsion, e.g., spray drying, yields a powder composition that contains high concentrations of non-polar ingredient, yet is free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, and water-soluble. A number of parameters of the concentrates and emulsions, including ingredients, their relative concentrations, and methods for making the concentrates and emulsions, affect the ability of emulsion to form a free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, powder when a high concentration of non-polar ingredient is present. By extension, these parameters of the concentrates and emulsions also affect the advantageous properties of the powders, for example, the solubility of the powder, for example, in an aqueous solution.

Thus, the pre-spray emulsions are formulated such that after drying, e.g., spray drying, the resulting powder compositions display one or more advantageous properties, for example, the powder is free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, and/or the powder is water-soluble. In one example, the advantageous property is the ability of the provided emulsions to yield powder compositions that have no or only a minimal amount of polar solvent, e.g., water and are free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, after drying, for example, spray drying. In another example, the advantageous property relates to the ability of the pre-spray emulsions to be dried, e.g., spray dried, to form a powder that contains a high concentration of non-polar ingredients and is water-soluble.

ii. Ingredients and Concentration Ranges

Each of the provided powder compositions contains a pre-spray emulsion that has been dried, for example, spray dried, to remove all or almost all of the polar solvent, e.g., water. The pre-spray emulsions, and thus, the powder compositions provided herein, contain the pre-emulsion concentrates provided herein that contain non-polar ingredients and a polyalkylene glycol surfactant, e.g., TPGS. In some examples, the pre-emulsion concentrate contains a preservative, e.g., benzyl alcohol. The pre-spray emulsions, and thus, the powder compositions provided herein additionally contain a surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, in place of or in combination with a binder, e.g., maltodextrin, and additional ingredients, including, but not limited to, stabilizers, e.g., bicarbonates or carbonates, acids, and/or antioxidants, co-surfactants (emulsifiers), e.g., phospholipids and/or PEG-derived surfactants, emulsion stabilizers (co-emulsifiers), pH adjusters, e.g., citric acid, and any of the ingredients provided herein in Section B.2.b., with the exception of polar solvents, e.g., water.

Each of the provided powder compositions contains a non-polar ingredient, including, but not limited to, the exemplary non-polar ingredients described herein above. Typically, the non-polar ingredient is or contains one or more non-polar compounds. The powder compositions provided herein can contain one non-polar ingredient or more than one non-polar ingredient, such as two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, or more non-polar ingredients. The powder compositions provided herein can contain high amounts (i.e., concentrations) of non-polar ingredients, such as up to at or about 60 wt % non-polar ingredients.

The powders provided herein contain high amounts of non-polar ingredients, e.g., non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, for example, between or between about 10 wt % and 60 wt % non-polar ingredient, such as between or between about 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 10% and 45%, 10% and 50%, 10% and 55%, 10% and 60%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 15% and 45%, 15% and 50%, 15% and 55%, 15% and 60%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, and 55% and 60%, by weight of the powder. The powder compositions that contain high amounts of non-polar ingredient and a sugar fatty acid ester surfactant in place of or in combination with a binder, e.g., maltodextrin, exhibit desirable properties, for example, the powder is a free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, powder that is water-soluble.

Each of the provided powder compositions contain a pre-emulsion concentrate that contains at least one surfactant that is a polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, for example, TPGS, TPGS analogs, TPGS homologs and TPGS derivatives described herein. The surfactant typically has an HLB value of between 12 or about 12 and 20 or about 20, for example, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 or 20, or about 12, about 13, about 14, about 15, about 16, about 17, about 18, about 19 or about 20, typically between at or about 12 and at or about 14. For example, TPGS, such as the TPGS described herein, has an HLB value of about 13.

The polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the powder compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 0.1% to at or about 20%, such as 0.1% to 0.5%, 0.1% to 1%, 0.1% to 2%, 0.1% to 5%, 0.1% to 7%, 0.1% to 10%, 0.1% to 12%, 0.1% to 15%, 0.1% to 20%, 0.5% to 1%, 0.5% to 2%, 0.5% to 5%, 0.5% to 7%, 0.5% to 10%, 0.5% to 12%, 0.5% to 15%, 0.5% to 20%, 1% to 2%, 1% to 5%, 1% to 7%, 1% to 10%, 1% to 12%, 1% to 15%, 1% to 20%, 2% to 5%, 2% to 7%, 2% to 10%, 2% to 12%, 2% to 15%, 2% to 20%, 5% to 7%, 5% to 10%, 5% to 12%, 5% to 15%, 5% to 20%, 7% to 10%, 7% to 12%, 7% to 15%, 7% to 20%, 10% to 12%, 10% to 15%, 10% to 20%, 12% to 15%, 12% to 20%, and 15% to 20%, by weight, of the powder compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the polyethylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, in the powder compositions are at or about 0.1%, 0.5%, 1%, 1.5%, 2%, 2.5%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17% and 20% (wt %) of the powder compositions.

The powder compositions contain a sugar fatty acid ester surfactant in place of or in combination with a binder, e.g., maltodextrin. Typically, the sugar fatty acid ester is a sucrose fatty acid ester. The surfactant, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, does not contribute to the oil load of the composition, thus allowing the addition of high concentrations of non-polar ingredients and formation of a free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, powder. In one example, the powder contains a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, in place of a binder, e.g., maltodextrin. In another example, the powder contains a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, in combination with a binder, e.g., maltodextrin.

The powder compositions provided herein contain a surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, where the total amount of surfactant, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, is typically present in an amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the powder compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 5 wt % to at or about 30 wt %, such as between or between about 5% and 7%, 5% and 10%, 5% and 12%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 17%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 7% and 10%, 7% and 12%, 7% and 15%, 7% and 17%, 7% and 20%, 7% and 25%, 7% and 30%, 10% and 12%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 17%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 12% and 15%, 12% and 17%, 12% and 20%, 12% and 25%, 12% and 30%, 15% and 17%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 17% and 20%, 17% and 25%, 17% and 30%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, and 25% and 30% sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, by weight of the soft gel compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester in the powder compositions are at or about 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, 20%, 25% and 30% (wt %) of the powder compositions.

The powder compositions provided herein can contain a binder. Exemplary binders include, e.g., maltodextrin. Typically, when a binder, e.g., maltodextrin, is present in the powder composition, the total amount of binder, e.g., maltodextrin, and surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, is typically present in a total amount as a percentage (%) by weight of the powder compositions (wt %), e.g., from at or about 5 wt % to at or about 60 wt %, such as between or between about 5% and 10%, 5% and 15%, 5% and 20%, 5% and 25%, 5% and 30%, 5% and 35%, 5% and 40%, 5% and 45%, 5% and 50%, 5% and 55%, 5% and 60%, 10% and 15%, 10% and 20%, 10% and 25%, 10% and 30%, 10% and 35%, 10% and 40%, 10% and 45%, 10% and 50%, 10% and 55%, 10% and 60%, 15% and 20%, 15% and 25%, 15% and 30%, 15% and 35%, 15% and 40%, 15% and 45%, 15% and 50%, 15% and 55%, 15% and 60%, 20% and 25%, 20% and 30%, 20% and 35%, 20% and 40%, 20% and 45%, 20% and 50%, 20% and 55%, 20% and 60%, 25% and 30%, 25% and 35%, 25% and 40%, 25% and 45%, 25% and 50%, 25% and 55%, 25% and 60%, 30% and 35%, 30% and 40%, 30% and 45%, 30% and 50%, 30% and 55%, 30% and 60%, 35% and 40%, 35% and 45%, 35% and 50%, 35% and 55%, 35% and 60%, 40% and 45%, 40% and 50%, 40% and 55%, 40% and 60%, 45% and 50%, 45% and 55%, 45% and 60%, 50% and 55%, 50% and 60%, and 55% and 60% total amount of binder, e.g., maltodextrin, and sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, by weight of the powder compositions. Exemplary concentrations of the total amount of binder, e.g., maltodextrin, and sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester in the powder compositions are at or about 5%, 7%, 10%, 12%, 15%, 17%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55%, and 60% (wt %) of the powder compositions.

Typically, when the powder compositions provided herein contain a mixture of surfactant, such as a sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, and binder, e.g., maltodextrin, such as a mixture of surfactant, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, and binder, e.g., that is present in an amount between or about between 5 wt % and 60 wt %, the mixture contains at least or about at least 5% sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, e.g., at least or about at least 5%, 7%, 10%, 15%, 20%, or more, sugar fatty acid ester, e.g., sucrose fatty acid ester, by weight of the powder.

E. EXEMPLARY METHODS FOR PREPARING PRODUCTS CONTAINING HIGH DIMER-CONTAINING WATER-SOLUBLE VITAMIN E DERIVATIVE MIXTURES

Methods for preparing products containing the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixtures, e.g., TPGS compositions, for example, products for human consumption, such as food and beverage products, in particular aqueous food and beverage products, are provided herein. For example, methods for preparing the concentrates provided herein are described. Equipment for use in the methods and general steps of the methods are described below. The methods include bench-top manufacturing processes, which are used to make small quantities of the products. The methods also include scaled-up manufacturing processes, which are used to make larger batches of the products. Any of the bench-top processes can be scaled up to perform the methods using the scaled-up processes. Any of the provided products can be made using either scaled-up or bench-top processes. The concentrates and liquid dilution compositions provided herein can be made following the methods provided in U.S. Pat. No. 8,282,977 and U.S. Pub. Nos. 2009-0297491 and 2012-0016026.

1. Equipment Employed in the Methods

Equipment used in various steps of the provided methods for making the products can include, for example, vessels, such as tanks, for mixing the water and oil phases and the product; scales; mixers, for example standard mixers and homogenizers; heating and cooling apparatuses, such as water-jacketed tanks, hot plates, water baths and chillers (coolers), including recirculating coolers; transfer apparatuses, for example, transfer devices, such as, pumps, hoses and sanitary fittings; ball valves; purifiers, for example, filters, such as carbon filters, ion exchange equipment, reverse osmosis equipment, end-point filters and end product filters; evaluation devices, for example, pH and temperature meters; and other equipment. The choice of equipment depends on a plurality of factors, including batch size and the manufacturing process.

a. Scales

One or more scales can be used to measure the amount of the ingredients before adding them to the appropriate vessel. Alternatively, the ingredients can be weighed in the vessel, for example, in a tank on top of a scale.

Any of a plurality of well-known, commercially sold scales can be used to weigh the ingredients. The choice of scale(s) can depend on a number of factors, including the mass of the product being made (e.g., the batch size) and the ingredient being weighed. In one example, multiple scales are used to weigh the various ingredients of the products. In general, relatively larger capacity (i.e., weight) scale(s) are used in making larger batches of the products while relatively smaller capacity scale(s) are used in making smaller batches.

Exemplary of the scales used to weigh the ingredients using the provided methods are a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA); a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), which is a basic series analytical scale with a 110 g capacity and a resolution of 0.1 mg; and an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000), which is a compact portable digital scale having a 2000 g capacity and a resolution of 1 g.

b. Purifiers

Purifiers, such as filters, are used in the provided methods to remove impurities from the ingredients prior to their addition to and/or from the product or to and/or from a phase of the product. For example, the water added to the water phase typically is purified water. In one example, one or more purifiers, for example, carbon filters, ion exchange purifiers, reverse osmosis purifiers, and/or end point filters can be used to filter water, for example, city water, prior to its addition to the water phase. For example, the water can be filtered to remove impurities, such as sediment, from the water.

Purifiers that can be used with the provided methods include filters, for example, 100 micron filters and carbon filters, which are filters that use activated carbon to remove impurities by chemical adsorption. Carbon filtering typically is used for water purification and is particularly effective at filtering out chlorine, sediment, volatile organic compounds and other impurities. Typically, the particles removed by carbon filters are between about 0.5 microns and about 50 microns. Other filters are well known and can be used with the provided methods.

The purifiers also include reverse osmosis purifiers, which use mechanical pressure to purify liquids, for example, water. In one example, the pressure forces the water through a semi-permeable membrane to remove impurities.

The purifiers also include exchange purifiers, for example, an ion exchange purifier. The ion exchange purifier can use a resin bed, such as a zeolite resin bed, to replace salts, such as cations, e.g., magnesium and calcium, with other cations, such as sodium and potassium cations. Such purifiers can be purchased, for example, from Aqua-Pure Filters (Clarkston, Mich.).

In one example, the purifier is an end product filter (e.g., a 100 micron filter; Product No. BPEM 100-5GP; FSI, Michigan City, Ind.). This filter is used to filter any impurities out of the final product (e.g., the final pre-emulsion composition). Other filters also are known and can be used with the provided methods.

c. Vessels

One or more, typically two or more, vessels, can be used in the methods to contain the ingredients of the provided products, for example, during mixing and/or heating or cooling. The vessels can be tanks, for example, water-jacketed tanks; pots; and/or beakers, for example, Pyrex® beakers. Separate vessels (e.g., an oil phase tank and a water phase tank) can be used for mixing and heating the ingredients of the oil phase and the water phase prior to combining the two phases. In some examples, an additional vessel, for example, a holding and/or packaging tank, can be used for holding and/or packaging the products and/or for addition/mixing of additional ingredients to the products.

A number of vessels are available for mixing ingredients. Typically, the vessels are cleaned, for example, rinsed, soaped and/or sanitized, according to known procedures prior to use and between uses, such as with the cleaning procedures described below.

In the bench-top process, the vessel can be a container, for example, a bench-top container, such as a flask, beaker (e.g., a Pyrex® beaker), vial, measuring container, bottle and/or other bench-top container.

In the scaled-up manufacturing process, the vessels can be tanks, for example, water phase tanks, oil phase tanks and holding/packaging tanks. Typically, the tanks are equipped with one or more mixers, for example, a standard mixer and/or homogenizer, which are used to mix the ingredients that are added to the tank. In one example, the tank is further equipped with a heating and/or cooling device. For example, the tank can be a water-jacketed tank. The temperature of the water-jacketed tank is controlled through the water jacket, for example, to heat the contents, such as during mixing.

Exemplary of the tanks that can be used with the provided methods are water-jacketed tanks, for example, the Overly 550 gallon water-jacketed tank (Model 10576501G), which has a 550 gallon capacity and typically is used as a water phase tank, the Schweitzer's 450 gallon tank (Model #5214-C), which has a 450 gallon capacity and typically is used as an oil phase tank and the Royal 190 gallon water-jacketed tank (Model 9977-5), which has a 190 gallon capacity and can be used as a water or oil phase tank when mixing smaller volumes. Other tanks are well known and can be used with the provided methods for mixing the products, for example, the phases of the product.

d. Mixers

Mixers are used in the methods to blend, mix and/or emulsify the products and ingredients, mixtures and phases of the products. In some examples, the mixers can be used to keep the ingredients and/or mixture circulating to maintain temperature, viscosity and/or other parameters of the mixture. Suitable mixers include, but are not limited to, standard mixers, for example, those that can be used to mix ingredients and maintain a homogeneous mixture, such as while heating a mixture of ingredients. Exemplary of the standard mixers are LIGHTNIN® mixers (LIGHTNIN, Rochester, N.Y.), for example, Model Numbers XJC117 and ND-2. In one example, the LIGHTNIN® mixers are fixed-mount, gear drive high-flow mixers, for use with closed tanks. Another example of a standard mixer is a mixer sold by IKA®, for example, overhead IKA® mixers. Exemplary IKA® mixers include Model Nos. RW-14 Basic and RE-16S, which are laboratory stirrers that can be used to mix ingredients. In some examples, the mixer can be attached to the vessel, e.g., the tank, such as by mounting or clamping onto the tank, such as at the top of the tank. In other examples, the mixer can be placed in the vessel for mixing.

The mixer can be a homogenizer which can be used, for example, to emulsify mixtures, i.e., form an emulsion. The homogenizer can be used to mix phases of the compositions, e.g., oil and water phases, after combining the phases, in order to form an emulsion. The homogenizer provides high-shear dispersion of solids and emulsification of immiscible liquids at high shear rates. Suitable homogenizers include, but are not limited to, high-shear homogenizers, for example, reversible homogenizers sold by Arde Barinco, Inc. (Norwood, N.J.). Exemplary Arde Barinco, Inc. reversible homogenizers are Model CJ-50 (a 3600 rpm mixer having a 6-inch rotor diameter, tip speed of 5575 ft/minute, emersion depth of 33 inches, and six separate openings at the bottom and top, which concentrate the liquid into six chambers, reducing the surface volume and creating a shear effect); and Model CJ-4E (a 10,000 rpm mixer with fan-cooled motor, optimized for 1 to 5 gallon batch sizes, having a 1.875 inch rotor diameter, tip speed of 4920 rpm, and immersion depth of 16 inches). The homogenizers further include other homogenizers, for example, other reversible homogenizers sold by Arde Barinco, Inc.

In one example, the homogenizer is attached to the top of the vessel, for example, the tank, for example, by clamps or by channel locks and an electrical hoist. In another example, the homogenizer is placed in the vessel. The Arde Barinco reversible homogenizers contain axial flow impellers, which create two distinct mixing actions, depending on direction. Downward “vortex flow” pulls solids from the top and bottom of the mixture, while upward “umbrella flow” controls mixing at the highest shear and recirculation rates without splashing or incorporating air. The reversible homogenizers typically are equipped with an adjustable baffle plate, which can be adjusted to control the type of mixing, for example at different times during mixing, e.g., during emulsification.

A number of other mixers are well known and can be used with the provided methods. Exemplary of suitable mixers that can be used with the provided methods are homogenizers, inline mixers, ribbon mixers, plow mixers, paddle mixers, Forberg® mixers, conveyors, bag dumps and compactors, V-blenders, blade mixers, double cone mixers, continuous mixers, speedflow mixers, batch mixers, double ribbon blenders, paddle and ribbon mixers with choppers, plow blenders, turbulent mixers, fluidizing Forberg-type mixers, air mixers, active mixers, passive mixers, top-entry mixers, side-entry mixers, static mixers, fixed-entry mixers, portable mixers (e.g., direct and gear drive), sanitary mixers, drum mixers, bulk container (IBC) mixers, lab stirrers, variable speed mixers, dough mixer, vertical mixer, spiral mixer, twin arm mixer, fork mixer, double spiral mixer, all agitators, agitator mixers, Banbury® mixers, rubber mixers, Blondheim mixers, churn mixers, conical mixers, continuous mixers, disperser mixers, pan mixers, emulsifier mixers, Hobart® mixers, liquifier mixers, Littleford mixers, meat mixers, plow mixers, Mix-Muller® Mixers, vertical screw mixers (e.g., Nauta mixers), Oakes mixers, planetary mixers, pony mixers, pug mixers, Ross mixers, rotary mixers, Sigma mixers, single arm mixers, tote bin mixers, tumble mixers, vacuum mixers, Turbolizer mixers, twin shell mixers, V-type mixers, zigzag mixers, side-arm mixers, hand-held mixers, stir rods, stir bars, magnetic mixers, overhead mixers (e.g., mechanical and/or electric overhead mixers), and any mixer known to those of skill in the art.

e. Heating/Cooling Apparatuses

Equipment that can be used in the methods includes heating and cooling apparatuses. The heating and cooling apparatuses can be used to control the temperature of the ingredients and combinations thereof, such as while generating the products.

Heating apparatuses that can be used in the provided methods are those that are capable of heating the mixture to between at or about 45° C. and at or about 85° C., for example, to at or about 45° C., 46° C., 47° C., 48° C., 49° C., 50° C., 51° C., 52° C., 53° C., 54° C., 55° C., 56° C., 57° C., 58° C., 59° C., 60° C., 61° C., 62° C., 63° C., 64° C., 65° C., 66° C., 67° C., 68° C., 69° C., 70° C., 71° C., 72° C., 73° C., 74° C., 75° C., 76° C., 77° C., 78° C., 79° C., 80° C., 81° C., 82° C., 83° C., 84° C. or 85° C. Typically, the heating apparatus is used to heat the mixtures to a temperature of at or about 60° C.

The heating apparatus can be a water jacket, for example, a water jacket on a water-jacketed tank, which can be controlled, for example, by a control panel, such as to adjust the temperature of the contents of the tank. Other suitable heating apparatuses are immersible and/or submersible heaters, for example, 12 KW or 13 KW sanitary heaters, including food-grade heaters, that can be immersed into the tanks, typically while mixing and typically when higher temperatures are required, such as when temperatures greater than 60° C. or about 60° C., or greater than 80° C. or about 80° C. are required. The heating apparatuses also include stoves, for example, propane stoves, and hot plates, for example, Thermolyne® hot plates (e.g., Model Nos. 846925 and SP46615).

The cooling apparatus can be any apparatus that can cool the ingredients and combinations thereof, such as rapidly cooling and/or cooling while mixing the ingredients. Typically, the cooling apparatus is capable of cooling the mixtures to a temperature between at or about 25° C. and at or about 45° C., for example, to at or about 25° C., 26° C., 27° C., 28° C., 29° C., 30° C., 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C., 43° C., 44° C. or 45° C. In some examples, the cooling apparatus can cool the mixture to a temperature between at or about 30° C. and at or about 35° C. Typically, the cooling is rapid cooling. For example, the products can be cooled to a temperature between at or about 30° C. and at or about 35° C. in at or about 15 minutes to at or about 2 hours, for example, in at or about 30 minutes to at or about 60 minutes, such as in at or about 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 or 60 minutes. In an exemplary method, the products can be cooled to a temperature between at or about 30° C. to at or about 35° C. in at or about 30 minutes to at or about 60 minutes.

Suitable cooling apparatuses for used in the methods include chillers, for example, recirculating coolers. The cooling apparatuses can be attached to the vessel, such as remotely or by a tank mounted in the cooler, to repeatedly circulate fluid from the tank, through the chiller and back to the vessel, to rapidly cool and maintain the temperature of the mixture during mixing. Exemplary of cooling apparatuses that can be attached to the tank and used with the provided methods are open-loop chillers and closed-loop chillers, for example, those sold by Turmoil (West Swanzey, N.H.), such as Model No. OC-1000 RO. Suitable cooling apparatuses also include water baths and ice baths, for example, water baths and/or ice baths in which the vessel is placed, for example, during homogenizing. Other cooling apparatuses are well known by those of skill in the art and can be used with the provided methods.

f. Transfer Devices

Transfer devices can be used with the provided methods to transfer liquid from one vessel to another vessel. Transfer devices can be used in the methods to combine the phases and form the emulsion. For example, transfer device can be used to transfer the water phase from the water phase vessel to the oil phase vessel or to transfer the oil phase from the oil phase vessel to the water phase vessel. Transfer devices include, for example, transfer pumps and associated accessories (e.g., fittings), including ball valves, sanitary fittings (for example, sanitary fittings sold by Granger, Inc. (Lake Forrest, Ill.)) and transfer hoses (for example, hoses sold by Sani-Tech West (Oxnard, Calif.)), such as food grade hoses attached to a transfer pump, for example, the food grade Sani-Tech® STHT-R-HD Braid-Reinforced Heavy Duty Silicone Hose. Suitable transfer pumps include the Teel Pump (Model 2P377B; Granger, Inc., Lake Forrest Ill.), a self-priming pump having a power rating of 2 HP, 60 Hz voltage, 208-230/460 AC, speed of 3450 rpm; and other pumps, such as self-priming pumps from Granger, Inc. The transfer device can also include equipment for manually transferring the liquid to another vessel, for example, by pouring, pipetting and/or other well-known methods of manually transferring liquids.

g. Evaluation Equipment

Evaluation equipment includes equipment that can be used to evaluate properties of the products and/or phases of the products, such as the temperature, pH, clarity, color, activity, smell and/or taste of the products. Suitable evaluation equipment includes pH and temperature meters, such as the pH and temperature meter sold by Hanna Instruments (Model No. HI 8314; Ann Arbor, Mich.), which can be used to measure the temperature and the pH of the product. Temperature meters can also include temperature probes, for example, digital and/or water-proof temperature probes, such as temperature probes sold by Cooper-Atkins (Middlefield, Conn.), for example, the Cooper-Atkins digital waterproof temperature probe (Model # DPP400W). The products can be evaluated and analyzed to verify the amounts of the non-polar ingredients and to verify that the products meet industry standards, such as to verify that the products do not contain levels of microbials and heavy metals that are above acceptable levels. Typically, these tests are performed by sending a sample of the product to a commercial testing facility, as described in section 2(g), below.

2. General Methods for Producing the Compositions

In general, the methods useful for making the concentrates provided herein are performed by generating an oil phase and generating a water phase (for the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates) and combining (e.g., using a transfer device) and mixing the phases to form emulsions. The oil and water phases typically are generated in separate vessels. The vessels can be, for example, tanks. Generation of the water phase and generation of the oil phase can be performed simultaneously or sequentially, in any order. Typically, both phases are heated to a desired temperature prior to combining the phases. For example, the phases can be heated to 60° C. prior to combining the phases. The provided methods can include additional steps. In some examples, the additional steps include evaluating properties of the products, adding additional ingredients (e.g., taste-modifying agents), packaging and/or filtering.

The provided methods can be performed using a bench-top manufacturing process (for small batch sizes) or performed using a scaled-up manufacturing process (for larger batch sizes). Each of the provided products can be made with either the bench-top or scaled up process. In one example, the product is first made with the bench-top process and then the method is scaled up to make larger quantities of the product.

The bench-top process can be performed on a bench, counter, table or any other suitable surface. Typically, the bench-top process is used to make emulsions having relatively smaller volumes than those made with the scaled-up process. For example, volumes less than 1 L or about 1 L, or less than 1 gallon or about 1 gallon, for example, less than or about 500 mL, for example, less than or about 1000 mL, 900 mL, 800 mL, 700 mL, 600 mL, 500 mL, 450 mL, 400 mL, 350 mL, 300 mL, 250 mL, 200 mL, 150 mL, 100 mL, or 50 mL or less, can be made using the bench-top process.

For the bench-top process, the equipment can be sufficiently compact to be used on a bench-top or other similar surface, and can be sufficiently compact to be moved, for example, lifted, by the artisan using the methods. For example, the vessels, such as water phase vessels, oil phase vessels, holding vessels, and packaging vessels, can be bench-top vessels. Exemplary bench-top vessels include, for example, flasks, beakers, vials, measuring containers, bottles and/or other bench-top containers. In some examples, the vessel in the bench-top process is a Pyrex® beaker.

Typically, the mixers for use in the bench-top processes of the provided methods are mixers that can be used in the bench-top vessels. Mixers that can be used in the bench-top vessels include, for example, standard mixers, such as hand-held mixers, stir rods, stir bars, magnetic mixers and overhead mixers, including, for example, mechanical and/or electric overhead mixers, and any other mixer that is suitable for use in the bench-top vessel. Exemplary standard mixers include those sold by IKA®, for example, overhead IKA® mixers, such as Model Nos. RW-14 Basic and RE-16S, which are laboratory stirrers and can be used to mix ingredients, such as to generate the oil and water phases. Suitable bench-top mixers also include homogenizers, for example, reversible homogenizers. An exemplary reversible homogenizer is the Arde Barinco reversible homogenizer, Model no. CJ-4E, which can be used to emulsify the phases.

Typically, the heating and cooling apparatuses are those that can be used with the bench-top vessels, such as hot plates, ice baths and/or water baths, into (or onto) which the vessels can be placed, for example, for rapid cooling. The evaluation device used in the bench-top process, for example, the temperature and/or pH meters, typically are capable of being placed in the bench-top vessels.

For the bench-top process, combining the oil and water phases typically is carried out manually, e.g., by pouring, pipetting and/or another manual transfer device.

The scaled-up manufacturing process of the methods typically is used to make products of relatively larger volumes, such as volumes greater than 1 L or about 1 L, or greater than 1 gallon (gal) or about 1 gallon. For example, volumes greater than or about 0.5 L, for example, greater than or about 0.5 L, 1 L, or 2 L, or greater than or about 1 gal, 2 gal, 3 gal, 4 gal, 5 gal, 6 gal, 7 gal, 8 gal, 9 gal, 10 gal, 11 gal, 12 gal, 13 gal, 14 gal, 15 gal, 16 gal, 17 gal, 18 gal, 19 gal, 20 gal, 21 gal, 22 gal, 23 gal, 24 gal, 25 gal, 26 gal, 27 gal, 28 gal, 29 gal, 30 gal, 40 gal, 50 gal, 60 gal, 70 gal, 80 gal, 90 gal, 100 gal, 150 gal, 200 gal, 250 gal, 300 gal, 350 gal, 400 gal, 450 gal, 500 gal, 550 gal, 600 gal, 650 gal, 700 gal, 800 gal, 900 gal, or 1000 gal or more, can be made using the scaled-up manufacturing process.

In general, equipment used for the scaled-up process is compatible with larger volume batches (batch sizes). For example, the vessels for use in the scaled-up processes can be tanks, for example, water-jacketed tanks, which are equipped with water jackets that can be used as heating apparatuses to heat the oil and water phase ingredients during generation of the oil and water phases. The water jackets typically are controlled via control panels. The transfer device can include devices attached to and connecting the tanks, such as transfer pumps and associated fittings, for example, ball valves and hoses that are attached to the tanks. Mixers for use in the scaled-up process can be standard mixers, for example, mounted mixers, such as LIGHTNIN® mixers, e.g., Model Nos. XJC117 (a fixed-mount, gear drive high-flow mixer) and ND2.

Prior to beginning the methods, the water jacket lines on any water-jacketed oil phase and water phase tank can be bled. The water jacket switches can then be turned on to maintain a pressure in the water jackets of between at or about 20 psi and at or about 40 psi (pounds per square inch). If the pressure in the water jacket falls below 20 psi during the method, the line can be bled and checked for bubbles while purging the line.

a. Water Phase Ingredients

The water phase includes one or more polar solvents, such as water, diols, such as propylene glycol and sugar alcohols, such as glycerin, and, in some examples includes other water phase ingredients. Typically, water phase ingredients are hydrophilic and/or amphipathic ingredients of the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate. For example, oils and other lipophilic ingredients typically are not added to the water phase. Certain ingredients, for example, ingredients having hydrophobic and hydrophilic moieties, for example, surfactants and co-surfactants, can be added to either the oil or the water phase, or to the oil and the water phase. Exemplary water phase ingredients include, but are not limited to, polar solvents, e.g., water, typically filtered water, propylene glycol, glycerin and other diols; emulsion stabilizers; pH adjusters, for example, phosphoric acid and/or citric acid; flavors; surfactants; co-surfactants, for example, phosphatidylcholine and sucrose fatty acid esters; and preservatives.

Water phase ingredients can be added to the water phase simultaneously and/or sequentially, in a specific order. In one example, one or more water phase ingredients is added first and heated, prior to addition of further ingredient(s). In one example, when the water phase ingredients include a polar solvent and an emulsion stabilizer, these ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) polar solvent, and 2) emulsion stabilizer. In one example, when the water phase ingredients include water and an emulsion stabilizer, these ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) water, and 2) emulsion stabilizer. In another example, when the water phase ingredients include a surfactant, a polar solvent (e.g., water) and an emulsion stabilizer, these ingredients are added to the water phase vessel sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) polar solvent (e.g., water); and 3) emulsion stabilizer. Alternatively, the water phase ingredients can be added in any other order. Typically, when the water phase includes a surfactant, particularly when the surfactant is a surfactant that is solid at room temperature, for example, tocopherol polyethylene glycol succinate surfactant, the surfactant is the first water phase ingredient added to the water phase vessel. Typically, when the water phase ingredients include an emulsion stabilizer, the emulsion stabilizer is the last ingredient added to the water phase vessel.

b. Water Phase Production

To produce the water phase, appropriate amounts of the water phase ingredients are added to the water phase vessel. Water phase vessels can include tanks, for example, water-jacketed tanks such as, but not limited to, the Overly 550 gallon water-jacketed tank, or any other tank described herein. The amounts of the water phase ingredients are measured, e.g., weighed, either prior to adding to the water phase vessel or are measured in the water phase vessel. In one example, the water phase ingredients are measured by weighing the ingredients on a scale (e.g., one or more of the scales described herein; the choice of scale depends on the desired amount of the ingredient), before addition to the water phase vessel. Typically, the appropriate amount of the water phase ingredient is calculated based on the desired concentration (e.g., weight/weight (w/w), molarity (M), volume/weight (v/w) or volume/volume (v/v)), of the ingredient in the final product.

Water phase ingredients can include water, typically purified water. In one example, unpurified water, for example, city water, is purified to remove impurities using one or more purifiers (e.g., purifiers described herein) prior to adding it to the water phase vessel. In another example, unpurified water, for example, city water, is purified by passing the water through the following purifiers, typically sequentially, in the following order: a carbon filter, an ion exchange purifier, a reverse osmosis purifier and an end-point filter, for example, a 100 micron end-point filter.

In general, the water phase ingredients are added, mixed and/or heated in the water phase vessel. The water phase vessel can be a water phase tank, for example, a water-jacketed tank, such as one of the tanks described herein (e.g., an Overly 550 gallon water-jacketed tank). In one example, ingredients are heated to temperatures between at or about 45° C. and at or about 85° C., for example, to at or about 45° C., 46° C., 47° C., 48° C., 49° C., 50° C., 51° C., 52° C., 53° C., 54° C., 55° C., 56° C., 57° C., 58° C., 59° C., 60° C., 61° C., 62° C., 63° C., 64° C., 65° C., 66° C., 67° C., 68° C., 69° C., 70° C., 71° C., 72° C., 73° C., 74° C., 75° C., 76° C., 77° C., 78° C., 79° C., 80° C., 81° C., 82° C., 83° C., 84° C. or 85° C. In one example, the water phase ingredients are heated to a temperature of at or about 60° C., for example, by adjusting the temperature on a water-jacketed tank or using another heating apparatus.

The mixing can be carried out with a standard mixer, a homogenizer, or any other suitable mixer, such as, but not limited to, the mixers described herein. Exemplary mixers include standard mixers, such as Lightnin® mixers (e.g., Model No. XJC117, a fixed-mount gear drive high-flow mixer) and homogenizers, such as Arde Barinco reversible homogenizers (e.g., Model No. CJ-4E). The mixer can be attached to the top of the water phase vessel, for example, attached to the tank, such as mounted on the top of the tank.

The water phase ingredients can be added to the water phase simultaneously or sequentially in any order. Typically, the water, e.g., purified water, is added before adding the other water phase ingredients. In one example, one or more of the ingredients are mixed and/or heated in the water phase tank before adding the other water phase ingredients.

In an exemplary method provided herein, the water phase is generated by combining water, e.g., purified water, and a preservative in the water phase vessel. The water phase is then mixed using a mixer such as a homogenizer, for example an Arde Barinco reversible homogenizer (e.g., Model No. CJ-4E), typically using the “reverse” setting. The homogenizer can be attached to the top of the water phase vessel. The water phase mixture is then heated to the desired temperature, for example, to a temperature of at or about 60° C. After the mixture of water phase ingredients reaches the desired temperature, e.g., at or about 60° C., an emulsion stabilizer, such as the SALADIZER® brand emulsion stabilizer (blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate) is added to the water phase. The water phase mixture is then mixed, for example, using a homogenizer, until the ingredients are mostly dispersed. Additional water phase ingredients are then added to the water phase tank at a temperature of at or about 60° C. The mixture is then mixed until the ingredients are dispersed, using a mixer, such as a standard water phase mixer, for example, a Lightnin® mixer (e.g., Model No. XJC117). Typically the heat is maintained at a temperature of at or about 60° C. Typically, the ingredients are mixed until combined and maintained at the desired temperature e.g., at or about 60° C., until combining with the oil phase.

c. Oil Phase Ingredients

The oil phase includes the high dimer-containing water-soluble vitamin E derivative surfactant, e.g., TPGS, the non-polar ingredient(s), for example, non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds and, in some examples, other oil phase ingredients. Typically, oil phase ingredients include one or more lipophilic and/or amphipathic ingredients of the liquid nanoemulsion concentrate. Oil phase ingredients typically do not include aqueous ingredients or hydrophilic ingredients. Certain ingredients, for example, ingredients having hydrophobic and hydrophilic moieties, for example, surfactants and co-surfactants, can be added to either the oil or the water phase, or to the oil and the water phase. Exemplary of ingredients used in the oil phase of the provided concentrates are non-polar ingredients, for example, non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, including any of the non-polar compounds or ingredients provided herein; emulsion stabilizers, pH adjusters, for example, phosphoric acid and/or citric acid; surfactants; co-surfactants, for example, phosphatidylcholine and/or sucrose fatty acid esters; preservatives, and oils, for example, non-polar solvents and other oil phase ingredients.

Oil phase ingredients can be added to the oil phase simultaneously and/or sequentially, for example, in any order or in a specific order. In one example, one or more oil phase ingredients is added first and heated, prior to addition of further ingredient(s). In one example, when the oil phase ingredients include a surfactant, a preservative, a solvent, a co-surfactant, and a non-polar ingredient, these ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) preservative; 3) solvent; 4) co-surfactant; 5) non-polar ingredient; and 6) emulsion stabilizer. In another example, when the oil phase ingredients include a surfactant, a preservative and a non-polar ingredient, the ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) preservative; and 3) non-polar ingredient. In another example, when the oil phase ingredients include a surfactant, a preservative, a non-polar ingredient and an emulsion stabilizer, the ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) preservative; 3) non-polar ingredient; and 4) emulsion stabilizer. Alternatively, the oil phase ingredients can be added in a different order, for example, any order. Two or more oil phase ingredients can be added simultaneously.

Typically, when the oil phase includes a surfactant, particularly when the surfactant is a surfactant that is solid at room temperature, for example, tocopherol polyethylene glycol succinate surfactant, the surfactant is the first oil phase ingredient added to the oil phase vessel. Typically, when the oil phase ingredients include an emulsion stabilizer, the emulsion stabilizer is the last ingredient added to the oil phase vessel. Typically, the non-polar ingredient either is the last ingredient added to the oil phase vessel, or is added immediately prior to addition of the emulsion stabilizer, which is the last ingredient added to the oil phase vessel.

d. Oil Phase Production

To produce the oil phase, appropriate amounts of the oil phase ingredients are added to the oil phase vessel. Oil phase vessels can include tanks, for example, water-jacketed tanks, such as, but not limited to, the Royal 190 Gallon water-jacketed tank, or any other tank described herein. The amounts of the oil phase ingredients are measured, e.g., weighed, either prior to adding to the oil phase vessel or are weighed/measured in the oil phase vessel. In one example, the oil phase ingredients are measured by weighing the ingredients on a scale (e.g., one or more of the scales described herein; the choice of scale depends on the desired amount of the ingredient), before addition to the oil phase vessel. Typically, the appropriate amount of the oil phase ingredient is calculated based on the desired concentration (e.g., weight/weight (w/w), molarity (M), volume/weight (v/w) or volume/volume (v/v)), of the ingredient in the final product.

In general, the oil phase ingredients are added, mixed and/or heated in the oil phase vessel. Mixing the oil phase ingredients can be carried out with a standard mixer or other mixer, such as, but not limited to, the mixers described herein, for example, a Lightnin® mixer (e.g., Model No. XJC117, a fixed-mount gear drive high-flow mixer). Heating the oil phase ingredients is carried out using a heating apparatus, such as those described herein, typically a water jacket on a water-jacketed tank. In one example, the ingredients are heated to temperatures between at or about 45° C. and at or about 85° C., for example, to at or about 45° C., 46° C., 47° C., 48° C., 49° C., 50° C., 51° C., 52° C., 53° C., 54° C., 55° C., 56° C., 57° C., 58° C., 59° C., 60° C., 61° C., 62° C., 63° C., 64° C., 65° C., 66° C., 67° C., 68° C., 69° C., 70° C., 71° C., 72° C., 73° C., 74° C., 75° C., 76° C., 77° C., 78° C., 79° C., 80° C., 81° C., 82° C., 83° C., 84° C. or 85° C. In one example, the oil phase ingredients are heated to a temperature of at or about 60° C., for example, by adjusting the temperature on a water-jacketed tank.

The oil phase ingredients can be added to the oil phase vessel simultaneously or sequentially in any order. In one example, one or more of the ingredients are added, mixed and/or heated, prior to the addition of the other ingredients to the vessel.

In an exemplary method provided herein, the oil phase is generated by combining an oil, such as a fatty acid (e.g., coconut oil) and a stimulant (e.g., theobromine) in the oil phase vessel. The oil phase is then heated to the desired temperature, for example, to a temperature of at or about 60° C., by adjusting the temperature on a water-jacketed tank, until dissolved. After the mixture of oil phase ingredients reaches the desired temperature, e.g., at or about 60° C., a surfactant, for example, TPGS, such as the TPGS compositions described herein is added to the oil phase. In some examples, the oil phase ingredients are mixed (e.g., using a mixer as provided herein) during generation of the oil phase. Typically, the oil phase ingredients are mixed until combined and maintained at the desired temperature, e.g., at or about at 60° C., prior to combining with the water phase.

e. Combining Phases

After the oil phase and the water phase are generated, the phases can be combined, for example, by using a transfer device, and mixed, e.g., homogenized, to form an emulsion. In one example, the oil phase is transferred from the oil phase vessel to the water phase vessel. In another example, the water phase is transferred from the water phase vessel to the oil phase vessel. In another example, the oil and water phases are transferred to another vessel, such as an emulsifying vessel.

Transfer device can include any device for transferring the contents of one vessel to another vessel, as described above. For example, suitable transfer device include transfer pumps and associated equipment, such as, but not limited to, combinations of sanitary fittings, hoses and/or ball valves; manual transfer device, for example, pouring and/or pipetting device; and any other suitable transfer device known to those of skill in the art. Typically, the phases are kept clean, e.g., sterile, during transfer. Sterility of the phases can be maintained, for example, by transfer device having sanitary fittings and/or by combining the phases in a sterile environment. In one example, the transfer device include a transfer pump, for example, a Teel pump (Model No. 2P377B; Granger, Inc.), sanitary fittings, transfer hoses, for example, food grade hoses, such as those sold by Sani-Tech West, and ball valves, which are attached to the tanks and connect the tanks.

Simultaneous with and/or subsequent to the combination of the phases, a mixer, for example, a homogenizer (e.g., a reversible homogenizer), can be used to emulsify the water and oil phases. In one example, a homogenizer, e.g., a homogenizer mounted on one of the tanks, is turned on, the ball valves are opened, and the transfer pump is turned on to effect transfer of the contents of one tank to another, for example, to transfer the contents of the oil phase tank to the water phase tank. As the phases are combined, they can be mixed by the homogenizer to form an emulsion. The position of the homogenizer in the tank can be adjusted, for example, by adjusting a baffle plate, e.g., moving the baffle plate further into/out of the mixture, in order to achieve and maintain the emulsion. Typically, the phases are homogenized (i.e., emulsified) by operating the mixer, e.g., homogenizer, at a speed sufficient to form an emulsion. In one example, the homogenizer is operated at a speed of between at or about 1000 and at or about 1500 rpm. Mixing typically is continued until the phases are combined, typically in an emulsion.

f. Cooling

The emulsion can be cooled during and/or after mixing to promote stability and emulsification, for example, by preventing or minimizing oxidization. The cooling can be rapid cooling and can be performed using one or more cooling apparatuses, for example, any of the cooling apparatuses described herein or any cooling apparatus known to those of skill in the art. Suitable cooling apparatuses for use with the methods include recirculating coolers and water and ice baths. An exemplary cooling apparatus is a recirculating cooler, such as those sold by Turmoil (Model No. OC-1000 RO; West Swanzey, N.H.). When the cooling apparatus is a recirculating cooler, fluid from the vessel containing the combined oil and water phases is circulated through the cooler, typically while mixing, and then back to the vessel, to rapidly cool and maintain the temperature of the mixture during mixing. Typically, the phases are mixed and cooled until the phases are emulsified and the temperature of the emulsification reaches between at or about 25° C. and at or about 43° C., typically between at or about 30° C. and at or about 35° C. For example, the emulsification can be cooled to a temperature of at or about 25° C., 26° C., 27° C., 28° C., 29° C., 30° C., 31° C., 32° C., 33° C., 34° C., 35° C., 36° C., 37° C., 38° C., 39° C., 40° C., 41° C., 42° C. or 43° C. Typically, when the cooling is rapid cooling, the temperature can be reached in less than or about 2 hours, typically less than or about 1 hour. For example, the emulsification can be cooled to the desired temperature, e.g., between at or about 25° C. and at or about 43° C., in at or about 30 minutes to at or about 60 minutes, such as in at or about 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59 or 60 minutes.

Cooling can be performed before or after additional steps, such as adding additional ingredients and/or evaluation of the product. In one example, the cooling is carried out after the addition of additional ingredients, for example, taste-modifying agents, and/or pH adjusting agents.

g. Filtration, Additions, Evaluation and Packaging

After combining the oil and water phases to form a mixture, i.e., emulsion, one or more additional steps can be carried out to modify, evaluate, analyze and/or package the product. Typically, taste-modifying agents are added to the emulsion, such as flavoring agents (e.g., flavoring agents that confer fruit flavors, such as peach, or other flavors, such as pina colada) and sweetening agents (e.g., sucralose). Other ingredients can be added, such as masking agents (e.g., NAT masking agent) and pH adjusting agents (e.g., acids, such as, but not limited to citric acid). The pH adjusting agent can be used to adjust the pH of the emulsion, for example, to a pH of between at or about 2 and at or about 5, e.g., to at or about 2 and at or about 3.5. Thus, the provided products typically have a pH of between at or about 2 and at or about 5, e.g., at or about 2 and at or about 3.5, such as a pH of at or about 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9 or 5.

Before and/or after adding additional ingredients, the product can be evaluated, such as by measuring the pH and/or the temperature. Measurements can be taken using an instrument such as those described herein. In one example, additional ingredients (e.g., pH adjusters) are added based on information obtained by evaluating the product. The product can be analyzed and evaluated to verify and/or determine other properties of the product, for example, to verify that the product contains the appropriate amounts of the non-polar ingredients and other ingredients. For example, the products can be evaluated to verify that microbial and heavy metal (e.g., arsenic, cadmium, mercury, lead and others) levels are within the acceptable range according to food and beverage standards. In one example, the acceptable microbial levels are not more than 1,000 cfu/g microbes (e.g., yeast, bacteria, mold and other microbes) and negative for E. coli and Salmonella. In another example, the acceptable heavy metal levels are not more than 10 ppm heavy metals and not more than 0.2 ppm lead and 2 ppm arsenic. When a standard exists for a particular amount and/or property, the amount/property is verified by tests in accordance with U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP) and/or AOAC (Association of Analytical Communities) standards. Samples can be analyzed in accordance with these standards by sending a sample of the product to a commercial testing facility, such as Eurofins U.S. (Des Moines, Iowa) or Advanced Botanical Consulting & Testing, Inc. (Tustin, Calif.), or any other facility that performs tests in accordance with these standards.

For example, the amount of some non-polar ingredients, such as caffeine anhydrous, chromium picolinate and vitamin B12, typically is verified according to USP standards. The density and pH of the composition and the level of microbes, e.g., yeast, mold, E. coli and Salmonella, also typically are verified according to USP standards. The amount of fatty acids, e.g., coconut oil, can be verified according to AOAC standards, for example, by gas chromatography (GC), gas liquid chromatography (GLC) or other fatty acid profiling methods. The levels of heavy metals, such as lead and arsenic, are tested using inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS), or by sending a sample of the composition for testing to a testing facility, such as Eurofins U.S. (Des Moines, Iowa) or Advanced Botanical Consulting & Testing, Inc. (Tustin, Calif.), or any other facility capable of performing such tests. Additionally, Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR) typically is used to obtain a fingerprint of the product, to verify that no other compounds except the desired ingredients are present in the product.

The emulsifications can be purified, for example, filtered, prior to use, using any of purification device described herein or any other suitable purification device. Water can be added in the case of evaporation, to bring the product up to the appropriate volume. HPLC, GC, GLC, FTIR and ICP-MS can be performed according to well-known methods (see, for example, Analytical Chemistry: An Introduction, 6th Ed., Douglas A. Skoog et al. (1994) Chapters 22 (FTIR) and 27 (GC/GLC, HPLC) and U.S. Pat. No. 6,265,717 (ICP-MS)).

After evaluation, purification, and/or addition of all the ingredients, the product can be packaged, for example, into large containers for storage or into smaller containers for administration, such as bottles or ampoules (as described below). The products can be transferred to the packaging containers using a transfer device, such as the transfer device described herein, including transfer pumps and fittings as described above or by manual transfer. For example, the product can be packaged for storage in containers, such as totes, e.g., 275 gallon totes (such as the 275 gallon bottle with a reconditioned CageTote tank IBC, Item No. REN275; Qualsery Enterprises, Inc. (www.qualservcontainer.com)), by transferring the mixture using a food grade hose (Sani-Tech® STHT-R-HD braid-reinforced heavy duty silicone hose; Sani-Tech West). After transfer, the tote can be closed and sealed, e.g., tied, such as with a cable tie.

h. Cleaning the Equipment

The equipment used in the provided methods can be cleaned prior to, and typically after, use. For example, the methods include cleaning all the equipment in a sink and/or rinsing the vessels, e.g., tanks, and hose lines. The tanks can be cleaned by filling with hot water, washing with soap and water, rinsing with water. The pH of the water can be checked before discharging the water from the vessel. The water can be adjusted to the desired pH, for example to a pH between 6 and 9, by adding a pH adjusting agent, such as soda ash, citric acid and/or H₃PO₄. After discharging the water from the vessel, the tanks can be sanitized, such as with isopropyl alcohol (IPA), and let dry.

i. Clarity

Compositions containing the high dimer-containing PEG derivative of vitamin E mixture, such as TPGS, are more clear (less turbid) than compositions containing the high monomer PEG derivative of vitamin E, such as TPGS, such as that available from Eastman Chemical Company, as described herein. The clarity of each of the compositions containing the concentrates that contained the high dimer (about 51%) TPGS mixture (composition), prepared according to Example 1 below, was determined and compared to the clarity of the concentrates that contained the commercially available standard TPGS composition (low dimer-containing) from Eastman.

The clarity of each concentrate was evaluated by a turbidity analysis using a nephelometer. The concentrates were prepared for the analysis using the following steps. Eight ounces of water was heated in a Pyrex® beaker by placing the beaker on a Thermolyne hot plate (Model #846925) until the water reached 49.8° C. The concentrate was then added to the heated water and stirred with a stir rod until dispersed. The resulting aqueous composition was cooled to room temperature (about 25° C.). The cooled aqueous composition was added to an amber-glass screw-top vial (Alcon) for evaluation. The vials that contained the aqueous compositions were sent to ACZ Laboratories, Inc. (Steamboat Springs, Colo.) for turbidity analysis using a nephelometer. Results of the analysis are listed in the form of Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU) and are indicated in Tables A-C below.

TABLE A Turbidity (NTU) of aqueous compositions containing 10% fish oil Composition Turbidity (NTU) TPGS (Example 1) + 10% fish oil 12.1 TPGS (Eastman) + 10% fish oil 76.8

TABLE B Turbidity (NTU) of aqueous compositions containing 15% fish oil Composition Turbidity (NTU) TPGS (Example 1) + 15% fish oil 38.5 TPGS (Eastman) + 15% fish oil 233

TABLE C Turbidity (NTU) of aqueous compositions containing 20% fish oil Composition Turbidity (NTU) TPGS (Example 1) + 15% fish oil 718 TPGS (Eastman) + 15% fish oil 1000

As the data demonstrate, aqueous compositions that contained the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates that were prepared with the high dimer-containing TPGS composition, prepared as described in Example 1 (i.e., TPGS compositions that contained the higher amounts of TPGS dimer and lower amounts of TPGS monomer), exhibited significantly lower turbidity than those compositions that contained the liquid nanoemulsion concentrates prepared using commercially available TPGS (i.e., TPGS compositions that contained higher amounts of TPGS monomer and lower amounts of TPGS dimer). Additional data are provided in U.S. application Ser. No. 14/207,310, now published as US-2014-0271593-A1.

3. General Methods for Preparing Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates (Compositions that are Introduced into or Formulated in Soft Gel Shells or Capsules)

In general, the methods useful for making the pre-gel concentrates provided herein are performed by combining the ingredients, i.e., non-polar ingredients, non-aqueous solvents, and a surfactant, and mixing to form a homogenous pre-gel concentrate. The pre-gel concentrate typically is generated in a vessel. The vessel can be, for example, a tank. Typically, the mixture is heated to a desired temperature to form a homogenous mixture. For example, the mixture can be heated to 60° C. The provided methods can include additional steps. In some examples, the additional steps include evaluating properties of the pre-gel concentrates, adding additional ingredients, packaging and/or filtering.

The provided methods can be performed using a bench-top manufacturing process (for small batch sizes) or performed using a scaled-up manufacturing process (for larger batch sizes). Each of the provided pre-gel concentrates can be made with either the bench-top or scaled up process. In one example, the pre-gel concentrate is first made with the bench-top process and then the method is scaled up to make larger quantities of the product.

The bench-top process can be performed on a bench, counter, table or any other suitable surface. Typically, the bench-top process is used to make pre-gel concentrates having relatively smaller volumes than those made with the scaled-up process. For example, volumes less than 1 L or about 1 L, or less than 1 gallon or about 1 gallon, for example, less than or about 500 mL, for example, less than or about 1000 mL, 900 mL, 800 mL, 700 mL, 600 mL, 500 mL, 450 mL, 400 mL, 350 mL, 300 mL, 250 mL, 200 mL, 150 mL, 100 mL, or 50 mL or less, can be made using the bench-top process.

For the bench-top process, the equipment can be sufficiently compact to be used on a bench-top or other similar surface, and can be sufficiently compact to be moved, for example, lifted, by the artisan using the methods. For example, the vessels can be bench-top vessels. Exemplary bench-top vessels include, for example, flasks, beakers, vials, measuring containers, bottles and/or other bench-top containers. In some examples, the vessel in the bench-top process is a Pyrex® beaker.

Typically, the mixers for use in the bench-top processes of the provided methods are mixers that can be used in the bench-top vessels. Mixers that can be used in the bench-top vessels include, for example, standard mixers, such as hand-held mixers, stir rods, stir bars, magnetic mixers and overhead mixers, including, for example, mechanical and/or electric overhead mixers, and any other mixer that is suitable for use in the bench-top vessel. Exemplary standard mixers include those sold by IKA®, for example, overhead IKA® mixers, such as Model Nos. RW-14 Basic and RE-16S, which are laboratory stirrers and can be used to mix ingredients, such as to for a homogenous concentrate. Suitable bench-top mixers also include homogenizers, for example, reversible homogenizers. An exemplary reversible homogenizer is the Arde Barinco reversible homogenizer, Model no. CJ-4E.

Typically, the heating and cooling apparatuses are those that can be used with the bench-top vessels, such as hot plates, ice baths and/or water baths, into (or onto) which the vessels can be placed, for example, for rapid cooling. The evaluation device used in the bench-top process, for example, the temperature and/or pH meters, typically are capable of being placed in the bench-top vessels.

The scaled-up manufacturing process of the methods typically is used to make pre-gel concentrates of relatively larger volumes, such as volumes greater than 1 L or about 1 L, or greater than 1 gallon (gal) or about 1 gallon. For example, volumes greater than or about 0.5 L, for example, greater than or about 0.5 L, 1 L, or 2 L, or greater than or about 1 gal, 2 gal, 3 gal, 4 gal, 5 gal, 6 gal, 7 gal, 8 gal, 9 gal, 10 gal, 11 gal, 12 gal, 13 gal, 14 gal, 15 gal, 16 gal, 17 gal, 18 gal, 19 gal, 20 gal, 21 gal, 22 gal, 23 gal, 24 gal, 25 gal, 26 gal, 27 gal, 28 gal, 29 gal, 30 gal, 40 gal, 50 gal, 60 gal, 70 gal, 80 gal, 90 gal, 100 gal, 150 gal, 200 gal, 250 gal, 300 gal, 350 gal, 400 gal, 450 gal, 500 gal, 550 gal, 600 gal, 650 gal, 700 gal, 800 gal, 900 gal, or 1000 gal or more, can be made using the scaled-up manufacturing process.

In general, equipment used for the scaled-up process is compatible with larger volume batches (batch sizes). For example, the vessels for use in the scaled-up processes can be tanks, for example, water-jacketed tanks, which are equipped with water jackets that can be used as heating apparatuses to ingredients during generation of the pre-gel concentrate. The water jackets typically are controlled via control panels. The transfer device can include devices attached to and connecting the tanks, such as transfer pumps and associated fittings, for example, ball valves and hoses that are attached to the tanks. Mixers for use in the scaled-up process can be standard mixers, for example, mounted mixers, such as LIGHTNIN® mixers, e.g., Model Nos. XJC117 (a fixed-mount, gear drive high-flow mixer) and ND2.

Prior to beginning the methods, the water jacket lines on any water-jacketed oil phase and water phase tank can be bled. The water jacket switches can then be turned on to maintain a pressure in the water jackets of between at or about 20 psi and at or about 40 psi (pounds per square inch). If the pressure in the water jacket falls below 20 psi during the method, the line can be bled and checked for bubbles while purging the line.

a. Ingredients

The pre-gel concentrates include a surfactant, for example, a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E, e.g., TPGS, the non-polar ingredients, for example, non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, and non-aqueous solvents. Typically, the ingredients do not include aqueous ingredients, e.g., water. Exemplary of ingredients used in the provided pre-gel concentrates are non-polar ingredients, for example, non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, including any of the non-polar compounds and ingredients provided herein; surfactants, including any of the polyalkylene glycol derivatives of vitamin E provided herein; and non-aqueous solvents, for example, solvents that have no water solubility or are only partially solubility in water.

b. Production of the Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates

Typically, the ingredients are weighed and/or measured, for example, using one or more scales (e.g., one or more of the scales described herein), before they are added to the mixing vessel (e.g., any vessel described herein). In one example, the amount of each ingredient to be added is determined according to the provided methods for formulating the pre-gel concentrates. Typically, the desired concentration, by weight (w/w), of the final pre-gel concentrate is used to calculate the amount of each ingredient that is added to the vessel. Alternatively, the desired volume per weight, volume per volume or weight per volume can be used to calculate the correct amount of an ingredient to be measured and added to the vessel.

The ingredients can be added simultaneously and/or sequentially, for example, in any order or in a specific order. In one example, one or more ingredients are added first and heated, prior to addition of further ingredient(s). Typically, when the ingredients include a surfactant, a non-aqueous solvent and a non-polar ingredient, the ingredients are added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) non-aqueous solvent; 3) non-polar ingredient. Alternatively, the ingredients can be added in a different order, for example, any order. Two or more ingredients can be added simultaneously.

Typically, when the oil phase includes a surfactant, particularly when the surfactant is a surfactant that is solid at room temperature, for example, a tocopherol polyethylene glycol succinate surfactant, the surfactant is the first ingredient added to the vessel. Typically, the non-polar ingredients are the last ingredients added to the vessel.

Typically, in order to dissolve the ingredients, the ingredients are mixed in the mixing vessel using a standard mixer (e.g., any of the standard mixers described herein) and heated using a heating apparatus (e.g., any of the heating apparatuses described herein). Typically, the ingredients are heated such that the ingredients reach an elevated temperature, for example, between about 45° C. or about 45° C. and 85° C. or about 85° C., for example, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84 or 85° C., typically, 60° C. or about 60° C. Typically, the ingredients are heated at an elevated temperature, for example, at 60° C. or about 60° C., until the ingredients dissolve, e.g., until a homogenous mixture is formed.

The ingredients typically are homogenized, continuously or intermittently, until the ingredients become homogeneous at the elevated temperature, for example, at between about 45° C. or about 45° C. and 85° C. or about 85° C., for example, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81, 82, 83, 84 or 85° C., typically, 60° C. or about 60° C. In one example, the baffle plate of the mixer is adjusted, for example, by moving the baffle plate further down into the mixture or further up out of the mixture, to control the type of mixing, for example, to switch from downward flow to upward flow and vice versa, during mixing of the ingredients. In another example, the homogenizer can be adjusted to increase or decrease shear or to maintain the shear at a particular speed. Methods for homogenizing ingredients are well known and other methods can be used to homogenize in the provided methods.

Typically, after all the ingredients have been added and made homogeneous, the pre-gel concentrate is filtered using an end-product filter (e.g., a 100 micron end-product filter), to remove any impurities.

c. Transfer and/or Packaging

After mixing, the pre-gel concentrate is transferred, using one or more transfer means, to another vessel, for example, a holding or packaging vessel and/or a storage container. Any transfer means can be used. For example, any means for transferring the contents of one vessel to another vessel as described above, for example, transfer pumps and associated equipment, for example, sanitary fittings, hoses and/or ball valves; and manual transfer means, for example, pouring and/or pipetting means or other known transfer means. In some examples, the mixture is kept clean, for example, sterile during transfer, for example, by using transfer means with sanitary fittings and/or combining the phases in a sterile environment.

In one example, the mixture is transferred to a holding tank. In another example, the pre-gel concentrate, after being made and filtered, is transferred, e.g., by hot filling while the concentrate is a liquid, to a storage container, e.g., a vial, plastic bottle, or bag-in-a-box type packaging. Typically, the concentrate is allowed to cool naturally in the storage container. Alternatively, a cooling apparatus, e.g., a refrigerator, freezer or water bath, can be used to cool the concentrate in the storage container. The pre-gel concentrate can remain a liquid as it cools or, alternatively, can solidify or partially solidify as it cools in the storage container, e.g., becomes a waxy solid.

4. Exemplary Methods for Preparing Pre-Spray Emulsions and Powders

Methods for preparing the pre-spray emulsions include those described above and exemplified below for preparing emulsions. The powders containing a high amount of non-polar ingredients and a sugar fatty acid ester-binder mixture are prepared by any suitable drying methods. Equipment for use in the methods and general steps of the methods are described herein. The methods include bench-top manufacturing processes, which are used to make small quantities of the concentrates. The methods also include scaled-up manufacturing processes, which are used to make larger batches of the compositions and powders. Any of the bench-top processes can be scaled up to perform the methods using the scaled-up processes. Any of the emulsions and powders can be made using either scaled-up or bench-top processes. For example exemplary methods include those described in U.S. Pat. No. 8,282,977 and U.S. Pub. Nos. 2009-0297491 and 2012-0016026.

a. General Methods for Producing the Emulsions and Powders

As described above, emulsions are prepared by generating an oil phase (e.g., the pre-emulsion concentrate) and generating a water phase and combining (e.g., using a transfer device) and mixing the phases to form emulsions, e.g., the pre-spray emulsions. The dry powders are generated from the pre-spray emulsions by drying, for example, by spray drying the pre-spray emulsions. The oil and water phases typically are generated in separate vessels. The vessels can be, for example, tanks. Generation of the water phase and generation of the oil phase can be performed simultaneously or sequentially, in any order. Typically, both phases are heated to a desired temperature prior to combining the phases. For example, the phases can be heated to between 60° C. and 70° C. prior to combining the phases. The provided methods can include additional steps. In some examples, the additional steps include evaluating properties of the products, adding additional ingredients (e.g., taste-modifying agents), packaging and/or filtering. The methods and equipment for preparing the emulsions are as described above.

b. Drying the Emulsions to Produce Powders

After combining the oil phase and water phase to form the emulsion, the emulsion can be dried into a powder. The emulsion is dried, for example, spray dried, into a powder after the emulsion has been cooled to a desired temperature, e.g., between or between about 25° C. and 43° C., such as at or about 30° C. The methods for forming the powders include spray drying. Spray drying processes and spray drying equipment are described generally in Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, pp. 20-57 (Sixth Edition 1984). More details on spray drying processes and equipment are reviewed by Marshall (1954) “Atomization and Spray-Drying,” Chem. Eng. Prog. Monogr. 50: Series 2 and Masters, “Spray Drying Handbook” (Fourth Edition 1985). Methods for spray drying are well known (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,430,021 and 6,534,085 and U.S. Publication No. 2007/0184117). In general, spray drying is used to dry a heated liquid by passing it through hot gas. One or more spray nozzles is used to atomize the liquid in a cooling tower or chamber. As the material is atomized (sprayed), the surface tension causes a uniform spherical particle to form, which is passed through the cooling chamber and hardens into a solid intact sphere. The spray dried particles can be between at or about 0.5 microns and at or about 100 microns, and typically are less than at or about 10 microns, typically less than at or about 5 microns, and typically less than at or about, or at or about, 1 micron.

Exemplary of a spray dryer is a cyclone spray dryer. During spray drying with a cyclone spray dryer, the homogenized mixture is pumped into an atomizing device where it is broken into small droplets. Upon contact with a stream of hot air, the moisture is removed very rapidly from the droplets while still suspended in the drying air. The dry powder is separated from the moist air in cyclones by centrifugal action. The centrifugal action is caused by the great increase in air speed when the mixture of particles and air enters the cyclone system. The dense powder particles are forced toward the cyclone walls while the lighter, moist air is directed away through the exhaust pipes. The powder settles to the bottom of the cyclone where it is removed through a discharging device. Sometimes the air-conveying ducts for the dry powder are connected with cooling systems which admit cold air for transport of the product through conveying pipes. Cyclone dryers have been designed for large production schedules capable of drying ton-lots of powder per hour.

The methods provided herein produce powders using a standard spray dryer. The liquid to be dried, for example a solution, suspension or emulsion, may be fed into an atomizer to generate the powder. The atomizer may be, for example, a rotary (wheel) atomizer or nozzle atomizer. In some examples, a fluid bed dryer may also be used. The atomizer is typically an open-mode design with single-point powder discharge, an open-mode design with dual-point powder discharge, or a closed-cycle design with single-point powder discharge, or an alternative form of atomizer. In some examples, the atomizer is contained within a dryer consisting of a feed pump to funnel in the liquid, for example the emulsion, an atomizer, an air heater, an air dispenser, a drying chamber, systems for powder recovery, and process control systems.

In order to prepare the dry powder using a spray drier, the liquid, e.g., emulsion, is fed into a rotary wheel or high pressure nozzle atomizer at a uniform rate, and thereby converted into a spray of droplets. The pattern of the resultant droplets may be largely dependent on the properties of the liquid to be spray dried, including its bulk density, in conjunction with the speed and configuration of the atomizer wheel. In desirable conditions, rotation of the atomizer wheel occurs with minimal vibration, at high peripheral speeds and with smooth internal surfaces, for maximum efficacy. The optimum speed and wheel configuration for a specific liquid can be determined empirically by one of skill in the art. In some examples, the spray of droplets contacts the hot air, for example air at a temperature of about 180° C., present in the drying chamber, triggering the formation of dry particles and cooling of the hot air due to the evaporation of water or chemical solvent from the concentrated liquid sample. The resultant powder and cooler, humid air are separately, and continuously, discharged from the chamber. In some examples, the dry powder is cooled and bagged after separation from the cooler, humid air. After powder recovery, some powders are rewet by re-dissolving the powder in water or a solvent and the composition is subject to a second round of spray drying and collection. In some examples the powders are then sifted, for example through a 60-80 μm mesh screen.

As will be appreciated by one of skill in the art, the inlet temperature and the outlet temperature of the spray drier are not critical but will be of such a level to provide the desired particle size, of less than at or about 1 micron, and to result in a powder that has a desired property. The inlet and outlet temperatures can be adjusted depending on the melting characteristics and composition of the emulsion. The inlet temperature typically is between at or about 60° C. and at or about 170° C. with outlet temperatures between at or about 40° C. to at or about 120° C. Typical inlet temperatures are from at or about 90° C. to at or about 120° C. and typical outlet temperatures are from at or about 60° C. to at or about 90° C. The flow rate which is used in the spray drying equipment will generally be at or about 3 mL per minute to at or about 15 mL per minute. The atomizer air flow rate will vary between values of at or about 25 L per minute to at or about 50 L per minute. Commercially available spray dryers are well known to those of skill in the art, and suitable settings for any particular dispersion can be readily determined by one of skill in the art without undue experimentation. Operating conditions such as inlet temperature and outlet temperature, feed rate, atomization pressure, flow rate of the drying air, and nozzle configuration can be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines.

In some examples, a processing aid, such as additional solvent, for example, water, is added to the emulsion. The processing aid, e.g., water, allows the emulsion to pass through the pump of the dryer more easily, for example, by making the emulsion less thick. The processing aid, for example, water, is evaporated during the spray drying process and is not present in the final dry powder.

The resulting powder can be processed further, such as by adding polar solvent and repeating the drying process. This can improve to properties of the powders.

c. Storing the Powders

The resulting powders are very stable and can be stored in any convenient manner, including in packets, such as packets containing an amount for a single dose or use or multiple doses. The amount in each pack depends upon the intended application.

In some examples, the dry powder is stored into a capsule form or is pressed into a tablet. For use as tablets, the compositions can contain other excipients generally included in tables. These excipients include tablet disintegrants, such as corn starch, glidants, such as silicon dioxide, and lubricants such as magnesium stearate. Ordinarily these compositions contain minor amounts by weight of glidants and lubricants, e.g., each two percent (2%) or less by weight. Tablet disintegrants are optionally present and, if present, are included in sufficient amounts to assure that the tablet disintegrates upon ingestion. For example, disintegrants, such as corn starch, can be employed at concentrations of from about zero to about 30 percent by weight of the composition.

The free-flowing, i.e., not sticky, powders also can be used to administer the non-polar ingredients by inhalation using a dry powder inhaler (DPI). Such dry powder inhalers typically administer the ingredient as a free-flowing powder that is dispersed in the air-stream during inspiration. In order to achieve a free-flowing powder, the ingredients are typically formulated with a suitable excipient such as lactose or starch. For example, such a dry powder formulation can be made, for example, by combining the lactose with the non-polar ingredient and then dry blending the components. Alternatively, if desired, the non-polar ingredient can be formulated without an excipient. The pharmaceutical composition is then typically loaded into a dry powder dispenser, or into inhalation cartridges or capsules for use with a dry powder delivery device. Examples of dry powder inhaler delivery devices include Diskhaler (GlaxoSmithKline, Research Triangle Park, N.C.) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,035,237); Diskus (GlaxoSmithKline) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,378,519; Turbuhaler (AstraZeneca, Wilmington, Del.) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,524,769); Rotahaler (GlaxoSmithKline) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,353,365) and Handihaler (Boehringer Ingelheim). Further examples of suitable DPI devices are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,415,162, 5,239,993, and 5,715,810 and references cited therein.

d. Filtration, Additions, Evaluation and Packaging

After combining the oil and water phases to form a mixture, i.e., emulsion, or after spray drying the emulsion to form a dry powder, one or more additional steps can be carried out to modify, evaluate, analyze and/or package the product. Typically, taste-modifying agents are added to the emulsion, such as flavoring agents (e.g., flavoring agents that confer fruit flavors, such as peach, or other flavors, such as pina colada) and sweetening agents (e.g., sucralose). Other ingredients can be added, such as masking agents (e.g., NAT masking agent) and pH adjusting agents (e.g., acids, such as, but not limited to citric acid). The pH adjusting agent can be used to adjust the pH of the emulsion, for example, to a pH of between at or about 2 and at or about 5, e.g., to at or about 2 and at or about 3.5. Thus, the provided products typically have a pH of between at or about 2 and at or about 5, e.g., at or about 2 and at or about 3.5, such as a pH of at or about 2, 2.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 2.6, 2.7, 2.8, 2.9, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.5, 3.6, 3.7, 3.8, 3.9, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4, 4.5, 4.6, 4.7, 4.8, 4.9 or 5.

Before and/or after adding additional ingredients, the product can be evaluated, such as by measuring the pH and/or the temperature. Measurements can be taken using an instrument such as those described herein. In one example, additional ingredients (e.g., pH adjusters) are added based on information obtained by evaluating the product. The product can be analyzed and evaluated to verify and/or determine other properties of the product, for example, to verify that the product contains the appropriate amounts of the non-polar ingredients and other ingredients. For example, the products can be evaluated to verify that microbial and heavy metal (e.g., arsenic, cadmium, mercury, lead and others) levels are within the acceptable range according to food and beverage standards. In one example, the acceptable microbial levels are not more than 1,000 cfu/g microbes (e.g., yeast, bacteria, mold and other microbes) and negative for E. coli and Salmonella. In another example, the acceptable heavy metal levels are not more than 10 ppm heavy metals and not more than 0.2 ppm lead and 2 ppm arsenic. When a standard exists for a particular amount and/or property, the amount/property is verified by tests in accordance with U.S. Pharmacopeia (USP) and/or AOAC (Association of Analytical Communities) standards. Samples can be analyzed in accordance with these standards by sending a sample of the product to a commercial testing facility, such as Eurofins U.S. (Des Moines, Iowa) or Advanced Botanical Consulting & Testing, Inc. (Tustin, Calif.), or any other facility that performs tests in accordance with these standards.

For example, the amount of some non-polar ingredients, such as caffeine anhydrous, chromium picolinate and vitamin B12, typically is verified according to USP standards. The density and pH of the composition and the level of microbes, e.g., yeast, mold, E. coli and Salmonella, also typically are verified according to USP standards. The amount of fatty acids can be verified according to AOAC standards, for example, by gas chromatography (GC), gas liquid chromatography (GLC) or other fatty acid profiling methods. The levels of heavy metals, such as lead and arsenic, are tested using inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometry (ICP-MS), or by sending a sample of the composition for testing to a testing facility, such as Eurofins U.S. (Des Moines, Iowa) or Advanced Botanical Consulting & Testing, Inc. (Tustin, Calif.), or any other facility capable of performing such tests. Additionally, Fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR) typically is used to obtain a fingerprint of the product, to verify that no other compounds except the desired ingredients are present in the product.

After evaluation, purification, and/or addition of all the ingredients, the product, e.g., emulsion or dry powder, can be packaged, for example, into large containers for storage or into smaller containers for administration, such as bottles or ampoules (as described below). The products can be transferred to the packaging containers using a transfer device, such as the transfer device described herein, including transfer pumps and fittings as described above or by manual transfer. For example, the product can be packaged for storage in containers, such as totes, e.g., 275 gallon totes (such as the 275 gallon bottle with a reconditioned CageTote tank IBC, Item No. REN275; Qualsery Enterprises, Inc. (www.qualservcontainer.com)), by transferring the mixture using a food grade hose (Sani-Tech® STHT-R-HD braid-reinforced heavy duty silicone hose; Sani-Tech West). After transfer, the tote can be closed and sealed, e.g., tied, such as with a cable tie.

The following examples are included for illustrative purposes only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.

F. EXAMPLES Example 1

A. Method of Producing TPGS Compositions

d-α-Tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate (TPGS 1000) was synthesized from vitamin E succinate according to the following general procedure. See also, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/207,310 and International Patent Application No. PCT/US14/25006.

Polyethylene glycol (PEG) 1000 (168.7 kg) was added to a reaction flask containing 1430 L of toluene, followed by the addition of 71.5 kg of vitamin E (α-tocopheryl acid) succinate and 2.86 kg of p-toluene sulfonic acid. The reaction mixture was heated to 110-112° C. and refluxed for up to 6.5 hours, removing the water formed during the esterification reaction by azeotropic distillation. The reaction was terminated when the desired amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer were formed, as indicated by high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) and thin layer chromatography (TLC), resulting in the TPGS compositions set forth in Table 1a below. Each TPGS composition in Table 1a was formed by terminating the reaction at a different time point, up to 6.5 hours, and contained various amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer. The remainder of the TPGS composition was made up of unreacted starting materials, such as vitamin E and PEG The reaction was terminated by cooling the reaction mixture to room temperature, followed by washing with 25 L of a 10% solution of NaHCO₃. The solution stirred for 10 minutes, and after stirring was allowed to separate into layers. The organic (toluene) layer was removed, 6 kg of activated carbon (charcoal) was added, and the solution was heated to 55-60° C. and maintained at this temperature for 1 hour. The solution was then cooled to room temperature, filtered through 10 kg of Celite® Hyflo® filter aid (Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) and then washed with 100 L of toluene. The filtered toluene solution was concentrated by vacuum distillation below 60° C. to remove the toluene. Water (140 L) was added to remove traces of toluene and was then removed via vacuum distillation below 60° C. to obtain ˜180 kg of a crude α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol 1000 succinate composition that contained a mixture of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer, along with unreacted PEG 1000 and α-tocopherol.

TABLE 1a Amounts of TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer formed during reaction TPGS Monomer Dimer Total composition (%) (%) (% monomer + % dimer) 1 43.90 53.90 97.80 2 42.80 48.80 91.60 3 40.95 53.15 94.10 4 43.52 49.80 93.32 5 55.88 29.27 85.15 6 52.92 33.70 86.62 7 42.76 51.10 93.86 8 40.39 54.90 95.29 9 57.70 40.40 98.10 10 39.35 35.56 74.91 11 60.00 38.10 98.10

A series of extractions were performed on the crude TPGS composition. The crude TPGS composition (˜180 kg) was dissolved in 360 L of methanol and then 540 L of cyclohexane was added. The solution was stirred and then allowed to separate into layers. The cyclohexane layer was removed and an additional 540 L of cyclohexane was added to the remaining methanol layer. The solution was stirred and then allowed to separate into layers. The cyclohexane layer was again removed and an additional 540 L of cyclohexane was added to the remaining methanol layer. The solution was again stirred and allowed to separate into layers. The cyclohexane layer was removed, and the remaining methanol layer was further diluted with an additional 270 L of methanol. Activated carbon (18 kg) was added and the solution was heated to 55-60° C. and maintained at this temperature for 1 hour. The solution was then cooled to room temperature, filtered through 30 kg of Celite® Hyflo® filter aid, and washed with 100 L of methanol. The methanol solution was passed through a micron filter, then concentrated via vacuum distillation below 60° C. to obtain ˜98-102 kg of a TPGS composition. All traces of solvent were then removed by purging with nitrogen at 55° C. for two hours to obtain ˜98-102 kg of a purified TPGS composition that contained TPGS monomer and TPGS dimer.

One typical batch of TPGS prepared to contain a high dimer concentration, and used in the Examples below, had the following components:

TPGS monomer: 48% TPGS dimer: 51%

Vitamin E: 0.42%

Vitamin E succinate: 0.46%.

Other typical batches contained:

TPGS monomer: 46.09%-43.15% w/w TPGS dimer: 39.07%-50.28% w/w Other: up to about 3%-3.2% w/w

For example, the batches used in Example 11, below, contained:

TPGS monomer: 46.55%-48.72% w/w TPGS dimer: 46.88%-47.33% w/w Other: up to about 3.95%-6.55% w/w

B. Evaluation of the Clarity of the TPGS-Containing Compositions by a Turbidity Analysis

The clarity of the TPGS compositions prepared above was evaluated by a turbidity analysis. TPGS compositions 1-11 were formulated as 1 g concentrates and each were dissolved in 8 oz. of water. The resulting aqueous liquid dilution compositions then were evaluated for clarity by measuring turbidity using a nephelometer. Results of the evaluation are set forth in Table 1b below.

Each of the eleven TPGS compositions listed in Table 1a above was diluted in water (purified according to the provided methods) using the following steps.

Eight ounces of water was heated in a Pyrex® beaker by placing the beaker on a Thermolyne hot plate (Model #846925) until the water reached 49.8° C. The TPGS composition concentrate was then added to the heated water and stirred with a stir rod until dispersed. The resulting aqueous TPGS composition was cooled to room temperature (about 25° C.). The cooled aqueous TPGS composition was added to an amber-glass screw-top vial (Alcon) for evaluation.

The vials containing the aqueous TPGS compositions were sent to ACZ Laboratories, Inc. (Steamboat Springs, Colo.) for turbidity analysis using a nephelometer. Results are listed in the form of Nephelometric Turbidity Units (NTU) and are indicated in Table 1b below.

TABLE 1b Turbidity (NTU) of aqueous TPGS compositions Total TPGS Monomer Dimer (% monomer + Turbidity composition (%) (%) % dimer) (NTU) 1 43.90 53.90 97.80 8 2 42.80 48.80 91.60 8.2 3 40.95 53.15 94.10 10 4 43.52 49.80 93.32 10 5 55.88 29.27 85.15 14 6 52.92 33.70 86.62 14 7 42.76 51.10 93.86 18.5 8 40.39 54.90 95.29 39.4 9 57.70 40.40 98.10 71 10 39.35 35.56 74.91 80 11 60.00 38.10 98.10 80

Example 2 Preparation of Pre-Emulsion Concentrates Containing TPGS and Non-Polar Ingredients

Pre-emulsion concentrates were prepared according to the method described below with the ingredients detailed in Tables 2-18. The pre-emulsion concentrates contained between 31.5% and 97.43% by weight (of the concentrate) of one or more non-polar ingredients and TPGS (α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate) or benzyl alcohol, or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. The TPGS was prepared as described in Example 1, above.

The pre-emulsion concentrates contained as much as about 97% non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds. The remainder was TPGS or benzyl alcohol, or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. Non-polar ingredients included: a fish oil that contains 50% of the non-polar compounds DHA/EPA (sold as VivoMega 3322 TG by GC Rieber Oils, Kristiansund, Norway); an algal oil that contains 40% of the non-polar compound DHA (sold by GC Rieber Oils, Kristiansund, Norway); an algal oil that contains 35% of the non-polar compound DHA and contains 350 mg DHA/g oil (life's DHA™ S35-O300, sold by DSM Nutritional Products Inc., Kaiseraugst, Switzerland); a conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) that contains 79.6% CLA (Clarinol® G-80, sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); a medium chain triglyceride (MCT) oil that contains 98% MCT (sold by Abitec, Janesville, Wis. and Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); a flaxseed oil that contains 50% C:18-3 alpha-linolenic acid (ALA) (sold by San Mark Ltd., Greensboro, N.C.); resveratrol (sold by Maxsun Industries Inc., Walnut, Calif.); vinpocetine (sold by Cyvex Nutrition, Irvine, Calif.); sesamin (sold by KEB Nutraceutical USA, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.); a turmeric/curcumin composition that contains 95% curcumin (sold by Siddharth International, Mumbai, India); a phosphatidylserine (PS) composition that contains 40% phosphatidylserine and lesser amounts of phosphatidylinositol and phosphatidylethanolamine (sold by Doosan Corporation and distributed by Perrimondo LLC); vitamin E acetate that contains 1360 IU tocopheryl/g vitamin E oil (sold by DSM Nutritional Products Inc., Kaiseraugst, Switzerland); alpha-lipoic acid (sold by Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.); quercetin (sold by Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.); pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ; Nascent Health Sciences, Allentown, N.J.); and mixtures thereof. Ingredients marked with a “*” were added in overage to ensure the stated amount of non-polar ingredient was in the final product.

Each of the pre-emulsion concentrates set forth in Tables 2-18, below, were prepared using a bench-top process. Larger amounts of the pre-emulsion concentrates can be made by scaling up the bench-top process or using a scaled-up manufacturing process, for example, to make larger batch sizes of the pre-emulsion concentrates. Accordingly, each of the pre-emulsion concentrates in Tables 2-18 also can be made with the provided methods as described and a scaled-up process. Further details for each pre-emulsion concentrate are provided in each individual Table.

The bench-top process for making the pre-emulsion concentrates was performed using the following general steps. For each of the pre-emulsion concentrates set forth in Tables 2-18, below, the indicated amount of each ingredient was weighed using a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA), Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S) or an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000). Selection of scale depended on the weight of each ingredient being weighed.

The initial ingredients (all ingredients except the non-polar ingredients) were added in the indicated amounts (g/batch) to a vessel (a Pyrex® beaker), and mixed with a standard mixer (IKA® model No. RE-16 51, an overhead mixer (laboratory stirrer) compatible with the bench-top process). While mixing, the ingredients were heated by a Thermolyne hot plate (Model # SP46615) to reach a temperature of between 60° C. and 70° C.

After the initial ingredients dissolved, e.g., formed a homogeneous mixture, and reached the desired temperature, e.g., 60° C., the non-polar ingredients were added. The ingredients then were homogenized by placing a reversible homogenizer (Arde Barinco, Inc.; Model CJ-4E) in the vessel (beaker) and turning on at 850-1200 RPM. Mixing with the homogenizer was continued while maintaining the temperature using the hot plate. The baffle plate on the homogenizer was adjusted to achieve and maintain an emulsion, for example, by moving the baffle plate further into and/or out of the ingredient mixture. Homogenization continued at between 60° C. and 70° C. until the mixture became homogeneous. For the preparation of some pre-emulsion concentrates, an additional solvent, such as ethanol, tetrahydrofuran or hexanes, was added to aid in dissolving the non-polar ingredients. The additional solvent was then evaporated before further use of the solid phase composition.

Unless otherwise indicated, when the ingredients include a surfactant, a preservative and one or more non-polar ingredients, these ingredients were added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) preservative; 3) non-polar ingredient. When the ingredients include a surfactant, a preservative, a solvent and one or more non-polar ingredients, these ingredients were added sequentially, in the following order: 1) surfactant; 2) preservative; 3) solvent; 4) non-polar ingredient. The ingredients were heated with the hot plate until the temperature reached between 60° C. and 70° C. A temperature probe (Model # DPP400W, Cooper-Atkins) was used to measure the temperature of the mixing ingredients.

The composition then was filtered, through a 100 micron end-product filter, and packaged (transferred) by filling into one or more storage containers, for example, plastic bottles or 5 gallon pails, where it was cooled to room temperature (about 25° C.). Alternatively, the composition was packaged into a bag-in-a-box-type storage container. Depending on the particular ingredients, the resulting concentrates either were a solid to semi-solid composition at room-temperature (having a waxy consistency) or remained as a liquid.

TABLE 2 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Fish oil (50% DHA/EPA blend)* 39.50 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 60.50 Total 100.00

TABLE 3 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing algal oil (40% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Algal oil (40% DHA) 84.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 16.00 Total 100.00

TABLE 4 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Algal oil (35% DHA) 97.35 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 2.65 Total 100.00

TABLE 5 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition CLA oil (79.6% CLA) 97.43 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 2.57 Total 100.00

TABLE 6 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition MCT oil (98% MCT) 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 2.58 Total 100.00

TABLE 7 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing resveratrol and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Resveratrol 35.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 65.00 Total 100.00

TABLE 8 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing vinpocetine and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Vinpocetine 35.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 65.00 Total 100.00

TABLE 9 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing sesamin and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Sesamin 35.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 65.00 Total 100

TABLE 10 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) 31.50 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 68.50 Total 100.00

TABLE 11 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) 37.10 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 62.90 Total 100.00

TABLE 12 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing phosphatidylserine (40% Phosphatidylserine) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Phosphatidylserine (40% PS) 68.40 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 31.60 Total 100.00

TABLE 13 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidylserine), MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Phosphatidylserine (40% PS) 68.50 (non-polar ingredient) MCT oil (98% MCT) 17.80 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 13.70 Total 100.00

TABLE 14 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing vitamin E acetate, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Vitamin E acetate (1360 IU tocopheryl/g oil) 95.43 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 4.07 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) Total 100.00

TABLE 15 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing alpha- lipoic acid, TPGS and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Alpha-lipoic acid 70.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 20.00 Benzyl alcohol 10.00 (preservative) Total 100.00

TABLE 16 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing quercetin, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Quercetin 35.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 64.50 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) Total 100.00

TABLE 17 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing PQQ, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition PQQ 35.00 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 64.50 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) Total 100.00

TABLE 18 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), flaxseed oil (50% ALA), TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Flaxseed oil (50% ALA) 79.02 (non-polar ingredient) Fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) 0.40 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 20.08 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) Total 100.00

Example 3 Preparation of Pre-Spray Emulsions Containing TPGS and Non-Polar Ingredients

The pre-emulsion concentrates of Tables 2-18 were used to prepare pre-spray emulsions. The pre-spray emulsions were prepared by combining a pre-emulsion concentrate with the ingredients detailed in Tables 19-39, below, according to the general procedure described below. The resulting pre-spray emulsions contained between 5.25% and 19.49% by weight non-polar ingredient(s) that is or contains non-polar compounds, as shown in Table 40, below.

The ingredients in the pre-spray emulsions included: a pre-emulsion concentrate prepared as described above in Example 2 (see Tables 2-18); an emulsion stabilizer that is blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate, sold under the product name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.); a binder, maltodextrin (Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.); a sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE) sold under the trade name DK Ester® (produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan) in place of some or all of the maltodextrin; citric acid, a pH adjuster; stabilizers, including vitamin C (Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.), potassium bicarbonate (Armand Products, Princeton, N.J.), a green tea extract that contains 40% EGCG (epigallocatechin gallate) (Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients Corp., Guilin, China); one or more co-emulsifiers such as fish collagen (Norland Products Inc., Cranbury Township, N.J.), a whey protein isolate (Marquez Brothers International, Hanford, Calif.), and saponin from quillaja bark (sold by Desert King and Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described below. Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described below, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Tables 19-39) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Production of the Water Phase

The water phase was prepared in a 1500 mL Pyrex beaker. The appropriate amount of city water was purified by passing the water through the following purifiers, sequentially, in the following order: a carbon filter, an ion exchange purifier, a reverse osmosis purifier and a 100 micron end-point filter. The water (amount indicated in Tables 19-39, below) finally was passed through a UV sterilizer before it was measured and added to the beaker. The switch controlling the pump and UV sterilizer was then turned off.

The beaker containing the water was placed onto a Thermolyne hot plate (Model No. SP46615). An Arde Barinco reversible homogenizer (Model No. CJ-4E; Arde Barinco, Inc., Norwood, N.J.) was immersed in the water and turned on, using the “forward” setting, at a speed of 30 rpm. The water phase then was heated to between 60° C. and 70° C. using the Thermolyne hot plate while slowly mixing at 30 rpm. The Arde Barinco mixer then was raised and switched to the “reverse” setting to create a vortex.

The indicated amount of the “water phase” ingredients were added to the water phase beaker at 60-70° C. When a stabilizer was present, such as KHCO₃, the ingredients were added in the following order: 1) emulsion stabilizer; 2) co-emulsifier; 3) co-surfactant(s); and 4) stabilizer(s). Mixing was continued at 60-70° C. until the emulsion stabilizer was mostly dispersed in the water phase and until the water phase was ready to be combined with the solid phase. Temperatures were measured with a pH and temperature meter (Hanna Instruments, Model No. HI 8314).

Combining the Water and Oil Phases

Once the water phase had been prepared and was at 60-70° C., the Arde Barinco homogenizer was turned on the “forward” setting at 30 rpm in the water phase beaker and the oil phase (i.e., pre-emulsion concentrate) was transferred to the water phase beaker. Mixing with the homogenizer at 30 rpm continued until the phases had combined.

The ingredients were mixed and cooled in a water bath until the mixture reached 50° C. The indicated amount of pH adjuster was then added and the mixture was continuously mixed at 30 rpm using the Arde Barinco mixer on “forward” and further cooled to 30° C. Additional water was added to account for any evaporation that had occurred during the process. Temperatures and pH were measured with a temperature and pH meter (Hanna Instruments, Model No. HI 8314). The pH of each mixture was measured to confirm that it was around 2.76.

Tables 19-39, below, indicate the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 19 Pre-spray emulsion containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 54.507268 Water 10.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 2 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 20 Pre-spray emulsion containing algal oil (40% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 46.172823 Water 9.24 (binder/carrier) SFAE 33.0044 Water 6.60 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 100.01 Oil 20.00 containing algal oil (40% DHA) and TPGS (Table 3 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 21 Pre-spray emulsion containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 16.66889 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 44.239232 Water 8.85 (stabilizer) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 100.01 Oil 20.00 containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 4 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 22 Pre-spray emulsion containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 170.62 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 10.00133 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Fish collagen 26.543539 Water 8.85 (binder) SFAE 24.8033 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.20 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 6.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.82 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 60.01 Oil 20.00 containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 5 above) Totals 300.00 100.00

TABLE 23 Pre-spray emulsion containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 86.23 Water 57.48 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 5.00 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Whey protein 13.27 Water 8.85 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 12.40 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.10 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 3.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 30.00 Oil 20.00 containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 5 above) Totals 150.00 100.00

TABLE 24 Pre-spray emulsion containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 568.74 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 33.33778 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 88.478464 Water 8.85 (stabilizer) SFAE 82.6777 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.67 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 20.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 6.07 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 200.03 Oil 20.00 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Totals 1000.00 100.00

TABLE 25 Pre-spray emulsion containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 170.62 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 10.00133 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Fish collagen 26.543539 Water 8.85 (binder) SFAE 24.8033 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.20 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 6.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.82 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 60.01 Oil 20.00 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Totals 300.00 100.00

TABLE 26 Pre-spray emulsion containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 170.62 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 10.00133 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Whey protein 26.543539 Water 8.85 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 24.8033 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.20 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 6.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.82 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 60.01 Oil 20.00 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Totals 300.00 100.00

TABLE 27 Pre-spray emulsion containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 1437.166 Water 57.48 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 83.333 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Whey protein 221.166 Water 8.85 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 206.666 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 1.666 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 50.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 500.00 Oil 20.00 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Totals 2500.00 100.00

TABLE 28 Pre-spray emulsion containing resveratrol and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing resveratrol and TPGS (Table 7 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 29 Pre-spray emulsion containing vinpocetine and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing vinpocetine and TPGS (Table 8 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 30 Pre-spray emulsion containing sesamin and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing sesamin and TPGS (Table 9 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 31 Pre-spray emulsion containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS (Table 10 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 32 Pre-spray emulsion containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS (Table 11 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 33 Pre-spray emulsion containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidyl serine) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 64.508601 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidylserine) and TPGS (Table 12 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

TABLE 34 Pre-spray emulsion containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidylserine), MCT oil (98% MCT), and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 170.62 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 13.84 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 38.71 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 24.80 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.20 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.82 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 50.01 Oil 16.67 containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidylserine), MCT oil (98% MCT), and TPGS (Table 13 above) Totals 300.00 100.00

TABLE 35 Pre-spray emulsion containing vitamin E acetate, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 85.31 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) Maltodextrin 23.273103 Water 15.51 (binder/carrier) SFAE 12.4017 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.10 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 3.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 0.91 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 25.00 Oil 16.67 containing vitamin E acetate, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 14 above) Totals 150.00 100.00

TABLE 36 Pre-spray emulsion containing alpha- lipoic acid, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.33 Water 56.86 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06667 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 87.900 Water 17.58 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3333 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 50.00 Oil 10.00 containing alpha-lipoic acid, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 15 above) Totals 500.00 100.000

TABLE 37 Pre-spray emulsion containing quercetin, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 170.60 Water 56.86 (polar solvent) Citric acid 0.4000 Water 0.13 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 54.20 Water 18.07 (binder/carrier) SFAE 24.80 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate 50.00 Oil 16.67 containing quercetin, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 16 above) Totals 300.00 100.00

TABLE 38 Pre-spray emulsion containing PQQ, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 85.3 Water 56.86 (polar solvent) Citric acid 0.20 Water 0.13 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 27.1 Water 18.07 (binder/carrier) SFAE 12.400 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing PQQ, TPGS, 25.0 Oil 16.67 and benzyl alcohol (Table 17 above) Totals 150.00 100.00

TABLE 39 Pre-spray emulsion containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), flaxseed oil (50% ALA), TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 54.507268 Water 10.90 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.67 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), flaxseed oil (50% ALA), TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 18 above) Totals 500.00 100.00

The pre-spray emulsions of Tables 18-36, above, contained between 5.25% and 19.49% by weight non-polar ingredient(s), as shown in Table 37, below.

TABLE 40 Amount of non-polar ingredient(s) in pre-spray emulsions wt % of pre-emulsion wt % of non-polar concentrate in ingredient in Non-polar ingredient pre-spray emulsion pre-spray emulsion Fish oil 16.67 6.58 (Table 19 above) Algal oil 20.00 16.80 (Table 20 above) Algal oil 20.00 19.47 (Table 21 above) CLA oil 20.00 19.49 (Table 22 above) CLA oil 20.00 19.49 (Table 23 above) MCT oil 20.00 19.48 (Table 24 above) MCT oil 20.00 19.48 (Table 25 above) MCT oil 20.00 19.48 (Table 26 above) MCT oil 20.00 19.48 (Table 27 above) Resveratrol 16.67 5.83 (Table 28 above) Vinpocetine 16.67 5.83 (Table 29 above) Sesamin 16.67 5.83 (Table 30 above) Turmeric/curcumin 16.67 5.25 (Table 31 above) Turmeric/curcumin 16.67 6.18 (Table 32 above) Phosphatidylserine 16.67 11.40 (Table 33 above) Phosphatidylserine/ 16.67 14.39 MCT oil (Table 34 above) Vitamin E acetate 16.67 15.91 (Table 35 above) Alpha-lipoic acid 10.00 7.00 (Table 36 above) Quercetin 16.67 5.83 (Table 37 above) PQQ 16.67 5.83 (Table 38 above) Fish oil/flaxseed oil 16.67 13.24 (Table 39 above)

Example 4 Preparation of Dry Powders Containing TPGS and Non-Polar Ingredients

The pre-spray emulsions described above in Example 3 and indicated in Tables 19-39 were then spray dried into dry powders. The final dry powders contained between 12.18% and 45.83% non-polar ingredient, as summarized in Table 62 below, and were prepared according to the following procedure. Tables 41-61 below indicate the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final dry powder after spray drying the pre-spray emulsions.

The dry powders were prepared using a standard spray dryer equipped with a rotary atomizer nozzle or a standard spray nozzle. Alternatively, a fluid bed dryer can be used. A pre-spray emulsion was added to a tank and mixed with a mixer when necessary to keep the liquid homogenous during the spray drying process. The liquid was then pumped to the top of the spray dryer (GEA Niro, Denmark) and sprayed through a nozzle atomizer into the spray dryer, typically kept at a temperature of 180° C. When the spray dryer was equipped with a fluid bed, the liquid was sprayed through a rotary atomizer at lower temperatures into the spray dryer. Water then evaporated and pooled at the top of the dryer, while the powder collected at the floor bottom of the dryer, where it was recovered. After recovering the powder, some powders were rewet or instantized by redissolving the dry power in water at a 1:3 or 1:1 powder to water ratio (e.g., 30-50 g of powder was dissolved in 100 g of water) and spray drying a second time. The powders then were sifted/filtered using a 60-80 micron mesh screen.

Some pre-spray emulsions required the addition of extra water (i.e., evaporation water) as a processing aid to make the emulsion thinner and able to pass through the dryer pump more easily. The extra water was added to the pre-spray emulsion at 35° C. and was evaporated during the spray dry process, along with the rest of the water in the pre-spray emulsion.

TABLE 41 Dry powder containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.62 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 25.85 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.02 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.60 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.40 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.36 fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 2 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 42 Dry powder containing algal oil (40% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 21.41 (binder/carrier) SFAE 15.31 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 algal oil (40% DHA) and TPGS (Table 3 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 43 Dry powder containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 20.52 (stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 4 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 44 Dry powder containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Fish collagen 20.52 (binder) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 5 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 45 Dry powder containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.85 (stabilizer) Whey protein 20.81 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 19.44 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.16 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.70 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 47.04 CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 5 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 46 Dry powder containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 20.52 (stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 47 Dry powder containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Fish collagen 20.52 (stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 48 Dry powder containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Whey protein 20.52 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 46.38 MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 49 Dry powder containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.84 (stabilizer) Whey protein 20.81 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 19.45 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.16 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.70 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 47.04 MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 6 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 50 Dry powder containing resveratrol and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 resveratrol and TPGS (Table 7 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 51 Dry powder containing vinpocetine and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 vinpocetine and TPGS (Table 8 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 52 Dry powder containing sesamin and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 sesamin and TPGS (Table 9 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 53 Dry powder containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS (Table 10 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 54 Dry powder containing turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 turmeric/curcumin (95% curcumin) and TPGS (Table 11 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 55 Dry powder containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidyl serine) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 phosphatidylserine (40% PS) and TPGS (Table 12 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 56 Dry powder containing phosphatidylserine (40% phosphatidylserine), MCT oil (98% MCT), and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing phosphatidylserine 38.65 (40% PS), MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 13 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 57 Dry powder containing vitamin E acetate, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Maltodextrin 35.98 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.65 vitamin E acetate, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 14 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 58 Dry powder containing alpha-lipoic acid, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 40.76 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 23.18 alpha-lipoic acid, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 15 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 59 Dry powder containing quercetin, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Citric acid 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 41.89 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.64 quercetin, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 16 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 60 Dry powder containing PQQ, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Citric acid 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 41.89 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 38.64 PQQ, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 17 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 61 Dry powder containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), flaxseed oil (50% ALA), TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.62 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 25.85 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.02 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.60 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.40 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (50% 38.36 DHA/EPA), flaxseed oil (50% ALA), TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 18 above) Total 100.00

The dry powders depicted above in Tables 41-61 that contained the pre-emulsion concentrates described in Example 2 contained between 12.18% and 45.83% by weight non-polar ingredient(s), as shown in Table 62, below.

TABLE 62 Amount of non-polar ingredient(s) in dry powders wt % of pre-emulsion wt % of non-polar concentrate in dry ingredient in dry Non-polar ingredient powder powder Fish oil 38.36 15.15 (Table 41 above) Algal oil 46.38 38.96 (Table 42 above) Algal oil 46.38 45.15 (Table 43 above) CLA oil 46.38 45.19 (Table 44 above) CLA oil 47.04 45.83 (Table 45 above) MCT oil 46.38 45.18 (Table 46 above) MCT oil 46.38 45.18 (Table 47 above) MCT oil 46.38 45.18 (Table 48 above) MCT oil 47.04 45.83 (Table 49 above) Resveratrol 38.65 13.53 (Table 50 above) Vinpocetine 38.65 13.53 (Table 51 above) Sesamin 38.65 13.53 (Table 52 above) Turmeric/curcumin 38.65 12.18 (Table 53 above) Turmeric/curcumin 38.65 14.34 (Table 54 above) Phosphatidylserine 38.65 26.44 (Table 55 above) Phosphatidylserine/MCT 38.65 33.35 oil (Table 56 above) Vitamin E acetate 38.65 36.88 (Table 57 above) Alpha-lipoic acid 23.18 16.23 (Table 58 above) Quercetin 38.64 13.52 (Table 59 above) PQQ 38.64 13.52 (Table 60 above) Fish oil/flaxseed oil 38.36 30.46 (Table 61 above)

Example 5 Preparation of Another Dry Powder Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

A. Preparation of the Pre-Emulsion Concentrate

A pre-emulsion concentrate was prepared according to the method described above in Example 2 using the ingredients detailed in Table 63, below. The pre-emulsion concentrate contained benzyl alcohol, a natural preservative, and 99.5% by weight (of the concentrate) of fish oil, a non-polar ingredient which contains 50% of the non-polar compound DHA/EPA (sold as VivoMega 3322 TG by GC Rieber Oils, Kristiansund, Norway).

The pre-emulsion concentrate set forth in Table 63, below, was made using a bench-top process according to the provided methods (see Example 2). The pre-emulsion concentrate can alternatively be made by scaling up the bench-top process, using a scaled-up manufacturing process of the provided methods, for example, to make larger batch sizes of the pre-emulsion concentrate.

TABLE 63 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition Benzyl alcohol 0.5 Fish oil (50% DHA/EPA blend)* 99.5 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00

B. Preparation of the Pre-Spray Emulsion

The pre-emulsion concentrate described above and shown in Table 63 was used in the preparation of a pre-spray emulsion. The pre-spray emulsion was prepared by combining the pre-emulsion concentrate that contained 99.5% of the non-polar ingredient fish oil (50% DHA/EPA blend), described in Table 63, above, with the ingredients detailed in Table 64, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. The resulting pre-spray emulsion thus contained 16.669% by weight pre-emulsion concentrate containing 99.5% of the non-polar ingredient fish oil (i.e., the resulting pre-spray emulsion contained a total of 16.59% by weight non-polar ingredient).

The ingredients in the pre-spray emulsion included the pre-emulsion concentrate containing the non-polar ingredient fish oil, prepared as described above (see Table 63); a surfactant, a sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE; sold under the trade name DK Ester®, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan); an emulsion stabilizer that was a blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate, sold under the product name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.); the binder maltodextrin (sold by Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.); stabilizers, including vitamin C (sold by Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.) and potassium bicarbonate; a co-emulsifier that was saponin from quillaja bark (sold by Desert King, San Diego, Calif., and Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described above (see Example 3). Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described above, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Table 64) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Table 64, below, indicates the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 64 Pre-spray emulsion containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), benzyl alcohol, and SFAE wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.37 Water 56.874 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 23.06974 Water 4.614 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 54.507268 Water 10.901 (binder/carrier) SFAE 41.3388 Water 8.268 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.33 Water 0.067 emulsifier (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.000 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.607 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.34 Oil 16.669 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and benzyl alcohol (Table 63 above) Totals 500.00 100.000

C. Preparation of the Dry Powder

The pre-spray emulsion described above and indicated in Table 64 was then spray dried into a dry powder according to the procedure detailed in Example 4. The addition of extra water (i.e., evaporation water) to the pre-spray emulsion was required as a processing aid to make the emulsion thinner and able to pass through the dryer pump more easily. The extra water was added to the pre-spray emulsion at 35° C. and was evaporated during the spray dry process, along with the rest of the water in the pre-spray emulsion.

The final dry powder contained 38.36% of the pre-emulsion concentrate containing 99.5% fish oil (i.e., 38.17% non-polar ingredient). Table 65, below, indicates the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final dry powder after spray drying the pre-spray emulsion.

TABLE 65 Dry powder containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), benzyl alcohol, and SFAE wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.62 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 25.85 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.02 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.60 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.40 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 38.36 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and benzyl alcohol (Table 63 above) Total 100.00 The final dry powder thus contained 38.17% of the non-polar ingredient fish oil.

Example 6 Comparison Example of Preparation of Dry Powders Containing Non-Polar Ingredients and No Sucrose Fatty Acid Ester

This example is provided to show that addition of a sucrose (or other sugar) fatty acid ester in place of maltodextrin or other such binder in a pre-spray emulsion permits production of powders with a higher concentration of non-polar ingredients. In order to produce powders for spray drying, it is necessary to include a threshold amount of solids for forming the powder. To achieve this, the TPGS is reduced in amount, and SFAE is added in its place. In the absence of the added SFAE, the emulsions, and particularly the emulsions with higher amounts of non-polar ingredient, when dried, do not form dry free-flowing powders, but are sludge-like and oily and have too high a moisture content.

A series of pre-emulsion concentrates containing increasing concentrations of non-polar ingredient, as set forth in Tables 66-69, were prepared and used to prepare pre-spray emulsions that contained a binder (maltodextrin), but no SFAE. Preparation of dry powders from each pre-spray emulsion was attempted. If successful, the resulting dry powders would have contained 5.5%, 11.62%, 27.5% and 45.18% non-polar ingredient. As shown below, it was possible to produce dry powders that contained less than about 15% (5.5%, 11.62%) non-polar ingredient, but it was not possible to produce dry powders from the pre-spray emulsions containing the pre-emulsion concentrates with the highest amount of non-polar ingredients, and powders with the lower amounts (between about 15%-30%) exhibited undesirable properties. A dry powder could not be produced from the pre-spray emulsion with the highest concentration of non-polar ingredient (45.18%) and no SFAE. For all concentrations of non-polar ingredients, the presence of SFAE in place of a binder, such as maltodextrin, in the pre-spray emulsions improved the properties of the resulting powders, and permitted preparation of powders with very high concentrations (above 30%, 35%, or 40%) of non-polar ingredients.

A. Preparation of the Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Pre-emulsion concentrates were prepared according to the bench-top process described in Example 2, above, with the ingredients detailed in Tables 66-69, below. The pre-emulsion concentrates contained between 16.84% and 97.42% by weight (of the concentrate) of a non-polar ingredient, with the remainder of the concentrate containing TPGS or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. The non-polar compounds included a conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) that contains 70% CLA (Clarinol® CLA, sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); a coenzyme Q10 (coQ10) compound that contains greater than 98% ubidicarenone (ubiquinone), sold under the name Kaneka Q10™ (USP Ubidicarenone; Kaneka Nutrients, L.P., Pasadena, Tex.); and an algal oil that contains 35% of the non-polar compound DHA and contains 350 mg DHA/g oil (life's DHA™ S35-O300, sold by DSM Nutritional Products Inc., Kaiseraugst, Switzerland).

TABLE 66 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition TPGS 82.66 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) CoQ10 16.84 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00

TABLE 67 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol wt % of Ingredient composition TPGS 65.82 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 (preservative) CoQ10 33.68 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00

TABLE 68 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing CLA oil (70% CLA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition TPGS 16.58 CLA oil (70% CLA) 83.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00

TABLE 69 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition TPGS 2.58 Algal oil (35% DHA) 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00

B. Preparation of the Pre-Spray Emulsions

Pre-spray emulsions were prepared from the pre-emulsion concentrates of Tables 66-69, above, by combining the pre-emulsion concentrate with the ingredients detailed in Tables 70-73, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. The pre-spray emulsions contained between about 14.21% and 20.003% of a pre-emulsion concentrate, resulting in pre-spray emulsions that contained between 2.39% and 19.48% non-polar ingredient. None of the pre-spray emulsions contained SFAE.

In addition to the pre-emulsion concentrates prepared as described above (see Tables 66-69), the pre-spray emulsions also contained: maltodextrin (sold by Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.); the emulsion stabilizer SALADIZER® (TIC Gums, Inc.; Belcamp, Md.); stabilizers, including vitamin C (Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.), potassium bicarbonate (Armand Products, Princeton, N.J.), and a green tea extract that contains 40% EGCG (epigallocatechin gallate) (Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients Corp., Guilin, China); a co-emulsifier, saponin from quillaja bark (sold by Desert King and Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); citric acid, a pH adjuster; and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described above.

Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described above in Example 2, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Tables 70-73) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Tables 70-73 set forth the ingredients included in each pre-spray emulsion, the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase to which each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 70 Pre-spray emulsion containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 23051.31282 Water 56.86 (polar solvent) Citric acid 54.05 Water 0.13 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 11578.4 Water 28.56 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 96.4750 Water 0.24 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 5761.5 Oil 14.21 containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 66 above) Totals 40541.67 100.000

TABLE 71 Pre-spray emulsion containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 23051.31282 Water 56.86 (polar solvent) Citric acid 54.05 Water 0.13 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 11578.4 Water 28.56 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 96.4750 Water 0.24 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 5761.5 Oil 14.21 containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 67 above) Totals 40541.67 100.000

TABLE 72 Pre-spray emulsion containing CLA oil (70% CLA) and TPGS and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.38 Water 56.876 (polar solvent) Citric acid 0.6668 Water 0.133 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 142.69 Water 28.538 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 1.18 Water 0.237 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 71.08 Oil 14.216 containing CLA oil (70% CLA) and TPGS (Table 68 above) Totals 500.00 100.000

TABLE 73 Pre-spray emulsion containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 284.3712 Water 56.874 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 16.6689 Water 3.334 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 44.2392 Water 8.848 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 41.3388 Water 8.268 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.333378 Water 0.067 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.001 Water 2.000 (stabilizer) Saponin 3.03373 Water 0.607 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 100.0134 Oil 20.003 containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 69 above) Totals 500.00 100.000

C. Attempted Preparation of Dry Powders

Preparation of a dry powder was attempted from each of the pre-spray emulsions that contained a binder (maltodextrin) in place of sucrose fatty acid esters (described above and in Tables 70-73) according to the procedure detailed in Example 4, above. The final compositions contained between 32.94% and 46.38% of a pre-emulsion concentrate, resulting in final compositions that contained between 5.5% and 45.18% non-polar ingredient. A dry powder was not formed from the composition that contained the highest amount of non-polar ingredient (45.18%) and no SFAE (see Table 77). Dry powders were formed from the compositions containing lower amounts of non-polar ingredient (see Tables 74-76).

Tables 74-77, below, indicate the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the composition after attempting to spray dry the pre-spray emulsion.

TABLE 74 Dry powder containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient composition Citric acid 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 66.20 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.55 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 32.94 coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 66 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 75 Dry powder containing coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient composition Citric acid 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 64.66 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.55 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 34.49 coQ10, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 67 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 76 Dry powder containing CLA oil (70% CLA) and TPGS and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient composition Citric acid 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 66.18 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.55 (emulsion stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate containing 32.96 CLA oil (70% CLA) and TPGS (Table 68 above) Total 100.00

TABLE 77 Attempted dry powder containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS and maltodextrin in place of SFAE wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 20.52 (stabilizer) Maltodextrin 19.17 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 46.38 containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 69 above) Total 100.00

Example 7 Preparation and Comparison of Dry Powders Containing Non-Polar Ingredients

and TPGS with and without Sucrose Fatty Acid Esters Two dry powders were prepared from pre-spray emulsions that each contained a pre-emulsion concentrate containing the non-polar ingredient fish oil (50% DHA/EPA blend), TPGS and benzyl alcohol. One powder contained the binder maltodextrin, while the other contained maltodextrin and SFAE in place of some of the maltodextrin.

Table 78, below, lists the ingredients used in each pre-emulsion concentrate, prepared according to the general procedure described in Example 2, above. The pre-emulsion concentrates contained either 40.025% (Composition 12A) or 79.42% (Composition 13A) of the non-polar ingredient fish oil that contains 50% of the non-polar compounds DHA/EPA (sold as VivoMega 3322 TG by GC Rieber Oils, Kristiansund, Norway).

TABLE 78 Preparation of two pre-emulsion concentrates containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 12A Composition 13A TPGS 59.475 20.08 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 0.50 (preservative) Fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) 40.025 79.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00 100.00

Compositions 12A and 13A (Table 78) were used to prepare pre-spray emulsions 12B and 13B, respectively, with the ingredients detailed in Table 79, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. Composition 12B, which contained maltodextrin and no SFAE, contained 14.21% of the pre-emulsion concentrate 12A containing 40.025% fish oil (i.e., 5.69% non-polar ingredient). Composition 13B, which contained SFAE in place of some of the maltodextrin, contained 16.67% of the pre-emulsion concentrate 13A containing 79.42% fish oil (i.e., 13.24% non-polar ingredient).

TABLE 79 Pre-spray emulsions containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS, with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 12B Composition 13B Water 56.86 56.87 (polar solvent) Citric acid 0.13 — (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 28.80 10.90 (binder/carrier) KHCO₃ — 4.61 (stabilizer) SFAE — 8.27 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® — 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C — 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin — 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 14.21 16.67 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 78 above) Total 100.00 100.00

The pre-spray emulsions described above in Table 79 (Compositions 12B and 13B) were then spray dried into dry powders 12C and 13C, respectively, according to the general procedure described above in Example 4. Final dry powder 12C, which contained maltodextrin and no SFAE, contained 32.94% of the pre-emulsion concentrate 12A containing 40.025% fish oil (i.e., 13.18% non-polar ingredient). Composition 13C, which contained SFAE in place of some of the maltodextrin, contained 38.36% of the pre-emulsion concentrate 13A containing 79.42% fish oil (i.e., 30.47% non-polar ingredient). Table 80, below, indicates the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final dry powders after spray drying the pre-spray emulsions.

TABLE 80 Dry powders containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 12C Composition 13C Citric acid 0.31 — (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 66.75 25.85 (binder/carrier) KHCO₃ — 10.62 (stabilizer) SFAE — 19.02 (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® — 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C — 4.60 (stabilizer) Saponin — 1.40 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 32.94 38.36 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 78 above) Total 100.00 100.00

The composition containing SFAE in place of some of the maltodextrin (Composition 13C) formed a more free-flowing dry powder and was able to incorporate a higher amount of non-polar ingredient (i.e., 30.47% vs. 13.18%) than the composition that did not contain SFAE, but contained maltodextrin (Composition 12C).

Example 8 Preparation and Comparison of Dry Powders Containing Non-Polar Ingredients and TPGS with and without Sucrose Fatty Acid Esters

This example is provided to show that addition of a sucrose (or other sugar) fatty acid ester in place of maltodextrin or other such binder in a pre-spray emulsion permits production of powders with a higher concentration of non-polar ingredients. Pre-emulsion concentrates were prepared containing non-polar ingredients, TPGS, and sucrose fatty acid ester. Pre-spray emulsions that contained SFAE were prepared from the pre-emulsion concentrates. Comparative pre-emulsion concentrates were used to prepare comparative pre-spray emulsions in which the sucrose fatty acid ester was omitted. Preparation of dry powders from each was attempted. Dry powders could not be produced from the compositions containing maltodextrin in place of sucrose fatty acid ester (i.e., compositions not containing any sucrose fatty acid ester). Thus, the presence of SFAE in place of a binder, such as maltodextrin, in the pre-spray emulsions improves the properties of the resulting powders, and permits preparation of powders with high concentrations (above 30%, 35%, or 40%) of non-polar ingredients.

A. Preparation of the Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Pre-emulsion concentrates were prepared according to the bench-top process described above in Example 2, with the ingredients detailed in Tables 81-84 below. The pre-emulsion concentrates contained a non-polar ingredient, with the remainder of the concentrate containing TPGS or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. The non-polar ingredients included a conjugated linoleic acid (CLA) that contains 70% CLA (Clarinol® CLA, sold by Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); a medium chain triglyceride (MCT) oil that contains 98% MCT (sold by Abitec, Janesville, Wis. and Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ; Nascent Health Sciences, Allentown, N.J.); and an algal oil that contains 35% of the non-polar compound DHA and contains 350 mg DHA/g oil (life′sDHA™ S35-O300, sold by DSM Nutritional Products Inc., Kaiseraugst, Switzerland).

TABLE 81 Preparation of two pre-emulsion concentrates containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 14A Composition 15A TPGS 2.65 2.58 Algal oil (35% DHA) 97.35 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 82 Preparation of two pre-emulsion concentrates containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 16A Composition 17A TPGS 2.57 2.58 CLA oil (79.6% CLA) 97.43 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 83 Preparation of two pre-emulsion concentrates containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 18A Composition 19A TPGS 2.58 2.58 MCT oil (98% MCT) 97.42 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 84 Preparation of two pre-emulsion concentrates containing PQQ and TPGS wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 20A Composition 21A TPGS 64.50 69.50 Benzyl alcohol 0.50 0.50 (preservative) PQQ 35.00 30.00 (non-polar ingredient) Total 100.00 100.00

B. Preparation of the Pre-Spray Emulsions

Pre-spray emulsions were prepared from the pre-emulsion concentrates of Tables 81-84, above, by combining a pre-emulsion concentrate with the ingredients detailed in Tables 85-88, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. The pre-spray emulsions contained a pre-emulsion concentrate containing a non-polar ingredient and TPGS, and were formulated either with sucrose fatty acid ester, or with maltodextrin in place of sucrose fatty acid ester.

In addition to the pre-emulsion concentrates prepared as described above (see Tables 81-84), the pre-spray emulsions also contained: maltodextrin (sold by Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.); the emulsion stabilizer SALADIZER® (TIC Gums, Inc.; Belcamp, Md.); stabilizers, including vitamin C (Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.), potassium bicarbonate (Armand Products, Princeton, N.J.), and a green tea extract that contains 40% EGCG (epigallocatechin gallate) (Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients Corp., Guilin, China); a co-emulsifier, saponin from quillaja bark (sold by Desert King and Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); citric acid, a pH adjuster; and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described above.

Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described above in Example 3, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Tables 85-88) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Tables 85-88 set forth the ingredients included in each pre-spray emulsion, the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase to which each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 85 Pre-spray emulsions containing algal oil (35% DHA), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 14B Composition 15B Water 56.87 56.87 (polar solvent) Maltodextrin — 8.27 (binder/carrier) KHCO₃ 3.33 3.33 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 8.85 8.85 (stabilizer) SFAE 8.27 — (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.07 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 2.00 2.00 (stabilizer) Saponin 0.61 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 20.00 20.00 containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 81 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 86 Pre-spray emulsions containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 16B Composition 17B Water 57.48 57.48 (polar solvent) Maltodextrin — 8.27 (binder/carrier) KHCO₃ 3.33 3.33 (stabilizer) Whey protein 8.85 8.85 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 8.27 — (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.07 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 2.00 2.00 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 20.00 20.00 containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 82 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 87 Pre-spray emulsions containing MCT oil (98% MCT), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 18B Composition 19B Water 57.48 57.48 (polar solvent) Maltodextrin — 8.27 (binder/carrier) KHCO₃ 3.33 3.33 (stabilizer) Whey protein 8.85 8.85 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 8.27 — (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.07 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 2.00 2.00 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 20.00 20.00 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 83 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 88 Pre-spray emulsions containing PQQ, with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 20B Composition 21B Water 56.86 58.87 (polar solvent) Maltodextrin 18.07 26.33 (binder/carrier) Citric acid 0.13 0.13 (pH adjuster) SFAE 8.27 — (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate 16.67 16.67 containing PQQ, benzyl alcohol and TPGS (Table 84 above) Total 100.00 100.00

C. Preparation of Dry Powders

Formation of a dry powder from each of the pre-spray emulsions described above (Tables 85-88), was attempted, according to the procedure detailed in Example 4, above. Tables 89-92, below, indicate the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final composition after spray drying of the pre-spray emulsions was attempted. During preparation of the dry powders, the emulsions were continuously mixed in order to keep the mixture homogenous. Dry powders were obtained from all of the pre-spray emulsions containing sucrose fatty acid ester (Compositions 14B, 16B, 18B and 20B), but dry powders were not formed when maltodextrin was used as a binder in place of sucrose fatty acid ester (Compositions 15C, 17C, 19C and 21C). When maltodextrin was included in place of the SFAE, the end compositions were sludge-like materials, not dry powders. Hence, this Example demonstrates that addition of SFAE in place of some of the binder, such as maltodextrin, in pre-spray emulsions permits preparation of dry powders containing rather high amounts of non-polar ingredients.

TABLE 89 Dry powders containing algal oil (35% DHA), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 14C Composition 15C KHCO₃ 7.73 7.73 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 20.52 20.52 (stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 — (co-surfactant) Maltodextrin — 19.17 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.15 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 4.64 (stabilizer) Saponin 1.41 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 46.38 46.38 containing algal oil (35% DHA) and TPGS (Table 81 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 90 Dry powders containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 16C Composition 17C KHCO₃ 7.85 7.85 (stabilizer) Whey protein 20.81 20.81 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 19.44 — (co-surfactant) SALADIZER ® 0.16 0.16 (emulsion stabilizer) Maltodextrin — 19.44 (binder/carrier) Vitamin C 4.70 4.70 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 47.04 47.04 containing CLA oil (79.6% CLA) and TPGS (Table 82 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 91 Dry powders containing MCT oil (98% MCT), with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 18C Composition 19C KHCO₃ 7.84 7.84 (stabilizer) Whey protein 20.81 20.81 (co-emulsifier) SFAE 19.45 — (co-surfactant) Maltodextrin — 19.45 (binder/carrier) SALADIZER ® 0.16 0.16 (emulsion stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.70 4.70 (stabilizer) Pre-emulsion concentrate 47.04 47.04 containing MCT oil (98% MCT) and TPGS (Table 83 above) Total 100.00 100.00

TABLE 92 Dry powders containing PQQ, with and without SFAE wt % of wt % of Ingredient Composition 20C Composition 21C Citric acid 0.31 0.31 (pH adjuster) Maltodextrin 41.89 61.06 (binder/carrier) SFAE 19.17 — (co-surfactant) Pre-emulsion concentrate 38.64 38.64 containing PQQ, TPGS, and benzyl alcohol (Table 84 above) Total 100.00 100.00

Example 9 Preparation of Dry Powders Containing TPGS and Non-Polar Ingredients

A. Preparation of Pre-Emulsion Concentrates

Pre-emulsion concentrates were prepared according to the method described above in Example 2 using the ingredients detailed in Tables 93-97, below. The pre-emulsion concentrates contained between 37.1% and 97.42% by weight (of the concentrate) of one or more non-polar ingredients and either TPGS (α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate) or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. The TPGS was prepared as described in Example 1.

The pre-emulsion concentrates contained as much as about 97% non-polar ingredient. The remainder was TPGS or TPGS and benzyl alcohol. Non-polar ingredients in the concentrates included fish oils that contain 500 mg of the non-polar compounds DHA/EPA (sold as AlaskOmega® TG300200 M EU by Organic Technologies, Coshocton, Ohio); a carotenoid-containing compound, astaxanthin (an oil containing 10% astaxanthin sold as AstaPure® by Alga Technologies, Hevel Eilot, Israel); a dihydrocapsiate compound naturally found in CH-19 Sweet peppers (sold as CapsiAtra by Glanbia Nutritionals, Carlsbad, Calif.); vitamin K2 that contains 97% of the MK-7 form (sold as MenaQ7® by NattoPharma®, Metuchen, N.J.); a medium chain triglyceride (MCT) oil that contains 98% MCT (sold by Abitec, Janesville, Wis. and Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.); and combinations thereof.

The pre-emulsion concentrates set forth in Tables 93-97, below, were prepared using a bench-top process according to the provided methods (see Example 2). The pre-emulsion concentrates can alternatively be made by scaling up the bench-top process, using a scaled-up manufacturing process of the provided methods, for example, to make larger batch sizes of the pre-emulsion concentrates.

TABLE 93 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (60% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Fish oil (60% DHA/EPA blend) 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 2.58 Total 100.00

TABLE 94 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing fish oil (60% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Fish oil (60% DHA/EPA blend) 97.42 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 2.58 Total 100.00

TABLE 95 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing astaxanthin (10% astaxanthin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Astaxanthin (10%) 80 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 20 Total 100.00

TABLE 96 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing dihydrocapsiate and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Dihydrocapsiate 37.1 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 62.9 Total 100.00

TABLE 97 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing MCT oil (98% MCT), vitamin K2 (97% MK-7), benzyl alcohol and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition MCT oil (98% MCT) 31.99 (non-polar ingredient) Vitamin K2 (MK-7) 3.99 (non-polar ingredient) TPGS 58.0 Benzyl alcohol 6.02 (preservative) Total 100.00

B. Preparation of the Pre-Spray Emulsions

The pre-emulsion concentrates described above and shown in Tables 93-97 were used in the preparation of pre-spray emulsions. The pre-spray emulsions were prepared by combining the pre-emulsion concentrate with the ingredients detailed in Tables 98-102, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. The resulting pre-spray emulsions contained between 6.18% and 19.49%, by weight, non-polar ingredient.

The ingredients in the pre-spray emulsions included: the pre-emulsion concentrates containing non-polar ingredients, prepared as described above (see Tables 93-97); a surfactant, a sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE) (sold as DK Ester® by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd, Japan); a co-emulsifier, saponin from quillaja bark (Desert King International, San Diego, Calif.; Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); an emulsion stabilizer that was a blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate, sold under the product name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.); the binders maltodextrin (sold by Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.) and a highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) (sold as Cluster Dextrin® by Glico Nutrition, Japan); stabilizers, including vitamin C (sold by Pure Assay Ingredients, Walnut, Calif.), potassium bicarbonate, and green tea extracts that contained 40% or 50% epigallocatechin gallate (EGCG) (Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients, Corp., Guilin, China); sweeteners that included erythritol, stevia (sold as Stevia Leaf Powder Extract, Product code STE091, by MiniStar International Inc.), and sorbitol; flavor agents that included pink grapefruit, natural mandarin orange (346316), natural watermelon (600171), and natural sour yuzu (347528), all sold by Gold Coast Ingredients, Inc. (Commerce, Calif.), natural fresh orange (L-17283), natural blueberry (BL-238), natural watermelon (WM-122), and natural sour yuzu (L-20609), all sold by Mission Flavors and Fragrances, Inc. (Foothill Ranch, Calif.), natural orange tangerine (DABJ826) and natural blueberry pomegranate (DABJ831), sold by Wild Flavors (Erlanger, Ky.), and green tea flavor, sold by Kerry, Inc. (Beloit, Wis.); a pH adjuster, citric acid; and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described above (see Example 3). Ingredients marked with a * were added in the indicated amount of overage to ensure the final composition contained the stated amount of this ingredient.

Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described above, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Tables 98-102) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Tables 98-102, below, indicate the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 98 Pre-spray emulsion containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 268.42 Water 44.74 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 10.99 Water 1.83 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (50% EGCG) 27.50 Water 4.58 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 14.04 Water 2.34 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.22 Water 0.04 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 10.34 Water 1.72 (co-surfactant) Maltodextrin 49.50 Water 8.25 (binder/carrier) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 29.50 Water 4.92 (binder/carrier) Erythritol 10.99 Water 1.83 (sweetener) Stevia 15.46 Water 2.58 (sweetener) Pink grapefruit flavor 54.99 Water 9.17 (flavor) Natural mandarin orange 2.67 Water 0.45 (flavor) Natural fresh orange 3.37 Water 0.56 (flavor) Natural blueberry 3.57 Water 0.60 (flavor) Natural watermelon 1.20 Water 0.20 (flavor) Natural sour yuzu 6.96 Water 1.16 (flavor) Citric acid 7.77 Water 1.29 (pH adjuster) Pre-emulsion concentrate 82.49 Oil 13.75 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 93 above) Totals 600.00 100.00

TABLE 99 Pre-spray emulsion containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 279.37 Water 55.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 16.67 Water 3.33 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 44.23 Water 8.85 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 10.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 41.33 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) Saponin 3.03 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Green tea flavor 5.00 Water 1.00 (flavor) Pre-emulsion concentrate 100.01 Oil 20.00 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 94 above) Totals 100.00

TABLE 100 Pre-spray emulsion containing astaxanthin (10% astaxanthin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 6255.33 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 507.47 Water 4.61 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 220.00 Water 2.00 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 7.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 909.33 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) Saponin 26.77 Water 0.24 (co-emulsifier) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 1240.43 Water 11.28 (binder/carrier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 1833.33 Oil 16.67 containing astaxanthin and TPGS (Table 95 above) Totals 100.00

TABLE 101 Pre-spray emulsion containing dihydrocapsiate and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 85.31 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.10 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 12.40 Water 8.27 (co-surfactant) Saponin 0.91 Water 0.61 (co-emulsifier) Maltodextrin 19.35 Water 12.90 (binder/carrier) Citric acid 6.92 Water 4.61 (pH adjuster) Pre-emulsion concentrate 25.00 Oil 16.67 containing dihydrocapsiate and TPGS (Table 96 above) Totals 150.00 100.00

TABLE 102 Pre-spray emulsion containing MCT oil (98% MCT), vitamin K2 (97% MK-7), benzyl alcohol, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 49.47 Water 56.87 (polar solvent) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.06 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 3.89 Water 4.47 (co-surfactant) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 8.874 Water 10.20 (binder/carrier) Sorbitol 1.45 Water 1.67 (sweetener) Pre-emulsion concentrate 23.26 Oil 26.73 containing MCT oil, vitamin K2 (MK-7), benzyl alcohol and TPGS* (20% overage) (Table 97 above) Totals 87.00 100.00

The pre-spray emulsions of tables 98-102, above, contained between 6.18% and 19.49%, by weight, non-polar ingredient(s), as shown in Table 103, below.

TABLE 103 Amount of non-polar ingredient(s) in pre-spray emulsions wt % of pre-emulsion wt % of non-polar concentrate in pre- ingredient in pre- Non-polar ingredient spray emulsion spray emulsion Fish oil 13.75 13.39 (Table 98 above) Fish oil 20.00 19.49 (Table 99 above) Astaxanthin 16.67 13.33 (Table 100 above) Dihydrocapsiate 16.67 6.18 (Table 101 above) MCT oil/vitamin K2 (MK-7) 26.73 9.62 (Table 102 above)

C. Preparation of the Dry Powder

The pre-spray emulsions described above and indicated in Tables 98-102 were then spray dried into dry powders according to the procedure detailed in Example 4. The addition of extra water (i.e., evaporation water) to the pre-spray emulsions was required as a processing aid to make the emulsions thinner and able to pass through the dryer pump more easily. The extra water was added to the pre-spray emulsions at 35° C. and was evaporated during the spray dry process, along with the rest of the water in the pre-spray emulsions.

Tables 104-108, below, indicate the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final dry powders after spray drying the pre-spray emulsions.

TABLE 104 Dry powder containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 4.25 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (50% EGCG) 10.62 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 5.42 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.08 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 3.99 (co-surfactant) Maltodextrin 19.12 (binder/carrier) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 11.40 (binder/carrier) Erythritol 4.25 (sweetener) Stevia 5.98 (sweetener) Citric acid 3.00 (pH adjuster) Pre-emulsion concentrate 31.87 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 98 above) Totals 100.000

TABLE 105 Dry powder containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 7.73 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (40% EGCG) 18.96 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 14.53 (co-surfactant) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Green tea flavor (flavor) Pre-emulsion concentrate 52.58 containing fish oil (50% DHA/EPA) and TPGS (Table 99 above) Totals 100.00

TABLE 106 Dry powder containing astaxanthin (10% astaxanthin) and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 10.70 (stabilizer) Vitamin C 4.64 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) Saponin 0.56 (co-emulsifier) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 26.14 (binder/carrier) Pre-emulsion concentrate 38.64 containing astaxanthin and TPGS (Table 100 above) Totals 100.00

TABLE 107 Dry powder containing dihydrocapsiate and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 19.17 (co-surfactant) Saponin 1.41 (co-emulsifier) Maltodextrin 29.92 (binder/carrier) Citric acid 10.70 (pH adjuster) Pre-emulsion concentrate 38.65 containing dihydrocapsiate and TPGS (Table 101 above) Totals 100.00

TABLE 108 Dry powder containing MCT oil (98% MCT), vitamin K2 (97% MK-7), benzyl alcohol, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.15 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 10.36 (co-surfactant) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 39.10 (binder/carrier) Sorbitol 19.32 (sweetener) Pre-emulsion concentrate 31.07 containing MCT oil, vitamin K2 (MK-7), benzyl alcohol and TPGS (Table 102 above) Totals 100.00

The dry powders depicted above in Tables 104-108 that contained the pre-emulsion concentrates described in Tables 93-97, above, contained between 11.18% and 51.22% by weight non-polar ingredient(s), as shown in Table 109, below.

TABLE 109 Amount of non-polar ingredient in dry powders wt % of pre-emulsion wt % of non-polar concentrate in dry ingredient in dry Non-polar ingredient powder powder Fish oil 31.87 31.05 (Table 104 above) Fish oil 52.58 51.22 (Table 105 above) Astaxanthin 38.64 30.91 (Table 106 above) Dihydrocapsiate 38.65 14.34 (Table 107 above) MCT oil/vitamin K2 (MK-7) 31.07 11.18 (Table 108 above)

Example 10 Preparation of a Dry Powder by Instantization

A. Preparation of the Pre-Emulsion Concentrate

A pre-emulsion concentrate was prepared according to the method described above in Example 2 using the ingredients detailed in Table 110, below. The pre-emulsion concentrate contained TPGS, prepared as described in Example 1, above, and a total of 93.42% by weight (of the concentrate) non-polar ingredients that included a coenzyme Q10 (coQ10) compound that contains 99% ubidicarenone (ubiquinone) sold under the name Kaneka Q10™ (USP Ubidicarenone; Kaneka Nutrients, L.P., Pasadena, Tex.); astaxanthin (an oil containing 10% astaxanthin sold as AstaPure® by Alga Technologies, Hevel Eilot, Israel); pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ) (sold by Nascent Health Sciences, Allentown, N.J.); and a medium chain triglyceride (MCT) that contains 95% MCT (sold as Captex® 300 by Abitec, Columbus, Ohio).

The pre-emulsion concentrate set forth in Table 110, below, was made using a bench-top process according to the provided methods (see Example 2). The pre-emulsion concentrate can alternatively be made by scaling up the bench-top process, using a scaled-up manufacturing process of the provided methods, for example, to make larger batch sizes of the pre-emulsion concentrate.

TABLE 110 Pre-emulsion concentrate containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition CoQ10 (99% ubiquinone) 1.21 Astaxanthin (10% astaxanthin) 4.00 PQQ (99% PQQ) 0.70 MCT (95% MCT) 87.51 TPGS 6.58 Total 100.00

B. Preparation of the Pre-Spray Emulsion

The pre-emulsion concentrate described above and shown in Table 110 was used in the preparation of a pre-spray emulsion. The pre-spray emulsion was prepared by combining the pre-emulsion concentrate that contained 93.42% of the non-polar ingredients coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ and MCT, described in Table 110, above, with the ingredients detailed in Table 111, below, according to the general procedure described above in Example 3. The resulting pre-spray emulsion thus contained 16.75% by weight pre-emulsion concentrate containing 93.42% of the non-polar ingredients coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ and MCT (i.e., the resulting pre-spray emulsion contained a total of 15.65% by weight non-polar ingredient).

The ingredients in the pre-spray emulsion included the pre-emulsion concentrate prepared as described above (see Table 110); a surfactant, a sucrose fatty acid ester (SFAE; sold under the trade name DK Ester®, produced by Dai-Ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd of Japan); an emulsion stabilizer that was a blend of xanthan gum, guar gum and sodium alginate, sold under the product name SALADIZER®, available from TIC Gums, Inc. (Belcamp, Md.); the binders maltodextrin (sold by Archer Daniels Midland Company, Decatur, Ill.) and a highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) (sold as Cluster Dextrin® by Glico Nutrition, Japan); stabilizers, including potassium bicarbonate and green tea extract that contained 60% epigallocatechin gallate (EGCG) (Guilin Layn Natural Ingredients, Corp., Guilin, China); sweeteners, including pure cane sugar; additional ingredients, including citicholine (sold as Cognizin® Citicholine by Kyowa Hakko USA, New York, N.Y.) and caffeine (sold as Caffeine Anhydrous powder (white, crystalline powder), by Pacific Rainbow International, Inc., City of Industry, Calif.); silicon dioxide; and a polar solvent, water, which was purified city water, purified as described above (see Example 3). Before adding to the appropriate phase, as described above, the correct amount of each ingredient (as indicated in Table 111) was weighed out using either a Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA). Liquid ingredients were weighed in containers, while dry ingredients were weighed in bags.

Table 111, below, indicates the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch of the pre-spray emulsion, the phase each ingredient was added, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient.

TABLE 111 Pre-spray emulsion containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient g/batch Phase composition Water 287.5 Water 57.50 (polar solvent) KHCO₃ 14.67 Water 2.93 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (60% EGCG) 13.33 Water 2.67 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.33 Water 0.07 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 6.67 Water 1.33 (co-surfactant) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 14.23 Water 2.85 (binder/carrier) Maltodextrin 21.67 Water 4.33 (binder/carrier) Silicon dioxide 2.17 Water 0.43 (anticaking agent) Citicholine 12.50 Water 2.50 (active ingredient) Caffeine 4.73 Water 0.95 (active ingredient) Cane sugar 38.45 Water 7.69 (sweetener) Pre-emulsion concentrate 83.75 Oil 16.75 containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT and TPGS (Table 110above) Totals 500.00 100.000

C. Preparation of the Dry Powder

The pre-spray emulsion described above and indicated in Table 111 then was spray dried into an initial dry powder according to the procedure detailed in Example 4. The addition of extra water (i.e., evaporation water) to the pre-spray emulsion was required as a processing aid to make the emulsion thinner and able to pass through the dryer pump more easily. The extra water was added to the pre-spray emulsion at 35° C. and was evaporated during the spray dry process, along with the rest of the water in the pre-spray emulsion.

The initial dry powder contained 39.41% of the pre-emulsion concentrate containing 93.42% coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, and MCT (i.e., 36.82% non-polar ingredients). Table 112, below, indicates the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the initial dry powder after spray drying the pre-spray emulsion.

TABLE 112 Initial dry powder containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition KHCO₃ 6.90 (stabilizer) Green tea extract (60% EGCG) 6.27 (stabilizer) SALADIZER ® emulsifier 0.16 (emulsion stabilizer) SFAE 3.14 (co-surfactant) Highly branched cyclic dextrin (HBCD) 6.70 (binder/carrier) Maltodextrin 10.20 (binder/carrier) Silicon dioxide 1.02 (anticaking agent) Citicholine 5.88 (active ingredient) Caffeine 2.23 (active ingredient) Cane sugar 18.09 (sweetener) Pre-emulsion concentrate 39.41 containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT and TPGS (Table 110 above) Total 100.00 The initial dry powder thus contained 36.82% of the non-polar ingredients coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, and MCT.

The initial dry powder was then instantized to form a final dry powder. The initial dry powder was instantized by first rewetting the surface of the individual particles (by adding water), allowing the particles to come into contact and stick together, and then drying to remove the water, causing individual particles to stick together as agglomerates. Agglomerization was facilitated by addition of sugars and/or sugar alcohols. Silicon dioxide and maltodextrin were also added to facilitate the drying process. Table 113, below, indicates the amount (g) of each ingredient per batch and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient of the rewetted powder.

TABLE 113 Rewetted powder containing the initial dry powder containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Water 35.00 Pure cane sugar 9.42 Silicon dioxide 0.66 (anticaking agent) Maltodextrin 9.42 (binder/carrier) Initial dry powder containing non-polar ingredient coQ10, 45.50 astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS (Table 110 above) Total 100.00

The rewetted powder depicted above in Table 113 then was dried by fluidized bed drying to form the final instantized dry powder. The resulting final dry powder was a more granular product with improved wettability of the powder (i.e., the powder gets wet quickly and disperses in water quickly without any lumping). Table 114, below, indicates the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient per batch of the final dry powder after instantization of the rewetted powder.

TABLE 114 Rewetted powder containing the initial dry powder containing coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS wt % of Ingredient composition Pure cane sugar 14.49 Silicon dioxide 1.01 (anticaking agent) Maltodextrin 14.49 (binder/carrier) Initial dry powder containing non-polar ingredient coQ10, 70.00 astaxanthin, PQQ, MCT, and TPGS (Table 110 above) Total 100.00 The final dry powder, after instantization, thus contained 25.77% of the non-polar ingredients coQ10, astaxanthin, PQQ, and MCT and was a more granular powder than the initial dry powder.

Example 11 Preparation of Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates Containing TPGS, Benzyl Alcohol or Benzyl Alcohol and d-Limonene and Non-Polar Ingredients

Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates were prepared according to the procedure described below and containing the ingredients listed below. The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contained α-tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS), benzyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol and d-limonene, and one or more non-polar ingredients. After formation of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates, the compositions were encapsulated in a collagen-containing shell to form a soft gel.

A. Ingredients

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contained between 26.96% and 34.6% TPGS and between 7.49% and 15.42% benzyl alcohol or benzyl alcohol and d-limonene. The remainder of the concentrates, between 54.8% and 65.55%, contained one or more non-polar ingredients.

Ingredients in the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates included:

TPGS, a surfactant, that contained a high amount of the dimer form (e.g., 85%-90%) and a low amount of the monomer form (e.g., 10%-15%), such as the TPGS described in Example 1, above. See also, U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/207,310 and International PCT Application No. PCT/US14/25006, now published as US-2014-0271593-A1 and WO 2014/151109, respectively;

one or more non-aqueous solvents, including benzyl alcohol (Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.) and d-limonene (99% GRAS-certified; Florida Chemical, Winter Haven, Fla.); and

one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, including: vitamins, including vitamin E oil (such as the vitamin E oil sold under the name Novatol™ 5-67 (D-alpha-tocopherol) by ADM Natural Health and Nutrition, Decatur, Ill.), vitamin D3 (1.0 million IU/gram; DSM, Parsippany, N.J.) and vitamin K2 (as MK-7; NattoPharma®, Metuchen, N.J.); a borage oil compound that contains not less than (NLT) 22% of the non-polar compound C18:3 gamma-linolenic acid (GLA) (such as the borage oil sold by Sanmark Limited, Dalian, Liaoning Province, China); alpha-lipoic acid (such as sold by NutriChem Resources Company, Walnut, Calif., and Zhejiang Medicines & Health Products Import & Export Co., Ltd., Hangzhou, China); ubiquinol (Kaneka Ubiquinol®, sold by Kaneka Nutrients, Pasadena, Tex.); pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ; such as PureQQ, sold by Nascent Health Science, Allentown, N.J.); carotenoid-containing compounds, including astaxanthin (such as AstraREAL®, sold by Fuji Health Science, Burlington, N.J.; AstaPure®, sold by Alga Technologies, Hevel Eilot, Israel; BioAstin®, sold by Cyanotech, Kailua-Kona, Hi.); fatty acids and fatty acid derivatives, including an oleic acid compound that contains 70% oleic acid (MC Chemicals, Inc., New Paltz, N.Y.) and cetyl myristoleate, an esterified derivative of myristoleic acid (sold as Myristin®, EHP Products, Inc., Mt. Pleasant, S.C.); a phospholipid, lecithin (phosphatidylcholine; such as Lecithin Ultralec® P, ADM Natural Health and Nutrition, Decatur, Ill.; and Phospholipon®, a lecithin fraction with approximately 95% phosphatidylcholine, sold by Lipoid, Steinhausen, Switzerland, and American Lecithin Company, Oxford, Conn.); a turmeric/curcumin composition that contains 95% curcumin (sold by Siddharth International, Mumbai, India); Perluxan™, a hops (Humulus lupulus L.) extract that contains a minimum of 30% alpha acids (including humulone, co-humulone, adhumulone, iso-cohumulone and iso-adhumulone) and 10% beta acids (lupulone and colupulone) (sold by Pharmachem Laboratories, Kearny, N.J.); and ApresFLEX®, a Boswellia extract that contains acetyl-11-keto-β-boswellic acid (AKBA; sold by PLT Health Solutions, Morristown, N.J.).

B. Preparation of the Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates were made by a bench-top process according to the methods described below. Alternatively, the concentrates can be prepared by scaling up the bench-top process to make larger batch sizes of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates.

For each non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate, the appropriate amount of each ingredient was weighed using a Toledo Scale (Model GD13x/USA), Sartorius Basic Analytical Scale (Model BA110S), an OHAUS Scale (Model CS2000) or a CTS 6000 Scale (Model CTS-6000). Selection of the scale was dependent on the weight of each ingredient being weighed.

The appropriate amounts of TPGS, benzyl alcohol, and d-limonene (when indicated) were added to a vessel (e.g., a Pyrex® beaker) and heated to 60° C. using a Thermolyne hot plate while mixing with a standard mixer (IKA® Model No. RE-16 S1, an overhead mixer (laboratory stirrer) compatible with the bench-top process). Once the initial ingredients dissolved and formed a homogeneous mixture, the non-polar ingredients were added. The ingredients then were homogenized by placing a reversible homogenizer (Arde Barinco, Inc., Model No. CJ-4E) in the vessel (beaker) and turning it on at 850-1200 rpm. Mixing with the homogenizer continued while maintaining the temperature at 60° C. using the hot plate until the mixture became homogenous. During mixing, the baffle plate on the homogenizer was adjusted to achieve and maintain an emulsion, for example, by moving the baffle plate further into and/or out of the ingredient mixture.

The composition then was filtered, using a 100-400 micron filter and then packaged (transferred) by filling into one or more storage containers, such as plastic bottles or 5 gallon pails, where it was cooled to room temperature (about 25° C.). Alternatively, the mixture can be packaged into a bag-in-a-box type storage container. Each of the non-aqueous compositions was a liquid at room temperature.

C. Preparation of Soft-Gel Capsules

Soft gel capsules were prepared by a service provider (Captek Softgel International, Cerritos, Calif.) from a gelatin or other suitable material using standard methods. The outer capsule is formed, for example, using a polar emulsion and gelatin or other known gel replacement, at an appropriate ratio to form the gel capsule. The capsule is of a size to encompass a dosage amount for direct oral consumption and is filled with an appropriate selected dosage of a composition as described above.

Example 12 Exemplary Pre-Gel Concentrates

Exemplary pre-gel concentrates are provided below. These were introduced into soft gel capsules to form soft gel compositions. Tables 115-118, below, set forth the ingredients in the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates, the grams of each ingredient per batch, the amount (mg) of each ingredient per 0.5 mL serving, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient by weight of the composition. The non-aqueous compositions were prepared according to the provided methods using a bench-top process, described above. Each of the non-aqueous compositions was a liquid at room temperature.

TABLE 115 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol, and 56.19% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 6388.13 340.7 28.39 Benzyl alcohol 3468.75 185 15.42 Vitamin E oil (Novatol ™ 5-67) 768.75 41 3.42 Borage oil (NLT 22% GLA) 9375.00 500 41.67 Alpha-lipoic acid 1031.25 55 4.58 Ubiquinol 281.25 15 1.25 PQQ 112.50 6 0.50 Astaxanthin 1031.25 55 4.58 Vitamin K2 (180 mcg MK-7) 3.75 0.2 0.017 Vitamin D3 (1 million IU/g) 39.38 2.1 0.175 Totals 22500.00 1200 100.00

TABLE 116 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol, and 54.8% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 51.90 173 34.6 Benzyl alcohol 15.90 53 10.6 Oleic acid 30.00 100 20.0 Vitamin E oil (Novatol ™ 5-67) 10.20 34 6.8 Astaxanthin 42.00 140 28.0 Totals 150.00 500 100.00

TABLE 117 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol, and 61.2% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 42.37 564.999 28.25 Benzyl alcohol 15.83 211 10.55 Oleic acid 38.63 515 25.75 Cetyl myristoleate 45.30 604 30.20 (Myristin ®) ApresFLEX ® 7.88 105 5.25 (Boswellia extract) Vitamin D3 0.000054 0.00072 0.000036 (1 million IU/g) Totals 150.00 2000 100.00

TABLE 118 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol and d-limonene, and 65.55% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 26.96 785 26.96 Benzyl alcohol 2.85 83 2.85 d-Limonene 4.64 135 4.64 Lecithin 30.05 875 30.05 Turmeric/curcumin 2.06 60 2.06 (95% curcumin) Cetyl myristoleate 20.74 604 20.74 (Myristin ®) ApresFLEX ® 3.61 105 3.61 (Boswellia extract) Perluxan ™ 9.10 265 9.10 (hops extract) Vitamin D3 0.000025 0.00072 0.000025 (1 million IU/g) Totals 100.00 2912 100.00

Example 13 Preparation of Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates and Soft Gel Capsules Containing TPGS and Non-Polar Ingredients

A. Preparation of Non-Aqueous Pre-Gel Concentrates

Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates were prepared according to the procedure described above in Example 11. The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contained TPGS and one or more non-polar ingredients. Some of the concentrates also contained benzyl alcohol. After formation of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates, the compositions were encapsulated in a collagen-containing shell to form a soft gel.

The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates contained between 9% and 31.78% TPGS up to 91% of one or more non-polar ingredients. Ingredients in the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates included:

TPGS, a surfactant, that contained a high amount of the dimer form (e.g., 85%-90%) and low amount of the monomer form (e.g., 10%-15%), such as the TPGS prepared according Example 1;

non-aqueous solvents, including benzyl alcohol (Sigma Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.); and

one or more non-polar ingredients that are or contain non-polar compounds, including: almond oil; an oleic acid compound that contains 70% oleic acid (MC Chemicals, Inc., New Paltz, N.Y.); a cannabidiol oil that contains 30% cannabidiol; coenzyme Q10-containing compounds, including ubiquinol (Kaneka Ubiquinol®, sold by Kaneka Nutrients, Pasadena, Tex.) and a ubiquinone compound that contains greater than 98% ubidicarenone (ubiquinone), sold under the name Kaneka Q10™ (USP Ubidicarenone; Kaneka Nutrients, L.P., Pasadena, Tex.); natural flavors; pyrroloquinoline quinone (PQQ; such as PureQQ, sold by Nascent Health Science, Allentown, N.J.); an algal oil that contains 35% of the non-polar compound DHA and contains 350 mg DHA/g oil (life′sDHA™ S35-O300, sold by DSM Nutritional Products Inc., Kaiseraugst, Switzerland); and a medium chain triglyceride (MCT) oil that contains 98% MCT (sold by Abitec, Janesville, Wis. and Stepan Lipid Nutrition, Maywood, N.J.).

Tables 119-123, below, set forth the ingredients in the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates, the grams of each ingredient per batch, the amount (mg) of each ingredient per 0.5 mL serving, and the percentage by weight (wt %) of each ingredient by weight of the composition. The non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates were made by a bench-top process according to the methods described above in Example 11. Alternatively, the concentrates can be prepared by scaling up the bench-top process to make larger batch sizes of the non-aqueous pre-gel concentrates. Each of the non-aqueous pre-gel compositions was a liquid at room temperature.

TABLE 119 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS and 80% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 30.00 30.00 20.00 Almond oil 10.00 10.00 6.67 Oleic acid 84.00 84.00 56.00 Cannabidiol oil 26.00 26.00 17.33 Totals 150.00 150.00 100.00

TABLE 120 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS and 91% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 90.00 216.00 9.00 Natural flavor 62.92 6.29 6.29 Algal oil (35% DHA) 847.08 84.71 84.71 Totals 1000.00 2400.00 100.00

TABLE 121 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS and 89.25% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 3332.50 215 10.75 MCT oil 27667.50 1785 89.25 Totals 31000.00 2000.00 100.00

TABLE 122 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol and 63.03% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 276.66 153.70 15.37 Benzyl alcohol 388.80 216.00 21.60 Oleic acid 756.54 420.30 42.03 Ubiquinone 378.00 210.00 21.00 Totals 1800.00 1000.00 100.00

TABLE 123 Non-aqueous pre-gel concentrate containing TPGS, benzyl alcohol and 41.05% non-polar ingredients mg/0.5 mL wt % (of Ingredient g/batch serving composition) TPGS 95.35 190.70 31.78 Benzyl alcohol 81.50 163.00 27.17 Oleic acid 84.65 169.30 28.22 PQQ 12.00 24.00 4.00 Ubiquinol 26.50 53.00 8.83 Totals 300.00 600.00 100.00

B. Preparation of Soft-Gel Capsules

Soft gel capsules containing each of the pre-gel concentrates set forth in Tables 119-123, above, were prepared by Captek Softgel International (Cerritos, Calif.) from a gelatin or other suitable material using standard methods. The outer capsule was formed using a polar emulsion and gelatin or other known gel replacement, at an appropriate ratio to form the gel capsule. The capsule was of a size to encompass a dosage amount for direct oral consumption and was filled with an appropriate selected dosage of a composition as described above.

Since modifications will be apparent to those of skill in this art, it is intended that this invention be limited only by the scope of the appended claims. 

1. A non-aqueous pre-gel composition, comprising: a water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture present in an amount from 1% to 99%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition, wherein: the water-soluble vitamin E derivative is a polyalkylene glycol derivative of vitamin E; and the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture comprises at least 13 wt % water-soluble vitamin E derivative dimer and up to 87% water-soluble vitamin E derivative monomer; a non-polar compound or mixtures thereof other than the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture; and an ingestible non-aqueous solvent that is insoluble or partially soluble in water.
 2. The composition of claim 1, wherein the water-soluble vitamin E derivative is a polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivative of vitamin E.
 3. The composition of claim 2, wherein the PEG derivative of vitamin E is tocopheryl polyethylene glycol succinate (TPGS).
 4. The composition of claim 3, wherein the TPGS is TPGS-1000.
 5. The composition of claim 3, wherein the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture contains 29%-69%, inclusive, of dimer; and contains less than 70% of the vitamin E derivative monomer.
 6. The composition of claim 4, wherein the monomer comprises between or between about 35% and 65%, inclusive, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture and the dimer comprises between or between about 25% and 65%, by weight, of the water-soluble vitamin E derivative mixture.
 7. The composition of claim 1, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is selected from among aromatic compounds, haloalkanes, ethers, esters and ketones, organic solvents of natural origin, alkyl ketones, tetrahydrofuran, cyclic alkyl amides, decylmethylsulfoxide, oleic acid, aromatic amines, natural oils, and acyl glycerols.
 8. The composition of claim 7, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is selected from among d-limonene, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, terpenes, alpha-pinene, beta-pinene, myrcene, linalol, citronellol, geraniol, menthol, citral, citronellal, N-methyl pyrrolidone (NMP), alkylene glycols, dimethyl sulfoxide, dimethyl acetamide, 2-pyrrolidone, C2-C6 alkanols, 2-ethoxyethanol, 2-ethoxyethyl acetate, methyl acetate, ethyl acetate, ethylene glycol diethyl ether, ethylene glycol dimethyl ether, (S)-(−)-ethyl lactate, acetone, glycerol, methylethyl ketone, dimethyl sulfone, tetrahydrofuran, caprolactam, decylmethylsulfoxide, oleic acid, N,N-diethyl-m-toluamide, 1-dodecylazacycloheptan-2-one, olive oils and fatty acids.
 9. The composition of claim 1, wherein the amount of the non-aqueous solvent is at least 7%, up to and including 30%, by weight, of the composition.
 10. The composition of claim 3, comprising: a non-aqueous solvent in an amount between 2% and 40%, or greater than 5%, up to 50%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition; the polyethylene glycol (PEG) derivative of vitamin E mixture in an amount between 5% and 50%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition; and a non-polar ingredient, other than the PEG derivative of vitamin E, in an amount between 10% and 90%, inclusive, by weight, of the composition.
 11. The composition of claim 1, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is an alcohol, an alcohol derivative, a hydrocarbon, or mixtures thereof.
 12. The composition of claim 11, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is selected from among benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, d-limonene and mixtures thereof.
 13. The composition of claim 1, wherein the non-polar ingredient is or contains a non-polar compound selected from among polyunsaturated fatty acids (PUFAs), non-essential fatty acids, phospholipids, coenzyme Q compounds, flavonoids, carotenoids, micronutrients, Boswellia extracts, alkaloids, hops-containing compounds, antioxidants, and mixtures thereof.
 14. The composition of claim 1, wherein the non-polar compound is present in an amount of from between 40% and 90%, by weight, of the composition.
 15. A capsule composition, comprising a non-aqueous pre-gel composition of claim 1 in a shell or coating.
 16. A capsule composition, comprising a non-aqueous pre-gel composition of claim 5 in a shell or coating.
 17. The capsule composition of claim 16, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is an alcohol, an alcohol derivative, a hydrocarbon, or mixtures thereof.
 18. The capsule composition of claim 17, wherein the non-aqueous solvent is selected from among benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, d-limonene, and mixtures thereof.
 19. The capsule composition of claim 15, wherein the shell or coating is a gelatin or gelatin substitute shell or coating.
 20. A method of making the pre-gel composition of claim 1, comprising: a) mixing and heating ingredients in a vessel; b) homogenizing the ingredients; and c) cooling the mixed ingredients, whereby the mixed ingredients become a pre-gel liquid composition.
 21. The method of claim 20, further comprising introducing the pre-gel concentrate into a soft gel shell or capsule.
 22. A method of providing a non-polar compound to a subject, comprising administering a capsule of claim 15 to the subject. 